Sony A3724011 GSM900/1800/1900 UMTS mobile phone with RFID User Manual

Download:
Mirror Download [FCC.gov]
Document ID	929852
Application ID	tPGvz1VnlgjmGD2fN/Ss+w==
Document Description	08 user guide part 2
Short Term Confidential	No
Permanent Confidential	No
Supercede	No
Document Type	User Manual
Display Format	Adobe Acrobat PDF - pdf
Filesize	316.6kB (3957539 bits)
Date Submitted	2008-04-18 00:00:00
Date Available	2008-10-14 00:00:00
Creation Date	2017-12-02 20:19:33
Producing Software	GPL Ghostscript 9.18
Document Lastmod	2017-12-02 20:19:33
Document Title	untitled
Document Creator	PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Document Author:	23048152

Adding a Signature to Mail
When saved beforehand, your signature can
be attached at the end of the main body of
mail.
Saving a Signature
You can set whether to receive mail, Message
R, and Message F when making inquiries to
the i-mode center.
Example: Setting the i-mode inquiry set for mail
The signature attached to mail can be created
and saved.
Setting the Type of Mail/Message
to be Checked
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Edit signature] and press .
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ ｉｎｑｕｉｒｙ ｓｅｔ
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
The Edit signature display appears.
ˎ If you have saved a signature before, it is
displayed.
Press
(Edit) and enter a signature.
Enter a signature within 5,000 full-width or 10,000
half-width characters.
You can enter a Deco mail pict. to compose Decomail.
Press
(Complete).
● You can also decorate a signature (P.208).
Adding a Signature Automatically
The saved signature can be automatically
attached to the main body when you compose
mail.
The i-mode inquiry set is set.
Setting to Select and Receive Mail
ˎ Even if the Recv option setting is [ON], all mail is
received if you use the Check new message. If you
do not want to receive mail, set [Mail] to [Invalid] in
the i-mode inquiry set (P.227).
The Signature is set.
● Even if the Signature is set to [No], you can
attach the signature manually. From the Function
menu in the Input text display, select [Add
signature].
● Even if the Signature is set to [Auto], you cannot
attach a signature to a reply mail using the Quote
function or a forwarded mail.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Recv option setting] and press .
The Recv option setting display appears.
[ON]:
Sent mail is held at the i-mode center and not
received by the FOMA terminal. To receive, use
the Receive option (P.215).
[OFF]:
Sent mail is received automatically by the FOMA
terminal.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Signature] and press .
Select [Auto]/[No] and press
Select [Mail] → [Valid]/[Invalid] of the
i-mode inquiry set.
You can set whether to selectively receive
i-mode mail.
The signature is saved.
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Mail
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Common setting] → [i-mode inquiry
set] and press .
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Recv option setting is set.
Continued
199
6
Setting a Mail List
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Mail list] → a mail list and press .
Ｌｉｓｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
● Even if you change the contents of the
Phonebook after saving a member to the mail
list, the saved contents on the mail list do not
change.
Ｌｉｓｔ
リスト５
Ｍｅｍｂｅｒ ｌｉｓｔ
０／５
Enter a list name at [List].
Enter a list name within eight full-width or 16 halfwidth characters.
(Complete).
The mail list is set.
To delete a mail list
Move the cursor to a mail list in the Mail list
display and from the Function menu, select
[Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete several mail lists,
from the Function menu, select [Select&delete],
select mail lists, press
(Complete), and select
[Yes]. To delete all mail lists, from the Function
menu, select [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
By saving mail addresses in a mail list, you can
send mail to all members in the list at the same
time.
Up to 10 mail lists can be saved. Up to five
mail addresses can be saved in each mail list.
Press
Select [Member list] and press
Playing a Melody Automatically
from Mail
Ｆｒｉｅｎｄ
Member field
The melody can be set to be played back
automatically when displaying mail or
message.
Mail
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Common setting] → [Melody auto
play] and press .
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Melody auto play is set.
To delete a member
Move the cursor to the member field and from
the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete
one] → [Yes]. To delete all members, from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
Enter the mail address or the phone
number in the member field.
Enter a mail address or phone number within 50
half-width alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Press
(Complete).
The member list is set.
200
● When mail has several melody attachments, the
melodies are played back in the order they were
attached to the mail. Melodies in the MFi format
has lower priority than those in the SMF format.
● When the Manner mode is set or when the
message is displayed automatically, the Melody
auto play is disabled.
Setting the Receiving Operation
during Multitasking
Enabling the Receiving of a File
Attachment
You can set whether the incoming mail or
received mail display should appear when you
receive mail, SMS, or Message R/F while you
are using the FOMA terminal for other tasks.
You can set whether to automatically receive
the file attached to i-mode mail.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Common setting] → [Dur multi task
disp] and press .
[Prefer alarm]:
Display the incoming mail or received mail
display.
[Prefer operat.]:
Do not display the incoming mail or received mail
display. “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” flashes while you are
receiving mail/message and “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ”
appears after reception.
Ａｔｔａｃｈｅｄ ｆｉｌｅ ｐｒｅｆ．
Ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
ＰＤＦ
Ｔｏｏｌ ｄａｔａ
Ｏｔｈｅｒｓ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] for each item.
The receiving operation during multitasking is set.
Mail
[Valid]:
Automatically receive a file attachment.
[Invalid]:
Do not automatically receive a file attachment. To
obtain a file attachment, from the Inbox display,
select “ ” (P.219).
The Attached file pref. is set.
Select [Prefer alarm]/[Prefer operat.] and
press .
● Regardless of the setting, SMS is received
with [Prefer operat.] while placing (originating)/
receiving a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call,
during a voice call, videophone call, or PushTalk
communication, while recording a still image/
movie, running i-αppli, or receiving mail.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Attached file pref.] and press .
● Even if you set the Attached file pref. to [Valid],
a file attachment exceeding 100K bytes is not
received automatically.
Deleting the Send/Receive
Ranking List
Up to 20 each of most frequent senders and
recipients are automatically saved in the Send
and Receive ranking lists. You can select a
recipient from this list when you compose mail.
The Send and Receive ranking lists can be
cleared at once.
Example: Deleting the Receive ranking list
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Clear Recv ranking] and press .
To delete the Send ranking list
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting] → [Clear
Send ranking].
Select [Clear all] and press
All Receive ranking list data is deleted.
201
Receiving a Message

When a message is received while in the
stand-by display, the contents of the message
are automatically displayed. Up to 20 Message
R and Message F each can be saved in the
FOMA terminal.
When receiving a message,
“ ”/“ ”/“ ” flashes.
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
● Message R/F that has been sent to you in the
following situations is held at the i-mode center.
- During a videophone call
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- When the FOMA terminal is outside of the
i-mode service area
- During PushTalk communication
- While receiving SMS
- While the Self mode is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- During the infrared communication
- During the iC communication
- While updating the software
- While connected to the FirstPass Center
- While connected to the Data Security Service
Center
Setting Auto-display
Mail
When receiving is completed, “ ”/“ ”/“ ” is
displayed, the indicator flashes, the ring tone
sounds, and the number of received messages is
displayed.
The contents of the message appear automatically
after about 15 seconds. The display before
receiving reappears after about 15 seconds when
no operations are made.
ˎ Messages that are automatically displayed are
saved as unread.
● When the number of saved received messages
has reached 20 and a new message is received,
the unprotected message is overwritten from the
oldest.
● You can also disable Auto-display of messages
(P.230).
● Messages are held at the i-mode center when “ ”,
“ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears
(sometimes “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or
“ ” do not appear even if messages are held at
the i-mode center).
If the maximum number of messages is held
at the i-mode center, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”,
“ ”, “ ”, “ ” appears. In this case, perform the
Check new message after checking contents
of the unread messages, delete unnecessary
m e s s a g e s , a n d c a n c e l p ro t e c t i o n o f t h e
messages.
202
You can set to display the contents of the
message automatically when it is received
while in the stand-by display. You can also
select which message should be displayed
first when receiving both Message R and
Message F at the same time.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Common setting] → [Auto-display]
and press .
[Prefer msgR]:
Display automatically Message R first when
receiving Message R and Message F at the
same time.
[MessageR only]:
Display automatically Message R only.
[Prefer msgF]:
Display automatically Message F first when
receiving Message R and Message F at the
same time.
[MessageF only]:
Display automatically Message F only.
[Display off]:
Do not display automatically.
To set from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [i-mode setting] →
[Common setting] → [Auto-display].
Select a display method and press
The Auto-display is set.
To display from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [Message] → the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder.
Checking a New Message

New messages held at the i-mode center while
the FOMA terminal is powered off or outside of
the i-mode service area can be checked.
ˎ Depending on the radio wave condition, you may
not be able to check new messages.
Press
(Mail) for over a second in the
stand-by display.
The FOMA terminal is connected to the i-mode
center, and an inquiry result is displayed.
To check messages
Select [MessageR] or [MessageF].
● You can select an inquiry item (P.227).
Displaying a Message

From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder and press
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
１／８
２００８／０２／２８ １０：５０
Ｎｅｗｓ
２００８／０２／２８ １０：００
Ｗｅａｔｈｅｒ Ｆｏｒｅｃａｓｔ
２００８／０２／２７ ０９：５２
Ｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
２００８／０２／２６ １０：００
Ｂｅｓｔ ｃｈｏｉｃｅ ｆｏｒ
２００８／０２／２５ １１：４５
Ｓａｌｔ ａｎｄ Ｐｅｐｐｅｒ
２００８／０２／２５ ０９：４８
Ｒｅｃｏｍｍｅｎｄｅｄ ｓｔｏ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
２００８／０２／２７
Ｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
３
０９：５２
０８０２２７．ｍｉｄ ０．９ＫＢ
Received date/time
Subject
Ｓａｇｉｔｔａｒｉｕｓ
Ｍｏｎｅｙ ☆☆
Ｌｏｖｅ
☆☆☆☆
Ｊｏｂ
☆☆
Ｈｅａｌｔｈ ☆☆☆
Ｓｏｍｅ ｏｖｅｒｔｉｍｅ ｉｓ ｕｎａｖｏｉｄ
ａｂｌｅ ｂｅｃａｕｓｅ ｏｆ ｏｖｅｒｌａｐｐ
ｉｎｇ ｊｏｂｓ． Ｈｏｗｅｖｅｒ， ｉｆ ｉｔ
ｔｒｉｇｇｅｒｓ ａ ｃｈａｎｃｅ ｔｏ ｍｅ
ｅｔ ａ ｄｒｅａｍ ｐａｒｔｎｅｒ， ｉｔ ｗ
ｉｌｌ ｂｅ ｌｕｃｋｙ．
The message appears and “ ” changes to “ ”.
ˎ The following icons show the details of a
message. Other icons are the same as in step 1.
File attachment type
Failed to obtain the image
With invalid image attachment
With image attachment (When the
UIM is not inserted or other than
that used when the message was
received)
With SMF-format melody
(Green)※
attachment
With MFi-format melody
(Orange)※
attachment
With invalid MFi-format melody
(Orange)
attachment
With image attachment
※
Mail
T h e l i s t o f re c e i v e d m e s s a g e s c a n b e
displayed.
Select a message and press
With ToruCa card attachment
※ “ ” appears when the UIM is not inserted.
ˎ For details about the operation of the file
attachment, see P.218.
To display the previous or next message
Use
to display the previous message or
to
display the next message.
ˎ The following icons show the status and type of
the message.
Unread message
Read message
Protected read message
With melody attachment
With still image attachment
With ToruCa card attachment
Continued
203
Protecting a Message
Deleting a Message
Message R or Message F can be protected
from being overwritten.
ˎ An unread message cannot be protected.
You can delete messages using four methods.
Example: Deleting Message R
Example: Protecting Message R
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → the
[MessageR] folder and press .
To delete Message F
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → the
[MessageF] folder.
To delete from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [Message] → the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder.
To delete all messages
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete all], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes].
ˎ In the received mail list, from the Function
menu, select [Delete] to delete a message.
To delete all read messages
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete read msg], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
ˎ In the received mail list, from the Function
menu, select [Delete] to delete a message.
To delete several messages
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete], select messages, press
(Complete), and select [Yes].
To protect Message F
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → the
[MessageF] folder.
To set from the i-mode menu
From the i-mode menu, select [Message] → the
[MessageR]/[MessageF] folder.
Select a message and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To cancel the protection
Move the cursor to the protected message and
press
(Func).
Mail
Select [Protect ON/OFF] → [Yes] and
press .
The message is protected and “
” changes to “
From the Mail menu, select [Inbox] → the
[MessageR] folder and press .
”.
Select a message and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]
and press .
The selected message is deleted.
● You can delete all messages or read messages
by selecting [Delete] from the Function menu at
the folder list display of received mail.
204
What is Early Warning
“Area Mail”?
Area Mail is a service that allows you to receive
mail such as the urgent earthquake news flash
delivered by the Japan Meteorological Agency.
ˎ You can receive Area Mail without subscribing to the
i-mode service.

● You cannot adjust the volume of the beep of
Area Mail of the urgent earthquake news flash.
[Pattern1] is used for the vibrator (P.110). The
vibration pattern cannot be changed. But the
Beep and Beep time can be set (P.234). While
the Manner mode is set, the setting follows that
set in the Manner mode (P.115).
● When you receive Area Mail except Area Mail of
the urgent earthquake news flash, the ring tone
volume of the incoming Area Mail follows the
setting of the Mail volume.
Setting Early Warning “Area
Mail”

Setting Whether to Receive Area
Mail
The default setting of the Receive setting is
[OFF].
Mail
ˎ To receive Area Mail, you need to set the Receive
setting.
※ To set the Receive setting of Area Mail, see
P.233.
ˎ You may not be able to receive Area Mail in the
following cases.
- During a call (voice/videophone call)
- During the packet communication (i-mode,
data, or PushTalk communication)
- While updating the software
In the following cases, you cannot receive Area
Mail at all.
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- While the international roaming service is used
- While the Self mode is set
※ The message which cannot be received
because of the reasons such as above ones,
you cannot receive it again.
ˎ Some Area Mail may show the Area Mail main
body after the reception is completed. Confirm
the contents and press
(OK),
, or
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Area Mail setting] → [Receive setting]
and press .
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｅｎａｂｌｅｓ ｙｏｕ
ｔｏ ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ａｒｅａ
ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ， ｓｕｃｈ ａｓ
Ｅａｒｔｈｑｕａｋｅ Ｅａｒｌｙ
Ｗａｒｎｉｎｇ， ｂａｓｅｄ ｏｎ ｙｏｕｒ
ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Receiving Early Warning
“Area Mail”

The FOMA terminal automatically receives
Area Mail when it is sent. You can save up to
30 received Area Mail in [Inbox] separated
from up to 1,000 mails of the normal received
mail. When there are already 30 received Area
Mail, the unprotected read mail from the oldest
one is deleted.
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ
Ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
（Ｒｅａｄ ｔｈｅｓｅ
ｄｉｒｅｃｔｉｏｎｓ）
ＤｏＣｏＭｏ ｗｉｌｌ ｐｒｏｖｉｄｅ
Confirm the contents, select [Yes]/[No],
and press .
The Receive setting is set.
ˎ You may receive messages from different areas
other than your current area.
When Area Mail is received, “ ” appears, the
incoming indicator flashes, the beep or ring tone of
Area Mail sounds, and then the screen informing
the Area Mail reception appears.
After about 15 seconds, the display prior to the
Area Mail reception reappears.
ˎ Some Area Mail may activate the vibrator after
the reception is completed.
Continued
205
Setting to Save Receiving Entry
of Area Mail
You need to save a name and Message ID of
Area Mail including information you want to
receive rather than Area Mail of the emergency
information. To receive emergency information,
you do not need to save receiving entry.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Area Mail setting] → [Receive entry]
and press .
You can set whether to sound the beep and
activate the vibrator when you receive Area
Mail of the urgent earthquake news flash, and
the ring time of the beep. The Beep setting is
set to [Permission] and the Beep time is set to
[10sec] at the time of purchase.
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｅｍｅｒｇｅｎｃｙ ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＯＮ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｅｎｔｒｙ
Ｂｅｅｐ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｐｅｒｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ
１０ ｓｅｃ
Ｂｅｅｐ ｔｉｍｅ
（０１−３０）
Mail
Press
(Create).
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Ｅｄｉｔ Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｎａｍｅ
Select [Permission]/[Non-permission] at
[Beep setting].
[Permission]:
The beep sounds and the vibrator is active.
[Non-permission]:
Neither the beep nor the vibrator activates.
The Security code screen appears.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [Area Mail setting] and press .
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｅｎｔｒｙ
To edit the settings of the set entry
Move the cursor to the set entry, press
(Edit),
and enter the Security code. Edit each item.
To delete the set entry
Move the cursor to the set entry, press
(Delete), enter the Security code, and select
[Yes].
Setting the Operation While
Receiving Area Mail
Enter the ring time of the beep at [Beep
time].
Enter the ring time within 01 to 30 seconds.
Ａｒｅａ Ｍａｉｌ ｎａｍｅ
Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ ＩＤ
（Ａ４００−Ａ７ＦＦ）
[Area Mail name]:
Enter the Area Mail name within 15 full-width or
30 half-width characters.
[Message ID]:
Enter the Message ID from A400 to A7FF (in
hexadecimal).
Enter each item.
Press
(Complete).
The entered entry is saved.
● You cannot edit/delete the pre-saved [Emergency
information].
206
Composing and Sending
SMS

Regardless of whether you subscribe to
i-mode, you can send/receive text messages
between FOMA terminals.
ˎ You can exchange SMS with recipients/senders
who subscribe to an overseas telecommunication
company other than DoCoMo. See the NTT DoCoMo
website for infor mation about countries and
overseas telecommunication companies you can
use for sending/receiving SMS.
ˎ Even if the Notify caller ID is set to [Not notify], an
SMS recipient is notified of the sender’s phone
number.
ˎ The text of sent message may not be displayed
correctly on the recipient’s terminal depending on
the radio wave condition or the type of characters to
be sent.
1
From the Mail menu, select [Compose
SMS] and press .
Ｅｄｉｔ ＳＭＳ
● When you change the font size, from the Function
menu, from [Input method] → [Font size], in the
Edit SMS display, the setting is only applied for
the font size in the matching word list. The setting
for the font size of an address and main body
text is changed from the next time when you edit
mail/SMS (P.127).
● When you subscribe to the Multi Number Service,
set [Basic Number] for the Set Multi Number.
● When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot
compose SMS.
● You cannot send SMS from Number B.
Ｒ．７０ｃｈａｒ
Enter a phone number at [
].
Enter a main body at [
Press

The FOMA terminal automatically receives
SMS. You can save up to 1,000 received SMS
including i-mode mail in [Inbox].
While receiving SMS, “
flashes.
”
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｉｎｇ ＳＭＳ
].
When you set [Language] to [JPN] for the SMS
setting, enter the SMS main body within 70
characters regardless of full-width or half-width.
When you set it to [ENG], enter the main body
within 160 half-width characters (excluding `, 。,
「, 」, 、,・, ”, and ゜). Use of the symbols (|^{}[] ¥)
reduces the number of characters that can be sent.
Receiving SMS
Mail
Enter a phone number within 21 digits.
When a recipient subscribes to an overseas
telecommunication company other than DoCoMo
Enter “+” (press
for over a second), “Country
code”, and “recipient’s mobile phone number”,
in this order. When the mobile phone number
starts with “0”, enter the number without “0”. You
can also send SMS by entering “010”, “Country
code”, and “recipient’s mobile phone number”,
in this order. (To reply to SMS received from
overseas, use the latter method using “010”.)
Ｕｎｒｅａｄ ｍａｉｌ／ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ
(Send).
The SMS is sent.
To save SMS without sending it
From the Function menu, select [Save]. The SMS
is saved in [Draft].
Ｍａｉｌ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＲ
ＭｅｓｓａｇｅＦ
１
０
０
When SMS reception
is completed, “ ” is
displayed, the incoming
indicator flashes, the ring
tone sounds, and the
number of received SMS
appears.
After about 15 seconds,
the display prior to the SMS
reception reappears.
ˎ When retur ning to the
s t a n d - b y d i s p l a y, t h e
notification icon “ ” (New
mail) appears. Press
(Link) and select “ ” to
display the Inbox display.
Continued
207
● You can compose and send a reply to the
received SMS and forward it (P.216).
● Some characters in a received SMS message
are replaced with as many spaces (blanks).
● You cannot reply to SMS sent to Number B of
2in1.
Checking New SMS
Setting SMS

※ Normally, you do not need to change the
SMSC, Type of Number, and address
settings.
From the Mail menu, select [Mail setting]
→ [SMS setting] and press .
ＳＭＳ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ

Ｌａｎｇｕａｇｅ
ＪＰＮ
New SMS held at the SMS center while the
FOMA terminal is powered off or outside of the
service area can be checked.
ＳＭＳ ｒｅｐｏｒｔ
Ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ
３ｄａｙｓ
Ｖａｌｉｄｉｔｙ
ＤｏＣｏＭｏ
ＳＭＳＣ
Ｔｙｐｅ ｏｆ Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ｉｎｔｅｒｎａｔｉｏｎａｌ
Ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
８１９０３１０１６５２
ˎ Depending on the radio wave condition, you may
not be able to check new SMS.
From the Mail menu, select [Check new
SMS] and press .
[Language]:
Select whether a message to be sent is going
to be displayed in Japanese or English. The
number of characters that can be sent varies
depending on the type of characters.
[SMS report]:
Set whether you require a delivery report when
SMS is sent.
[Validity]:
Select the period for holding your SMS at the
SMS center when a recipient is unable to receive
the SMS you sent.
[SMSC]:
Set when you receive SMS services provided by
companies other than DoCoMo.
[Type of Number]:
When you select [Others] at [SMSC], select
[International]/[Unknown].
ˎ When “ ” or “#” is included in the address
entered at [Address], select [Unknown].
[Address]:
When you select [Others] at [SMSC], enter an
address. You can enter up to 20 half-width digits.
The FOMA terminal is connected to the SMS center
and receives SMS if some are held at the center.
Mail
● Even if you check new SMS, it may take time to
receive SMS.
Set each item.
Press
(Complete).
The SMS setting is set.
208
i-αppli
What is i-αppli? ...................................................................................................... 238
Downloading i-αppli from a Site ............................................................................. 238
Running i-αppli ...................................................................................  239
Running i-αppli Automatically ................................................................  246
Setting i-αppli for the Stand-by Display ........................................  247
Managing i-αppli ..................................................................................................... 247
Displaying i-αppli Data in microSD memory card ........................ 250
Using Various i-αppli Functions .............................................................................. 251
209
3
What is i-αppli?
ＳＷ ｉｎｉｔ． Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
ＮＷ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
By downloading i-αppli from its site, the
i-mode terminal can be made much more
useful in many ways. For example, you can
enjoy many kinds of games by downloading
them to it. There are also i-αppli from which
you can directly save data to the Phonebook
and Schedule, as well as i-αppli that can
be linked with Data Box for saving/loading
images.
Ｙｅｓ
ｐｐｌｉ ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ
Ｎｏ
Ｕｓｅ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｙｅｓ
ˎ There are items that cannot be changed
depending on the software.
To connect to the network automatically when the
software is started
Select [NW setting] → [Yes].
ˎ Settings you made are applied to the NW
setting and Stand-by NW setting of the
Individual set (P.241).
To set the software for the i-αppli stand-by display
Select [i αppli stand-by] → [Yes].
To use the location information
Select [Use location info] → [Yes].
ˎ For details on i-αppli, see the “Mobile Phone User’s
Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
ˎ Some i-αppli cannot be used when 2in1 is set to
either the B or Dual mode.
Downloading i-αppli from
a Site
You can download i-αppli software from sites
and save it.
i-αppli
ˎ You can save up to 100 i-αppli software, each
software maximum 1M bytes. The number of
i-αppli software that can be saved may decrease
depending on the data to be saved.
ˎ When downloading ends in failure due to the radio
wave condition, the software is not saved.
ˎ When downloading i-αppli with mail, software
cannot be downloaded if there are already five mail
folders for i-αppli with mail or if software using the
same mail folder already exists.
While displaying the site, select the
software and press .
The software is downloaded.
When the screen for confir ming whether to
download the software appears
Select [Yes] or [Download].
Select a folder and press
The downloaded software is saved in the selected
folder.
210
Perform the Software setting.
Press
(Complete).
The screen for confirming whether to run the
software appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The downloaded software is started.
● If you have deleted preinstalled software, you
can download it from “PlayNow by SO”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search)
→ [ ケータイ電話メーカー] ( M o b i l e P h o n e
Manufacturers) → [PlayNow by SO] (Japanese
only)
● The message “Terminal and UIM ID will be
sent” may appear when downloading. Select
[Download] to download. Since the “serial
number of your mobile phone/UIM (FOMA card)”
is sent to IP (information service providers) via
the Internet, it might be accessed by a third
party.
● The message “This software uses saved data”
may appear when downloading. Information on
the saved data to be used can be confirmed
by pressing [Description]. Select [Download]
to download the software. The i-αppli uses the
saved data in this case.
● If you lock the IC card function while
downloading an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli, the downloading is stopped.
● After downloading i-αppli with mail, i-αppli with
mail folder is automatically created in Inbox,
Outbox, and Draft. The folder is named based on
the downloaded i-αppli with mail and cannot be
changed.
● If only the mail folder to be used remains when
downloading i-αppli with mail, that folder can
be used. If a folder name is different from the
name of a downloaded i-αppli, this folder name
is changed to the downloaded i-αppli name.
If the i-αppli with mail does not use that folder,
it can be deleted and a new folder can be
created. Note that the i-αppli with mail cannot
be downloaded without creating a new folder.
● Even if there is enough memory, you may not be
able to download an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli depending on the volume of data
saved on your IC card. If you cannot perform a
download, delete unnecessary software data in
accordance with the confirmation screen and
download the i-αppli again. (You may not be
able to delete some software data.) In some
cases, you may need to start up the software
before deleting related data on the IC card.
Checking i-αppli Information
When Downloading
The software information can be displayed
when i-αppli software is downloaded from a
site.
From the Menu, select [i appli] → [i αppli
setting] → [SW description] and press .
Select [Yes]/[No] and press
The SW description is set.
Running i-αppli

i-αppli software can be set to run manually.
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in the
stand-by display.
The i-αppli folder list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type of folder.
(Yellow) Preset folder
(Blue) User-created folder
i-αppli
Continued
211
2
Select a folder and press
ͧ
) : Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli
software (While the service is
unavailable)
: Software downloaded from an SSL site
: GPS-compatible i-αppli software
: Software set for automatic startup
ͨ Software icon
ˎ An icon assigned to each software appears.
If there is no icon assigned to software, the
following icons appear.
: i-αppli software
: i-αppli DX software
: O s a i f u - K e i t a i - c o m p a t i b l e i - αp p l i
software
ͩ Title image of selected software
ˎ A title image assigned to each software
appears. If there is no title image assigned to
software, the following icons appear.
: i-αppli software
: i-αppli DX software
: O s a i f u - K e i t a i - c o m p a t i b l e i - αp p l i
software
Icon(L)
ͦ
ͧ
ͨ
ͩ
Icon(S)
ͦ
ͧ
ͨ
Select the software and press
i-αppli
List
ソフト一覧
１／９
デコ絵つくーる
スーハ゜ーモンキーホ゛ール ｆｏｒ ＳＯ
地図アプリ
ＦＯＭＡ通信環境確認アフ゜リ
Ｇカ゛イト゛番組表リモコン
ｉアフ゜リハ゛ンキンク゛
ｉＤ 設定アプリ
ＤＣＭＸクレシ゛ットアフ゜リ
楽オク出品アプリ２
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ͦ
212
ͦ
ͧ
)※ : Software supporting i-αppli stand-by
display (While setting)
( )※ : Software supporting i-αppli DX
stand-by display (While setting)
( )※ : Software supporting i-αppli with
mail stand-by display (While setting)
: Software not supporting i-αppli
※
stand-by display
: Software not supporting i-αppli DX
※
stand-by display
: Software not supporting i-αppli with
※
mail stand-by display
: Search by i-mode
※ “ ” appears to the lower right of the icon for
the software while downloading in progress.
The software is started up and “ ” or “ ” appears.
To quit i-αppli software
Press
and select [Yes].
To check the detailed information
Move the cursor to the software and from the
Function menu, select [Soft description].
ˎ Displayed items may vary depending on the
software.
ˎ The name of the software listed in the Soft
description display cannot be changed.
To display the certificate
Move the cursor to the software and from the
Function menu, select [Certificates].
● There is i-αppli software that starts the specified
software so that you can enjoy the software
without returning to the software list. If software
to start is not specified, you need to select it.
Even if software to start is specified, however,
you need to download it if it is not included in the
software list.
● Some software cannot start with the MUSIC
Player or Music&Video Channel simultaneously.
● Some software may be displayed in the fullscreen display. While displaying in the fullscreen, the icons other than the communication
icon are not displayed.
Setting i-αppli Operating
Conditions
ˎ It may not be possible to change some items of the
saved software.
From the list of i-αppli software, select
the software and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Individual set] and press
Ｉｎｄｉｖｉｄｕａｌ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
i-αppli
● Some software applications start up immediately
from the site. This means that the software has
been downloaded, but not saved. Also note that
you cannot save some downloaded software.
● Some software applications that star t up
immediately from the site may require NW setting
while it is running.
● The software is interrupted when the Alarm or
Schedule alarm time comes while running the
software. Press
or
to return to the
previous display.
● The software can be interrupted and the phone
can be answered when you receive a voice,
videophone, or PushTalk call while running the
software. The previous display returns when a
call is finished. When receiving a videophone or
PushTalk call while i-αppli communication is in
progress, the setting for the V.ph while packet or
the i-mode arrival act is applied, respectively.
● When you receive mail/message/Area Mail
while running the software, “ ”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ”
appears.
When the Receive option setting is [ON], “ ”
appears if you receive mail while running the
software. “ ” (Mail at center) appears when you
display the stand-by display. To check mail, use
the Receive option (P.215).
● Images used by i-αppli software※ and some of
the data you entered may be automatically sent
to a server via the Internet.
※ Images used by i-αppli software include
those recorded by the camera activated from
within i-αppli software with camera interface,
obtained using the infrared communication
function of i-αppli software, obtained from
sites or Internet home pages using i-αppli
software, and obtained from the Data Box by
i-αppli software.
● You can save data of some software applications
in a microSD memory card. The data saved in a
microSD memory card may not be used by other
terminal models.
ＮＷ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ ＮＷ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｙｅｓ
ｐｐｌｉ Ｔｏ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｕｓｅ ｉｃｏｎｓ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｃｎｇ． ｒｉｎｇ ｔｏｎｅ／ｉｍｇ．
Ｙｅｓ
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ／Ｒｅｃｏｒｄｓ
Ｙｅｓ
[NW setting]:
Set whether to permit the software that uses
network communication to connect to the
network or alternatively set it to ask confirmation
every time you start it.
[Stand-by NW setting]:
Set whether the FOMA terminal should connect
to the network when you set an i-αppli software
that uses network communication as the stand-by
display.
[i αppli To]:
Set whether to start the software from the
currently displayed i-αppli link.
[Use icons]:
Set whether to use icon information (mail,
message, radio wave condition, battery level,
and Manner mode).
Continued
213
[Cng. ring tone/img.]:
Set whether to permit the software to change the
ring tone or image. Otherwise, set the software
to ask for your permission every time before
changing it.
[Phonebook/Records]:
Set whether to permit the software to look up
the Phonebook, Redial/Received record, unread
mail, or ToruCa cards.
[Use location info]:
Set whether to use location information.
Set each item.
i-αppli
● If you set the NW setting or Stand-by NW setting
to [No], the software may not be started and
information may not be provided in a timely
manner.
● If you set the NW setting or Stand-by NW setting
to [Yes], i-αppli automatically connects to the
network. When the FOMA terminal is connected
to the network, the packet communication charge
is required.
● When you set [Yes] for the Use icons, icon
information might be accessed by a third
party since it is sent to IP (information service
providers) via the Internet just as it is the case
with the “serial number of your mobile phone/UIM
(FOMA card)”.
● Depending on the settings of the Individual
set, the network connection and use of icon
information (such as unread mail and battery
level) from i-αppli software may not be available.
Preinstalled Software
● デコ絵つくーる™ (deco-e maker)
You can create materials for decorating mail by
converting/editing a part of a still image recorded by
the camera, drawing a picture by yourself, or other
means. The created image is saved in the Data Box
and you can use it when you compose mail.
214
Creating from the camera shoot
You can create a Deco mail image or Deco mail
pictograph by converting/editing a part of a still image
recorded by the camera. To edit an image nicely, it is
recommended to record an image in a mono-(even)
color background where pictures or characters are
separated clearly in brightness from the background.
Creating by drawing a picture by yourself
Using various lines, colors, and functions such as
daubing and background transmission functions,
you can create a Deco mail pictograph. You can also
create an animation pictograph.
Creating from saved data
You can create a Deco mail image or Deco mail
pictograph by converting/editing data saved in the
Data Box.
ˎ For information on the operations, see “ヘルプ”
(Help).
To display it, select [ヘルプ] (Help) and press .
● スーパーモンキーボールモバイル f o r S O
(Super Monkey Ball Mobile for SO)
©SEGA
This is the mobile phone appli that is the very famous
home action game called “スーパーモンキーボール”
(Super Monkey Ball).
This is the action game to roll a ball where a monkey
character stays for the goal.
Clear various worlds (scenes) and daedal stages for
the goal.
To operate by moving SO906i
Moving the FOMA terminal up, down, and to the left
and right allows you to operate it as using the 4-way
keys of the FOMA terminal.
The ball where the monkey stays is rolled to the
direction where the FOMA terminal is moved.
To operate by a player’s movement
Check the player location by the In-camera and the
ball is rolled to the direction where the player moves.
ˎ For more details about operations, see the “スー
パーモンキーボールの遊び方” (How to play Super
Monkey Ball).
From the Menu, select [Data Box] → [My document]
→ [Preinstall] → [スーパーモンキーボールの遊び方]
and press . The appli appears.
■ Warning
This appli is the game played by titling or shaking
the FOMA terminal. It may injure or damage by
hitting a person or object due to some reasons
such as shaking too hard.
When you play it, hold the FOMA terminal tightly
and do not shake or move the FOMA terminal
too much or too hard. Make sure to secure the
surroundings to be safe as to play.
● 地図アプリ (Map appli)
● FOMA通信環境確認アプリ (FOMA
communication environment check i-appli)
※ The display shown is an
image for explanatory
purpose and may be
different from the actual
display.
FOMA通信環境確認アプリ (FOMA communication
environment check i-appli) is an appli to check whether
the FOMA terminal can be used the FOMA HIGHSPEED Area.
ˎ To u s e F O M A 通 信 環 境 確 認 ア プ リ ( F O M A
communication environment check i-appli),
you need to accept “ご利用上の注意” (Usage
Precautions).
● G ガイド番組表リモコン ( G - G U I D E T V
Program List Remote Control)
※ The display shown is an
image for explanatory
purpose and may be
different from the actual
display. The TV program
list is displayed according
to your location.
This convenient i-αppli is a TV program list integrated
with an audiovisual remote control function and it is
free.
It enables you to get terrestrial digital/analog or BS
digital TV program information for your preferred hour
from anywhere, any time. The information includes a
TV program title, details of the program, start/end time,
etc.
If you find any program interesting, you can let the
DVD hard disk recorder to schedule recording of it
remotely via the Internet. (A DVD hard disk recorder
that features a remote scheduling function is required.
Before using this function, the initial setting for this
appli is also required.)
You can also search for program information by
entering a keyword such as a TV program category or
your favorite TV personality. Furthermore, you can also
perform remote control operation of a TV/video player/
DVD player. (Some models are not compatible with this
function.)
ˎ When you use the “G-GUIDE TV Program List
Remote Control” for the first time, you need to
perform initial registration and accept the Terms of
Use.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is
required for using this function.
ˎ When you use this appli overseas, you need to set
the time of the FOMA terminal to Japan time.
ˎ For details on Gガイド番組表リモコン (G-GUIDE
TV Program List Remote Control), see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
ˎ You cannot use this appli when 2in1 is set to the B
mode because it uses mail.
Continued
i-αppli
You can check your current location, search a map
by addresses or phone numbers, or use the FOMA
terminal to navigate you to the destination. The i-αppli
allows you to use GPS functions (P.264).
ˎ When you use a GPS-compatible i-αppli, the
location information is sent to IP (information service
providers) of the i-αppli being used.
ˎ When you use the GPS function with a GPScompatible i-αppli, set the Use location info of the
i-αppli being used to [Yes].
ˎ When the communication environment is checked,
different confirmation results or the result informing
that it is outside of the service area may appear
depending on the communication environment
(such as weather, radio wave condition, or network
congested) even if you use it in the same place and
same time.
ˎ When you use another function while using this
appli, it may not be checked correctly.
215
About the remote timer recording function
If you have a DVD hard disk recorder that supports
a remote timer recording function, you can book
recording of a program from the program list provided
by this appli.
To use this function, the initial setting for this appli is
required.
ˎ Making initial setting
1. Set the DVD hard disk recorder to connect to the
Internet.
(For more information, see the user’s manual
supplied with your DVD hard disk recorder.)
2. S t a r t t h i s a p p l i , s e l e c t “ リモート録画予約”
(Remote timer recording) from the menu, and
continue the initial setting as instructed by the
displayed guidance.
ˎ Booking recording of a program
Once you complete the initial setting, by selecting
a desired program and selecting “リモート録画
予約” from the menu, you can connect to the DVD
hard disk recorder that has an entry in this appli via
the Internet and let it to schedule recording of the
program.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is
required for using this function.
● ｉアプリバンキング (i-appli Banking)
i-αppli
※ The display shown is an
image for explanatory
purpose and may be
different from the actual
display.
This i-αppli is for using the mobile banking service
conveniently. Mobile banking is a service that allows
you to check the balance and usage details of deposit
or withdrawal, transfer between accounts, and make a
transfer, from anywhere and at anytime. By entering the
password which you set when you start this i-αppli,
you can use up to two mobile banking services
provided by financial institutions.
ˎ To use a mobile banking service by ｉアプリバンキ
ング (i-appli Banking), you need to open an account
at a financial institution which provides the mobile
banking service and subscribe to a mobile banking
service of each financial institution.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is
required for using this function.
216
ˎ For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】FOMA version”.
ˎ For information on ｉアプリバンキン
グ (i-appli Banking), see the i-mode
site.
i-mode site :
[ ｉM e n u ] → [ メニュー/ 検索]
(Menu/Search)→[モバイルバ
ンキング] (Mobile banking) →
[ ｉアプリバンキング] ( i - a p p l i
Banking)
● iD 設定アプリ (iD Setting appli)
※ The display shown is an
image for explanatory
purpose and may be
different from the actual
display.
The chargeless e-cash “iD” is a service that enables
you to make payments for shopping by simply holding
up the Osaifu-Keitai or a credit card that is employed
“iD” to a reader. It provides you with a convenient way
of shopping because you do not need to give your
signature as you did before. Some credit card issuing
companies support cash withdrawals as well.
ˎ To use “iD”, a subscription to each credit card
issuing company that adopts the iD brand and the
Osaifu-Keitai whose settings are completed by the
iD appli and Card appli of a credit card issuing
company or a credit card that is employed “iD” are
needed.
ˎ For using “iD” by the Osaifu-Keitai, you start the
iD appli, agree with “ご利用上の注意” (Usage
precautions), complete the settings for the iD appli,
download or start a Card appli, and then perform
the settings for the Card appli.
ˎ A fee for using a service that adopts the iD brand
(annual membership fee, etc.) varies depending on
each credit card issuing company.
ˎ The packet communication charge is required for
downloading the iD appli and a Card appli.
ˎ For information on “iD”, see the
i-mode site for “iD”.
i-mode site :
[ i M e n u ] → [ メニュー/検索]
(Menu/Search) → [iD]
● DCMXクレジットアプリ(DCMX credit appli)
※ The display shown is an
image for explanatory
purpose and may be
different from the actual
display.
“DCMX” is an “iD” compatible credit service provided
by NTT DoCoMo group. Two types of services are
available in DCMX: DCMX mini in which the total
amount of credit is limited to ¥10,000 per month and
DCMX which allows you to use more amount than
DCMX mini as well as get DoCoMo points.
DCMX mini provides immediate use of a mobile credit
service with an easy subscription that can be made
from within this software.
What you can do on this software
Subscription and Examination ※1
Setting card information
Checking ※2
You can check the available balance of the credit
and the usage details for this month from within the
software!
Changing
You can also make necessary settings from within
the software when you get the card updated or the
FOMA terminal changed!
※1 We m a k e a n o n l i n e e x a m i n a t i o n f o r y o u r
qualification when we receive your subscription
to DCMX mini. If your subscription is to other than
DCMX mini, the connection is redirected to the
i-mode site for subscription information.
※2 A function, such as for checking the usage status
is available only when you are a member of DCMX
mini.
※3 You may be asked to enter a security code at a
given condition.
Precaution on the Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli software
● Under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable
for any information set in the IC card.
● 楽オク出品アプリ2 (Appli for selling items at
Rakuten)
※ The display shown is an
image for explanatory
purpose and may be
different from the actual
display.
“ 楽オク出品アプリ2 ” ( A p p l i f o r s e l l i n g i t e m s a t
Rakuten) is a convenient appli for selling items at 楽
オク (Rakuten Auction) from anywhere and at anytime
easily.
The appli helps you sell an item with the guide display,
making it easy even for first-time users. Also, there are
functions such as shooting a photo, editing a photo,
and saving a history to sell an item faster than doing it
from the site.
ˎ When you use the “Appli for selling items at
Rakuten” for the first time, you need to accept “利用
規約” (Terms of use).
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is
required for using this function.
ˎ For details on 楽オク (Rakuten Auction), see the
“Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】FOMA
version”.
ˎ To sell items at 楽オク (Rakuten Auction), you need
to sign up for the Rakuten Membership and register
as an auctioneer.
ˎ For information on 楽オク (Rakuten
Auction), see the i-mode site.
i-mode site : [i Menu] → [楽オク オークション-]
i-αppli
Using
No need for troublesome charging!
You can enjoy shopping simply by holding the mobile
phone that has been configured for the service close
to a reading device without signature ※3.
● When you start this software for the first time, you
are asked to agree with “ご利用上の注意” (Note
on using the program). Agree with it to continue.
● Packet communication charge is required for
settings and operations on this software.
ˎ For information on the contents of
the service and on how to subscribe
to the service, see the i-mode site
for DCMX.
i-mode site : [i Menu] → [DCMX iD]
217
Running i-αppli
Automatically

[OFF]:
Do not set the start time.
[D/T]:
Start the software automatically at the specified
date and time.
[Eyd]:
Start the software automatically at the specified
time everyday.
[Week]:
Start the software automatically at the specified
time on every specified day of the week.
Enabling/Disabling Auto-Start
You can set whether to start i-αppli software
automatically on the FOMA terminal.
From the Menu, select [i appli] → [i αppli
setting] → [Auto-start] and press .
Select [Yes]/[No] and press
Whether to enable the Auto-start is set.
i-αppli
From the list of i-αppli software, select
the software and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Auto-start] and press
Ａｕｔｏ−ｓｔａｒｔ
Ｕｓｅｒ ｓｅｔ
ＳＷ ｓｅｔ
ＯＦＦ
Ｉｎｖａ
[User set]:
Set the staring date/time and day of the week for
each software.
[SW set]:
Set whether to start the software using the
software’s auto-start function.
Select [User set] and press
Ｕｓｅｒ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｓｔｙｌｅ
Ｄａｔｅ
Ｔｉｍｅ
Ｄａｙ
218
ＯＦＦ
２００８／０２／０１ Ｆｒｉ
０９：０５
Ｍｏｎ
Enter the date/time/day of the week.
ˎ Enter the date/time/day of the week according to
the style of the auto-start time selected in step 4.
Setting the Start Date and Time
T h e i - αp p l i s o f t w a r e c a n b e s t a r t e d
automatically. You can set the starting date/
time and day of the week and whether to use
the software’s automatic start for each i-αppli
software.
Select a style of the Auto-start time at
[Style].
Press
Select [SW set] and press
(Complete).
The SW set display appears.
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] of the Auto-start
function of the software at [Set].
The Auto-start is set.
● The Auto-start does not operate in the following
cases.
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- During a call/communication
- When the date/time is not set
- When another function is executed
- When the Alarm/Schedule alarm is set to start
at the same time as the Auto-start
- When the Lock all/Personal data lock is set
- When the Lock key is set
- When the Omakase Lock is set
- When 2in1 is set to the B mode (when i-αppli
with mail software is used or i-αppli uses
mail)
Setting i-αppli for the
Stand-by Display 
Only one supporting software can be set for
the i-αppli stand-by display. The software
that supports the i-αppli stand-by display is
identified by “ / / ”.
ˎ When the software using network transmission is set
for the i-αppli stand-by display, it may not operate
properly depending on the radio wave condition.
ˎ When you set the i-αppli stand-by display from
the i-αppli software list display, the image set for
the stand-by display in the Stand-by display is also
changed.
From the list of i-αppli software, select
the software and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Stand-by display] → [Yes] and
press .
● The message confirming whether to start the
i-αppli stand-by display appears when the
FOMA terminal is powered on if the i-αppli
stand-by display is set. Select [No] not to start
it. Select [Yes] or leave it for a while to start the
i-αppli stand-by display.
● If the Lock all or Personal data lock is set or 2in1
is set to the Dual or B mode while you set the
i-αppli stand-by display, the i-αppli stand-by
display is temporarily terminated. When you
cancel the Lock all or Personal data lock, the
i-αppli stand-by display reappears.
● The Web To cannot be used from the i-αppli
stand-by display.
● If an error which could terminate the i-αppli
stand-by display occurs, the time of error
occurrence can be checked in the stand-by error
history.
● If a security error occurs in the i-αppli stand-by
display, “ ” (Stand-by SW error) appears in the
stand-by display.
The i-αppli stand-by display is terminated and
the normal stand-by display is set.
From the list of i-αppli software, select
the software and press
(Func).
Select [Stand-by display] → [Cancel] and
press .
The Function menu appears.
[End]:
End the i-αppli stand-by display once and
redisplay without terminating it.
[Cancel]:
Terminate the i-αppli stand-by display.
The i-αppli stand-by display is terminated.
Managing i-αppli
ˎ For some software, IP (information service providers)
may access the software saved in the mobile phone
and directly stop the use of it. In this case, most
operations including starting the software, setting
the software for the stand-by display, and upgrading
the software are disabled and only deleting the
software and displaying the software information
are available. To use the software again, you need
to request IP to resume the use of the software. For
more details, contact IP.
ˎ For some software, IP (information service providers)
may send data to the software saved in the mobile
phone.
ˎ When IP (information service providers) sends a
stop/resume request or data to the software, the
mobile phone starts to communicate with IP and
“ ” flashes. No packet communication charge is
required.
Continued
i-αppli
The i-αppli stand-by display is set and the icon
(P.240) changes to indicate that the software is set
for the stand-by display.
To operate the software set for the i-αppli stand-by
display
Press
( ) in the i-αppli stand-by display.
Terminating the i-αppli Stand-by
Display
219
Upgrading i-αppli
Moving i-αppli to a Different
Folder
The software saved in the FOMA terminal
can be upgraded if a newer version of the
downloaded software is available on a site.
You can move software to a different folder
using three methods.
Example: Moving a software
From the list of i-αppli software, select
the software and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Upgrade] → [Yes] and press
To move all software in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move
all] → [Yes] → a folder.
To move several software
From the Function menu, select [Move] →
[Select&move]. Select software and press
(Complete). Select [Yes] → a folder.
Download of the new version of the software starts.
● Some software can be upgraded automatically
when it is started.
● When the FOMA terminal is connected to the
network for software upgrade, the packet
communication charge is required.
i-αppli
ˎ You cannot delete the preset folders.
Example: Adding a folder
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in the
stand-by display and press
(Func).
Select [Edit folder] → [Create folder],
press , and enter a folder name.
The Function menu appears.
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
The folder is added.
To change a folder name
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function
menu, select [Edit folder] → [Edit folder name].
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function
menu, select [Edit folder] → [Delete folder]. Enter
the Security code and select [Yes].
220
Select the software and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Adding/Deleting Folders
Folders in which software are saved can be
added or deleted. Up to 10 folders can be
used to manage software and folder names
can also be changed.
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in
the stand-by display, select a folder, and
press .
Select [Move] → [Move one] → [Yes] and
press .
The Select move to display appears.
Select a folder and press
The selected software is moved to the different
folder.
Deleting i-αppli
You can delete software using four methods.
Example: Deleting a software
Press
(i-mode) for over a second in the
stand-by display.
Setting How to Display a List of
Software
You can select the display style of a software
list using the following three methods. The set
display style is applied to all folders.
Icon(L)
To delete all software
From the Function menu, select [Delete all], enter
the Security code, and select [Yes].
Select a folder and press
To delete all software in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete all], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes].
To delete several software
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete] and select software. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes].
Select the software and press
Icon(S)
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]
and press .
● When deleting i-αppli with mail or deleting
all software including i-αppli with mail, you
can select whether to delete the automatically
created mail folder at the same time. However,
if the i-αppli with mail folder contains protected
mail at the time you select to delete both of
them, neither the software nor the folder can
be deleted. When you select to delete only
the software and keep the folder intact, you
can display only the mail main body from the
Function menu (P.224).
● Some Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli software
may not be deleted. Some software requires to
run i-αppli software and delete data stored in
the IC card before you can delete the software.
● When the IC card lock is set, you cannot delete
an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli.
i-αppli
The selected software is deleted.
List
ソフト一覧
１／９
デコ絵つくーる
スーハ゜ーモンキーホ゛ール ｆｏｒ ＳＯ
地図アプリ
ＦＯＭＡ通信環境確認アフ゜リ
Ｇカ゛イト゛番組表リモコン
ｉアフ゜リハ゛ンキンク゛
ｉＤ 設定アプリ
ＤＣＭＸクレシ゛ットアフ゜リ
楽オク出品アプリ２
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Press
(Func) in the i-αppli software
list display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Change display] → the display
style and press .
The display style of an i-αppli software list is set.
Continued
221
Displaying i-αppli Data in microSD
memory card

Checking Error History and
Trace Result
The error histories for the i-αppli stand-by
display and the results output by the i-αppli
trace feature can be displayed.
W h e n a n i - αp p l i s t a n d - b y
display is terminated by an
error, such as being unable to
continue operation, up to 10
records including the time of error
occurrence, etc. are displayed.
Security err. hist. W h e n i - αp p l i s o f t w a r e i s
terminated by an error, such as
being unable to use the saved
data, up to 10 records including
the time of error occurrence, etc.
are displayed.
Trace result
When i-αppli software supporting
the trace feature is terminated, up
to 16 trace results are displayed.
Auto-start err hist When i-αppli software fails to
operate the Auto-start, up to 10
records including the time of error
occurrence, etc. are displayed.
Stand-by err hist
i-αppli
Example: Displaying the stand-by error history
From the Menu, select [i appli] → [i αppli
history] and press .
ｐｐｌｉ ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ ｅｒｒ ｈｉｓｔ
Ｓｅｃｕｒｉｔｙ ｅｒｒ． ｈｉｓｔ．
Ｔｒａｃｅ ｒｅｓｕｌｔ
Ａｕｔｏ−ｓｔａｒｔ ｅｒｒ ｈｉｓｔ
Select [Stand-by err hist] and press
Ｓｔｂｙ ｅｒｒ ｈｉｓｔ
２００８／０２／１４ １５：１１
ＸＸＸｇａｍｅ
２００８／０２／１３ １２：３４
ＸＸＸｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
To display the security error history
Select [Security err. hist.].
To display the trace result
Select [Trace result].
To display the auto-start error history
Select [Auto-start err hist].
To delete the error history or trace result
Press
(Delete) and select [Yes].
● To i-αppli authors
If the software does not operate properly during
its programming, the trace result may be useful
as a reference.
222
You can display i-αppli data saved in the
microSD memory card, using a folder name.
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ i a p p l i ] →
[i αppli(microSD)] and press .
ｐｐｌｉ ｄａｔａ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ１
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ２
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ３
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ４
The i-αppli(microSD) folder list display appears.
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to a folder and from the Function
menu, select [Delete folder]. Enter the Security
code and select [Yes].
Select a folder and press
The SW description display appears.
Using Various i-αppli
Functions
Using the Camera Function from
i-αppli
You can use the camera function (P.155) from
the software running on the FOMA terminal.
ˎ When you use the camera, open the lens cover.
ˎ Images are used and saved in the software.
ˎ Items that can be set and the startup procedure of
the camera vary depending on the software.
ˎ When you activate the camera from the software
that is specified the setting of the Closeup mode,
the Auto focus becomes [Macro].
While running the software, start the
camera function.
The Camera mode display appears.
Point the camera at the object and press
The image is recorded.
You can use the bar code reader (P.183) from
the software running on the FOMA terminal.
ˎ The startup procedure of the bar code reader varies
depending on the software.
ˎ The scanned data may be used in the software.
While running the software, start the bar
code reader.
The Bar code reader display appears.
Locate at the JAN/QR code at the center
of the display and press .
The JAN/QR code is scanned.
You can use the infrared communication
(P.327) from the software running on the FOMA
terminal.
ˎ There are some data that cannot be exchanged
even if the other device is equipped with the infrared
communication function.
ˎ The startup procedure of the infrared communication
varies depending on the software.
While running the software, start the
infrared communication.
Select [Yes] and press
The infrared communication is started.
Obtaining a ToruCa Card from
i-αppli
You can obtain ToruCa cards from the software
running on the FOMA terminal (P.256) and
save them.
ˎ You can obtain up to 100 ToruCa or ToruCa(detail)
cards each up to 1K bytes for a ToruCa card or
100K bytes for a ToruCa(detail) card. The number
of cards that can be obtained may decrease
depending on the data to be obtained.
ˎ The obtaining method of ToruCa cards varies
depending on the software.
i-αppli
Using the Bar Code Reader from
i-αppli
Using Infrared Communication
from i-αppli
While running the software, select a
ToruCa card and press .
The screen for confirming whether to save data
appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The ToruCa card is obtained.
Saving the Alarm from i-αppli
You can save the Alarm from the software
running on the FOMA terminal (P.360).
While running the software, perform the
settings of the Alarm.
Select [OK] and press
The Alarm is saved.
223
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
What is Osaifu-Keitai? ............................................................................................. 254
What is the iC transfer service?................................................................................ 254
Starting an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli ........................................................... 255
What is ToruCa? ...................................................................................................... 256
Obtaining a ToruCa Card ........................................................  256
Displaying a ToruCa Card ...............................................................  257
Managing ToruCa Cards .......................................................................................... 258
Setting the ToruCa Details ...............................................................  259
Setting Whether to Notify That within the Communication Range .....  261
Locking the IC Card Function ..............................................................  262
225
What is Osaifu-Keitai?
“Osaifu-Keitai” provides convenient i-mode
functions (i-mode FeliCa) that can be
performed using the IC card inserted in an
i-mode terminal.
FeliCa adopts a contactless IC card technology
that enables data to be read/written just by
scanning.
You can simply hold up your Osaifu-Keitai to a
reading device in stores that provide the FeliCa
service to pay using e-money, or use it as an
airplane ticket or point card. With features like
Osaifu-Keitai, your mobile phone becomes an
increasingly handy tool.
This latest FeliCa is even more convenient to
use compared with previous versions of the
FeliCa-compatible contactless IC card. For
example, you can deposit e-money in OsaifuKeitai on the IC card, and check the balance
and purchase history using communications.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
226
※ To use Osaifu-Keitai-compatible services, you
need to make the necessary settings using i-αppli
software (IC appli) supporting IC card function
(check with IP (information service providers) for
more details).
※ For precautions on the use of each Osaifu-Keitaicompatible service, see the “Mobile Phone User’s
Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
● The data on the IC card could be lost/changed
due to an Osaifu-Keitai trouble (Note that, as
a rule, when your Osaifu-Keitai is left with us
such as for repairs, we can take it only when all
data is deleted. Therefore, you are requested
to delete the data yourself). You are requested
to use the backup services provided by IP
(information service providers) to support for
reissuing, restoring, holding temporarily, or
transferring data except transferring data by the
iC transfer service. Check with IP (information
service providers) whether the backup service
is provided, for the usage conditions (such as
necessary prior procedures or fees), or whether
the iC transfer service is supported beforehand
because those vary from one service to another.
Please make sure to use the services supporting
the backup services for important data.
● DoCoMo shall not be liable for any data loss/
change of the information saved on the IC card
or any damage occurred relating to using OsaifuKeitai-compatible services regardless of any
reasons such as trouble or changing to another
FOMA terminal.
● If you should lose the Osaifu-Keitai or have
it stolen, immediately contact the OsaifuKeitai-compatible service provider you use
for operations which have to be done in this
situation. For this FOMA terminal, both the
Omakase Lock (P.136) and IC card lock (P.262)
can be used.
What is the iC transfer
service?
The iC transfer service※1 is a service
provided for transferring all data stored on
the IC card at once※2 to a new Osaifu-Keitai
※3 when the Osaifu-Keitai is replaced such
as for changing to another FOMA terminal or
trouble repair. Once the data stored in the IC
card is transferred to the new Osaifu-Keitai,
you can use Osaifu-Keitai-compatible services
by simply downloading the Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli.
You can use the iC transfer service at our
service counter of your local DoCoMo shop,
etc.
For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s
Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
※1 There is a processing charge for the use of the iC
transfer service. (There are some cases where no
charges apply.) Packet communication charges
apply for IC appli downloads and various settings.
※2 There are some Osaifu-Keitai-compatible services
that do not support the all data transfer function.
Unsupported services are deleted when you
use the iC transfer service. Therefore, utilize the
backup service of each Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
service or delete them before you use the iC
transfer service.
※3 The iC transfer service can be used only the
Osaifu-Keitai where the data is transferred to has
to be the compatible model with the iC transfer
service.
Starting an Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli
You have access to useful functions, for
example, reading/writing data on the IC card
using an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli in
order to deposit e-money (such as train ticket
deposit) or look up the balance or purchase
history from the mobile phone.
ˎ When you start an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli
software for the first time or download one, the
message “Current UIM necessary to use IC card?”
appears. If you select [Yes], you cannot use the IC
card function without inserting the associated UIM.
When you use the FOMA terminal with another UIM,
you once need to delete all Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli software with the associated UIM inserted in
the FOMA terminal to use the IC card function.
Using the Osaifu-Keitai
When you hold up and show the FeliCa mark
“ ” side of the FOMA terminal to a reading
device, you can use the FOMA terminal for
payment as e-money or use it in place of a
train ticket. You can use this function without
starting up the associated software.
ˎ You can use Osaifu-Keitai by holding up and
showing the FeliCa mark to a reading device during
a call or i-mode connection. You cannot start the
software.
ˎ Holding up and showing the FeliCa mark to a
reading device may cause the associated software
to be executed.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[IC card content] and press .
ＩＣ ｃａｒｄ ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔ
１／２
ｉＤ 設定アフ゜リ
ＤＣＭＸクレシ゛ットアフ゜リ
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Select the software and press
The software is started up and “ ” or “ ” appears.
● Reading/writing of data on the IC card from the
software is interrupted in the following cases.
Partially read/written data may be discarded.
- When the time preset for the Schedule alarm
or Alarm occurs
- When receiving a voice, videophone, or
PushTalk call (The operation that takes place
after you hang up the call may be different
depending on the service you use.)
- When the battery runs out
● If the FeliCa mark on the FOMA terminal is not
recognized by a reading device, move the
terminal back and forth and side to side as you
hold it up to the device.
● Even if the FOMA terminal is powered off, you
can use the Osaifu-Keitai by holding up and
showing the FeliCa mark to a reading device. You
cannot use it if the battery pack is not attached.
You may not be able to use Osaifu-Keitai if the
attached battery pack has not been used for a
long period of time or has not been charged after
the battery alarm was sounded. In this case,
charge the battery pack and power on the FOMA
terminal. When the FOMA terminal is powered
off, you cannot start an Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli to read/write data on the IC card.
● Note that if you leave the FeliCa Sign lighting, the
battery drains faster.
● When the FOMA terminal comes within the
communication range with the reading device
while charging the battery, the Charge indicator
and FeliCa Sign light at the same time.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
When the FOMA terminal comes within the
communication range with the reading device, the
FeliCa Sign lights in green. The vibrator vibrates
when the communication starts.
227
What is ToruCa?
ToruCa is an e-card that can be obtained using
Osaifu-Keitai. This convenient e-card can be
used for applications such as flier, restaurant
card, or coupon.
You can obtain ToruCa cards from a reading
device or site. These e-cards can be easily
e x c h a n g e d b y w a y o f e - m a i l , i n f r a re d
communication, or the microSD memory card.
The ToruCa card you obtained is saved in
[ToruCa] of the [Osaifu-Keitai] menu.
You need a ToruCa-compatible terminal to use
ToruCa. For details, see the “Mobile Phone
User’s Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
Flow of ToruCa Operation
Beep!
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
Hold up and show the OsaifuKeitai to a reading device in
order to obtain a ToruCa card.
When the FOMA terminal
comes within the
communication range with
t h e re a d i n g d e v i c e , t h e
FeliCa Sign lights in green.
The vibrator vibrates and the
FeliCa Sign flashes when the
communication starts.
１／８
１２：４５ 赤坂
炭火・焼肉レストラン
０２／１３ 築地
江戸前 ○○○
０２／０８ 銀座
とんかつ △△△
０２／０８ 六本木
サロン △□△
０２／０７ 赤坂
フレンチ ○□○
０２／０５ 品川
割烹 ○△○
Select an obtained ToruCa card from the ToruCa list.
228
Methods for Obtaining a ToruCa Card
Reading device
Site
microSD memory card
Mail
QR code
i-αppli
Infrared/
iC communication
Exchange a ToruCa card between
i-mode terminals
● When you exchange a ToruCa card using
i-mode communication, the regular packet
communication charge is required.
● Some ToruCa cards may not allow you to
update or redistribute using mail or infrared
communication, etc. depending on the settings
by IP (information service providers).
Obtaining a ToruCa Card

You can hold up and show the FOMA terminal
to a reading device to obtain a ToruCa or
ToruCa(detail) card.
ˎ You can obtain up to 100 ToruCa cards, each up to
1K bytes for a ToruCa card and up to 100K bytes for
a ToruCa(detail) card. The number of ToruCa cards
that can be obtained may decrease depending on
the data to be obtained.
ˎ While the IC card lock is set, you cannot obtain a
ToruCa card from a reading device.
When you obtain a ToruCa
card from a reading device,
the FeliCa Sign flashes in
green, a beep sounds to
notify you that the card has
been obtained, the ToruCa
card is displayed, and the
previous display reappears
after about 15 seconds. The
notification icon “ ” (New
Ｎｅｗ ＴｏｒｕＣａ
１
To r u C a ) a p p e a r s i n t h e
stand-by display.
To display the ToruCa card
Press
(Link) in the
stand-by display and
select “ ”.
● Some ToruCa cards may not allow you to send
mail with ToruCa cards attached, send data
using iC or infrared communication, or copy
them to the microSD memory card.
● When the Lock key is set, a beep for notifying
you that the card has been obtained does not
sound.
Select a ToruCa card and press
Index
Category icon
Displaying a ToruCa Card

Select [詳細] (Detail) → [Yes] and press
Yo u c a n d i s p l a y a s a v e d To r u C a o r
ToruCa(detail) card any time. You can also
obtain a ToruCa(detail) card from the ToruCa
card.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[ToruCa] and press .
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
８／１２
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ１
Ｕｓｅｄ
The ToruCa folder list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the status of the folder.
(Yellow) Preset folder
User-created folder
Select a folder and press
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
１／８
１２：４５ 赤坂
炭火・焼肉レストラン
０２／１３ 築地
江戸前 ○○○
０２／０８ 銀座
とんかつ △△△
０２／０８ 六本木
サロン △□△
０２／０７ 赤坂
フレンチ ○□○
０２／０５ 品川
割烹 ○△○
”
Obtained date/time
Index
Category icon
● When you obtain a ToruCa card from a reading
device while displaying a list such as the ToruCa
list, the ToruCa folder list appears. Select [ToruCa]
once again to display the obtained ToruCa card.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
(Blue)
ˎ If there is an unread ToruCa card, “
appears at the lower right of the icon.
You obtain a ToruCa(detail) card.
To update a ToruCa(detail) card to the latest status
From the Function menu, select [Updated
ToruCa] → [Yes].
To save data such as a phone number in the
Phonebook
Move the cursor to the phone number, etc.
and from the Function menu, select [Add to
phonebook].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Saving the
Redial/Received Record in the Phonebook”
(P.99, step 4 to 7).
The ToruCa list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the status of the ToruCa
card.
Unread ToruCa card/Expired unread
ToruCa card
Read ToruCa card/Expired read
ToruCa card
229
Managing ToruCa Cards
ˎ You cannot move, sort, or search a ToruCa card in
the [Used] folder.
Adding/Deleting Folders
You can create and delete a folder for saving a
ToruCa card. You can manage up to 22 folders.
You can also change the name of a folder or
sort folders in the list.
Moving a ToruCa Card to
Another Folder
You can move ToruCa cards to another folder
using three methods.
ˎ You cannot move a ToruCa card to [Used].
Example: Moving a ToruCa card
To move all ToruCa cards in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move
all] → [Yes] → a folder.
To move several ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Move] →
[Select&move], select ToruCa cards, and press
(Complete). Select [Yes] → a folder.
ˎ You cannot delete or change the names of the
preset folders.
Example: Adding a folder
Press
(Func) in the ToruCa folder list.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit folder] → [Create folder],
press , and enter a folder name.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
Enter a folder name within 10 full-width or 20 halfwidth characters.
The folder is added.
To change a folder name
Move the cursor to the folder and from the
Function menu, select [Edit folder] → [Edit folder
name]. Enter a folder name within 10 full-width or
20 half-width characters.
To reorder the folders
From the Function menu, select [Edit folder] →
[Reorder folders] → a folder. Move the cursor
(Move), and
to a position to move to, press
press
(Complete).
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to the folder and from the
Function menu, select [Edit folder] → [Delete
folder], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
From the ToruCa folder list, select a folder
and press .
Select a ToruCa card and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Move] → [Move one] → [Yes] and
press .
The Select move to display appears.
Select a folder and press
The selected ToruCa card is moved to another
folder.
Deleting a ToruCa Card
You can delete ToruCa cards using four
methods.
Example: Deleting a ToruCa card
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[ToruCa] and press .
To delete all ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Delete all], enter
the Security code, and select [Yes].
Select a folder and press
To delete all ToruCa cards in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete all], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes].
To delete several ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete], select ToruCa cards, press
(Complete), and select [Yes].
230
3
Select a ToruCa card and press
(Func).
Sorting the List
You can temporarily sort the ToruCa cards in a
folder and display them.
Press
(Func) in the ToruCa list.
Category icons
The Function menu appears.
Searching a ToruCa Card
Setting the ToruCa Details

Setting Whether to Obtain a
ToruCa Card
Yo u c a n s e t w h e t h e r t o o b t a i n To r u C a
cards from a reading device or using the iC
communication.
You can search for ToruCa cards by genre.
Press
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[Settings] → [ToruCa setting] → [ToruCa
receive] and press .
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
● When you sort ToruCa cards using [Index], the
order of sorting may not follow the Japanese
alphabetical order if both full-width and halfwidth characters are used.
Select a genre and press
The search result appears.
To delete all searched ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete all item], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
To move all searched ToruCa cards
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move
all item] → [Yes] → a folder.
Select [Sort] → a sorting order and press
[Date]:
Sort by obtained date/time from newest to oldest.
[Genre]:
Sort by genre that identifies the type of ToruCa.
[Index]:
Sort by index in Japanese alphabetical order.
[By kana]:
Sort by “kana” in the data saved on a ToruCa
card.
The ToruCa cards are displayed in accordance with
the selected sort method.
Ｒｅｓｔａｕｒａｎｔ
Ｔｏｗｎ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｓｕｐｅｒｍａｒｋｅｔ
ｔｒａｖｅｌ／ｒｅｃｒｅａｔｉｏｎ
ｆａｓｈｉｏｎ／ａｃｃｅｓｓｏｒｙ
ｂｅａｕｔｙ／ｒｅｌａｘａｔｉｏｎ
ｇａｍｅ／ｈｏｒｏｓｃｏｐｅ
ｈｏｂｂｙ／ｅｎｔｅｒｔａｉｎｍｅｎｔ
Ｅｄｕｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｏｔｈｅｒｓ
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]
and press .
The selected ToruCa card is deleted.
Select [Search] and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｃａｔｅｇｏｒｙ
The Function menu appears.
[Yes]:
Obtain a ToruCa card from a reading device or
using the iC communication.
[No]:
Do not obtain a ToruCa card from a reading
device or using the iC communication.
(Func) in the ToruCa folder list.
The Function menu appears.
To search for ToruCa cards in the folder
Press
(Func) in the ToruCa list.
Select [Yes]/[No] and press
The ToruCa receive is set.
Continued
231
Assigning Separate Folders for
ToruCa Cards
[Genre]:
Specify a genre of ToruCa cards.
[Title]:
Specify a part of a title within 10 full-width or 20
half-width characters.
[Index]:
Specify a part of an index within 10 full-width or
20 half-width characters.
[None]:
Do not specify any sorting method.
You can save requirements to sort ToruCa
cards obtained from a reading device so that
they can be automatically assigned to folders.
Up to 20 sorting requirements can be saved.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[Settings] → [ToruCa setting] → [Sort
folder] and press .
Ｓｏｒｔ ｆｏｌｄｅｒ
Select the sorting method at [Sorting
criteria].
Select a folder to be used for sorted
ToruCa cards at [Folder to sort into] and
press .
When no folder is specified
ToruCa cards are sorted to [ToruCa].
Press
(Complete).
The sorting requirement is saved.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
To delete a sorting requirement
Move the cursor to the sorting requirement
and from the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete one] → [Yes]. To delete several sorting
requirements, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Select&delete], select sorting
(Complete), and select
requirements, press
[Yes]. To delete all sorting requirements, from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To reorder the sorting requirements
From the Function menu, select [Reorder] → a
sorting requirement, move the cursor to a folder
to move to, press
(Move), and press
(Complete).
S e l e c t a p l a c e t o s av e t h e s o r t i n g
requirement to and press .
Ｓｏｒｔ ｒｕｌｅ１
Ｓｏｒｔｉｎｇ ｃｒｉｔｅｒｉａ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ ｔｏ ｓｏｒｔ ｉｎｔｏ
232
● If a ToruCa card satisfies several sor ting
requirements, the sorting requirement with a
lower number in the list has higher priority.
● If you delete a folder for which the sorting
requirement is set, [ToruCa] is used as a sort
destination folder.
● ToruCa cards received before the sor ting
requirement is set are not sorted automatically.
● You cannot set [Used] as a sort destination
folder.
● Only ToruCa cards obtained from the reading
device are sorted automatically.
Setting Whether to Automatically
Recognize a ToruCa(Detail) Card
You can set whether to let a reading device
recognize available ToruCa cards automatically
when you hold up and show the FOMA terminal
to it in order to use ToruCa.
ˎ Up to 20 ToruCa cards are saved in [Used]. When
the number of saved cards exceeds 20, the cards
with the oldest date/time are deleted, in that order.
1
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai]
→ [ S e t t i n g s ] → [ To r u C a ] → [ A u t o
recognition] and press .
[ON]:
Available ToruCa cards are automatically
recognized by the reading device and saved in
[Used].
[OFF]:
Available ToruCa cards are not recognized by
the reading device.
To display the explanation about the Auto recognition
Move the cursor to [Auto recognition] and press
(Help).
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Auto recognition is set.
When you select [ON]
Select [Yes].
Setting Whether to Notify That within
the Communication Range 
You can set the FOMA terminal whether to notify
you of being within the FeliCa communication
range or the FeliCa communication being
started by vibration or the FeliCa Sign when
you are close to a reading device with the
FOMA terminal powered on.
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[Settings] → [ToruCa] → [Duplication
check] and press .
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[Settings] → [IC act. notice] and press .
ＩＣ ａｃｔ． ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
Ｂｙ ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
ＯＮ
Ｂｙ ＬＥＤ
ＯＮ
[By vibrator]:
Set whether to activate the vibrator when the
communication starts.
[By LED]:
Set whether to turn on the FeliCa Sign when
you enter the range in which communication is
enabled or when the communication starts.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the vibrator at [By
vibrator].
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the FeliCa Sign at [By
LED].
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
You can set the FOMA terminal to check if the
ToruCa(detail) card you are trying to obtain has
been obtained already when you obtain the
card from a reading device.
The Duplication check is set.
● When the Lock all or Personal data lock is set, a
ToruCa card does not move to [Used] even if it is
to be deleted regardless of the Auto recognition
being set to [ON].
● If you hold up and show the FOMA terminal to
a reading device with the Auto recognition set
to [OFF], a message confirming whether to use
the Automatic reading function or stating that the
Automatic reading function is OFF may appear.
To use the Automatic reading function, select
[Yes] to set the Auto recognition to [ON].
Setting Whether to Check the
Duplication of a ToruCa(Detail) Card
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
● When the Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the
FeliCa Sign does not light and the vibrator does
not operate even if the By vibrator and By LED
are set to [ON].
[ON]:
Check if a target ToruCa(detail) card is already
obtained. Do not obtain a ToruCa card that you
have obtained already. Obtain a ToruCa card
only when you have not obtained it yet.
[OFF]:
Do not check if a target ToruCa(detail) card is
already obtained.
233
Locking the IC Card
Function

You can lock the IC card function to prevent
others from using it.
Press
( ) for over a second in the
stand-by display.
The IC card function is locked and “ ” appears.
To cancel the IC card lock
Press
( ) for over a second in the stand-by
display, enter the Security code, and press
(OK).
Locking the IC Card Function When
the FOMA Terminal Is Powered Off
You can set to automatically lock the IC card
function when the FOMA terminal is powered
off.
Osaifu-Keitai/ToruCa
From the Menu, select [Osaifu-Keitai] →
[Settings] → [IC card lock] and press .
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
ＩＣ ｃａｒｄ ｌｏｃｋ
ＩＣ ｃａｒｄ ｌｏｃｋ
ＯＦＦ
ＩＣ ｌｏｃｋ（ｐｏｗｅｒ−ｏｆｆ）
Ｌａｓｔ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
[IC card lock]:
Set whether to lock the IC card function.
[IC lock(power-off)]:
Set whether to automatically lock the IC card
function when the FOMA terminal is powered off.
234
Select [Last status]/[Locked] at [IC
lock(power-off)].
[Last status]:
Keep the current status even after the FOMA
terminal is powered off.
[Locked]:
Lock the IC card function when the FOMA
terminal is powered off.
GPS Function
Precautions on the Use of GPS Functions .............................................................. 264
Checking Your Location .................................................................  264
Using the GPS-compatible i-αppli ..............................................................  265
Providing Your Current Location Information upon Request .......  270
Notifying Your Current Location Information ...................................  274
Displaying the History of Location Positioning ...............................  276
Using the Location Information from Each Function ................................................ 277
Setting the GPS Functions .................................................................  278
235
Precautions on the Use of
GPS Functions
GPS Function
236
ˎ You may need i-mode subscription for the use of the
GPS function.
ˎ GPS is operated by the U.S. Depar tment of
Defense. Therefore, GPS radio wave condition may
be controlled (degradation of accuracy, suspension
of radio wave transmission, etc.) at the discretion of
the U.S. Department of Defense.
ˎ Note that radio waves may not be received or it may
be difficult to receive radio waves in the following
conditions, since GPS uses radio waves from a
satellite.
- Inside or immediately under a building
- Inside a basement or tunnel, and below the
ground or water
- Inside a bag or box
- High-rise building district or densely populated
residential area
- Inside or under a thick covering of trees
- Near a high-voltage cable
- In a car, inside a train compartment
- Bad weather such as heavy rain or snow
- When there are obstructions (people or objects)
near a mobile phone
- When you are covering the display or earpiece of
your mobile phone with your hand.
The obtained location information may deviate by
300 m or more under the above conditions.
ˎ When the FOMA terminal is outside of the service
area (or it is overseas), the GPS function is not
available.
ˎ There are about 24 GPS satellites in orbit at an
altitude of about 20,000 km, and each satellite takes
about 12 hours to travel around the earth. Therefore,
radio wave reception condition may vary depending
on the date/time even if the operating environment is
the same. For example, a significant deviation could
occur to the location information or it may not be
possible to identify a location.
ˎ Please note that DoCoMo shall have no liabilities
for any purely economic loss including those due
to missing a chance to check the measurement
(communication) results because of external factors
(including the running out of the battery), such as
a failure, malfunction, or any other problems of the
FOMA terminal or the power failure.
ˎ You cannot use the FOMA terminal as a navigation
device for an aircraft, vehicle, and person.
Please note that DoCoMo shall have no liabilities
whatsoever even if you suffer damage or loss
while performing a navigation using the location
information.
ˎ You cannot use the FOMA terminal as a highaccuracy measurement GPS. Please note that
DoCoMo shall have no liabilities whatsoever even if
you suffer damage or loss due to a deviation of the
location information.
ˎ The Position location, Location notice, and Location
provision cannot be used in the following cases.
- While the Lock all is set※1
- While the Omakase Lock is set※1
- While the Personal data lock is set※1
- While the Lock key is set※1
- While the Self mode is set
- When the UIM is not inserted
- While updating the software
- While the Key dial lock is set※2
※1 The Location provision is available.
※2 The Position location, Location provision, and
Location notice from the Loc. service client list
are available.
Checking Your Location

You can measure your current location to
determine where you are. You can display a
map based on the location information you
obtain, mail the location information, or save
the location information in the Phonebook.
ˎ No communication charge is required for confirming
your current location. Note, however, that there is an
extra packet communication charge for displaying a
map based on your current location information.
Example: Displaying a map of your current location
ˎ You can also check your current location by
for over a second in the stand-by
pressing
display. After positioning, the operations follow
the settings of the GPS button setting (P.278).
“ ” flashes and the incoming
indicator flashes.
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ ｌｏｃ．
The progress of accuracy is
indicated by the bar.
To quit the Position location
Press
(Cancel).
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
To display the result for
identifying a location right
away
Press
(Use).
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ
ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｄ．
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ ★ ★ ★
Ｒｅａｄ ａ Ｍａｐ
Ｒｕｎ ｉ ａｐｐｌｉ
Ｐａｓｔｅ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ
Ａｄｄ ｔｏ ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｉｍａｇｅ
To retry the operation
Press
(Retry).
Select [Read a Map] and press
The map of deter mined current location is
displayed.
ˎ After displaying the map, you can search for the
neighborhood information using “ｉエリア−周
辺情報−” (i-mode area –Neighbor info–). For
details about “ｉエリア−周辺情報−”, see the
DoCoMo’s website.
To use the location information with GPS-compatible
i-αppli software
Select [Run i appli] → software to be used.
To paste the location information to mail
Select [Paste to mail] → [Yes].
ˎ “ location URL” that has a link to the location
information is entered in the mail main body.
ˎ The location information URL being sent is
only displayed on the i-mode compatible
terminals.
● You can add location information using the GPS
function on an image recorded by the camera
automatically (P.171).
Using the GPS-compatible
i-αppli

You can use the location information with GPScompatible i-αppli software.
ˎ When you use a GPS-compatible i-αppli, the
location information is sent to the information
provider of the software being used.
ˎ When you use the GPS function with a GPScompatible i-αppli, set the Use location info of the
software being used to [Yes].
ˎ The method of using the location information varies
depending on the software.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [i appli] and press .
The GPS software list display appears.
Select a software and press
The software is started up and “
” or “
” appears.
Using 地図アプリ(Map appli)
GPS Function
Accuracy
★ ★ ★: Nearly accurate
location information
(with an error less
than approximately
50 m)
★ ★ ☆: Relatively accurate
location information
(with an error less
than approximately
300 m)
★ ☆ ☆: Approximate
location information
(with an error more
than approximately
300 m)
ˎ Use the positioning accuracy as a guide. The
accuracy may vary depending on the radio wave
condition of the vicinity.
To save the location information in the Phonebook
Select [Add to phonebook] → [New]/[Add].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in the Add to FOMA
terminal phonebook (P.95, step 3 to 6).
To add location information on an image
Select [Attach to image] → an image from My
picture of the Data Box.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [Position location] and press .
The preinstalled “地図アプリ(Map appli)”
uses the GPS function and a map to display
your current location or specified location, to
search the information on neighborhood, and
to navigate you to the destination by public
transportation, walk, or car.
ˎ An additional packet communication charge is
required for using this function. It is recommended
to use the Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full for this
software.
ˎ When you have deleted the software but you want to
restore it, download it from “ｉエリア−周辺情報−”
(i-mode area-Neighbor info-).
ˎ You cannot use this software when 2in1 is set to the
B mode because it uses mail.
ˎ Please note that DoCoMo will not guarantee any
result such as of the accuracy and immediacy of
information such as map or route.
ˎ While driving a car, please let a person other than
the driver operate it.
Continued
237
Basic Service and Additional Service
There are the basic services and additional
services for this software.
Basic service
: S e r v i c e s p ro v i d e d b y
DoCoMo for free of
charge.
Additional service : S e r v i c e s p ro v i d e d b y
ZENRIN DataCom that
require an additional
charge.
You can use the additional services except
the traffic information up to 90 days after you
activate the software for the first time.
After 90 days, if you wish to keep using the
additional services, you need to apply for a
membership (paid) to “ゼンリン 地図＋ナ
ビ” (ZENRIN Maps+Navi) provided by ZENRIN
DataCom.
If you apply for a membership while still using
it, you do not need to download the software
again. You can keep using the software.
Menu
今いる場所
(Current
location)
ˎ
GPS Function
ˎ
周辺を調べる ˎ
(Search
neighborhood)
ˎ
地図を見る ˎ
(View a map)
ˎ
ˎ
238
Up to After 90
90 days days
Use the GPS function to Free Free
show the map of your
current location or send
a map attached to mail.
Leave your footmark of
your current location,
follow the track, and
check others’ footmarks.
Search information such Free Free
as shops, facilities, iDavailable stores around
your current location or
specified location and
obtain a coupon from
gourmet information.
Check weather or
availabilities of parking
lot near the location.
S e a r c h a m a p b y Free Free
entering information
such as keywords, a
g e n re , a d d re s s , a n d
phone number.
C h e c k a m a p o f t h e Free Paid
location saved in the
s o f t w a r e , s e r v e r, o r
Phonebook or searched
before.
Save a map of a location
in a server to use the
information on a PC as
well.
Contents
Menu
Up to After 90
90 days days
Navigate the route to the Free Paid
destination by public
transportation, walk, or
car.
Navigate the route
to your house whose
information is saved
before.
C h e c k t r a n s f e r Free Paid
infor mation and time
table of trains.
Check the train route on
a map and set an alarm
before departure.
Tilt the FOMA terminal to Free Free
move a 3D map or map.
C h e c k h o w t o s e t o r Free Free
operate the software
regarding display of a
map, navigation, etc.
Contents
ナビをする ˎ
(Navigation)
ˎ
乗換案内
ˎ
(Transfer
information)
ˎ
設定/直感★ ˎ
(Settings/
Intuition)
ˎ
Menus and Operations of the Top Display
of “地図アプリ” (Map appli)
ˎ When you use “地図アプリ” (Map appli) for the
first time, the Terms of Use and precautions are
displayed.
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory
purpose and may be different from the actual
display.
Top display
Each menu is displayed in the Top display. When you
close the menu, the last searched map appears.
■ After 90 days without a subscription for a
membership
When you use the software for the first time after
90 days, the message informing that available
functions are limited and the message inquiring for a
subscription for a membership appear.
When you select an additional service, those
messages appear as well.
Key operations while displaying a map
Key operation
Action
メニュー(Menu) Display the menu.
Display the quick access menu.
拡縮 (Zoom)
Display the zoom bar. Press
to display a wider range, or
to
display the detailed area. Press
(閉じる) (Exit) to determine the
zoom and the bar disappears.
Move the map horizontally or
vertically.
Close the menu or send you back
to the first searched result position.
Rotate the map counterclockwise.
Rotate the map faced to north.
Rotate the map clockwise.
Key operations while displaying the quick access menu
You can subscribe for a membership from the software
accessed to the “ゼンリン 地図＋ナビ” (ZENRIN
Maps+Navi) site.
Display and Operations of a Map
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory
purpose and may be different from the actual
display.
Map display
Continued
GPS Function
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
Key operation
Action
周辺を調べる Search the neighboring information
(Search neighbor) b a s e d o n t h e c e n t e r o f t h e
displayed map.
Search the route from the set
ココへナビ
(Navi here)
departure point to the center of the
displayed map.
Send mail with the URL of the
ココを送信
(Send here)
displayed map.
Save the location infor mation
ココを登録
(Save here)
on the center of the map in the
software, server, or Phonebook.
When you save it in the server, you
can access it from a PC as well.
Close the quick access menu.
地図へ
(To Map)
3D・パノラマ Display the points where you
(3D/Panorama)
can display a 3D intersection or
panorama image. Select the point
to view them.
Display a building existed around
ビル テナ
and if there is a tenant, you can
ント (Building
Tenant)
click to check it.
239
Display and Operations of the Search
Result of Neighboring Information
ˎ It explains only for the display and operations of the
search result displayed on the map, and it does not
apply for the display and operations selected from
the list.
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory
purpose and may be different from the actual
display.
Search result display of neighboring information
While activating the software, press
( メニュー) ( M e nu ) , s e l e c t [ ナビをする]
(Navigation) → [ナビをする] (Navigation),
and press .
Select [出発地] (Departure point), press
, and set the departure point by the
items below.
現在地(GPS)
(Current location
(GPS))
フリーワード検索
(By keyword)
地図上で指定
(Specify on map)
TEL/〒検索
(By phone
number/code)
住所一覧から
(From address list)
ジャンルから
(From genre)
履歴から
(From history)
登録地点から
(From saved
location)
自宅 (Home)
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
GPS Function
Action
Check the detailed information on
the search result.
Move the map horizontally or
vertically.
Search again based on the
displayed map to be center.
Show the previous search result.
Show the next search result.
メニュー (Menu) Display the menu.
拡縮 (Zoom)
Display the zoom bar. Press
to display a wider range, or
to
display the detailed area. Press
(閉じる) (Exit) to determine the
zoom and the bar disappears.
Navigating the Searched Route with
Sound and Display to the Destination
You can set the departure point and the
destination to search the route. The route
is displayed traveling by walk, public
transpor tation, or car. After the route is
searched, you can be navigated to the
destination with sound and display.
240
Search by keyword.
Set the departure point on the
map.
S e a rc h b y p h o n e n u m b e r /
postal code.
Select an address to set.
Select a genre to set.
Set from the previously
displayed map.
Set from the location information
saved in the software, server, or
Phonebook.
Set the location information on
your home.
Check information on the
出発地の確認
(Check departure departure point.
point)
Key operations while displaying the search result
display of neighboring information
ˎ When the cursor does not point at searched
information such as a store, the quick menu is
displayed.
Key operation
Position the current location
and set it.
S e l e c t [ 目的地] ( D e s t i n a t i o n ) , p r e s s
, and set the destination following the
similar steps at Step 2.
Select [時間指定] (Specify time), press
and select an item below.
現時刻で指定
(Current time)
出発時刻指定
(Start time)
到着時刻指定
(Arrival time)
終電を利用
(Last train)
Check the route using the
current time.
Set the start time and check the
route.
Set the arrival time and check
the route.
Check the route with the last
train of the day.
5
Select [条件設定] (Condition), press
select an item below, select [上記で設定]
(Set as above), and press .
乗換条件
(Transfer)
徒歩ルート
(Walking route)
特急利用
(Express)
通常利用車種
(Type of car in
regular use)
Select [
press .
Select from [早い] (Fast), [安い]
(Budget), or [楽々] (Easy) for
transfer selection criteria.
S e l e c t f r o m [ おまかせ]
(Recommended), [屋根多い]
(Many roofs), or [階段少ない]
(Less up-and-down) for route
selection criteria.
Select whether to use express
even if the total route distance
is within 100 km.
Select a type of car in regular
use.
で検索]/[
のみで検索] and
Display and operations of route (car)/
navigation (car)
ˎ The display shown is an image for explanatory
purpose and may be different from the actual
display.
Route (car) display
Route to the destination
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
Navigation (car) display
You can search a route by using the total navigation:
で検索] and the car navigation: [ のみで
検索]. Routes (up to six routes) are displayed as a
search result. If there is another transfer route, an
icon shows the characteristics of the route.
Icon
早 (Fast)
安 (Budget)
オススメ
(Recommended)
Car route taking toll roads.
有料 (Toll)
Car route taking local roads.
一般 (Local)
To save the route
Select [ルートを登録] (Save route).
Select a route, select [ナビ・ルート確認]
(Check Navi/route) → [ナビ]/[ナビ(省電力)]
(Navi/Navi(power saver)), and press .
T h e “ ご利用上の注意” ( U s a g e p r e c a u t i o n s )
appears.
To check a route
Select a route and select [ルート確認] (Check
route).
To check the time table
Select a route and select [時刻表] (Time table).
Select [はい] and press
The navigation to the destination starts.
Current location/traveling direction
Route to the destination
GPS Function
楽 (Easy)
Meaning
F a s t e s t ro u t e t o re a c h t h e
destination.
Most budget route to reach the
destination.
Route with less numbers of
transfers to reach the destination.
Meet the above three conditions.
©ZENRIN DataCom CO.,LTD. 2007
Key operations while using the navigation
Key operation
Action
メニュー(Menu) End the navigation and display
the Top menu.
Display the quick access menu.
拡縮 (Zoom)
Display the zoom bar. Press
to display a wider range,
or
to display the detailed
area. Press
(閉じる) (Exit) to
determine the zoom and the bar
disappears.
Move the map horizontally or
vertically.
Go back to the current location.
Switch to the intersection mode.
End/start the navigation.
Rotate the map counterclockwise.
Rotate the map faced to north.
Rotate the map clockwise.
Continued
241
Key operations while displaying the quick access menu
Key operation
結果&設定
(Result&Settings)
Action
Display the search result
o f a ro u t e ( t i m e , f e e , e t c . )
and perform settings for the
navigation.
Search the route adding up to
経由地の決定
(Decide the passing three passing points toward the
point)
destination.
Search the route from the
リルート
(Search the route
departure to the destination
again)
again.
Delete the displayed route.
ルート消去
(Delete route)
Switch to the intersection mode.
モード切替
(Switch mode)
Display the traffic information
渋滞情報
(Traffic information) linked to the displayed map.
※ Only for the car
route
Using the Setting/Help
GPS Function
242
From the menu of the Top display, select
[設定/直感★] → [設定・ヘルプ], press
and select items from the followings.
Check whether you sign up
会員情報確認
(Check membership) f o r
[ ゼンリン 地図＋ナ
ビ] (ZENRIN Maps+Navi).
Set the settings related
基本設定
(Basic settings of appli) to the software itself such
as the display color of the
map and font size.
Set the setting related to
ナビ設定
(Navi setting)
the navigation function
s u c h a s リルート ( R e route) and volume of audio
guidance.
Save your home location.
自宅設定
(Set your home)
Delete the usage history of
履歴系クリア
(Delete history)
maps and navigations.
Check the explanation
使い方の説明/よく
o f u s a g e , FA Q , a n d
ある質問/利用規約
(Explanation of usage/ agreement for use.
FAQ/Agreement for use)
Providing Your Current Location
Information upon Request 
Yo u c a n p ro v i d e y o u r c u r re n t l o c a t i o n
information when there is a request from
another party.
ˎ Before using the Location provision, set the Location
request to [ON] or [Permission sched]. The default
setting is set to [OFF]. You may also need to perform
the usage settings for each service (P.271). (When
you use “imadoco-search”, you need to set “位置情
報利用設定” (Settings to use location information)
(settings for imadoco-search) in i Menu (“オプショ
ン設定” (Options) of “料金＆お申込・設定” (Charge &
Subscription/Settings)).)
ˎ To use the Location provision, you may need to
subscribe to a service provider that supports this
function. There may be a charge for the use of the
service.
ˎ To use the Location provision, follow the information
provided by the service provider and DoCoMo’s
website.
ˎ When the Location request is set to [ON] or
[Permission sched], the location information may
be sent to a searcher without operating the FOMA
terminal.
When Your Location Information
Is Requested
When the provision of the location information
is requested by the preset GPS host, the
Location provision is started.
ˎ During a voice call or PushTalk communication, the
vibrator does not operate.
When the settings for using each service is set to “許可”
(accept)
“ ” flashes, the Loc.
provide/accept tone sounds,
Ｐｒｏｖｉｄｉｎｇ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
and the incoming indicator
イマドコサーチ
flashes.
To quit the Location provision
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
Press
(Cancel),
ドコモ一郎
or
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
When the Lock key is set,
(Cancel) becomes
invalid.
When the settings for using each service is set to “毎回
確認” (Check every time)
Ｌｏｃ．Ｒｅｑ．ｆｒｏｍ:
イマドコサーチ
ドコモ一郎
Setting Whether to Provide Your
Location Information
Ｓｅｎｄ Ｌｏｃ．
Ｎｏｔ Ｓｅｎｄ Ｌｏｃ．
You can set whether to accept or reject the
request to provide your current location
information.
Select [Send Loc.].
Ｐｒｏｖｉｄｉｎｇ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
イマドコサーチ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
ドコモ一郎
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
● When 2in1 is used, the location information is
provided, regardless of the 2in1 mode.
● Some Service client IDs may not be displayed.
“ ” flashes, the Loc.
provide/check tone sounds,
and the incoming indicator
flashes.
To quit the Location provision
Press
(Cancel),
or
When the Lock key is set,
(Cancel) becomes
invalid.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [GPS settings] → [Loc. request menu]
→ [Location request] and press .
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
The Location request display appears.
[ON]:
Provide the location information to requesting
party. The location information may be sent to a
searcher without operating the FOMA terminal.
[OFF]:
Do not provide location information to requesting
party.
[Permission schedule]:
Provide the location information to requesting
party during the permitted period.
Select a way to provide the location
information and press .
GPS Function
● If there is a request for your location information
when the Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the
FOMA terminal operates as follows.
- When the settings for using each service
is set to “許可” (accept), it is indicated only
in the display and the location information
is provided. The Loc. provide/accept tone,
vibrator, and incoming indicator do not
operate.
- When the settings for using each service is set
to “毎回確認” (Check every time), the location
information is not provided.
● When the location information is requested from
a person who uses “imadocokantan search”, the
FOMA terminal operates as follows.
- The confirmation screen appears every time
you are requested. If you select [Send Loc.],
the rough positioning result is immediately
notified to the person who requests it. After
you select [Send Loc.], the GPS positioning
display appears. The high-detailed positioning
result is notified after the GPS positioning.
- After you select [Send Loc.] and you cancel
providing the location, the rough positioning
result is notified to the person who requests it.
In this case, the Location history is saved but
location information is not displayed.
● The location information may be sent depending
on the timing of cancellation.
● Even if the location information may have
been sent, the service provider that supports
the Location provision function may not have
received it depending on the radio wave
condition.
The Location request is set. If you set [ON] or
[Permission sche], “ ” appears.
When you select [Permission schedule]
Set a period to permit for providing location
information. Enter the time both at [Start time]
and [End time] in 24-hour format and select the
repeat type at [Repeat]. If you set [Eyd] or [Day],
enter dates both at [Start day] and [End day].
To perform the setting via the Initial setting
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [Initial setting] → [Location
request], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes]/[No].
Continued
243
Starting time: 09:00
Operations When the Period to Permit for
Providing Location Information is Set
Example: When the current date and time is “2008/2/23
14:00”
Starting time: 15:00
Ending time: 22:00
GPS Function
244
Settings
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date None
specified
Specified Start date
day
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date None
specified
Period for providing location
information
From 2008/2/23 15:00
2008/2/23 22:00
From 2008/2/28 15:00
2008/3/28 22:00
Everyday (from 15:00
22:00)
From 2008/2/23 15:00 to
2008/3/28 22:00
Everyday (from 15:00
22:00)
After 2008/2/23 15:00
Everyday (from 15:00
22:00)
Ending time: 22:00
Settings
to
to
to
to
to
Specified day from
2008/2/28 15:00 to
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 8 2 2 : 0 0 ( f ro m
15:00 to 22:00)
Specified day from
2008/2/23 15:00 to
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 8 2 2 : 0 0 ( f ro m
15:00 to 22:00)
Specified day after
2 0 0 8 / 2 / 2 3 1 5 : 0 0 ( f ro m
15:00 to 22:00)
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date None
specified
Specified Start date
day
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date None
specified
Period for providing location
information
From 2008/2/23 14:00
2008/2/23 22:00
From 2008/2/28 09:00
2008/3/28 22:00
Everyday (from 09:00
22:00)
From 2008/2/23 14:00
2008/3/28 22:00
Everyday (from 09:00
22:00)
After 2008/2/23 14:00
Everyday (from 09:00
22:00)
to
to
to
to
to
to
Specified day from
2008/2/28 09:00 to
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 8 2 2 : 0 0 ( f ro m
09:00 to 22:00)
Specified day from
2008/2/23 14:00 to
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 8 2 2 : 0 0 ( f ro m
09:00 to 22:00)
Specified day after
2 0 0 8 / 2 / 2 3 1 4 : 0 0 ( f ro m
09:00 to 22:00)
Starting time: 15:00
Starting time: 09:00
Ending time: 10:00
Settings
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date None
specified
Specified Start date
day
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Period for providing location
information
From 2008/2/23 15:00
2008/2/24 10:00
From 2008/2/28 15:00
2008/3/29 10:00
Everyday (from 15:00
10:00 at the next day)
From 2008/2/23 15:00
2008/3/29 10:00
Everyday (from 15:00
10:00 at the next day)
After 2008/2/23 15:00
Everyday (from 15:00
10:00 at the next day)
to
to
to
to
to
to
Repeat
Valid period
type
None
−
specified
Everyday Start date
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date
2008/3/28
Start date
2008/2/23
End date None
specified
Specified Start date
day
2008/2/28
End date
2008/3/28
Period for providing location
information
From 2008/2/23 14:00
2008/2/24 09:00
From 2008/2/28 09:00
2008/3/29 09:00
Everyday (from 09:00
09:00 at the next day)
From 2008/2/23 14:00
2008/3/29 09:00
Everyday (from 09:00
09:00 at the next day)
After 2008/2/23 14:00
Everyday (from 09:00
09:00 at the next day)
to
to
to
to
to
to
Specified day from
2008/2/28 09:00 to
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 9 0 9 : 0 0 ( f ro m
09:00 to 09:00 at the next
day)
Start date
Specified day from
2008/2/23
2008/2/23 14:00 to
End date
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 9 0 9 : 0 0 ( f ro m
2008/3/28
09:00 to 09:00 at the next
day)
Start date
Specified day after
2008/2/23
2 0 0 8 / 2 / 2 3 1 4 : 0 0 ( f ro m
End date None 09:00 to 09:00 at the next
specified
day)
Continued
GPS Function
Specified day from
2008/2/28 15:00 to
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 9 1 0 : 0 0 ( f ro m
15:00 to 10:00 at the next
day)
Start date
Specified day from
2008/2/23
2008/2/23 15:00 to
End date
2 0 0 8 / 3 / 2 9 1 0 : 0 0 ( f ro m
2008/3/28
15:00 to 10:00 at the next
day)
Start date
Specified day after
2008/2/23
2 0 0 8 / 2 / 2 3 1 5 : 0 0 ( f ro m
End date None 15:00 to 10:00 at the next
specified
day)
Ending time: 09:00
Settings
245
Setting the User-defined Host
※ Normally, you do not need to change this
setting.
You can set one host for using the GPS service
besides the Initial host set at the time of
subscription.
Performing Settings for Using
the GPS Service
You can connect to the GPS service settings
site and per for m setting necessar y for
providing the location information.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [GPS settings] → [Loc. request menu]
→ [Host setting] and press .
The FOMA terminal is connected to the GPS service
settings site.
Ｈｏｓｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｉｎｉｔｉａｌ ｈｏｓｔ
Ｕｎｒｅｇｉｓｔｅｒｅｄ
To edit the set host
Move the cursor to the set host, press
(Edit),
and enter the Security code. Edit each item.
To delete the set host
Move the cursor to the set host, press
(Delete),
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To reset the host to the default setting
Select [Initial host].
Select [Unregistered] and press
(Edit).
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [GPS settings] → [Loc. request menu]
→ [Service settings] and press .
Set each item.
ˎ For details about how to set the services, contact
your service provider.
● While you are connecting to the GPS service
settings site, available Function menus are
different from the ones displayed during i-mode.
The URL history is also not recorded.
● If you connect to the GPS service settings site
during international roaming, an error message
appears on the display and a communication
charge is required.
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Notifying Your Current Location
Information

Ｒｅｇｉｓｔｅｒ ｈｏｓｔ
GPS Function
Ｈｏｓｔ ｎａｍｅ
Ｈｏｓｔ ａｄｄｒｅｓｓ
[Host name]:
Enter a host name within 99 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
[Host address]:
Enter a host address within 100 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Enter each item.
Press
(Complete).
Select a host and press
The user-defined host is changed.
246
ˎ To use the Location notice, you may need to
subscribe to a service provider that supports this
function. There may be a charge for the use of the
service.
ˎ To use the Location notice, follow the instructions
provided by the service provider or on the DoCoMo’s
website. There is a charge for the use of the Location
notice function.
The entered host is saved.
You can notify a specific party (a service
provider that supports the Location notice
function) of the location information of your
current location.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [Location notice] and press .
The screen for selecting the method for activating
the Location notice appears.
2
Select [Loc. service client] → a party to
be notified and press .
Ｎｏｔｉｆｙｉｎｇ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
○○サービス
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ☆ ☆
To delete a party
Move the cursor to the party and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one]
→ [Yes]. To delete all parties, from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
To save a party in the Phonebook
Move the cursor to the party and from the
Function menu, select [Add to phonebook] →
[Main memory]/ [UIM].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in the Add to FOMA
terminal phonebook (P.95, step 3 to 6) or in
the Add to UIM phonebook (P.98, step 3 to 4).
“ ” flashes and the incoming
indicator flashes.
When the current location
is notified, the location
notice tone sounds and
the location information is
notified to a recipient.
Ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ｃｌｉｅｎｔ ＩＤ
Ｐｈｏｎｅ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
Ａｕｔｏ Ｎｏｔｉｃｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ
ˎ Make sure to enter [Loc. serv. client] and [Service
client ID].
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [GPS settings] → [Reg. service client]
and press .
Ｌｏｃ． ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ｃｌｉｅｎｔ
Enter a name of a party to be notified at
[Loc. serv. client].
GPS Function
[Loc. serv. client]:
Enter a name of the party to be notified.
[Service client ID]:
Enter a notified party ID specified by the service
provider.
[Phone number]:
Enter a phone number.
[Auto Notice setting]:
Set whether to notify your current location
automatically when you place a voice/
videophone call to the number set at [Phone
number].
Saving a Party to Be Notified
(Create).
Ｌｏｃ． ｓｅｒｖ． ｃｌｉｅｎｔ
● When 2in1 is used, the location information is
notified by Number A, regardless of the 2in1
mode.
● The location information may be sent depending
on the timing of cancellation.
● Even if the location information may have been
sent, the service provider that supports the
Location notice function may not have received it
depending on the radio wave condition.
You can save a party to be notified of your
current location information as a location
service client. Up to five parties can be saved.
Press
Ｒｅｇ． ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ｃｌｉｅｎｔ
To enter a party to be notified and notify location
information
Select [Direct input], enter the service client ID,
(OK).
and press
To quit the Location notice
Press
(Cancel),
, or
Enter the name within 16 full-width or 32 half-width
characters.
Enter a notified party ID specified by the
service provider at [Service client ID].
Enter the ID within 12 half-width numeric characters
including “＊” or “#”.
To display the details of a party
Move the cursor to the party and press
(Detail).
To edit the information of a party
Move the cursor to the party and from the
Function menu, select [Edit]. Edit each item.
Continued
247
5
Select [Phone number] → [Direct input],
press , and enter a phone number.
To use the location information
Press
(Use).
ˎ For details about how to use the location
information, see P.277.
To delete a location history record
Move the cursor to the location history record
and press
(Use), select [Delete] → [Delete
one] → [Yes]. To delete several location history
records, from the Function menu, select [Delete]
→ [Select&delete], select records, press
(Complete), and select [Yes]. To delete all
location history records, from the Function menu,
select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security
code, and select [Yes].
Enter the phone number within 26 half-width
numeric characters including “ ”, “#”, “+”, or “P”.
ˎ The phone number which is already saved as a
location service client cannot be saved again.
To quote from the Phonebook
Select [Phonebook].
Select the notification method at [Auto
Notice setting].
[Yes]:
Notify your current location automatically.
[No]:
Do not notify your current location automatically.
[Confirm]:
When you place a voice/videophone call, confirm
whether to notify your current location.
Press
(Complete).
The party is set as a location service client.
Select a location history and press
(Detail).
Ｌｏｃ． ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
２００８／０２／１４ １０：２０：１０
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
ＮＸＸ° ＸＸ’ ＸＸ．ＸＸＸ”
ＥＸＸＸ° ＸＸ’ ＸＸ．ＸＸＸ”
Ｄａｔｕｍ：ＷＧＳ８４
Ａｃｃｕｒａｃｙ： ★ ★ ☆
Displaying the History of
Location Positioning 
GPS Function
Up to 50 results of location infor mation
positioned by the Position location, Location
provision, and Location notice are recorded
as history. You can perform various operations
from the location information recorded in the
history.
ˎ When the number of location information records
exceeds 50, the records are deleted starting from
the location information with the oldest date/time.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [Location history] and press .
Ｌｏｃ． ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
０２／１４
０２／１２
０２／１２
０２／１１
０２／１１
０２／１１
０２／１１
０２／１１
０２／１１
０２／１０
０２／１０
０２／１０
１／２５
１０：２０：１０
１０：００：０８
９：３２：００
２１：２８：３７
２１：２２：１５
１５：４３：１０
１５：０９：５１
１４：４９：３３
１４：４０：３９
２２：５４：２２
２２：３４：０８
１０：５５：１７
When the location information
is available, “ ” appears.
Type of positioning
ˎ The following icons show the type of positioning
used.
Position location
Location notice
Location provision
248
Accuracy
Positioning date/time
Type:
Either Position location,
Location notice, or Location
provision is displayed.
Location information:
Latitude (degree, minute,
second), Longitude
(degree, minute, second)
“N” and “E” indicate
northern latitude and eastern
longitude, respectively.
Datum:
WGS84 (World Geodetic
System)
The geodetic system is the
standard used for indicating
a location on earth by its
longitude/latitude.
● When the Location notice or Location provision is
performed, it is recorded in the Location history
even if the Position location fails or is canceled.
However, note that some items are not displayed.
● A location history record for which location
information is not obtained cannot be used by
any function.
● Even if the result of the Location provision or
Location notice is left in the history, the service
provider may not have received the location
information.
● When you provide your location information while
2in1 is used, the name of the party who requests
the location information is displayed by each
2in1 mode following the Phonebook 2in1 setting.
● The location information and accuracy saved in
the Location history may differ from those sent
to the Location provision destination/Location
service client depending on some reasons such
as radio wave condition.
Using the Location Information
from Each Function
You can display a map based on the location
information added to the Phonebook, sites,
screen memos, ToruCa cards, Message R/F,
or images. You can also paste the location
information URL to mail.
Using the Added Location
Information
You can use the location information added to
the image, FOMA terminal phonebook, sites,
screen memos, ToruCa cards, or Message R/F.
ˎ Items you can use vary depending on the type of
data which is attached location information. The
available items depending on the type of data are
followings.
Type of data
Image
Available item
Read a Map, Paste to mail,
Run i appli, and Add to
phonebook
Phonebook
Read a Map, Paste to mail,
Run i appli, and Attach to
image
Site, Screen memo,
Read a Map, Paste to mail,
ToruCa, or MessageR/F and Run i appli
Adding the Location Information
You can add the location information to an
image or the FOMA terminal phonebook or
paste the location information URL in the main
body of mail.
Example: Adding the location information to the mail
main body by obtaining it by the Position
location
Press
(Func) in the mail main body
input display, select [Rcv loc. info], and
press .
Example: Displaying a map of the location information
added to the Phonebook
Ｒｃｖ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｕｓｅ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｆｒｏｍ ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃ．
Ｆｒｏｍ ｌｏｃ． ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
Ｆｒｏｍ ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｆｒｏｍ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｒｅａｄ ａ Ｍａｐ
Ｒｕｎ ｉ ａｐｐｌｉ
Ｐａｓｔｅ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｉｍａｇｅ
Select [From position loc.], press
press
(OK).
, and
The screen for confirming whether to paste the
location URL appears.
To add the location information by selecting from the
Location history
Select [From loc. history] → a location history
and press
(OK).
To add the location information by selecting from the
Phonebook
Select [From phonebook] → a phonebook.
To add the location information from an image
Select [Attach from image] → an image from My
picture of the Data Box.
ˎ You cannot select it when you add the location
information on an image.
Select [Yes] and press
Select [Read a Map] and press
The map of the location information appears.
ˎ After displaying the map, you can search for the
neighborhood information using “ｉエリア−周
辺情報−” (i-mode area –Neighbor info–). For
details about “ｉエリア−周辺情報−”, see the
DoCoMo’s website.
To add the location information on an image
Select [Attach to image] → an image from My
picture of the Data Box.
To delete the location information added on the
image
Select [Delete loc. info] → [Yes].
To use the location information with GPS-compatible
i-αppli software
Select [Run i appli] → software to be used.
To paste the location information to mail
Select [Paste to mail] → [Yes].
ˎ “ location URL” that has a link to the location
information is entered in the mail main body.
GPS Function
To add the location information to the FOMA
terminal phonebook
Select “ ” in the Edit FOMA terminal phonebook
display.
From the Phonebook, select data → [
Has loc. info] and press .
location URL” that has a link to the location
“
information is entered in the mail main body.
Continued
249
To save the location information in the Phonebook
Select [Add to phonebook] → [New]/[Add].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in the Add to FOMA
terminal phonebook (P.95, step 3 to 6).
Setting the GPS Functions

Setting the Positioning
Accuracy
You can set to prioritize either the speed or
accuracy of positioning.
Setting the GPS Keys
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎｉｎｇ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｐｏｓｉｔｉｏｎ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
Ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ ｐｒｏｖｉｓｉｏｎ
Ｓｔａｎｄａｒｄ ｍｏｄｅ
You can set the actions when performing the
Position location by pressing
for over a
second in the stand-by display.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [GPS settings] → [GPS button setting]
and press .
GPS Function
[Read a Map]:
Display the map showing your current location
that is positioned.
[Run i appli]:
Use the GPS-compatible i-αppli.
[Paste to mail]:
Attach the location information into mail.
[Add to phonebook]:
Save the location information in the Phonebook.
[Attach to image]:
Attach the location information to an image.
[Confirm]:
Select a function every time you use.
S e l e c t a f u n c t i o n t o b e p e r fo r m e d
automatically and press .
The GPS button setting is set.
250
Select a positioning mode at each item.
[Standard mode]:
Perform positioning in preference to the speed.
[Quality mode]:
Per for m positioning in preference to the
accuracy. It may take time longer than [Standard
mode] to perform positioning.
ＧＰＳ ｂｕｔｔｏｎ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｒｅａｄ ａ Ｍａｐ
Ｒｕｎ ｉ ａｐｐｌｉ
Ｐａｓｔｅ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ
Ａｄｄ ｔｏ ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｃｏｎｆｉｒｍ
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [GPS]
→ [GPS settings] → [Positioning mode]
and press .
Press
(Complete).
The Positioning mode is set.
1Seg
About One Seg ........................................................................................................ 240
Before Using One Seg ............................................................................................. 241
Setting Channels ............................................................................  242
Watching One Seg ...........................................................................  243
Using the Program Guide i-αppli ....................................................  247
Setting a Timer for Watching/Recording a One Seg Program .............  247
Using Data Broadcasting ......................................................................................... 251
Using TVlink .................................................................................................  252
Recording One Seg While Watching ............................................  252
Starting Time Shift Play While Watching .................................................  253
Receiving Mail While Watching One Seg ................................................................. 254
Various Settings for One Seg ............................................................. <1Seg setting> 255
251
About One Seg
What is One Seg?
One Seg is a digital terrestrial broadcasting
f o r m o b i l e d e v i c e s a n d p ro v i d e s d a t a
broadcasting as well as video and sound
broadcasting. You can also receive more
detailed program information, join panel shows,
enjoy TV shopping, and more using i-mode.
ˎ For details on the “One Seg” service, see the
website below.
The Association for Promotion of Digital
Broadcasting
PC
: http://www.dpa.or.jp/
i-mode : http://www.dpa.or.jp/1seg/k/
About Using One Seg
1Seg
ˎ One Seg is a service provided by TV broadcasters
(broadcast stations).
ˎ Yo u c a n r e c e i v e v i d e o , s o u n d , a n d d a t a
broadcasting of One Seg that is broadcasted
without any subscription and free of charge.
ˎ The two types of information are available in the
area of the data broadcasting: “data broadcasting”
and “data broadcasting site”. “Data broadcasting”
is carried in airwave with video and sound, and “data
broadcasting site” is available by accessing sites
provided by TV broadcasters (broadcast stations).
Also, “i-mode site” can be accessed with this
service. To access sites, you need to subscribe to
services such as i-mode.
ˎ The packet communication charge is required to
access a site such as “data broadcasting site” or
“i-mode site”.
Depending on a site, an additional information
charge may be required for using sites (i-mode paid
sites).
About Radio Wave
One Seg is one of the broadcasting services
and uses the different radio wave (airwave)
from the FOMA service. Therefore, regardless
of whether you are outside/inside of the FOMA
service area, you cannot receive One Seg
broadcasting in a place where the airwave
does not reach or in a time zone when it is out
of service.
Even if you are in the digital terrestrial
broadcasting service area, the receiving
condition may become worse or you cannot
receive anything in the following places.
- Places where are far away from the radio wave
tower which send airwaves
- Places such as interfered by mountains, covered
with a building where the radio wave is interrupted
by features or buildings
- Places such as in the tunnel, basement, or building
where the radio wave is weak or does not reach at all
To make the radio wave condition better,
extend the One Seg Antenna fully. Changing
the orientation of the antenna, placing the
FOMA terminal closer or further to the body, or
moving to another location may make the radio
wave condition better.
Display When Using One Seg for the First
Time
After the purchase, when you use One Seg
for the first time, the display for confirming the
notabilia of the service appears. Check the
contents and press
(OK).
● When you insert another UIM or perform the
Reset all data&set, the display for confirming the
notabilia of the service appears again.
What is Broadcast Storage Area?
The broadcast storage area is a storage area
inside the terminal that is exclusive for One
Seg. The information you input according
to the instructions provided by the data
broadcast program you are watching is saved
in the broadcast storage area as specified by
the settings of TV broadcasters (broadcast
stations). The information to be saved may
contain answers for quiz, as well as personal
information such as membership number,
gender, age, or occupation.
252
The saved information may be displayed, or be
sent to TV broadcasters (broadcast stations)
without another input of information when you
browse to the data broadcasting site.
To delete information in the broadcast storage
area, see P.255.
When you replace the UIM with another one,
the screen for confirming whether to reset the
broadcast storage area appears. Select [Yes]
to reset it.
■ Using information in the broadcast storage
area
When information in the broadcast storage area
is used while you are watching a program, the
message “Use saved info? It may include info
used by the same broadcasting gr.” appears.
When you select [Yes], the confirmation screen
does not appear as long as you watch the
same program. If you select [Yes,from then
on], the confirmation screen no longer appears
even if the program is changed.
Other Features
Step to Watch One Seg
Example: When you watch One Seg for the first time
Step 1 Set channel list (P.242)
Save a channel list suitable for the
area you use.
Step 2 Activate One Seg (P.243)
Extend the One Seg Antenna and
activate One Seg.
■ One Seg Antenna
When you use the One Seg function, extend
the One Seg Antenna as illustrated below.
When the One Seg reception is poor, change
the direction of the One Seg Antenna or the
location of the FOMA terminal.
ˎ Do not use force to change the direction of the One
Seg Antenna.
Using the One Seg Antenna
Pull out the One Seg Antenna.
Raise the One Seg Antenna.
Change the direction.
1Seg
● One-touch channel selection by the remotecontrol numbers (P.244)
● Switching between the main sound and sub
sound (P.246)
● Using the program guide i-αppli (P.247)
● Setting a timer for watching (P.247)
● Setting a timer for recording (P.247)
● Displaying and using the data broadcasting
(P.251)
● Using TVlink (P.252)
● Recording a video and still image (P.252)
● Time shift play while watching (P.253)
● Rapid play with sound at about 1.3x speed
(P.277)
Before Using One Seg
Continued
253
Putting the One Seg Antenna back
Change the direction back.
Push the One Seg Antenna back while
aligning the top of the One Seg Antenna
with the counter part until it stops.
ˎ If you use force to put the antenna back without
confirming the correct orientation, it may cause
malfunction.
■ The display that appears when One Seg is
used for the first time
When One Seg is activated for the first time,
the display for confirming the notabilia of the
service appears. When the FOMA terminal is
in the TV style, switch to the Normal style, and
then check the contents and press
(OK)
(P.240).
■ Battery level
1Seg
254
ˎ If you try to activate One Seg with the battery level
low, the screen for confirming whether to activate
One Seg appears. If you select [Yes], One Seg
is activated. When the battery level becomes low
while watching One Seg, the screen for confirming
whether to quit One Seg appears. When you select
[Yes], One Seg is terminated.
ˎ When the battery level becomes low, the screen
informing that the battery level becomes low
appears, “ ”/“ ”/“ ” flashes while watching One
Seg, and “ ”/“ ”/“ ” flashes while recording a
One Seg program.
ˎ When the battery level becomes extremely low while
watching or recording a One Seg program, One
Seg is terminated. When you are recording a One
Seg program, the video recorded up to this point is
saved automatically.
■ When there is an incoming call, etc. while
watching One Seg
ˎ When receiving a voice, videophone, or PushTalk
call while watching One Seg, you can answer the
call by pausing video and sound. After the call is
terminated, the screen for confirming whether to
use Time shift play appears. When you select [Yes],
Time shift play is started.
ˎ When receiving i-mode mail, SMS, Message R/F
while watching One Seg, the incoming mail display
appears. The display restores when mail reception
is completed. (When the Mail telop disp set is set
to [OFF] and Dur multi task disp is set to [Prefer
operat.])
ˎ When the Alarm, Schedule alarm, or Booking alarm
time comes while watching One Seg, the alarm is
displayed. The display restores when you stop the
Alarm or Schedule alarm and press
or
in the display informing the release of the alarm.
When you stop the Booking alarm, the screen for
confirming whether to activate One Seg appears
depending on the setting of the Cfm. activation
(P.248) and you can activate it.
● When the UIM is not inserted, you cancel the
subscription to DoCoMo, or you temporarily
suspend using the FOMA service, you cannot
watch One Seg.
● Even when you insert the UIM for which you
subscribe to DoCoMo, you may not be able to
activate One Seg if you repeatedly watch One
Seg in the condition the FOMA terminal cannot
communicate such as when the FOMA terminal
is outside of the service area or in the Self mode.
In that case, try to activate One Seg in the
condition the FOMA terminal can communicate
by moving into the FOMA service area.
● When you activate One Seg for the first time,
activate it within the FOMA service area.
● Even if the data may be lost or changed as a
result of malfunction, repair, or other handling
of the FOMA terminal, under no condition will
DoCoMo be held liable for any damaged or lost
data saved in the FOMA terminal. Furthermore,
note that the saved information (such as One
Seg recorded videos or still images, TV links, or
information saved in the broadcast storage area)
cannot be moved when you change your FOMA
terminal or have it repaired.
● If you continue watching One Seg for a long
period of time with the battery being charged,
the life of the battery pack may become shorter.
Setting Channels 
Select [Auto channel set] → [Yes] and
press .
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ ｓｃａｎｎｉｎｇ
To use One Seg, you need to perform the
channel setting and save the channel list
beforehand. When you watch One Seg, select
a channel list suitable for the current location.
You can save up to 10 channel lists, 62
broadcast stations for each list.
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｃｈ．
Ｐｈｙｓｉｃａｌ ｃｈ． ２７ｃｈ
○○テレビ
Saving a Broadcast Station to the Channel
List Automatically

Searching broadcast stations starts. The Channel
scan result display appears when the search is
completed.
To cancel searching broadcast stations
Press
(Cancel) and select [Yes].
Broadcast stations that can be received are
automatically searched and saved to a channel
list.
ˎ You need to set it within the Terrestrial digital TV
broadcasting service area.
ˎ When you perform the Auto channel set, extend the
One Seg Antenna fully.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Set
channel list] and press .
Ｓｅｔ ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ ｌｉｓｔ
チャンネルリスト１
東京
大阪
神奈川
Select a place to save to and press
(Create).
Press
(OK), select [Yes], press
enter a name of a channel list.
, and
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
The channel list is saved.
● When the multiple broadcast stations which have
the same remote-control number are retrieved,
the message to the effect that the remote-control
number is doubled appears. Press
and select
the current location you are in from the Select
service area display. The channels in the area
you select are preferentially assigned to remotecontrol numbers 1 to 12, and channels in the
area you do not select are assigned to remotecontrol numbers 13 to 62 onward.
● It takes about 40 to 60 seconds to complete
searching broadcast stations. However, the
searching time varies and it may exceed 60
seconds depending on the number of broadcast
stations or the condition of airwave.
1Seg
When no channel list is saved
Follow step 3 to 4.
The screen for creating a channel list appears.
Continued
255
Saving a Broadcast Station into
the Channel List Manually
Selecting a Channel List to be
Used
You can save broadcast stations to a channel
list by selecting a service area, prefecture, and
area.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Set
channel list] and press .
You can select a channel list suitable for your
current location. Also, you can edit the saved
channel lists.
The Set channel list display appears.
When no channel list is saved
Follow step 3 to 5.
The Set channel list display appears.
To activate One Seg from the channel list
Move the cursor to a channel list, press
(Ch. list), move the cursor to a broadcast station
in the channel list, and press
(Watch).
To change the name of a channel list
Move the cursor to a channel list and from the
Function menu, select [Edit title]. Enter a name
within 10 full-width or 20 half-width characters.
To delete a channel list
Move the cursor to a channel list and from the
Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
ˎ The currently used channel list cannot be
deleted.
To reset the channel list
From the Function menu, select [Reset], enter
the Security code, and select [Yes].
To display detailed information of a broadcast station
Move the cursor to a channel list, press
(Ch. list), move to the cursor to a broadcast
station in the channel list, and press
(Detail).
Select a place to save to and press
(Create).
The screen for creating a channel list appears.
Select [Select Serv Area] and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ ａｒｅａ
Ｈｏｋｋａｉｄｏ
Ｔｏｈｏｋｕ
Ｋａｎｔｏ
Ｋｏｓｈｉｎｅｔｓｕ／Ｈｏｋｕｒｉｋｕ
Ｔｏｋａｉ
Ｋｉｎｋｉ
Ｃｈｕｇｏｋｕ
Ｓｈｉｋｏｋｕ
Ｋｙｕｓｙｕ／Ｏｋｉｎａｗａ
Select a service area → a prefecture → an
area and press .
The screen for confirming the channel information
of the selected service area appears.
1Seg
Press
(OK), select [Yes], and press
The channel list is saved.
● Depending on the area you use, you may not be
able to save a broadcast station correctly even
if you set the Select Serv Area. In this case, use
the Auto channel set.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Set
channel list] and press .
Select a channel list and press
Editing Remote-control Numbers
A remote-control number which can be used
for selecting a station is already assigned
to each broadcast station. Remote-control
numbers can be changed.
Select a channel list in the Set channel
list display and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
256
The channel list to be used is set.
2
Select [Edit RC number] and press
Ｅｄｉｔ ＲＣ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
○○テレビ
△△ テレビ
○ △ テレビ
□□テレビ
To delete a broadcast station
Move the cursor to a broadcast station and from
the Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
Select a broadcast station and press
The remote-control number input screen appears.
Enter a remote-control number.
Enter a number within 01 to 62.
The remote-control number is changed.
When the remote-control number is already
assigned to another broadcast station
Select [Yes]. The saved broadcast station is
replaced with the new one.
Watching One Seg

Using the Display for Watching
One Seg
Normal style (Watching)
Normal style (Recording)
ͦ
ͦ
ͨ Subtitle
ͩ Data broadcasting/displaying mail
ˎ The display varies depending on the Mail disp
set (P.256).
※ It is not displayed in the TV style.
ͪ Remote-control number
ͫ Name of the channel/program
ͬ Recording status
ͭ Recording progress bar
ͮ Estimated recordable time
※ The recordable time changes according to
the progress of recording. It may increase or
suddenly decrease while recording, depending
on the contents of the program to be recorded.
ͯ Volume
Ͱ Operating mode
Video mode
Data broadcasting mode
Video mode while displaying mail
Mail mode
ͱ Airwave reception level
Outside of the broadcast
service area
weak)
(strong
Ͳ Guide display
Watching One Seg in the Normal
Style
You can watch One Seg in the Normal style.
ͧ
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
ͪ
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
○ × ｃｈ ○○テレビ
Ｒｅｃ
Ͳ
ͨ
ͩ
○ △ の不思議
ͫͪ
ͯ Ͱͱ
群れのペンギンたちが、み
んないっせいに同じ方向を
見た。なにかを見つけたの
だろうか。
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
○ × ｃｈ ○○テレビ
ͬ ͭ
ͨ
ͩ
○ △ の不思議
ͫ
ͮ ͯ Ͱͱ
TV style
ͦ
ͪ
○ × ｃｈ ○○テレビ
ͬ
ͭ
ͮ
ͱ
ͫ
○ △ の不思議
ͧ
群れのペンギンたちが、みんないっ
せいに同じ方向を見た。なにかを見
つけたのだろうか。
Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
ͦ Display status
Watching One Seg
ͧ Video
Ｒｅｃ
Ｆｕｎｃ
Ｑｕｉｔ
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Activate
1Seg] and press .
1Seg
群れのペンギンたちが、み
んないっせいに同じ方向を
見た。なにかを見つけたの
だろうか。
ͧ
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
■豆知識
■クイズ
■撮影裏話
■次回予告
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｒｅｃ
The channel which you watched previously is
displayed.
ˎ You can also activate One Seg by pressing
for over a second in the stand-by display.
ͨ
Ͳ
Recording One Seg
Continued
257
Operating method
Video mode
When no channel list is saved
The screen informing that no channel list is saved
appears. Select how to save a channel and save
one (P.242).
To display the program information
From the Function menu, select [Program info.].
When you press
, the details of the program
is displayed. To display the information of the
previous/next program, press
(Previous) /
(Next).
To set the 1Seg setting
From the Function menu, select [1Seg setting].
To compose mail containing program information
From the Function menu, select [Prog info mail].
ˎ When you send the program information to the
FOMA terminal which is compatible with the
Media To function, the recipient can select it to
activate One Seg.
To select a program when multiple ser vices
(programs) are broadcasted on the same channel
From the Function menu, select [Select service]
→ a program.
To save the broadcast station into a channel list
while watching it
From the Function menu, select [Add channel].
Operation
Key operation
UP/DOWN channel Use
)/
).
select
Select a station in order/
reverse order of the remotecontrol numbers.
One-touch channel Remote-control number
to
select
1 to 9 :
10
11
12
Channel search
Use
) /
) for
over a second.
Search broadcast stations
which can be received.
)/
).
Volume adjustment Use
The volume can be adjusted
in 32 levels: 0 to 31.
(TV/DATA) (P.251).
S w i t c h b e t w e e n Press
video and data
broadcasting
modes
Start the program Press
(EPG).
guide i-αppli
Time shift
Press
(T.shft).
Pause watching a program
and play it back in time-shift
mode (P.253).
Record a still image Press
Record a video
Press
for over a second.
Quit 1Seg
Press
and select [Yes].
1Seg
Data broadcasting mode
Operation
Display the previous/
next page
Switch the data
broadcasting
screen between half
and full screens
Key operation
Use
while using the
data broadcasting site.
Press
(TV/DATA) for over a
second.
Watching One Seg in the TV Style
When you switch the FOMA terminal to the TV
style, you can watch One Seg in the horizontal
orientation.
ˎ See “About the Style” (P.27) to switch the FOMA
terminal to the TV style.
ˎ The data broadcasting cannot be displayed in the
TV style.
Switch to the TV style in stand-by status.
The Viewing Touch Key lights and it can be
operated.
ˎ You can set functions to be activated when
switching to the TV style (P.328).
When you set other functions to be activated,
activate One Seg in the stand-by status and then
switch to the TV style.
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
Ｒｅｃ
Ｆｕｎｃ
Ｑｕｉｔ
The channel which you watched previously is
displayed.
258
Operating method
Operation
Key operation
UP/DOWN channel Use
Select a station in order/
select
reverse order of the remotecontrol numbers.
Channel search
Use
for over a second.
Search broadcast stations
which can be received.
Volume adjustment Use
The volume can be adjusted
in 32 levels: 0 to 31.
Record a still image Press
Record a video
Press
Setting While Watching One Seg
Watching One Seg with Subtitles
You can display subtitles while watching a
program.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV
style.
Example: For the TV style
To display the program information
From the Function menu, select [Program info.].
When you use
(Chg.Info), the details of the
program is displayed. To display the information
of the previous/next program, use
(Back/
Next).
Use
press
to select [Caption disp set] and
The Caption disp set menu appears.
[Language1]:
The subtitle of Language 1 is displayed.
[Language2]:
The subtitle of Language 2 is displayed.
[OFF]:
The subtitle is not displayed.
Use
press
to select a type of subtitles and
The subtitle is set.
● Whether subtitles are provided or not depends
on the program.
● When no subtitle is provided on a program,
the subtitle is not displayed regardless of the
Caption disp set.
1Seg
● Depending on the receiving condition of
airwave, sound interruption or video pause may
occur, black-shaped noise may appear on the
picture, or a dark display without video or data
broadcasting may appear.
● Depending on the radio wave condition, videos
and data broadcasting may not be displayed
even if the status of the airwave reception level
is other than the outside of the broadcast service
area.
● When you activate One Seg while the Manner
mode is set, the screen for confirming whether
to output sound appears. When you select [Yes],
you hear the sound.
● Colors of the guide display, etc. may change
slightly while watching One Seg.
● The Viewing Touch Key is turned off about 15
seconds after it lights. Pat the Viewing Touch Key
or press
, or
to light it again.
(Func) while watching One
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Caption disp
set] → a type of subtitles.
for over a second.
Display the Function Press
menu
for over a second
Quit 1Seg
Press
and select [Yes].
Press
Seg.
Displaying the Guide Display All the Time
You can set whether to display the guide
display, icon, etc. all the time in the TV style.
ˎ You can set it only in the TV style.
Press
Seg.
Use
press
(Func) while watching One
The Function menu appears.
to select [Guide always on] and
The Guide always on setting menu appears.
Continued
259
3
Use
to select [ON]/[OFF] and press
Example: For the TV style
The Guide always on is set.
You can set the image quality of the video
portion.
Example: For the TV style
Press
Seg.
(Func) while watching One
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Image quality]
→ an image quality.
1Seg
Use
press
Use
press
to select [Auto Disp light] and
The Auto Disp light display appears.
[ON]:
Adjust the light automatically.
[OFF]:
Do not adjust the light automatically.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV
style.
(Func) while watching One
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Auto Disp light]
→ [ON]/[OFF].
● When the guide display, icon, etc. are displayed,
part of video may not be seen.
Adjusting the Image Quality
Press
Seg.
Use
to select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Auto Disp light is set.
Adjusting the Brightness of the Display
to select [Image quality] and
You can set the display light brightness when
you watch One Seg.
The Image quality menu appears.
[Normal]:
T h e s t a n d a rd i m a g e q u a l i t y e m p h a s i z e d
naturalness.
[Sharp]:
Sharply edged image quality.
[Dynam.]:
The clear image quality in which an edge and
contrast of an image is emphasized.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV
style.
Use
press
to select an image quality and
Example: For the TV style
Press
Seg.
(Func) while watching One
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Display light] →
brightness.
The image quality is set.
Use
press
to select [Display light] and
The Display light menu appears.
Setting to Adjust the Light Automatically
You can set whether to adjust automatically
the display light brightness by the Brightness
Sensor to adapt for the surrounding brightness
while watching One Seg.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV
style.
260
Use
to select brightness and press
Select brightness from [1 to 5].
Switching between the Primary/Secondary
Sounds
You can switch the sound between the primary
and secondary sounds.
ˎ You can switch the sound only in the Normal style.
Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Switch sound] and press
The screen for selecting the Switch sound appears.
[Primary sound]:
The primary sound is played back.
[Secondary sound]:
The secondary sound is played back.
Select a sound and press
● Even if the Main/Sub is set to [Sub sound]/
[Main+Sub sound], the main sound is played
back when there is no sub sound for the program
which you are watching.
Using the Sleep Timer
You can set to terminate One Seg automatically
after the certain period of time.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV
style.
Example: For the TV style
The Switch sound is set.
Switching between the Main/Sub Sounds
You can switch the sound between the main
and sub sounds.
ˎ You can switch the sound only in the Normal style.
Press
(Func) while watching One Seg.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Main/Sub] and press
The screen for selecting the Main/Sub appears.
[Main sound]:
The main sound is played back.
[Sub sound]:
The sub sound is played back.
[Main+Sub sound]:
The main sound is played back from the left
speaker and the sub sound is played back from
the right speaker.
Select a sound and press
Use
to select [Sleep] and press
The Sleep setting menu appears.
Use
to select a time before
terminating One Seg automatically and
press
Select from [OFF], [30min], [60min], [90min], and
[120min].
Using the Program Guide
i-αppli

Using the program guide i-αppli, you can
activate One Seg by selecting a program from
within the program guide and set a timer for
watching or recording a program.
1Seg
(Func) while watching One
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
From the Function menu, select [Sleep] → a time
before terminating One Seg automatically.
● Even if the Switch sound is set to [Secondary
sound], the primary sound is played back when
there is no secondary sound for the program
which you are watching.
Press
Seg.
ˎ “Gガイド番組表リモコン” (G-GUIDE TV Program
List Remote Control) is preinstalled as the program
guide i-αppli (P.211). For details, see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
The Main/Sub is set.
Continued
261
1
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Program
guide] and press .
※ The display shown is an
image for explanator y
purpose and may be
different from the actual
display. The TV program
list is displayed according
to your location.
The program guide i-αppli is started and “ ” or
“ ” appears.
To start the program guide i-αppli while watching in
the Normal style
Press
(EPG). You can also start the program
guide i-αppli when, from the Function menu,
select [Program guide].
To change the software to be activated by the
Program guide key
Move the cursor to the software in the list of
i-αppli software and from the Function menu,
select [Individual set] → [Program guide key] →
[Yes]/[No] (P.209).
● When you select a program in the “Gガイド番組
表リモコン” (G-GUIDE TV Program List Remote
Control) display, you can watch the selected
program by pressing
(TV起動).
ˎ When the copy control signal changes to “the
program cannot be recorded (Copy Never)” while
recording a program, the recording stops. Video
data recorded up to that point is saved.
ˎ When you set a microSD memory card as a place
to save a recorded video, insert a microSD memory
card beforehand.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [Booking
list] and press .
Ｒｓｒｖ ｄａｔａ ｌｉｓｔ
１／１
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ１８：００
○○テレビ
明日の天気
The Res. data list display appears.
To delete a timer for watching/recording a program
Move the cursor to a timer and from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To
delete all timers, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
To edit a timer for watching/recording a program
Move the cursor to a timer and press
(Edit).
To display the detailed information of a timer for
watching/recording a program
Move the cursor to a timer and press .
Press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
1Seg
Setting a Timer for Watching/Recording
a One Seg Program

You can set a timer for watching or recording
a One Seg program. When you set a timer for
watching a program, the alarm sounds to notify
you of the start of the program at the specified
date/time. You can save up to 50 timer settings
for watching and recording programs.
ˎ When the channel list is not set, you cannot set a
timer for watching or recording a program.
ˎ The copy control signal (indicating that “the program
cannot be recorded (Copy Never)”, “the program
can be recorded only once (Copy Once)”, or “the
program can be recorded without restrictions (Copy
Free)”) is placed in One Seg. They are set by each
broadcast station.
ˎ If the copy control signal of a program is one of
“the program can be recorded only once (Copy
Once)” and “the program can be recorded without
restrictions (Copy Free)”, the program can be
recorded.
262
Select [Create] and press
Ｅｄｉｔ Ｒｅｓｅｒｖａｔｉｏｎ
Ｂｏｏｋｉｎｇ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ
１８：００
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ
２０：００
○○テレビ
明日の天気
ＯＮ
３０ｓｅｃ．ｂｅｆｏｒｅ
Ｅｙｄ
１０ Ｃｏｕｎｔ
Ｔｏ ２００７／１２／０７
4
Save each item.
○: Allowed to be saved −: Not allowed to be saved
Icon
Setting data
S e l e c t [ B o o k i n g p ro g r a m ]
(Blue)/ [Timer recording] (Pink).
Enter a starting date within
the range from 2000/01/01 to
2050/12/31.
Enter a starting time in 24-hour
format.
Enter an ending date from the
starting date to 2050/12/31.
Enter an ending time in 24-hour
format.
Select a channel.
○
○
○
○
○
○
−
○
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
−
○
○
○
−
Setting data
Dur multitask Rec
Select whether to display the
screen for confirming to start
recording when the time to
start recording comes while
another function which cannot
be activated at the same time
is running.
[Pref. recording]:
Te r m i n a t e t h e e x e c u t e d
function automatically and
start recording.
[Prefer operat.]:
Display the screen for
confirming whether to
terminate the executed
function. When you select
[ Ye s ] , t e r m i n a t e t h e
executed function and start
recording. When you select
[No], a timer for recording a
program is canceled.
Output of Rec
Select [Data Box]/[microSD]
as a place to save a recorded
video.
Booking Timer
program recording
−
○
−
○
1Seg
Enter a program name within
48 full-width or 96 half-width
characters.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the alarm.
ˎ When you set to [ON],
you can select how many
minutes before the starting
time of timer the alarm
should sound. If you want to
sound the alarm at the same
time as the starting time,
select [00sec.before].
Select the repeat type.
[OFF]:
Do not repeat the timer.
[Eyd]:
Repeat the timer every day.
[Day]:
Repeat the timer on the
same day of the week.
[Month]:
Repeat the timer every
month on the same day.
When
the repeat type is set
ˎ
to other than [OFF], enter the
repeat count within 01 to 99
times.
Cfm. activation
Select whether to display the
Cfm. activation display when
the Booking alarm is activated.
[ON]:
Display the Cfm. activation
display.
[OFF]:
Do not display the Cfm.
activation display.
ˎ When the alarm is set to
[OFF], it cannot be set.
Booking Timer
program recording
Icon
Continued
263
5
Press
(Complete).
A timer for watching/recording a program is saved.
ˎ To play back a recorded video, see “Displaying/
Playing Back One Seg” (P.277).
To set a timer for recording a program
The display for confirming the notabilia of the
service appears. To save a timer for recording a
program, confirm the contents and select [Yes].
If you do not want to display the confirmation
display next time, select [Yes,from then on]. The
confirmation display no longer appears.
ˎ To restore the display for confirming the
notabilia of the service, perform the Rset
permission set (P.256).
1Seg
264
● You can also set a timer for watching/recording
a program using a program information provided
by the program guide i-αppli, site, mail, etc.
● If the Alarm, Schedule alarm, and Booking alarm
are set to start at the same time, the following
priority is applied.
1. Schedule alarm
2. Booking alarm
3. Alarm
● If there is a timer that is set to start at the same
time as the new timer for recording a program,
the confirmation screen appears. If you select
[Yes], the previously saved timer for recording a
program is overwritten by the new one.
● When the ending or starting date and time set
for the previously saved timer for recording a
program is the same as the starting or ending
date and time set for the newly saved one
respectively, the confirmation screen appears. If
you select [Yes], the preceding timer terminates
slightly earlier than the specified time.
● If the Booking list is updated because of the
saved reservation being started while editing a
reservation or other reason, the reservation may
not be saved successfully.
● If the repeat type of the schedule set for the 31st
is set to [Month], the schedule is set for the last
day of the month for months with less than 31
days.
At the Booking Alarm Time
The alarm tone sounds for about 30 seconds
with the indicator flashing.
Ｂｏｏｋｉｎｇ ａｌａｒｍ
１８：００
○○テレビ
明日の天気
ＯＮ
３０ｓｅｃ．ｂｅｆｏｒｅ
Ｅｙｄ
１０ Ｃｏｕｎｔ
To stop the alarm tone
Press any key. When you stop the alarm tone,
the display informing the release of the alarm
appears. To turn off the display, press
(OK) or
When you do not stop the alarm tone
The display informing the release of the alarm
appears. To turn off the display, press
(OK) or
When the Cfm. activation is set to [ON]
After you turn off the display informing the
release of the alarm, the Cfm. activation display
appears. Select [Yes] to activate One Seg.
When the Cfm. activation is set to [OFF]
Press
for over a second to activate One
Seg.
● If you set an i-motion with video and sound
tracks to the alarm tone, a movie in the i-motion
is displayed.
● If the alarm time comes during a voice/
videophone call or PushTalk communication,
the default alarm tone sounds and default
alarm image is displayed. The vibrator does not
operate.
● The Booking alarm does not operate in the
following cases.
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- While the Lock all is set
- While the Personal data lock is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- While updating the software
● If the alarm time comes in the following cases,
the alarm may operate when the status changes
to during a call or stand-by.
- While placing/receiving a voice/videophone
call or originating/receiving a PushTalk call
- During packet communication
- During the infrared communication/while the
infrared remote control is being used
- During the iC communication
- During data communication or while reading/
writing data from/into a microSD memory card
on a PC with the FOMA terminal connected
using the USB cable
- While recording a still image/movie
- While the Schedule alarm is sounding
- B e e p w h i l e re c e i v i n g A re a M a i l , w h i l e
sounding Area Mail ring tone, or displaying
Area Mail
● If you leave the FOMA terminal with the battery
pack removed or fully expended for a long
period of time, the date and time is reset, and the
Booking alarm may not operate correctly.
At the Timer Recording Starting Time
A recording is automatically started. When the
timer for recording a program starts while One
Seg is not activated, “ ” appears. After the
recording is completed, the notification icon
“ ” (Timer Rec result) appears in the stand-by
display.
ˎ Extend the One Seg Antenna fully while recording a
program.
１
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
■豆知識
■クイズ
■撮影裏話
■次回予告
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｐｒｅｐａｒｉｎｇ ｔｏ Ｒｅｃ
When the timer recording starting time comes while
watching One Seg
The Preparing to Rec display appears. To cancel
recording, press
and select [Yes].
To cancel the recording during timer recording
Press
while recording and select [Yes].
● Even if the Dur multitask Rec is set to [Prefer
recording], the timer for recording a program
may be canceled in a case such as when there
are too many active functions or there is not
enough memory. Also, while transferring data to
the microSD memory card, the recording does
not start.
● If the Dur multitask Rec is set to [Prefer
operat.] and when functions that cannot be
run simultaneously are active, the screen for
confirming whether to start the timer recording
appears. When you select [Yes], the timer
recording starts.
However, regardless of selecting [Yes] on the
confirmation screen, the timer for recording a
program may not start in a case such as when
there are too many active functions or there is not
enough memory.
● Even if the FOMA terminal is outside of the
broadcast service area when the timer recording
starting time comes, the timer recording works
effectively.
However, the timer recording fails if the FOMA
terminal is outside of the broadcast service area
all the time from the beginning to the end of the
scheduled recording time. The message “Could
not receive broadcast wave” appears in the
Result detail display (P.251).
Continued
1Seg
Ｔｉｍｅｒ Ｒｅｃ ｒｅｓｕｌｔ
To check the reservation result
Press
(Link) in the stand-by display and select
“ ”.
265
● Timer recording does not start in the following
cases.
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- When the UIM is not inserted
- While the Lock all is set
- While the Personal data lock is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- During packet communication
- During 64K data communication
- During the infrared communication
- During the iC communication
- While using the Data Security Service
- While updating the software
When you select a Chaku-Uta Full ® that has a
choice of specified playback ranges from [MUSIC]
The screen for selecting a type of setting
appears. If you select [Full song], the whole track
of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the alarm tone. If you
select [Point], the specified playback range of
Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the alarm tone.
To mute the alarm tone
Select [Silent].
To check the alarm tone
Move the cursor to the alarm tone and press
(Play).
Setting the Operation for the
Booking Alarm
ˎ You can set the following files.
File
File size
Image size
format
My picture GIF/
Max. 250K Max. [Stand-by
JPEG bytes
(480×864)],
Max. W480×
H288 for GIF
animation
SWF Max. 100K
−
bytes
i-motion※ MP4
Max. 10M Max. [VGA(640×
bytes
480)]
Category
You can set the detailed operation for the
Booking alarm.
Press
display.
(Func) in the Res. data list
The Function menu appears.
Select [Booking ALM set] and press
Ａｌａｒｍ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ａｌａｒｍ ｔｏｎｅ
Ａｌａｒｍ（ｓｔｄ）
Ａｌａｒｍ ｉｍａｇｅ
視聴予約アラーム鳴動
Ａｌａｒｍ ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
４
ＯＦＦ
Ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
Ｃｏｌｏｒ
Ｃ５
1Seg
S e l e c t a n a l a r m t o n e f ro m M U S I C /
i-motion/Melody of the Data Box at [Alarm
tone].
ˎ You can set the following files. You can select a
Chaku-Uta® from [i-motion].
File
Category
File size
Image size
format
MUSIC※ AAC-LC/ Max. 5M
−
HE-AAC bytes
i-motion※ MP4
Max. 10M Max. [VGA(640×
bytes
480)]
Melody
SMF/ Max. 350K
−
MFi
bytes
※ Some files may not be set.
266
Select an image from My picture/i-motion
of the Data Box at [Alarm image].
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
To check the alarm image
Move the cursor to the alarm image and press
(Play).
Set the volume at [Alarm volume].
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 6].
To set the volume to [OFF]
Press
at level 1.
Select a vibration type at [Vibrator].
[Pattern1]:
Set short intermittent vibration.
[Pattern2]:
Set long intermittent vibration.
[Link melody]:
Vibrates in accordance with the alarm tone. If you
have set the alarm tone to [Silent] or to a melody
that cannot be synchronized with the vibrator
operation, the vibrator vibrates using [Pattern1].
[OFF]:
Do not set the vibrator.
To check the vibration
Move the cursor to the pattern and press
(Confirm).
Press
(Complete).
The operation for the Booking alarm is set.
● When you set an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® for
the alarm tone or set an i-motion for the alarm
image, the settings may be changed in some
cases.
Checking the Reservation Result
Up to 30 results of Timer recording can be
saved.
Press
display.
(Res.Rslt) in the Res. data list
Ｒｓｒｖ ｒｓｌｔ ｌｉｓｔ
１／２
To delete a reservation result
Move the cursor to a reservation result and from
the Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
To delete all reservation results, from the Function
menu, select [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
［Ｒｅｓｕｌｔ］
Ｔｉｍｅｒ ｒｅｃｏｒｄｉｎｇ
ｆｉｎｉｓｈｅｄ ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｌｙ
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ
１８：００
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ
２０：００
○○テレビ
明日の天気
Ｅｙｄ
１０ Ｃｏｕｎｔ
Ｔｏ ２００７／１２／０７
Using Data Broadcasting
One Seg allows you to use the data
broadcasting in addition to the video and
s o u n d b ro a d c a s t i n g . Va r i o u s k i n d s o f
information including still images and movies,
such as sites linked with programs are
available.
ˎ You cannot display the data broadcasting in the TV
style.
ˎ During the data broadcasting mode, you cannot
select a broadcast station.
Press
Seg.
(TV/DATA) while watching One
“ ” appears and the mode is switched to the data
broadcasting mode.
Half-screen display
Full-screen display
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
■豆知識
■クイズ
■撮影裏話
■次回予告
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
最新情報
■豆知識
■クイズ
■撮影裏話
■次回予告
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｒｅｃ
1Seg
２００７／１１／２８ Ｗｅｄ１８：００
○○テレビ
明日の天気
２００７／１１／２９ Ｔｈｕ２１：００
△△ テレビ
今日のニュース
Select a reservation result and press
Ｒｅｓｕｌｔ ｄｅｔａｉｌ
Select an indicator color at [Color].
Select from 12 indicator colors or [C13:ALL]
(indicator flashes in 12 colors in sequence).
When you move the cursor, the indicator flashes
accordingly.
●ドラマ
●ニュース・ドキュメンタリー
●バラエティ
●スポーツ
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｒｅｃ
To go back to the video mode
Press
(TV/DATA). Every time you press , the
mode is switched between the video and data
broadcasting modes.
To switch the data broadcasting screen between half
and full screens
Press
(TV/DATA) for over a second during the
data broadcasting mode. Every time you press
for over a second, the screen is switched
between half and full screens.
To display the certificate
From the Function menu, select [Certificates].
Continued
267
To reload the data broadcasting site
From the Function menu, select [Reload].
To go back to the data broadcasting from the data
broadcasting site
From the Function menu, select [Back to data
BC.].
Select an item and press
● When you access an i-mode site from the data
broadcasting, the site is displayed in full-screen
and the video and sound of One Seg are not
output.
● If you select [Yes] on the screen for confirming
whether to connect to i-mode that appears while
using data broadcasting or data broadcasting
site, the FOMA terminal connects to i-mode. If
you select [Yes,from then on], the confirmation
screen no longer appears. The packet
communication charge may be required because
of contents of data broadcasting or data
broadcasting site being updated automatically.
To display the confirmation screen again,
perform the Rset permission set (P.256).
● The packet communication performed when
connecting to a data broadcasting site is
covered by the Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full
service.
● For the operation while the site is displayed,
follow the same steps as in “Using Sites”
(P.162). You cannot enter pictographs in the
text box while in a data broadcasting or data
broadcasting site.
ˎ You can save up to 50 TV links.
Select an item that can be saved as a TV
link and press .
Select [Yes] and press
1Seg

Depending on the data broadcasting or data
broadcasting sites, you can save a URL or
memo information as a TV link. Once the
frequently used site or memo information is
saved as a TV link, you can display a desired
site or memo information directly.
The TV link is saved.
Displaying the Saved TV link
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [TVlink]
and press .
ＴＶｌｉｎｋ ｌｉｓｔ
１／４
○○番組
□ △ ズーム
○ △ 入門
△△ 発見
ˎ The following icons show the type of TV link
Data broadcasting site
i-mode site
Memo information
TV link with expiration date set
To display the detailed information of a TV link
Move the cursor to a TV link and press
(Detail).
To delete a TV link
Move the cursor to a TV link and from the
Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
To delete all TV links, from the Function menu,
select [Delete all], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
Using Displayed Information
Some data broadcasting or data broadcasting
sites allow you to use displayed information
to activate Phone To, Mail To, or i-αppli To
function, download ToruCa cards, and save
entries in the Phonebook or Schedule.
Using TVlink
268
Saving as a TV link
Select a TV link and press
The selected TV link is displayed.
When the screen for confirming whether to connect
to the i-mode appears
Select [Yes].
Recording One Seg While
Watching

Recording a Video
A recorded video is saved in either the [Video]
folder in 1Seg of the Data Box or in 1Seg of a
microSD memory card.
■ Estimated number and recording time of
videos you can record
Estimated max.
recording time＊2
About 30 minutes
About 10 hours
43 minutes
＊1 Depending on the data size, the number of
videos you can save may decrease.
＊2 The recording times are estimated values. They
vary depending on the contents of a program
to be recorded.
ˎ To set a place to save a recording video, see
“Setting a Place to Save a Recorded Video to”
(P.255).
● A file name of a recorded video appears in
the format of the recorded year, month, date,
hour, and minute. For example, when a video is
recorded at November 1, 2007, 9:05, it appears
as “200711010905NNN”. A number “000 to 999”
is assigned to “NNN”.
● You cannot set a recorded video for the stand-by
display, ring tone, incoming image, etc.
● When the Rec T.shift now/Play T.shift now is
activated, you cannot start recording a program.
● You cannot start recording a video while the
FOMA terminal is outside of the broadcast
service area.
● Recorded video can only be moved from the
Data Box to the microSD memory card. A video
cannot be moved/copied from the microSD
memory card to the Data Box.
● If the free space of the storage area is being
decreased during recording, the message
informing that there is not enough space appears
and the recording ends. The video recorded up
to this point is saved.
Recording a Still Image
You can save up to 50 recorded still images.
Press
1Seg
Estimated max.
number＊1
Data Box
99 items
microSD memory 99 items
card (2GB)
Place to save to
, select [Yes],
The recording is stopped and a video is saved.
ˎ To play back a saved video, see “Displaying/
Playing Back One Seg” (P.277).
For the TV style
Press
, select [Yes], and press
You can save a program as a video and a
scene of a program as a still image while
watching One Seg.
ˎ The copy control signal (indicating that “the program
cannot be recorded (Copy Never)”, “the program
can be recorded only once (Copy Once)”, or “the
program can be recorded without restrictions (Copy
Free)”) is placed in One Seg. They are set by each
broadcast station.
ˎ If the copy control signal of a program is one of
“the program can be recorded only once (Copy
Once)” and “the program can be recorded without
restrictions (Copy Free)”, the program can be
recorded.
ˎ When the copy control signal changes to “the
program cannot be recorded (Copy Never)” while
recording a program, the recording stops. Video
data recorded up to that point is saved.
To stop recording, press
and press .
while watching One Seg.
A still image is recorded and saved automatically.
ˎ A One Seg recorded still image cannot be saved
in the microSD memory card.
ˎ To play back a saved still image, see “Displaying/
Playing Back One Seg” (P.277).
Press
fo r ov e r a s e c o n d w h i l e
watching One Seg.
The display is switched to the Preparing to Rec
display. After time for preparation, recording starts
” appears.
and “
Continued
269
● Subtitles and data broadcasting cannot be
recorded as a still image.
● A file name of a recorded still image appears
in the format of the recorded year, month, date,
hour, and minute. For example, when a still
image is recorded at November 1, 2007, 9:05, it
appears as “200711010905NNN”. A number “000
to 999” is assigned to “NNN”.
● You cannot set a recorded still image for the
stand-by display, incoming image, etc.
● You cannot record a still image while the Rec
T.shift is in progress, the FOMA terminal is
outside of the broadcast service area, or video
playback is in progress.
● The number of images that can be saved may
decrease depending on the size of still images.
You can play back a time-delayed copy of a
program after pausing watching One Seg.
ˎ While playing back, a video and sound are played
back at about 1.3× speed. When the time shift
play is ended, the original broadcasting program is
returned.
ˎ When you start the Time shift recording while you
are talking on the phone, extend the One Seg
Antenna fully.
ˎ You can set it either in the Normal style or in the TV
style.
1Seg
Example: For the TV style
Press
Seg.
(Func) while watching One
The Function menu appears.
For the Normal style
Press
(T.shft) and select [Yes]. To play back,
press
(Play).
Use
to select [Time shift] and press
270
Use
to select [Start] and press
to select [Yes] and press
The Time shift recording is started and the Rec
T.shift now display appears.
To cancel the Time shift recording
From the Function menu, select [Time shift] →
[Quit] → [Yes].
To cancel the Time shift recording in the Normal
style
Press
and select [Yes].
Press
(Func) to play back.
The Function menu appears.
Use
to select [Time shift] and press
Starting Time Shift Play
While Watching

Use
Use
to select [Play] and press
The Time shift play is started.
To quit the Time shift play
From the Function menu, select [Time shift] →
[Quit] → [Yes].
To quit the Time shift play in the Normal style
Press
(Quit) and select [Yes].
● When there is an incoming voice/videophone or
PushTalk call while watching One Seg, the Time
shift recording is automatically started. After the
call is disconnected, the screen for confirming
whether to play back a program appears. Select
[Yes] to start the Time shift play.
● The recording time of video you can record
using the Time shift recording is up to about 90
seconds. When 90 seconds are past, the older
part of the video is overwritten by the newer one.
Every latest 90 seconds of video is maintained.
● When the Time shift recording is too short, the
Time shift play may not start, or it may stop
immediately to return to the original broadcasting
program.
● You cannot start the Time shift recording when
the FOMA terminal is outside of the broadcast
service area. However, if the FOMA terminal
becomes outside of the broadcast service area
while the Time shift recording is in progress, the
recording continues.
● Regardless of whether the data broadcasting
is displayed in half-/full-screen, you cannot
start the Time shift recording during the data
broadcasting mode.
Receiving Mail While
Watching One Seg
While watching One Seg, you can read
received mail or reply to the mail. The display
style of the received mail varies depending on
the Mail disp set. The default setting is set to
[OFF] (P.256).
■ When the Mail disp set is set to [Display
mail]
“ ” appears in the Video
mode and “ ” appears in the
Mail mode.
Ｉｎ
携帯なつ子
Ｈａｐｐｙ Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
Ｈａｐｐｙ ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ！ Ｉｔ’ｓ ａｌｒ
ｅａｄｙ ｏｎｅ ｙｅａｒ ｓｉｎｃｅ ｙｏｕ
ｌｅｆｔ． Ｙｏｕ ｓｕｒｅｌｙ ｆａｍｉｌｉａ
ｒｉｚｅ ｙｏｕｒｓｅｌｆ ｗｉｔｈ ｔｈｅ ｌ
ｏｃａｌ ｃｕｌｔｕｒｅ． Ｉ ｈｏｐｅ ｙｏｕ
ｅｎｊｏｙ ｙｏｕｒ ｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｙｅａｒ
■ When the Mail disp set is set to [Display
telop]
When you receive mail, the Telop text is displayed.
When you receive i-mode mail from the sender who is
saved in the Phonebook, the name of the sender and
subject are added to the Telop text. When SMS is sent
from the sender who is saved in the Phonebook, the
name of the sender and “SMS” are added.
For the Normal style
○ △ の不思議
毎週木曜よる１０時∼
第２２５回
ペンギンの一生
■豆知識
■クイズ
■撮影裏話
■次回予告
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ ｍａｉｌ 携帯なつ子
1Seg
Multi-window
When you receive mail in the Normal style, the screen
for confirming whether to display received mail
appears. Select [Yes] to display the contents of the
mail and “ ” appears.
To reply mail/SMS using the Quote function
Press
(Quote). The Edit mail display or Edit SMS
display appears.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and send
mail” (P.179, step 3 to 5) or “Compose and send
SMS” (P.202, step 3 to 4).
To switch to the Video mode
Press
(TV/Mail). Every time you press
(TV/
Mail), the mode is changed between Video and Mail
modes.
To end the mail display
Press
(QuitMail).
● Mail cannot be displayed in the TV style but the
Telop text is displayed.
● Mail cannot be displayed when you receive
it from the sender who is saved as Secret. To
display mail, set the Secret display to [ON].
● Mail cannot be displayed when it is sent from a
sender who is not saved in the Phonebook.
● If you receive several mails continuously, the last
received mail is displayed.
● When a message appears in the Mail mode, the
message is not displayed completely and you
may not be able to perform an operation. Press
(TV/Mail) to switch to the Video mode, the
message appears correctly, and then you can
perform the operation.
Telop
For the TV style
Telop
○ × ｃｈ ○ △ の不思議
Ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅｄ ｍａｉｌ
Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
Ｒｅｃ
携帯なつ子
Ｆｕｎｃ
Ｑｕｉｔ
Continued
271
● When you receive mail from a sender who is
saved as Secret, the name of the sender is not
displayed. To display a name, set the Secret
display to [ON].
● When the mail is being saved in the folder for
which the Mail security is set, the name and
subject are not displayed.
● When the Public mode (Drive mode) is set, the
Telop text is not displayed.
● Mail ring tone, vibrator, and incoming indicator
are not operated.
● If you receive several mails or messages
continuously, the information of the last received
mail or message is displayed in the Telop text.
Various Settings for One
Seg
<1Seg setting>
You can set functions regarding One Seg, reset
the settings, etc.
Deleting the Broadcast Storage

Area
You can delete information stored in the
broadcast storage area.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [1Seg
setting] → [Delete storage area] and
press .
1Seg
The BC group list display appears.
To delete data by each affiliated channel group
Move the cursor to an affiliated channel group
and from the Function menu, select [Delete aff.
Data] → [Yes]. To delete data of all affiliated
channel groups, from the Function menu, select
[Del all aff.data], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
Select an affiliated channel group and
press .
The list of the broadcast stations in the affiliated
channel group is displayed.
Select a broadcast station and press
(Delete).
Select [Yes] and press
Data of the selected broadcast station is deleted.
272
Setting Not to Display Images of
Data Broadcasting Site 
You can set whether to display images
provided by data broadcasting sites.
ˎ This setting is synchronized with that of the Display
img of i-mode (P.170).
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [1Seg
setting] → [Display img] and press .
Select [ON]/[OFF].
The Display img is set.
When set to [OFF], “
images.
” is displayed instead of
● Even if the Display img is set to [ON], some
images may not be displayed correctly.
Setting Not to Hear Sound Effect of
Data Broadcasting Site 
You can set whether to hear sound effect
provided by data broadcasting/data
broadcasting sites.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [1Seg
setting] → [Sound effect] and press .
Select [ON]/[OFF].
The Sound effect is set.
● The volume of the Sound effect follows that set
for watching One Seg.
Setting a Place to Save a

Recorded Video to
You can set a place to save a recorded video.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [1Seg
setting] → [Output of Rec] and press .
The Save to display appears.
[Data Box]:
A video is saved in the [Video] folder of 1Seg of
the Data Box.
[microSD]:
A video is saved in 1Seg of the microSD memory
card.
Select a place to save to and press
The Output of Rec is set.
● When you set the Output of Rec while recording
a video, the setting is effective from the next
recording.
Setting the Operation for Incoming Mail
While Watching One Seg 
You can set whether to display contents of the
received mail or telop when you receive mail
while watching One Seg.
The Mail disp set is set.
● Even if the Mail disp set is set to [Display mail],
while watching One Seg in the TV style or when
receiving mail from the sender who is not saved
in the Phonebook, the mail is not displayed but
the Telop text is displayed.
Displaying a User’s Confirmation Screen for
Data Broadcasting Site 
If you select [Yes,from then on] on the screen
for confirming whether to connect to i-mode,
which appears when using data broadcasting
or data broadcasting sites, the confirmation
screen no longer appears. To display the
confirmation screen again, perform the Rset
permission set.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [1Seg
setting] → [Rset permission set] and
press .
The Security code screen appears.
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [1Seg
setting] → [Mail disp set] and press .
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to perform the
Rset permission set appears.
Select [Yes] and press
1Seg
[Display mail]:
Display the screen for confirming whether to
display the contents of mail when you receive
mail.
[Display telop]:
Display the Telop text.
[OFF]:
Do not display anything.
When you watch in the TV style
In the watching display, from the Function menu,
select [Mail disp set] → [Mail]/[Telop]/[OFF].
Select an operation which is performed
when you receive mail while watching.
The Rset permission set is reset.
Continued
273
Resetting the One Seg Settings to
the Default Settings 
You can reset the settings of the functions
regarding the One Seg video and sound to the
default settings. The items that can be reset
are as follows.
Item
Items set from Caption disp set
t h e F u n c t i o n Guide always on
m e n u w h i l e Image quality
watching/
Display light
playing back a
Auto Disp light
program
Switch sound
Main/Sub
Auto off setting
Items set from Display img
the 1Seg menu Sound effect
Output of Rec
Mail disp set
Booking ALM set
Default setting
OFF
ON
Normal
ON
Primary sound
Main sound
OFF
ON
ON
Data Box
OFF
Alarm tone:
Alarm(std), Alarm
i m a g e : 視聴予約
アラーム鳴動中,
Alarm volume:
4, Vibrator: OFF,
Color: C5:Color5
ˎ The broadcast storage area and channel list are not
reset.
ˎ By per for ming the Reset 1Seg set, the Rset
permission set is also performed simultaneously.
1Seg
From the Menu, select [1 Seg] → [1Seg
setting] → [Reset 1Seg set] and press .
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The Security code screen appears.
The screen for confirming whether to reset the One
Seg settings appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The One Seg settings are reset.
274
Full Browser
Displaying a Website Designed for PC .....................................................................
Key Operations While Viewing a Website .................................................................
Managing a Bookmark..............................................................................................
Setting the Full Browser Functions ...........................................................................
280
280
285
286
275
Displaying a Website
Designed for PC
You can view websites designed for PC on the
FOMA terminal using Full Browser.
ˎ Some websites may not be displayed at all or
displayed incorrectly.
ˎ Note that the communication charge could be
expensive if you exchange large volumes of data
such as viewing websites that contain a lot of
images or downloading files. For details on the
packet communication charge, see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
Press
(i-mode) in the stand-by display,
select [Full Browser], and press .
Ｆｕｌｌ Ｂｒｏｗｓｅｒ
Ｈｏｍｅ
Ｂｏｏｋｍａｒｋ
Ｇｏ ｔｏ ｌｏｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｌａｓｔ ａｃｃｅｓｓｅｄ ＵＲＬ
Ｆｕｌｌ Ｂｒｏｗｓｅｒ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
The Full Browser menu appears.
Select [Go to location] → [Enter URL] and
press .
The Enter URL display appears.
To view the website saved as the Home page
Select [Home].
To view a website from a bookmark
Select [Bookmark] → a folder → a bookmark.
To view the website accessed last
Select [Last accessed URL] and press
(Cnct).
Full Browser
Press
(Edit) and enter the URL.
Enter the URL including “http://” within 512 halfwidth alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Press
(Cnct).
○○○
△△△
××××××××××
×××××
□□□
□□□
The website is displayed.
ˎ When the Access setting is set to [No], the
screen for confirming whether to use Full
Browser appears. If you select [Yes] and [OK],
the Access setting is changed and the website is
displayed (P.288).
● It may take time to display a website depending
on a website.
● Full Browser does not support the following
functions.
- Displaying a Flash movie
- Plug-in
- Playing back a melody or music data
- Phone To
- Displaying PDF data
● Some websites may communicate automatically.
Key Operations While
Viewing a Website
You can operate Full Browser both in vertical
and horizontal views.
The following key operations can be performed
while viewing a website.
Operating in Vertical View
○○○
△△△
××××××××××
×××××
□□□
276
□□□
Operating method
Operation
Move the pointer※
Press
Key operation
Zoom out
Press
Scroll to the upper page
Press
Zoom in
Press
Scroll to the left page
Press
It can be operated only in
the PC mode.
Press
Operating in Horizontal View
You can operate the FOMA terminal held
horizontally, tilted 90 degrees from vertical.
Press
(Func) in the Full Browser
display, select [Horizontal mode], and
press .
○○○
Display the PagePilot
display (Full page display)
Scroll to the right page
Press
It can be operated only in
the PC mode.
Display the previous page Press
or
(History).
Scroll to the lower page
Press
Display the next page
Press
Display the list of
bookmarks
Switch to the left window
Press
While displaying multiple
windows, press
Switch to the right window While displaying multiple
windows, press
※ The movement speed of the pointer can be changed
(P.287).
To change the function assigned to a key
From the Function menu, select [Short cut], select a
key, press
(Edit), select a function to be assigned
to the key, and press
(Complete).
To restore the default settings, press
(Reset) in
the Short cut list display and select [Yes].
Ｖｅｒｔｉｃａｌ
××××××××××
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ
Ｈｉｓｔｏｒｙ
A website is displayed in horizontal view.
Operating method
Operation
Move the pointer
Press
Key operation
Switch the display to the Press
vertical view
View the previous page
Press
(Vertical).
OK
Press
(History).
(Ver tical) while viewing a
● If you press
website in horizontal view, the display may not
be switched to the vertical view immediately in
a case such as when the PagePilot display is
active. To switch to the vertical view, return to the
normal page viewing display.
● Setting/canceling the full-screen display can be
performed only in vertical view (P.284).
Function Menus While Viewing a
Website
While viewing a website, press
(Func)
to display the Function menu, and from the
Function menu, the following operations can
be performed.
Full Browser
● You can scroll pages using the JOG but you
cannot use the JOG to operate the pointer in a
page such as selecting items. To operate the
pointer, use the 4-way keys.
△△△
ˎ Operations from the Function menu are not available
in horizontal view. Switch to the vertical view before
using the Function menu.
ˎ Some functions cannot be activated while loading a
page.
Continued
277
Item
Display the
previous page
Display the next
page
Reload a website
Save a website in
the Bookmark
Connect to
another site
Use a history※
Display a website
Save a website as
the Home page
Display the website
saved as Home
Display in
horizontal view
Display in fullscreen view
Save an image
Operation
Select [Previous page].
Select [Next page].
Select [Reload].
Select [Add bookmark] →
[Complete] → a folder.
Select [Bookmark] → a folder → a
bookmark.
Select [History].
Select [Go to location] (P.280, 283).
Select [Set as Home URL] → [Yes].
Select [Home].
Select [Horizontal mode].
Select [Full scrn/normal].
Select [Acquire image] → [Save]/
[Save&Setting] → an image.
Select [Window] (P.283).
Full Browser
Display multiple
windows
Display the Flame Select [All frames] (P.283).
selection display
Search a
Select [Search] (P.285).
character string
in a page
Send a URL by mail S e l e c t [ C o m p o s e m e s s a g e ]
(P.207).
Display a website Select [Word translate].
correctly
ˎ Sequentially convert the
character codes and display
the site again.
Retry to play back Select [Retry].
an animation
Display a title of a Select [Title].
website
Display a website Select [URL].
URL
ˎ To copy the URL, press
(Copy).
Display a certificate Select [Certificates] (P.284).
Set Full Browser Select [Full browser set] (P.286).
Display a function Select [Short cut] (P.281).
assigned to a key
※ If there is not enough memory, the image which is
different from the one displayed in the shrinking
display may appear.
278
Action Menu While Viewing a
Website
While viewing a website, press
(Action)
to display the Action menu, and from the
Action menu, the following operations can be
performed.
ˎ Operations from the Action menu are not available
in horizontal view. Switch to the vertical view before
using the Action menu.
ˎ The Action menu which can be actually performed
varies depending on a displayed website or position
of the pointer.
Item
Operating method
Display a link in a new S e l e c t [ O p e n N e w
window
Window] (P.283).
Display a linked URL
Select [Display Link URL]
(P.283).
Download and save an S e l e c t [ S a v e i m a g e ]
image
(P.285).
Save an image and set it Select [Save image&set].
as the stand-by display
Zoom in
Select [Zoom in].
Zoom out
Select [Zoom out].
Select a por tion of an Select [PagePilot] (P.284).
entire page to display
Select an area or grab a Select [Drag] (P.284).
display to move
Copy a text
Select [Text copy] (P.284).
Paste a text
Select [Text paste] (P.284).
Example: Displaying the Home page in the new
window
Displaying Using the URL
History
Up to 50 websites that have been displayed
by entering their URLs are saved in the URL
history. The sites can be directly accessed
from the URL history.
To display a link in the new window
Move the cursor to a link in the Full Browser
display, press
(Action), and select [Open New
Window].
To display a URL of a link
Move the cursor to a link in the Full Browser
display, press
(Action), and select [Display
Link URL].
ˎ If a total of 50 URLs is saved in the URL history, the
URL is overwritten from the oldest.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Go
to location] → [URL history] and press
The URL history display appears.
To display a URL
Move the cursor to a URL history and from the
Function menu, select [URL]. When you press
(Cnct), it is connected to its website.
To send a URL history by mail
Move the cursor to a URL history and from the
Function menu, select [Compose message].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Compose and
send mail” (P.207, step 2 to 5).
To delete a URL history
Move the cursor to a URL history and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] →
[Yes]. To delete several URLs, from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete], select
(Complete), and select [Yes]. To
URLs, press
delete all URLs, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
Select a URL history and press
Press
(Func) in the Full Browser
display, select [Window], and press .
Select [Open New Window] and press
To display a website in the back window
Select [Open Back Window].
To close the window
Select [Close Window] → [OK].
To change the window
Select [Change Window] → a window being
switched.
Select [Home].
The Home is displayed in the new window.
To display a website from a bookmark
Select [Bookmark] → a folder → a bookmark.
To display a website by entering a URL
Select [Go to location] → [Enter URL], press
(Edit), enter a URL, and press
(Cnct).
To display a website from a URL history
Select [Go to location] → [URL history] → a URL.
Displaying a Frame Page
(Cnct).
Displaying Websites in the
Multiple Windows
You can view several websites by switching
windows.
You can display a website consisted of multiple
frames. Select a frame from the frame selection
display to display a page.
Use
to select a frame in the frame
selection display and press .
Full Browser
The website of the selected URL histor y is
connected.
The selected frame is displayed.
To go back to the frame selection display
From the Function menu, select [All frames].
ˎ Up to five windows can be displayed. However, you
may not be able to display the maximum number of
windows depending on displaying websites.
Continued
279
Changing the Display
Dragging
You can set whether to display the guide
display in the display.
Press
display.
(Func) in the Full Browser
Select [Full scrn/normal] and press
ˎ Some sites may not allow you to drag.
Example: Selecting an area
The Function menu appears.
You can select an area or move a display using
the dragging operation in the Full Browser
display.
Press
(Action) in the Full Browser
display, select [Drag], and press .
Select the Start point and press
The Full scrn/normal is set.
Displaying a SSL-/TLSCompatible Page
You can display a SSL-/TLS-compatible page
whose URL begins with “https://” using Full
Browser.
The pointer changes from “ ” to “ ”.
ˎ SSL/TLS is a method to perform data communication
safely using the authentication/cr yptograph
technology.
Ｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｉｎｇ
ＳＳＬ／ＴＬＳ ｓｅｓｓｉｏｎ
（Ａｕｔｈｅｎｔｉ−
ｃａｔｉｎｇ）
When you display a SSL-/TLS-compatible page,
the screen above appears. Once the SSL-/TLScompatible page is displayed, “ ” appears.
To display a certificate
From the Function menu, select [Certificates] →
a certificate.
Full Browser
Selecting a Portion to be
Displayed from the Entire Page
Press
(Action) in the Full Browser
display, select [PagePilot], and press .
The entire page is displayed.
Use
to select a portion to be
displayed and press .
The selected portion is displayed.
● If there is not enough memory, the image which is
different from the one displayed in the shrinking
display may appear.
280
The pointer changes to “ ”.
To move a display by dragging
Press
at the point to grab and use
to move the display.
Use
press
to select an area and
The area is selected and the pointer changes
to “ ”.
To quit the Drag
Press
Copying Text
Press
(Action) in the Full Browser
display, select [Text copy], and press .
The pointer changes from “ ” to “ ”.
Select the Start point and press
Use
and press .
to select the End point
The text is copied.
To paste text
Press
(Action) in the textbox of the Full
Browser display and select [Text paste].
Searching a Character String in
a Page
Press
(Func) in the Full Browser
display, select [Search], and press .
Enter a keyword to be searched at [Search
text].
Enter a keyword within 25 full-width or 50 half-width
characters.
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Match full].
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Case sensitivity].
Press
(OK).
The searched word is displayed in reverse video.
To display the previous/next search result
Press
(Back)/
(Next).
Saving an Image
You can save images downloaded from a
website in the Data Box or microSD memory
card.
ˎ A GIF image, JPEG image, PNG image, or BMP
image can be saved and the image size must be
less than 1M bytes. PNG and BMP images can be
saved in the microSD memory card only.
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t s a v e a G I F i m a g e e x c e e d i n g
[ U X G A ( 1 6 0 0 ×1 2 0 0 ) ] a n d a G I F a n i m a t i o n
exceeding [Stby(480×864)] in the Data Box. You
may not be able to save some JPEG images in the
Data Box as well.
In the Full Browser display, move the
pointer to an image which you want to
save.
Press
(Action), select [Save image],
and press .
Uploading an Image
The screen for selecting where to save appears.
[Data Box]:
Save an image in the Data Box. Select a folder to
save to.
[microSD]:
Save an image in the microSD memory card.
You can upload an image saved in the Data
Box or microSD memory card to a website
which allows you to upload an image.
ˎ The way of uploading an image varies depending
on a website.
Select the “select” key in the Full Browser
display and press .
Select an image in My picture of the Data
Box or microSD memory card.
ˎ The following image can be uploaded.
File size
※ It is the size for one file. When containing
several images or character strings, the
maximum size of the total amount is 100K
bytes.
Select a place to save to and press
The image is saved in the selected place to save
to.
Managing a Bookmark
Up to 200 URLs can be saved as bookmarks
of Full Browser.
ˎ For information on functions operated at the folder
list display or bookmark list display of Bookmark,
see P.191 (a URL can be changed in Full Browser).
ˎ A URL including “http://” of up to 512 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols can be
saved as a bookmark.
ˎ Bookmarks can be managed by up to 16 folders.
ˎ A folder neme of a bookmark can be entered within
16 full-width or 32 half-width characters.
ˎ If there is not enough memory, the image which is
different from the one displayed in the shrinking
display may appear.
Continued
Full Browser
Image
size
My picture GIF/JPEG Max. 80K bytes※ −
Category File format
281
Editing a Bookmark
Setting Cookie
You can change the title of a bookmark or URL.
From the Full Browser menu, select
[Bookmark] → a folder, press , select a
bookmark, and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit] and press
The display for editing a bookmark appears.
Select [Title], press
, and enter a title.
Enter a title within 12 full-width or 24 half-width
characters.
Select [URL], press
, and enter a URL.
Enter the URL including “http://” within 512 halfwidth alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Press
Cookie is the mechanism for temporarily saving
information such as the user name, date and
time you accessed the website, and number
of accesses in the FOMA terminal when you
accessed a website. When you access the
same website next time, the information is
used.
You can set whether to send/receive Cookie
when connecting to a website.
ˎ Under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable
for any reveal of your information to third parties
because of sending Cookie.
ˎ Some websites may not be displayed correctly or
may be unable to use when Cookie is not set.
(Complete).
The edited contents are saved.
[Valid]:
Cookie is always valid.
[Notify-sending]:
Select whether to send Cookie.
[Notify-receiving]:
Select whether to receive Cookie.
[Notify-send/recv]:
Select whether to send/receive Cookie.
[Invalid]:
Cookie is always invalid.
To delete all Cookie
Select [Delete Cookie], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
Setting the Full Browser
Functions
You can set the functions used for Full Browser.
ˎ You can operate Full Browser from the Function
menu while viewing a website, but some functions
cannot be performed.
Saving a Website as the Home
Page
Full Browser
You can save a website as the Home page.
“http://www.google.co.jp” is set as the Home
URL at the time of purchase.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Home URL] and
press .
Press
(OK).
(Edit), enter a URL, and press
Enter the URL including “http://” within 512 halfwidth alphanumeric characters and symbols.
282
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Cookie setting] and
press .
Select whether to set Cookie valid and
press .
The Cookie setting is set.
● When you insert another UIM, the Cookie setting
becomes [Invalid].
Setting JavaScript to Be Valid/
Invalid
JavaScript is a programming language
used on a website to create a website with
movement.
When JavaScript is used at the website, you
can set whether to execute the program.
ˎ Some websites may not be displayed correctly
when you set JavaScript to be invalid.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Script setting] and
press .
[Valid(Auto)]:
Activate a program automatically during
communication.
[Valid(Confirm)]:
Confirm whether to activate a program during
communication. If you select [Yes,from then on]
at the confirmation screen during communication,
t h e s e t t i n g i s c h a n g e d t o [ Va l i d ( A u t o ) ]
automatically.
[Invalid]:
Do not activate a program.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Display img] and
press .
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
Setting the Display Magnification
You can set the display magnification for the
Full Browser display.
From the Full Browser menu, select
[Full Browser setting] → [Display
magnification] and press .
Select a display magnification and press
Select from [75%], [100%], [125%], [150%], [175%],
and [200%].
You can set whether to display the entire page
automatically while scrolling.
From the Full Browser menu, select
[Full Browser setting] → [Display mode
setting] and press .
[PC mode]:
Display the website with the screen size for PC.
[Mobile mode]:
Reduce the display size of a website to fit in the
width of the FOMA terminal.
The Display mode setting is set.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [PagePilot setting]
and press .
Select [Valid in scrl]/[Invalid] and press
Full Browser
You can set the display mode when activating
Full Browser.
Select a display mode and press
The Display img is set.
Displaying the Entire Page While
Scrolling
Setting the Display Mode
You can set whether to display graphics when
displaying a website.
Select a method to activate a program
and press .
The Script setting is set.
When [Valid(Auto)] is selected
Select [Yes].
Disabling the Display of
Graphics
The PagePilot setting is set.
Setting the Movement Speed of
the Pointer
You can set a speed to move the pointer.
From the Full Browser menu, select
[Full Browser setting] → [Pointer speed
setting] and press .
Select a movement speed of the pointer
and press .
Select from [1(Slow)], [2 to 4], or [5(Fast)].
Continued
283
Setting Whether to Open a New
Window Automatically
You can set whether to open a website in a
new window automatically when JavaScript of
a website requests to open a new window.
Setting Whether to Use the Full
Browser Function
You can set whether to use the Full Browser
function.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Window Open Guard]
and press .
[Yes]:
Full Browser can be used.
[No]:
The Access setting display appears when you
activate Full Browser.
[Valid]:
Do not open a website in a new window.
[Invalid]:
Open a website in a new window.
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] and press
Select whether to use the Full Browser
function and press .
Select [OK] and press
The Window Open Guard is set.
Setting Whether to Send Referer
Referer is the information of a link origin. If you
send Referer, the access information of which
page is used to connect is sent to a site.
You can set whether to send Referer when you
select the link while viewing a website.
ˎ Under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable
for any reveal of your information to third parties
because of using Referer.
ˎ Some websites may not be displayed correctly
when Referer is not sent.
Full Browser
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Referer setting] and
press .
Select [Send]/[Unsend]/[Notify] and press
The Referer setting is set.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Access setting] and
press .
The Access setting is set.
● When you change the UIM to another UIM, the
Access setting changes to [No].
Checking the Settings of Full
Browser
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Check settings] and
press .
The contents of the settings appear.
Restoring the Default Settings
of Full Browser
You can restore the default settings of Full
Browser.
From the Full Browser menu, select [Full
Browser setting] → [Reset settings] and
press .
Enter the Security code and press
Select [Yes] and press
The Security code screen appears.
The default settings of Full Browser are restored.
284
Data Display/Edit/
Management
■ Using Still Image
Displaying the Saved Image ..................................................................  290
Display Images Using the Music Slide Show............................................................. 291
Editing Still Images ................................................................................  292
■ Using Movie
Playing Back Movie/i-motion .....................................................................  295
Editing Movies .......................................................................................  298
■ Using Chara-den
What is Chara-den? ...............................................................................  302
■ Using Music
Playing Back Music Data .............................................................................  303
■ Using the Melody
Playing Back a Melody ..............................................................................  304
■ Using Kisekae Tool
Displaying/Playing Back Kisekae Tool .................................................  305
■ Using the microSD memory card
microSD memory card ............................................................................................. 306
Displaying Data on the microSD memory card ........................................................ 308
Folder Setup of the microSD memory card ............................................................. 309
Data That Can Be Written/Read to and from the microSD memory card ................ 311
Saving Data from the FOMA Terminal to the microSD memory card ...................... 312
Saving Data from the microSD memory card to the FOMA Terminal ...................... 312
Managing the microSD memory card ...................................................................... 313
Using the FOMA Terminal with a PC ..........................................  314
■ Using the UIM
Copying Data from the FOMA Terminal to the UIM ................................................. 316
Copying Data from the UIM to the FOMA Terminal ................................................. 317
■ Using Data Box
Managing Data Box .................................................................................  317
Checking the Memory of the FOMA Terminal ...........................  326
■ Using Infrared Communication
What is the Infrared Communication? .................................  327
Data That Can Be Sent/Received via Infrared Communication ............................... 328
Receiving Data Using the Infrared Communication ........................  329
Sending Data Using the Infrared Communication ..............................  329
Using the Infrared Remote Control .......................................................................... 331
■ Using iC Communication Function
What is iC Communication Function? ..................................................................... 331
Receiving Data Using iC Communication ................................................................ 332
Sending Data Using iC Communication .................................................................. 332
■ Using PDF-compatible Viewer
Displaying PDF Data ......................................................................... 333
285
Icon
Displaying the Saved
Image

Type
Mini-Photo
image
Size
QCIF(176×144)
QVGA(240×320)
VGA(640×480)
You can display images saved in My picture of
the Data Box or microSD memory card.
Stby(480×864)
Others
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [My picture], and press .
My picture folder list appears.
Select a folder and press
Ｃａｍｅｒａ
１／２５
Ｍｙ ｆａｖｏｒｉｔｅ
Management title
Ｙｏｕｒ ｃａｔ
Ｓａｓｈａ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘ
Ａ ｆｒｉｅｎｄ ｏｆ Ｓａｓｈ
Ａ ｓｔａｇｅ ｆａｃｅ
My picture file list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type/size of an
image.
Type
JPEG image
−
Stamp image
−
Deco mail pict.
−
GIF image
−
Flash movie
−
Has loc. info
−
ˎ “ ” appears on the upper right of the icon for
images prohibited from being retrieved out of
the FOMA terminal.
To display the saved date/time
Press
to switch the display temporarily
between the management title and saved date/
time.
Ｍｅｍｏｒｉａｌ ｓｈｏｔ
Icon
Frame image
Select an image and press
Display quality
Size
sQCIF(128×96)
QCIF(176×144)
QVGA(240×320)
CIF(352×288)
WQVGA(240×432)
VGA(640×480)
Stby(480×864)
1M(1280×960)
Data Display/Edit/Management
286
2M(1632×1224)
2M Wide(1920×1080)
3M(2048×1536)
5M(2592×1944)
Others
Ｆｕｎｃ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｅｎｌａｒｇｅ
The selected image appears.
To change the display quality
Press
. By pressing
, you can switch the
display quality between Normal/Sharp/Dynamic.
ˎ The following icons show the display quality.
Normal
Sharp
Dynamic
To hide the icons and guide display
Press
(Display). When you press
(Display),
you can switch the display between standard
and simple or turn off the display.
To display the previous/next image
Use
to display the previous image and
to
display the next image.
To change the display size of a JPEG or GIF image
Press
(True img/Std./Enlarge/Shrink). Press
(True img) to display the image in the true
size. However, when the image size is set
to [sQCIF(128×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], or
[QVGA(240×320)], press
(Std.) to display the
image in the doubled size.
To display a Flash movie again
Press
(Retry).
To attach to i-mode mail
Press
(Func) for over a second (P.212).
To post on a blog
From the Function menu, select [easy BlogUp]
→ a service provided a blog (P.358).
To set an image for stand-by or other displays
From the Function menu, select [Display setting]
→ a type of display.
To add the location information
From the Function menu, select [Location info] →
[Rcv loc. info] → [Yes] (P.277).
To use the added location information
From the Function menu, select [Location info] →
[Use loc. info] (P.277).
To display the attached detailed location information
From the Function menu, select [Location info] →
[Location detail].
To delete the added location information
From the Function menu, select [Location info] →
[Delete loc. info] → [Yes].
JPEG images saved in My picture of the
Data Box or microSD memory card can be
displayed with a BGM and effect, while being
switched automatically.
ˎ The Music slide show is played back in the
horizontal orientation.
Example: Playing back the Music slide show from My
picture of the Data Box
Press
(Func) in the My picture file list.
The Function menu appears.
To play back the Music slide show from the Menu
display
From the Menu, select [Imaging] → [Music slide
show].
To play back the Music slide show while the camera
is activated
Press
in the Camera mode, press
(List),
and from the Function menu, select [Music slide
show].
Select [Music slide show] and press
The display indicating stand-by for playing back
the Music slide show appears.
Press
(Play).
The Music slide show is started.
Operating method
Operation
Play
Press
Key operation
(Play).
Pause
Press
(Pause).
Volume
Use
adjustment
Fast-forward Press
while pausing. Pressing
an image
and holding
keeps fast-forwarding
images continuously.
Fast-reverse Press
while pausing. Pressing
an image
and holding
keeps fast-reversing
images continuously.
To display the icon or guide display while playing
back
Press
. Every time you press
, you can
switch between turning on/off the display.
To specify the folder to be played back as the Music
slide show
While pausing, from the Function menu, select
[ ] → a folder.
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
● When the file list of images in the microSD
memory card is displayed, you cannot perform
the Rcv loc. info or Delete loc. info.
● It may take time to display a file list or images
saved in the microSD memory card.
● If you edit a recorded image on a PC, etc., “ ”
may be displayed instead of the thumbnail.
● When the image cannot be displayed, “ ”
appears.
● You can send a still image using the high-speed
infrared communication (P.330).
Displaying Images Using
the Music Slide Show
287
To change the Effect
While pausing, from the Function menu, select
[ ](Effect) → a type of effects.
To set the repeat on the Effect
While pausing, from the Function menu, select
[ ](Repeat) → [ ](ON)/[ ](OFF).
To change the BGM
While pausing, from the Function menu, select
[ ](BGM) → [ ](Data Box) → [Music]/[i-motion]
→ a BGM. To mute the BGM, select [ ](Silent).
®
ˎ When you select a Chaku-Uta Full that has
a choice of specified playback ranges from
[MUSIC], the screen for selecting a type of
setting appears. If you select [Full song],
the entire track of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for
the BGM. If you select [Point], the specified
playback range of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for
the BGM.
To set the display quality
While pausing, from the Function menu, select
[ ](Change image quality) → [ ](Normal)/
[ ](Sharp)/[ ](Dynamic).
To end the Music slide show
Press
to end the Music slide show and go
back to the stand-by display.
Editing Still Images

You can edit a JPEG image saved in My
picture by pasting a stamp, a frame, etc.
Data Display/Edit/Management
288
ˎ You cannot edit preinstalled images, images
prohibited from being retrieved out of the FOMA
terminal, or images recorded with [Panorama] set at
the Shoot mode.
ˎ Some images may not be edited.
ˎ Once you start editing an image of a type displayed
after being rotated, the rotation is canceled and the
image is displayed in the orientation in which the
image is saved. Also after saving the image, it is
displayed in the orientation without rotation.
ˎ Images may become inferior by editing repeatedly.
Example: Pasting a frame and saving by overwriting
From My picture file list, select an image,
press , and press
(Func).
Select [Edit photo] → [Frame] and press
Select a frame and press
The Function menu appears.
Press
press
(Play).
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
The image with the frame is saved by overwriting
the original image.
To save as a new image
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
Pasting a Stamp
A stamp can be pasted to an image of
[ s Q C I F ( 1 2 8 ×9 6 ) ] , [ Q C I F ( 1 7 6 ×1 4 4 ) ] ,
[ Q V G A ( 2 4 0 ×3 2 0 ) ] , [ C I F ( 3 5 2 ×2 8 8 ) ] ,
[VGA(640×480)], and [Stby(480×864)].
Example: Pasting a stamp and saving by overwriting
From My picture file list, select an image,
press , and press
(Func).
Select [Edit photo] → [Image stamp] and
press .
Select a stamp and press
The Function menu appears.
To check a stamp
Move the cursor to a stamp and press
(Play).
Use
to adjust the position
and press
(Paste).
To add the same stamp
Repeat step 4.
To paste another stamp
Press
(Retry) and perform step 3 to 4 again.
Pasting a Frame
A frame can be pasted to an image of
[ s Q C I F ( 1 2 8 ×9 6 ) ] , [ Q C I F ( 1 7 6 ×1 4 4 ) ] ,
[ Q V G A ( 2 4 0 ×3 2 0 ) ] , [ C I F ( 3 5 2 ×2 8 8 ) ] ,
[VGA(640×480)], and [Stby(480×864)].
To check a frame
Move the cursor to a frame and press
Press
(OK).
6
Press
press
To add the same text stamp
Repeat step 5.
To paste another text stamp
Press
(Retry) and perform step 2 to 5 again.
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
The image with the stamp is saved by overwriting
the original image.
To save as a new image
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
Press
Press
press
Pasting Text
Text can be pasted to an image of [sQCIF(128
×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], [QVGA(240×
320)], [CIF(352×288)], [VGA(640×480)], and
[Stby(480×864)]. The style and color of the
text can also be specified.
Example: Pasting text and saving by overwriting
From My picture file list, select an image,
press , and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit photo] → [Text stamp] and
press .
Ｔｅｘｔ ｓｔａｍｐ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｔｅｘｔ
Ｆｏｎｔ ｃｏｌｏｒ
Ｆｏｎｔ ｓｉｚｅ
Ｆｏｎｔ ｔｙｐｅ
Ｔｈｉｃｋｎｅｓｓ
Ｕｎｄｅｒｌｉｎｅ
□
Ｓｔｄ
Ｓｔｄ
Ｓｔｄ
Ｎｏ
Set each item.
Press
Use
to adjust the position
and press
(Paste).
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
The image with the text is saved by overwriting the
original image.
To save as a new image
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
Trimming Part of an Image After
Zoom In
You can specify a part of an image after
zooming in on it and trim it into a size of
[ s Q C I F ( 1 2 8 ×9 6 ) ] , [ Q C I F ( 1 7 6 ×1 4 4 ) ] ,
[ Q V G A ( 2 4 0 ×3 2 0 ) ] , [ C I F ( 3 5 2 ×2 8 8 ) ] ,
[VGA(640×480)], and [Stand-by(480×864)].
ˎ When the image size is [sQCIF(128×96)], you
cannot trim this image.
Example: Trimming an image and saving by overwriting
From My picture file list, select an image,
press , and press
(Func).
Select [Edit photo] → [Zoom&trim] → a
size of an image to be trimmed and press
The Function menu appears.
ˎ The image size displayed in gray is not available
for trimming.
Press
(Zoom(T))/
(Zoom(W)).
ＱＣＩＦ（１７６×１４４）
(Zoom(T)) to enlarge and
(Zoom(W))
ˎ Press
to reduce an image.
The zoom is adjusted and the bar is displayed for
the zoom magnification you have set.
(OK).
Data Display/Edit/Management
[Input text]:
Enter a text to be pasted within 10 full-width or
20 half-width characters.
[Font color]:
Select the color of a font to be pasted.
[Font size]:
Select the size of a font to be pasted.
[Font type]:
Select the type of a font to be pasted.
[Thickness]:
Select the thickness of a font to be pasted.
[Underline]:
Select whether to display a line under a font to
be pasted.
(OK).
Use
to select the area to be
trimmed and press
(OK).
The image is trimmed to the selected size.
Continued
289
5
Press
press
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
The trimmed image is saved by overwriting the
original image.
To save as a new image
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
Rotating an Image
An image of [sQCIF(128×96)], [QCIF(176×
144)], [QVGA(240×320)], [CIF(352×288)],
[VGA(640×480)], and [Stby(480×864)] can
be rotated.
● Some of the image size cannot be converted into
the selected size.
Adding the Effect on an Image
You can add special effects on an image.
From My picture file list, select an image,
press , and press
(Func).
Select [Edit photo] → [Image effect] and
press .
The Function menu appears.
[Photo fix]:
Adjust the color and brightness of an image
automatically.
[Comical]:
Make an image cartoonish.
[Gray scale]:
Set an image in black and white.
[Antique]:
Set an image antique-toned like an old
photograph. It is brighter than Sepia.
[Sketch]:
Make an image like in colored line drawing.
Example: Rotating an image and saving by overwriting
From My picture file list, select an image,
(Func).
press , and press
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit photo] → [Rotate] and press
Press
(Rotate) and press
(OK).
(Rotate), the image rotates
Every time you press
clockwise by 90 degrees.
Press
press
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
The rotated image is saved by overwriting the
original image.
To save as a new image
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
Converting the Image Size
Data Display/Edit/Management
You can convert an image size into [sQCIF(128
×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], [QVGA(240×
320)], [CIF(352×288)], [VGA(640×480)], and
[Stand-by(480×864)].
Example: Converting an image size and saving
From My picture file list, select an image,
press , and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit photo] → [Select size] → a
size of an image to be converted and
press .
ˎ The image size displayed in gray is not available
for size conversion.
Press
(Save), select [Yes] → a place to
save to, and press .
The size-converted image is saved.
290
Select an image effect and press
To display an image without an image effect
Press
(Eff. OFF). To undo it, press
ON).
Press
press
(Eff.
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
The image added the effect is overwritten.
To save as a new image
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
2
Storing an Image at the Data
Security Service Center
Select a folder and press
Ｃａｍｅｒａ
Ｆｌｏｗｅｒｓ ａｎｄ ｃａｔｓ
You can use the Data Security Service to store
up to 10 GIF/JPEG images at one time at the
Data Security Service Center.
Ｏｎｅ ｅａｒｌｙ ａｆｔｅｒｎ
ˎ Data Security Service is a paid service that requires
a subscription. For details on this service, see
the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】FOMA
version”.
ˎ You cannot store a file that contains an image larger
than 100K bytes and an image that is prohibited
from being retrieved out of the FOMA terminal.
Ｉｔ ｌｏｏｋｓ ｂｉｇ
Press
picture.
(Func) in the file list of My
Select [Store in Center] and press
Ｆａｒｅｗｅｌｌ， Ｍｙ ｆｒｉ
Ｒｏａｍｉｎｇ ａｔ ｎｉｇｈｔ
The i-motion file list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type/size of a
movie/i-motion and playback restrictions.
Type and size
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
Management title
Ｃｈｕｍｍｙ ｔｗｏ
Icon
The Function menu appears.
Type
Size
Movie/i-motion with sQCIF(128×96)
video and sound
QCIF(176×144)
tracks
QVGA(320×240)
VGA(640×480)
The Select&save display appears.
Select an image and press
Others
Movie/i-motion with sQCIF(128×96)
video track only
QCIF(176×144)
ˎ To store several images, repeat step 4.
Press
QVGA(320×240)
(Complete).
VGA(640×480)
The screen for confirming whether to store the
image appears.
Select [Yes] and press
Others
Movie/i-motion with
sound track only
(i-motion without
video track, such as
singer’s voice)
Movie/i-motion
d o w n l o a d e d
partway
The call is connected to the Data Security Service
Center and the image is stored. When the storing is
completed, the storing result display appears.

You can play back movie/i-motion that is saved
in i-motion of the Data Box or microSD memory
card.
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [i-motion], and press .
The i-motion folder list appears.
To play back data from the last stopped position
Select [Resume play].
To play back a playlist
Select the [Playlist] folder, move the cursor to
a playlist, and press
(Play). When you play
back a movie/i-motion in the playlist, select the
[Playlist] folder → a playlist, move the cursor to a
movie/i-motion, and press
(Play).
−
−
ˎ “ ” appears on the upper right of the icon for
movie/i-motion prohibited from being retrieved
out of the FOMA terminal.
Playback restrictions
Icon
Playback restrictions
Movie/i-motion with playback
restrictions
Movie/i-motion whose time limit on
playback has expired
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
Playing Back Movie/
i-motion
１／８
291
To play back movie in a folder repeatedly
From the Function menu, select [Continuous
play]. The files displayed in the list are played
back sequentially. To stop the playback, press
(Stop).
To display the saved date/time
Press
to switch the display temporarily
between the management title and saved date/
time.
Select a movie/i-motion and press
To set a movie/i-motion for the ring tone or other
tones
From the Function menu, select [Sound setting]
→ a type of a ring tone.
To change the display style of an image temporarily
From the Function menu, select [Change scr. set]
→ a display style of an image.
ˎ When the image size is [QVGA(320×240)],
you can select [Hor. wide(zoom)]/[Hor.
wide(full)].
To set the display style of an image
From the Function menu, select [Screen setting]
→ a display style of an image.
The selected movie/i-motion appears.
When the screen informing to make enough space
appears
Select [Yes].
To change the display quality
Press
. By pressing
, you can switch the
display quality between Normal/Sharp/Dynamic.
ˎ The following icons show the display quality.
Press
(Play).
Display quality
Normal
Sharp
Dynamic
Data Display/Edit/Management
292
To hide the icons and guide display
Press
(Display). When you press
(Display),
you can switch the display between standard/
simple or turn it off.
To display the previous/next movie/i-motion
Use
to display the previous movie/i-motion
and
to display the next movie/i-motion.
To change the display size
Press
(True img/Std./Enlarge). When the
image size is set to [QVGA(320×240)], press
(True img) to display the image in the true size.
When the image size is set to [sQCIF(128×96)]
or [QCIF(176×144)], press
(Std.) to display
the image in the doubled size.
ˎ When the image size is set to [VGA(640×
480)], the image is always displayed in the
true size and cannot change the display size.
To attach to i-mode mail
Press
(Func) for over a second (P.212).
To post on a blog
From the Function menu, select [easy BlogUp]
→ a service provided a blog (P.358).
To set a movie/i-motion for the stand-by display or
other settings
From the Function menu, select [Display setting]
→ a type of a display.
The selected movie/i-motion is played back.
Operating method
Operation
Play
Press
Key operation
(Play).
Pause
Press
(Pause).
Stop
Press
(Stop).
Volume
Use
adjustment
Fast-forward Press
during playback. Pressing
and holding
also provides Fastforward.
Fast-reverse Press
during playback. Pressing
and holding
also provides Fastreverse.
during pause.
Frame
Press
advance
● When you play back a movie/i-motion for the first
time, the screen for confirming whether to play it
back in the horizontal orientation appears. If you
select [Yes], the movie/i-motion is played back in
the horizontal orientation.
● It may take time to display a file list or movie/
i-motion saved in the microSD memory card.
● If you edit a recorded movie on a PC, etc., “ ”
may be displayed instead of the thumbnail.
● If you leave the FOMA terminal without a battery
pack or with a fully expended battery pack for a
long period of time, the date and time is reset,
and a movie/i-motion that has a time limit on
playback may not be played back.
● A movie/i-motion can be set for the ring tone
and/or incoming image when [Ring tone] and/or
[Receive display] is set to “Not restricted” as can
be checked in the Detail info display. However,
the following are the exceptions.
- A movie/i-motion restored from a PC or another
FOMA terminal, which was once transferred
to it using the infrared or iC communication or
DoCoMo keitai datalink
- A movie/i-motion saved from the microSD
memory card to the FOMA terminal (including
the one that is restored to the FOMA terminal
after once copied/moved from there, except
for the movable contents-compatible one)
Playing Back i-motion by Each
Chapter
You can play back i-motion by each chapter.
From the i-motion file list, select a movie/
i-motion, press , and press
(Func).
Select [Chapter list] and press
The Function menu appears.
Select a chapter and press
The movie/i-motion is played back from the selected
position.
To play back from the previous/next chapter
Press
to play back from the previous
chapter and press
to play back from the
next chapter.
Creating a Playlist
You can save your favorite movies/i-motion in a
playlist. Up to five playlists can be saved and
up to 25 movies/i-motion can be saved in each
playlist.
Example: Adding and saving one movie/i-motion
From the i-motion file list, select a movie/
(Func).
i-motion and press
The Function menu appears.
Select [Add to playlist] → [Save one] and
press .
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｄｄ ｔｏ
１／４
Ｐｌａｙｌｉｓｔ１
Ｐｌａｙｌｉｓｔ２
Ｐｌａｙｌｉｓｔ３
Ｐｌａｙｌｉｓｔ４
To create a new playlist
From the i-motion folder list, select [Playlist] and
from the Function menu, select [Create playlist].
Enter a playlist name within 10 full-width or 20
half-width characters.
To save several movies/i-motion
From the Function menu, select [Add to playlist]
→ [Select&save], select movies/i-motion, and
press
(Complete).
Data Display/Edit/Management
Ｃｈａｐｔｅｒ ｌｉｓｔ
１／４
Ｃｈａｐｔｅｒ１
００：００：００
Ｃｈａｐｔｅｒ２
００：０１：２０
Ｃｈａｐｔｅｒ３
００：０６：３０
Ｃｈａｐｔｅｒ４
００：０９：００
Continued
293
3
Select a playlist to be saved and press
The screen for selecting the saving method
appears.
[Add]:
The selected movie/i-motion is newly added in a
playlist.
[Overwrite]:
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite all
movies/i-motion saved in a playlist with selected
movies/i-motion appears. Note that all data
existing in the playlist is deleted when you select
[Yes].
Select [Add] and press
The selected movie/i-motion is deleted from the
playlist.
Deleting/Editing the Name of the
Playlist
You can delete a playlist or edit its name.
Example: Deleting one playlist
From the i-motion folder list, select
[Playlist] and press .
Select a playlist and press
A list of all playlists appears.
The selected movie/i-motion is saved in the playlist.
Deleting/Reordering Movies/
i-motion of the Playlist
You can delete movies/i-motion from a playlist
or reorder them within a playlist. Even if you
delete movies/i-motion from a playlist, the files
of the movies/i-motion are not deleted.
From the i-motion folder list, select
[Playlist] → a playlist and press .
The movie/i-motion list of the playlist appears.
To delete all movies/i-motion
From the Function menu, select [Delete from list]
→ [Delete all] → [Yes].
Data Display/Edit/Management
294
Select a movie/i-motion and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To reorder movies/i-motion
From the Function menu, select [Reorder] →
a movie/i-motion. Move the cursor to the place
(Move), and press
to move to, press
(Complete).
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To edit the name of a playlist
Move the cursor to the playlist and from the
Function menu, select [Edit name]. Enter a
new name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters.
Example: Deleting one movie/i-motion
Select [Delete from list] → [Delete one] →
[Yes] and press .
Select [Delete playlist] → [Yes] and press
The selected playlist is deleted.
Editing Movies

You can edit a movie recorded with the FOMA
terminal.
ˎ Some movies may not be edited.
Clipping a Movie
You can clip a portion of a movie of [sQCIF(128
×96)], [QCIF(176×144)], [QVGA(320×240)],
and [VGA(640×480)] image size by specifying
the range or size to be clipped.
Example: Trimming a movie image by specifying size
and saving by overwriting
From the i-motion file list, select a movie,
press , and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
2
Select [Edit movie] → [Clip movie] and
press .
Ｃｌｉｐ ｍｏｖｉｅ
Ａｎｙ ｓｉｚｅ
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ（Ｓ）
Ａｔｔａｃｈ ｔｏ ｍａｉｌ（Ｌ）
[Any size]:
Clip a movie by specifying the start and end
positions.
[Attach to mail(S)]:
Automatically clip a movie to up to 500K-byte
length from the specified start position.
[Attach to mail(L)]:
Automatically clip a movie to up to 2M-byte
length from the specified start position.
Clipping a Still Image from a
Movie
You can specify any portion of a movie and
clip it as a still image of [sQCIF(128×96)],
[QCIF(176×144)], [QVGA(320×240)], and
[VGA(640×480)] image size.
From the i-motion file list, select a movie,
press , and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit movie] → [Clip picture] and
press .
Select [Attach to mail(S)]/[Attach to
mail(L)] and press .
To move forward frame-by-frame
Press .
To move backward frame-by-frame
Press .
Use
to select the clipping start
position and press
(Start).
When you select [Any size]
Use
to select the clipping end position and
press
(End).
Select [Yes] and press
Press
press
Press
(Play), press
(Pause) at the
clipping position, and press
(Clip).
Select [Yes] and press
Press
(Save), select [Yes] → a place to
save to, and press .
The still image clip is saved in My picture.
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
The movie clip is saved by overwriting the original
movie.
To save as a new movie
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
Converting the Image Size
You can convert a [QVGA(320×240)] image
size movie into the [QCIF(176×144)] image
size.
Example: Converting the image size and saving by
overwriting
From the i-motion file list, select a movie,
press , and press
(Func).
Data Display/Edit/Management
The Function menu appears.
Continued
295
2
Select [Edit movie] → [Select size] and
press .
Select [Yes] and press
Press
press
(Save), select [Overwrite], and
● If you have deleted a preinstalled Chara-den fille,
you can download it from “PlayNow by SO”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search)
→ [ ケータイ電話メーカー] ( M o b i l e P h o n e
Manufacturers) → [PlayNow by SO] (Japanese
only)
The converted movie is saved by overwriting the
original movie.
To save as a new movie
Select [Save new] → a place to save to.
● It may take time to convert a large movie/i-motion
file.
● When the size of a file after conversion is too
large, movie images may be partially clipped into
a file of 500K bytes or less.
Displaying and Operating Charaden
You can display Chara-den characters saved
in the Chara-den folder of the Data Box.
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [Chara-den], and press .
Ｃｈａｒａ−ｄｅｎ
アイアイ
What is Chara-den?
Management title
The Chara-den file list appears.
ˎ File restriction is set for Chara-den files and “ ”
appears on the upper right of the Chara-den
icon.
To place a videophone call
Move the cursor to the Chara-den file and from
the Function menu, select [Call Chara-den], enter
a phone number, and press
(V.phone).
To set a substitute image of videophone
Move the cursor to the Chara-den file and from
the Function menu, select [Set sub image].
You can send an avatar of your choice
instead of your own image when you use the
videophone function. You can make this avatar
move by pressing the keys on the keypad. The
mouth part of some avatars can be moved
in response to the sound heard from the
microphone.
■ Preinstalled Chara-den characters
アイアイ
１／１
Select a Chara-den file and press
©SEGA
Data Display/Edit/Management
296
■ Action lists of the preinstalled Chara-den
characters
アイアイ
Full-body action
1: アレレ？
3: エーンエーン
5: もうっ！
7: がっかり・・・
9: なんだってー！
2:
4:
6:
8:
イェーイ！
アハハッ
ねむいよ∼
ごめんなさーい
Action mode icon
©SEGA
To display the previous/next Chara-den
Use
to display the previous Chara-den and
to display the next Chara-den.
Operating method
Operation
Stop action
Press
Key operation
while in action.
Switch the
action mode
Press
(Change). Every time
you press this key, the operation is
switched between full-body action
and parts action.
(Full-body action) :
The entire body is moved.
(Parts action) :
A part of the body is moved.
(List). Select an action to
Display the
Press
check the movement of it. Move
action list
the cursor to an action and press
(Detail) to display the action
name.
Display other From the Function menu, select
Chara-den file [ S e t C h a r a - d e n ] → [ C h a n g e
Chara-den] → a Chara-den file.
● The action that you can perform varies
depending on a Chara-den file. Some Chara-den
files have no action to be performed.
Playing Back Music Data

You can play back music data saved in MUSIC
of the Data Box and microSD memory card.
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [MUSIC], and press .
Ｍｕｓｉｃ
Ｏｒｉｇ． ｐｌａｙｌｉｓ
ｆｏｌｄｅｒ １
Ｃａｔ−Ｍａｓａｔｏ Ｋｏｕｙａ
The list of music folders and files appears.
Icon
Type
Original playlist, WMA playlist, and
imported playlist
Chaku-Uta Full®
Chaku-Uta Full® downloaded partway
3GPP
WMA
®
ˎ File restriction is set for Chaku-Uta Full and
“ ” appears on the upper right of the icon.
Playback restrictions
Icon
Playback restrictions
Music data with playback restrictions
Music data whose time limit on
playback has expired
Uta-hodai
Uta-hodai whose time limit on playback
has expired
To play back music data in a folder
Select a folder and press .
To switch between the jacket display and list display
From the Function menu, select [Change
jackets].
To switch to the MUSIC Player
From the Function menu, select [Player mode].
To set a Chaku-Uta Full® for the ring tone
Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta Full® from the
Function menu, select [Sound setting] → a type
of incoming.
®
ˎ When you select a Chaku-Uta Full that has
a choice of specified playback ranges from
[MUSIC], the screen for selecting a type of
setting appears. If you select [Full song], the
entire track of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the
ring tone. If you select [Point], the specified
playback range of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for
the ring tone.
®
ˎ When you select a Chaku-Uta Full saved in
the microSD memory card, select [Yes] at the
screen for confirming whether to save to the
FOMA terminal, select a folder to move to, and
press
(Save).
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
Ａｃｔｉｖｅ−ＯＫＩＮＯ， ＳＨ
ˎ The following icons show the type of music data
and playback restrictions.
Type
297
2
Select music data and press
ˎ The following icons show the type of the melody.
Icon
Type
Melody
3D sound-compatible melody
ˎ “ ” appears on the upper right of the icon for
melodies prohibited from being retrieved out
of the FOMA terminal.
To play a melody that has specified playback range
Move the cursor to the melody and from the
Function menu, select [Play portion].
To attach to i-mode mail
Move the cursor to the melody and from the
Function menu, select [Attach to mail] (P.212).
To set a melody for the phone tone or other settings
Move the cursor to a melody and from the
Function menu, select [Sound setting] → a ring
tone.
The selected music data is played back.
Operating method
Operation
Play
Press
Key operation
(Play).
Stop
Press
(Stop).
Volume
adjustment
Rewinding
Use
Press
Select a melody and press
Fast-forward Press
for over a second during
playback.
Fast-reverse Press
for over a second during
playback.
Ｔｓｕｋｉ
When you select a playlist
It is switched to the MUSIC Player.
Playing Back a Melody

You can play back an SMF/MFi-format melody
that is saved in Melody of the Data Box or
microSD memory card.
Data Display/Edit/Management
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [Melody], and press .
The melody folder list appears.
Select a folder and press
Ｐｒｅｉｎｓｔａｌｌ
着信音１
着信音２
着信音３
着信音４
着信音５
Ｓｙｍｐｈｏｎｙ
Ｔｓｕｋｉ
Ｐａｖａｎｅ
Ｒａｉｎｄｒｏｐ
Ｆｏｒｅｓｔ
Ｃｕｃｋｏｏ Ｃｌｏｃｋ
Ｓｃｈｏｏｌ Ｃｈｉｍｅ
１／２１
Management title
The melody file list appears.
298
The selected melody is played and the indicator
flashes.
To stop playback
Press
(Stop).
To play back the previous/next melody
Use
to play back the previous melody and
to play back the next melody.
To adjust the volume
Use
● When you play back a melody, the FOMA
terminal may start vibrating in concert with the
melody, regardless of the Vibrator setting (P.110).
Displaying/Playing Back
Kisekae Tool

Ｗｈｉｔｅ Ｓｃｒａｐｂｏｏｋ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ ｍｅｎｕ
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ
Ｖｏｉｃｅ ｃａｌｌ
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｖｏｉｃｅ ｃａｌｌ
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｖ．ｐｈｏｎｅ
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ ｉｍａｇｅ
ˎ You can display the list of contents of the Kisekae
tool but cannot select data to display/play back it
if the Kisekae tool is saved in the microSD memory
card.
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [Kisekae Tool], and press .
The data list display of the Kisekae tool appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type of the file.
The Kisekae Tool folder list appears.
Select a folder and press
Ｐｒｅｉｎｓｔａｌｌ
Icon
Type
Kisekae menu
Movie/i-motion
１／７
Image or melody
Ｍａｎｕａｌ Ｃｕｓｔｏｍ
File that cannot be played back
Ｒｅｆｌｅｃｔｉｖｅ Ｂｌａｃｋ
Color theme
Ｗｈｉｔｅ Ｓｃｒａｐｂｏｏｋ
When the screen informing to make enough space
appears
Select [Yes].
To set the currently displayed Kisekae tool
Press
(Kisekae).
Ｒｅｌｉｅｆ Ｐｉｎｋ
Ｅｒｉｃｌｅ’ｓ Ｔｒａｖｅｌ
ドコモダケ
The Kisekae Tool list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type of the Kisekae
tool.
Icon
１／１８
Ｐｒｅｖｉｅｗ
You can display/play back data selected from
the list of contents of the Kisekae tool saved in
the Data Box.
Select a Kisekae tool and press
Select data and press
The selected data is displayed/played back.
Type
Kisekae tool
Kisekae tool downloaded partway
Data Display/Edit/Management
To display an image of the Kisekae tool
Press
(Play).
To set the Kisekae tool
Move the cursor to a Kisekae tool and from the
Function menu, select [Kisekae setting].
299
microSD memory card
You can save Phonebook, mail, Bookmark,
and other data in the FOMA terminal to the
microSD memory card, as well as copy data
in the microSD memory card to the FOMA
terminal. In addition, you cannot only view data
in the microSD memory card on the FOMA
terminal, but also use the FOMA terminal as
a reader/writer of a microSD memory card by
connecting it to a PC (P.314).
To use the microSD memory card, you are
required to obtain a microSD memory card
separately. If you have no microSD memory
card, you can purchase it at a home electric
appliance store or other similar store.
Data Display/Edit/Management
300
ˎ Data saved in the microSD memory card from other
devices may not be displayed/played back on the
FOMA terminal. Similarly, data saved in the microSD
memory card from the FOMA terminal may not be
displayed/played back on other devices.
ˎ SO906i supports the commercially available
microSD memory card of up to 2G bytes (as of
December 2007).
For the latest information for which normal operation
of the microSD memory card is confirmed, such as
information about the manufactures and capacities
of the microSD memory card, see the following
websites. Note that a microSD memory card other
than listed in the websites may not operate normally
on SO906i.
i-mode site :
[PlayNow by SO] (as of December
2007)
[ i M e n u ] → [ メニュー/ 検索]
( M e n u / S e a r c h ) → [ ケータイ
電話メーカー] ( M o b i l e P h o n e
Manufacturers) → [PlayNow by
SO] (Japanese only)
Website :
Website of Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications
Japan, Inc.
http://www.SonyEricsson.co.jp/memorycard/
Please note that the information listed represents
only the result of the operation checks and by no
means provides guarantee for all operations of the
microSD memory card.
ˎ Do not remove the microSD memory card during
data access (reading of data, saving data, etc.).
Doing so may cause malfunction, etc.
ˎ During preparation for access after insertion of the
microSD memory card (the time before the first
reading/writing operation is ready), “ ” flashes. If
“ ” keeps flashing, remove the microSD memory
card and then insert it again. If the icon still keeps
flashing, please check conditions of the microSD
memory card.
ˎ Do not stick a label, etc. on the microSD memory
card. It may be removed when inserting/removing
the microSD memory card, resulting in malfunction,
etc. of the FOMA terminal.
ˎ When you save data in a microSD memory card, it is
recommended to make a backup copy of the saved
data and keep it separately in a safe place. Under
no condition will DoCoMo be held liable for any loss
or modification of the data.
The microSD memory card formatted on a PC or other
devices cannot be used on the FOMA terminal. Be
sure to use the microSD memory card after formatting
it using the FOMA terminal (P.313).
Inserting and Removing the
microSD memory card
■ Inserting the microSD memory card
ˎ When inserting the microSD memory card, make
sure to insert it in the correct orientation with the
printed side facing up as illustrated below. Any
insertion in an orientation other than illustrated
below may cause malfunction, etc.
Displaying Data on the
microSD memory card
Data saved in the microSD memory card can
be displayed and checked.
ｍｉｃｒｏＳＤ
Insert the microSD memory card into the
slot.
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ
ＭＵＳＩＣ
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
Ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
Ｍｙ ｄｏｃｕｍｅｎｔ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ Ｔｏｏｌ
ＳＤ＿ＰＩＭ
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
ＭＭ Ｆｉｌｅ
Ｏｔｈｅｒｓ
αｐｐｌｉ ｄａｔａ
ˎ Insert until it clicks into place.
microSD
memory
card slot
Printed side
The category list of the microSD appears.
To switch the contents of a memory to be displayed
Press
(Chg.Mmry). Each time you press
, the contents to be displayed are switched
between the Data Box/microSD memory card.
UIM tray
■ Removing the microSD memory card
Press the microSD memory card lightly.
It is ejected slightly.
Select a category and press
Remove the microSD memory card.
Select data and press
The contents of the selected data are displayed.
Data Display/Edit/Management
ˎ To perform an operation while category/data
is displayed, see the description about each
function. You may not be able to perform some of
the operations using the microSD memory card.
- My picture (P.290)
- MUSIC (P.303)
- i-motion (P.295)
- Melody (P.304)
- My document (P.333)
- Kisekae Tool (P.305)
- Phonebook (P.101)
- Text Memo (P.372)
- Schedule (P.363)
- Inbox/Outbox/Draft (P.219)
- Bookmark (P.191)
- ToruCa (P.257)
- MM File (P.295, 309)
- i αppli data (P.250)
● “ ” appears in the display while inserting the
microSD memory card. When it does not appear,
the following reasons about the microSD memory
card may be considered. Please check them.
- Dust or something gets on the metallic
terminal portion
- Insertion is not completed
- Damaged
- Using an external memory other than
recommended ones (For information on
recommended external memories, scan the
QR code in P.306 and access to “PlayNow by
SO”.)
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[microSD] and press .
301
Folder Setup of the microSD memory card
When Displaying the Folders on the FOMA Terminal
○: Allowed to be saved
×: Not allowed to be saved
Category
My picture
Camera
Deco mail pict.
Other images
Movable contents
MUSIC
Distrib. contents
Movable contents
WMA
i-motion
Distrib. contents
Movable contents
Melody
Distrib. contents
Movable contents
My document Distrib. contents
Movable contents
Kisekae Tool Movable contents
SD_PIM
Phonebook
Text Memo
Schedule
Inbox
Outbox
Draft
Bookmark
ToruCa
MM File
Data Display/Edit/Management
302
Others
i αppli data
△: Only allowed to be moved
Data you can/cannot save
in the FOMA terminal
Selected
One file
All files
files
○
○
○
○
○
△
×
△
×
○
△
○
△
○
△
△
○※1
○※1
○※1
○※1
○※1
○※1
○※1
○※1
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
○
×
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
×
×
Contents of data
Image recorded with the camera of the FOMA
terminal and GIF image
Deco-mail pictograph
JPEG image and GIF animation
Movable contents-compatible still image
Music data (3GPP)
Movable contents-compatible music data (Chaku-Uta Full®)
WMA file
Movie/i-motion
Movable contents-compatible movie/i-motion
Melody
Movable contents-compatible melody
PDF data
Movable contents-compatible PDF data
Movable contents-compatible Kisekae tool
Phonebook data
Text memo
Schedule
Received mail
Sent mail
Saved mail
Bookmark
ToruCa card, ToruCa(detail) card
i-motion with sound track only (i-motion without video
track, such as singer’s voice)※2
Other files
Saved i-αppli data
※1 When you save a Phonebook entry, text memo, schedule, mail, bookmark, and a ToruCa card from the
microSD memory card to the FOMA terminal, they are saved as a file formatted for the microSD memory card.
Multiple data records of above categories may be contained in a file of the microSD memory card.
※2 AAC-format music data is included.
■ Data that cannot be moved/saved in the FOMA terminal
ˎ You cannot save a movie/i-motion set for the Des call display and also a GIF/JPEG image set for
the Des call display if it exceeds 100K bytes or [QVGA(240×320)].
ToruCa
ˎ You cannot save a ToruCa and ToruCa(detail) card exceeding 1K bytes and 100K bytes respectively.
Melody
ˎ You cannot save a melody exceeding 200K bytes.
My picture
ˎ You cannot save a GIF image exceeding 2M bytes.
ˎ You cannot save a GIF image and a GIF animation exceeding [UXGA(1600×1200)] and
[Stby(480×864)] respectively, and some JPEG images.
ˎ You cannot save a JPEG image exceeding 2M bytes or [5M(2592×1944)].
MUSIC
ˎ You cannot save music data from the microSD memory card to the Data Box (except for the
movable contents-compatible Chaku-Uta Full®).
i-motion
ˎ You cannot save a movie/i-motion exceeding 10M bytes.
My document ˎ You cannot save PDF data exceeding 2M bytes.
Phonebook
When Displaying the Folders on a PC
When you save data of the FOMA terminal to the microSD memory card, a corresponding folder is
created automatically.
ˎ The maximum number of files that can be saved is an estimated number, assuming the blank memory is used.
Category
FOMA terminal folder
DCIM
−
100SODCF∼999SODCF My picture/Camera
SD_VIDEO
−
PRLxxx
i-motion/Distrib. contents
SD_PIM
Phonebook
Mail (Outbox/Inbox/Draft)
Schedule
Bookmark
Text Memo
PRIVATE
−
DOCOMO
−
STILL
SUDnnn
My picture/Other images
File format
Estimated max.
number of files to
be saved (64MB)
−
P.152
−
P.152, 153
3,877
−
DSC0nnnn.JPG/.GIF
−
MOLxxx.MP4/.3GP
PIM*****.VCF
PIM*****.VMG
PIM*****.VCS
PIM*****.VBM※1
PIM*****.VNT
−
−
−
−
STILnnnn.JPG/.GIF/.SWF 3,875
RINGnnnn.MID/.MLD/.SMF
PDFDCnnn.PDF/.$DF※2
TORUCnnn.TRC
MMFnnnn.MP4/.3GP
Filename.3gp/.wma
Filename.m3u
3,875
3,875
3,875
P.152, 153
P.343
P.348
Filename.wma
P.343
P.343
3,875
3,875
DIMGnnnn.JPG/.GIF
OTHERnnn
−
−
−
−
********.SB1
********.SB1
********.SB1
********.SB1
********.SB1
−
−
3,875
3,875
3,875
3,875
32
−
−
********.SB2
−
3,875
−
Data Display/Edit/Management
−
JPEG(Exif), GIF
−
MP4
vCard
vMessage
vCalendar
vBookmark
vNote
−
−
JPEG (excluding Exif),
GIF animation, SWF
RINGER RUDnnn
Melody/Distrib. contents
MFi, SMF
DOCUMENT PUDnnn
My document/Distrib. contents PDF
TORUCA TRCnnn
ToruCa
vNote
MMFILE MUDnnn
MM File/Distrib. contents
MP4
MUSIC
MUSIC/Distrib. contents
3GPP, WMA
Playlist
MUSIC/Distrib. contents/Imp. M3U
playlist
WM
Music/WMA
WMA
WM_SYSTEM
−
−
DECOIMG DUDnnn
My picture/Deco mail pict.
JPEG, GIF
OTHER
OUDnnn
Others
−
TABLE
DCIM
Additional information
management files of each
STILL
folder
SD_VIDEO
MMFILE
RINGER
−
DOCUMENT
TORUCA
DECOIMG
OTHER
SD_BIND
−
−
SVC*****
−
−
********
My picture/Movable contents JPEG, GIF, SWF
********
i-motion/Movable contents
MP4
********
Melody/Movable contents
MFi, SMF
********
My document/Movable contents PDF
********
Kisekae tool/Movable contents UI Meta-data file, UI
Content-Package file
SVC*****
−
−
********
i αppli data
i αppli data
SVC*****
−
−
********
MUSIC/Movable contents
Chaku-Uta Full®
FOMA terminal filename
P.343
※1 A “＊.url” file received via data communication is also processed as a bookmark file.
※2 If there is a file with the same name, a serial number is added to the end of the file name.
ˎ The numbers “001” to “999” and “0001” to “9999” are assigned to “nnn” and “nnnn” respectively from the smallest
available number in the order of their creation. Note that the number of files which can be saved per folder is up to 500
files.
The
hexadecimal digits “001” to “FFF” are assigned to “xxx” in the order of their creation.
ˎ
ˎ The numbers “00001” to “65535” and “00000001” to “00065535” are assigned to “*****” and “********” respectively from
the smallest available number in the order of their creation.
ˎ A file name that can be identified by the microSD memory card is up to 255 bytes including a drive name and path.
303
Data That Can Be Written/Read to
and from the microSD memory card
ˎ It may take time to save data depending on the data
size.
ˎ Data saved from the microSD memory card may not
be displayed/played back properly.
ˎ You cannot copy/move a file prohibited from being
retrieved out of the FOMA terminal.
Data Display/Edit/Management
304
Data you can/cannot
save from the FOMA Data you cannot save from
terminal
Category
the FOMA terminal and
other information
One Selected All
file
files files
My
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t s a v e a
picture
frame image and stamp
○
○
○
image.
MUSIC
ˎ You can only move data
from the Data Box to the
microSD memory card
×
×
×
(except for the movable
contents-compatible
Chaku-Uta Full®).
i-motion
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t s a v e a
movie/i-motion with
○
○
○
playback restriction.
Melody
○
○
○
−
My
ˎ The document definition
document ○
file is saved together
○
○
with PDF data.
Kisekae
ˎ You cannot save data
from the Data Box to the
Tool
microSD memory card
×
×
×
(except for the movable
contents-compatible
Kisekae tool).
Phonebook
ˎ You cannot save the Des
substitute image, Des
phone tone, Des mail
tone, Select phone Illum.,
and Select mail Illum.
ˎ When you use Save
one, you cannot save
a Group number and
Group name. To save
data using Save one,
set the Secret to [OFF].
○
×
○ ˎ Yo u c a n n o t s a v e a
movie/i-motion set for
the Des call display.
ˎ When you use Save all,
the data of the PushTalk
phonebook is also saved.
ˎ You cannot save the
Des call display if the
Save/attach image is
set to [Invalid].
ˎ You cannot copy the
UIM phonebook.
Data you can/cannot
save from the FOMA Data you cannot save from
terminal
Category
the FOMA terminal and
other information
One Selected All
file
files files
Text
○
×
○
−
Memo
Schedule
nnot save
ˎ
ON/OFF of the holiday
setting for a repeated
schedule.
○
×
○
ˎ To s a v e d a t a u s i n g
Save one, set the
Secret to [OFF].
Inbox/
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t s a v e a
folder name, i-αppli To
Outbox/
link, and file attachment
Draft
not yet obtained.
ˎ Mail exceeding 100K
bytes is saved after
being resized to 100K
○
×
○
bytes by deleting a file
attachment, etc.
ˎ Protected mail and
i-αppli mail are saved
as regular mail.
ˎ You cannot save the
SMS report.
Yo u c a n n o t s a v e a
Bookmark
○
×
○ ˎ
folder name.
ToruCa
ˎ You may not be able
to save some ToruCa
○
×
○
cards.
● If you edit, add, or delete data stored in the
microSD memory card on a device such as a PC,
it may not be displayed correctly on the FOMA
terminal. If this happens, update the information
of the management file in the microSD memory
card (P.314).
● When you reply to mail saved in the microSD
memory card, you cannot attach a file. If you
want to reply to the mail with file attachment,
you need to save the mail in the FOMA terminal
first, select the mail from the Draft, attach a file
to the mail, and then you can send it with file
attachment.
Saving Data from the FOMA Terminal
to the microSD memory card
Saving Data from the microSD
memory card to the FOMA Terminal
You can copy data from the FOMA terminal to
the microSD memory card.
You can copy data from the microSD memory
card to the FOMA terminal.
ˎ While you save the Phonebook, Text memo,
Schedule, mail, Bookmark, and ToruCa card data,
the status of the FOMA terminal is the same as the
outside of the service area status. Therefore, you
cannot use call or communication functions, such as
placing/receiving a call and using i-mode and data
communication.
You can save the Phonebook, Text memo,
Schedule, mail, Bookmark, and ToruCa card
data to the FOMA terminal.
Example: Saving data
Select data and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Save to microSD] → [Save one] →
[Yes] and press .
ˎ While you save the Phonebook, Text memo,
Schedule, mail, Bookmark, and ToruCa card data,
you cannot use call or communication functions,
such as placing/receiving a call and using i-mode
and data communication, because the FOMA
terminal is placed in the same condition as outside
of the service area.
ˎ While another function is activated, you cannot
save the Phonebook, Text memo, Schedule, mail,
Bookmark, and ToruCa card data to the FOMA
terminal.
Example: Saving the data by adding to the existing
data
From the microSD category list, select a
category and press .
Select data and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Save to main] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to save data
appears.
[Add]:
Save the data by adding to the existing data.
[Overwrite]:
Save the data by overwriting the existing data.
The screen for confirming whether to delete the
existing data appears.
Data Display/Edit/Management
The selected data is saved.
To save several data
Select [Save to microSD] → [Select&save] and
select data. Press
(Complete) and select
[Yes].
To save all data in My picture/i-motion/Melody/My
document
Select [Save to microSD] → [Save all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
To save all Phonebook entries
Select [Save to microSD] → [Save all] → [Yes]/
[No] and enter the Security code.
To save a file of the still image/movie file list
displayed in the Camera mode
In the file list, move the cursor to a file and from
the Function menu, select [Save to microSD] →
[Save one] → [Yes]. To save several files, in the
file list, from the Function menu, select [Save
to microSD] → [Select&save] and select files.
(Complete) and select [Yes]. To save
Press
all files, in the file list, from the Function menu,
select [Save to microSD] → [Save all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
To save all text memos
Select [Save to microSD] → [Save all] → [Yes]/
[No] and enter the Security code.
To save mail/Schedule/Bookmark/ToruCa card
In the data list, from the Function menu, select
[Save to microSD] → [Yes]. To save all data, in
the folder list or the calendar, from the Function
menu, select [Save to microSD] and enter the
Security code.
Saving the Phonebook and Mail
● When you save an image recorded with the
camera from the FOMA terminal to the microSD
memory card, the orientation of the displayed
image may differ from when it is saved in the
Data Box.
Continued
305
5
Select [Add] and press
The selected data is saved.
Managing the microSD
memory card
Saving a Melody and Image
You can save My picture, i-motion, Melody,
My document, and MM File data to the FOMA
terminal.
From the microSD category list, select a
category and press .
ˎ If you format the microSD memory card that
contains data, the data is deleted. Be careful not to
delete important data unintentionally when you start
formatting.
Select data and press
Press
list.
Select [Format] and press
Example: Saving one data item
Formatting
You can format the microSD memory card to
be used with the FOMA terminal.
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Data Display/Edit/Management
306
Select [Save to main] → [Save one] →
[Yes] and press .
The selected data is saved in the [Data exchange]
folder.
To save several data
Select [Save to main] → [Select&save] and
select data. Press
(Complete) and select
[Yes].
To save all data
Select [Save to main] → [Save all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
To save a file of the still image/movie file list
displayed in the Camera mode
In the file list, move the cursor to a file and from
the Function menu, select [Save to main] → [Save
one] → [Yes]. The selected file is saved in the
[Data exchange] folder. To save several files, in
the file list, from the Function menu, select [Save
to main] → [Select&save] and select files. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes]. To save all files,
in the file list, from the Function menu, select
[Save to main] → [Save all], enter the Security
code, and select [Yes].
● Data created on a microSD memor y card
compatible device other than SO906i may not be
saved correctly.
(Func) in the microSD category
The Function menu appears.
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Select [Yes] and press
The microSD memory card is formatted.
● Do not format the microSD memory card using
a PC, etc. Make sure to format it on the FOMA
terminal.
Checking the Usage Information
You can check the usage information of the
microSD memory card.
ˎ The displayed data amount and total capacity of
the microSD memory card are estimated values that
may not be accurate.
Press
list.
(Func) in the microSD category
The Function menu appears.
2
Select [microSD info] and press
Using the FOMA Terminal
with a PC

ｍｉｃｒｏＳＤ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｆｕｌｌ ｃａｐ．
６０．５ＭＢ
Ｕｓｉｎｇ
When you connect the FOMA terminal to a
PC using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional), you can use it as
an external drive to read/write data on the
microSD memory card.
２２．１ＭＢ
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ
３．２ＭＢ
ＭＵＳＩＣ
１２．１ＭＢ
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
５．６ＭＢ
Ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
０．５ＭＢ
To change the unit
Press
(Unit chg) to switch temporarily
between the MB and KB displays.
Updating the Management Information
of the microSD memory card
If you edit, add, or delete data stored in
the microSD memor y card on a device
other than the FOMA terminal, it may not be
displayed correctly on the FOMA terminal. If
this happens, update the information of the
management file in the microSD memory card.
Press
list.
Select [Update mng. info] and press
ˎ You can change the USB mode setting before
connecting the FOMA terminal to a PC.
ˎ If the FOMA terminal is not connected to a PC
correctly or the battery level is very low or 0, not only
data cannot be sent/received, but also it may be lost
in some cases.
ˎ Do not unplug the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional) during reading/writing
data. If you do so, not only data cannot be sent/
received, but also it may be lost in some cases.
ˎ The operating environment for using the FOMA
terminal connected to a PC is as follows.
Item
Connection
cable
Required environment
FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional)
PC main unit PC with a USB port (Universal Serial
Bus Specification 1.1 compliant) that
can be used to connect the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function
01/02 (optional)
OS
Windows 2000 Professional (SP3 or
later)※,
Windows XP,
Windows Vista (Japanese version)
(Func) in the microSD category
The Function menu appears.
The Update mng. info display appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The management information is updated. While the
management information is updated, “ ” appears.
● If any data in the microSD memory card has a
file name that is not supported by the FOMA
terminal, the file name is changed when you
update the management information.
● If you update the management information while
the screen for confirming whether to save the
recorded images is displayed, the image that is
being confirmed is discarded when the microSD
memory card is set as the place to save to.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [USB mode setting] and
press .
ＵＳＢ ｍｏｄｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｃｏｍｍｕｎｉｃａｔｉｏｎ ｍｏｄｅ
ｍｉｃｒｏＳＤ ｍｏｄｅ
ＭＴＰ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｕｓｅｓ ＵＳＢ Ｈａｎｄｓ−ｆｒｅｅ／
ｄａｔａ ｔｒａｎｓｍｉｓｓｉｏｎ／
ｄａｔａ ｔｒａｎｓｆｅｒ
Data Display/Edit/Management
The screen for confirming whether to update the
management information appears.
※ [Communication mode] and [microSD mode] are
supported.
Select a category to be updated, press
, and press
(Complete).
[Communication mode]:
Perform packet and 64K data communication,
and send/receive data (OBEX™ communication).
Continued
307
The icon “ ” (USB cable
cncted) appears in the
stand-by display.
When you press
(Link)
and then select “ ”, the
USB mode setting display
appears.
[microSD mode]:
Read and write data from/to the microSD memory
card.
[MTP mode]:
Transfer music data (WMA file) from a PC to the
microSD memory card.
Select [microSD mode] and press
The microSD mode is set and “ ” changes to “ ”.
On the PC, “リムーバブル ディスク” is displayed
for the microSD memory card.
ˎ You can check the current USB mode and
connection status by the following icons.
Icon
Mode/Connection status
Communication mode
microSD mode
MTP mode (Connected)
MTP mode (Transferring)
MTP mode (Completed)
MTP mode (Error)※
※ It appears when the FOMA ter minal is
connected to a PC by the MTP mode and
cannot start the connection because there
is not enough memory. End the unused
applications, increase memory space, and
then retry the operation again.
Connect the FOMA terminal and PC
using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional).
Insert the connector horizontally
with the label side 1
facing up.
Data Display/Edit/Management
308
USB
connector
Terminating the microSD Mode
To remove the FOMA terminal from a PC,
perform the procedure to safely remove the
hardware on the PC in advance, which is
slightly different for each OS.
Example: When using Windows XP
External
connection terminal
USB terminal
● Do not format the microSD memory card using
a PC, etc. Make sure to format it on the FOMA
terminal.
● Even if you set the USB mode setting to
[MTP mode] or [microSD mode] and connect
the FOMA terminal to a PC, the PC may not
recognize the FOMA terminal while the FOMA
terminal is accessing to the microSD memory
card (reading/saving data, etc.) or the microSD
memory card is not inserted.
● While the USB mode setting is set to [MTP mode]
and the FOMA terminal is connected to a PC,
when you press , the Standard menu appears.
The Kisekae menu is not displayed. Also, some
functions may be limited.
● For more details about the USB mode setting,
see the website below.
http://www.SonyEricsson.co.jp/so906i/faq.html
External connection
connector
FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional)
Double-click the task tray icon [ ]
（ハードウェアの安全な取り外し） o n t h e
Windows desktop.
2
Move the pointer to [USB大容量記憶装置
デバイス] and click [停止].
Copying Data from the
FOMA Terminal to the UIM
Yo u c a n c o p y u p t o 5 0 F O M A t e r m i n a l
phonebook entries and up to 20 SMS from the
FOMA terminal to the UIM (FOMA card).
ˎ Only the “name”, “reading”, “first phone number”,
and “first mail address” can be copied from the
FOMA terminal phonebook to the UIM phonebook.
The reading is converted from half-width katakana
characters to full-width katakana characters. If “+” is
included in a phone number, it is deleted.
ˎ If a group with the same name exists in the UIM
phonebook, data is saved in it and if not, data is
saved in グループなし.
ˎ You cannot copy the SMS report.
Click [OK] and confirm that the hardware
is unmounted successfully.
Remove the FOMA USB Cable with
Charge Function 01/02 (optional) from the
FOMA terminal and PC.
Example: Copying the FOMA terminal phonebook
entries
The Function menu appears.
To copy all data
From the Function menu, select [Copy to UIM] →
[Copy all] → [Yes] and enter the Security code.
To copy several data
From the Function menu, select [Copy to UIM]
→ [Select©] and select data. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes].
To copy SMS
Move the cursor to the mail in the mail list and
from the Function menu, select [Copy to UIM] →
[Yes].
Pull out the cable
while holding the
release buttons 3
pressed.
1 External
connection
terminal
USB terminal
USB
connector
External connection
connector
FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional)
From the FOMA terminal phonebook,
select data and press
(Func).
Select [Copy to UIM] → [Copy one] →
[Yes] and press .
The selected data is copied.
Data Display/Edit/Management
309
Copying Data from the
UIM to the FOMA Terminal
You can copy UIM (FOMA card) phonebook
data and SMS from the UIM to the FOMA
terminal.
ˎ The reading of the UIM phonebook is converted
from full-width katakana characters to half-width
katakana characters.
ˎ If a group with the same name exists in the FOMA
terminal phonebook, data is saved in it and if not,
data is saved in グループなし.
Example: Copying the UIM phonebook entries
From the UIM phonebook, select data and
press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To copy all data
From the Function menu, select [Copy to Main]
→ [Copy all] → [Yes] and enter the Security
code.
To copy several data
From the Function menu, select [Copy to Main]
→ [Select©] and select data. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes].
To copy SMS
Move the cursor to the mail in the mail list and
from the Function menu, select [Copy to Main] →
[Yes] → a folder.
Select [Copy to Main] → [Copy one] →
[Yes] and press .
The selected data is copied.
Data Display/Edit/Management
310
Managing Data Box

Data handled by the FOMA terminal, such as
downloaded data and data recorded using
the camera, are saved in the categories of the
Data Box: My picture, MUSIC, Music&Video
Channel, i-motion, Melody, My document,
Kisekae Tool, and Chara-den. You can display/
play back saved data any time.
ˎ You may not be able to operate some categories.
■ Data saved in the Data Box
Category Folder name
Contents of data
My picture i-mode
Images obtained from a
site, i-mode mail, or i-αppli
Camera
Images recorded using
the camera of the FOMA
terminal and images
replicated as the MiniPhoto images
Deco mail
Images that can be used
image
when you compose Decomail
Deco mail
Deco-mail pictograph
pict.※
Stamp&Frame Images used for stamps/
frames
Preinstall
Preinstalled images
Data
Images scanned by the
exchange
bar code reader, images
moved/copied from the
microSD memor y card,
images received using
infrared/iC communication,
images clipped from the
PDF data, and images
retrieved from a PC, etc.
MUSIC
U s e r- c r e a t e d o r i g i n a l
playlist, preinstalled Chaku−
Uta Full ® , or Chaku-Uta
Full® obtained from a site
Music&Video Distrib.
Program obtained from a
Channel
program
site
※ Only Deco mail pict. can be saved.
Category
i-motion
Example: Displaying the file list in the [Preinstall] folder
in My picture
Press
) in the stand-by display.
Ｄａｔａ Ｂｏｘ
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ
ＭＵＳＩＣ
Ｍｕｓｉｃ＆Ｖｉｄｅｏ Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
Ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
Ｍｙ ｄｏｃｕｍｅｎｔ
Ｋｉｓｅｋａｅ Ｔｏｏｌ
Ｃｈａｒａ−ｄｅｎ
Type of memory being
displayed
To switch the memory contents to be displayed
Press
(Chg.Mmry). Each time you press
the displayed contents are switched between the
microSD memory card/Data Box.
ˎ The following icons show the type of memory
being displayed.
Data Box (currently used)
microSD memory card (currently used)
Select [My picture] and press
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Ｃａｍｅｒａ
Ｄｅｃｏ ｍａｉｌ ｉｍａｇｅ
Ｄｅｃｏ ｍａｉｌ ｐｉｃｔ．
Ｓｔａｍｐ＆Ｆｒａｍｅ
Ｐｒｅｉｎｓｔａｌｌ
Ｄａｔａ ｅｘｃｈａｎｇｅ
スーハ゜ーモンキーホ゛ール
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
My picture folder list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the status of a folder.
The folder name is displayed next to the icon.
(Yellow) Preset folder
i-mode
Camera
Deco mail image
Deco mail pict.
Stamp&Frame
Preinstall
Data exchange
User-created folder
ˎ At the time of purchase, the [スーパー
(Blue)
モンキーボール] folder is created in
My picture, in which images used by
i-αppli are contained.
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
Folder name
Contents of data
i-mode
Movie obtained from
a s i t e , i-mode mail, or
i-αppli
Camera
Movie recorded using
the camera of the FOMA
terminal
Preinstall
Preinstalled movie
Playlist
User-created playlist
Data
Movie moved/copied from
exchange
the microSD memory card,
movie received using
infrared/iC communication,
and movie retrieved from a
PC, etc.
Melody
i-mode
Melodies obtained from a
site, i-mode mail, or i-αppli
Preinstall
Preinstalled melodies
Data
Melodies scanned by the
exchange
bar code reader, melodies
moved/copied from the
microSD memor y card,
melodies received using
infrared/iC communication,
and melodies retrieved
from a PC, etc.
My
i-mode
PDF data obtained from a
document
site or i-mode mail
Preinstall
Preinstalled PDF data
Data
PDF data moved/copied
exchange
from the microSD memory
card and PDF data
received using infrared/iC
communication
Kisekae Tool i-mode
Kisekae tool obtained from
a site
Preinstall
Preinstalled Kisekae tool
Chara-den
Preinstalled Chara-den
files, Chara-den files
−
downloaded from a site
311
3
Select [Preinstall] and press
Ｐｒｅｉｎｓｔａｌｌ
Ｃｙｂｅｒ−ｓｈｏｔ Ｌｏｇｏ
Press
(Func) in My picture folder list.
The Function menu appears.
１／２６
Management title
Select [Mini-Photo] → [Mini-Photo
creator] and press .
Ｔｏｗｎ
Select [Replicate to main]/[Not replicate]
and press .
Ｇｒｅａｔ Ｗｏｏｄ
The Mini-Photo creator is set.
Ｃｙｂｅｒ−ｓｈｏｔ Ｌｏｇｏ
（Ｆｌａｓｈ）
Ｆｒｕｉｔｓ
Source
Ｃｏｚｙ Ｖｉｌｌａｇｅ
Creating/Deleting Folders
The file list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the source from where
the file was obtained.
Icon
Source
Preinstalled data
Data obtained from sites, i-mode mail,
or i-αppli
Data recorded using the camera of the
FOMA terminal
Data scanned by a bar code reader,
data moved/copied from the microSD
memory card, data received using
infrared/iC communication, and data
retrieved from a PC, etc.
To display the saved date/time
Press
to switch the display temporarily
between the management title and saved date/
time.
● When you select [Search by i-mode] on the folder
or file lists, the screen for confirming whether to
connect to i-mode appears. If you select [Yes],
the FOMA terminal connects to an i-mode site
and you can search data.
Data Display/Edit/Management
312
Setting Whether to Replicate an
Image Automatically
When you move an image from the [Camera]
folder in My picture of the Data Box to the
microSD memory card, you can set whether to
save the replicated image automatically in the
Data Box (P.178).
You can create or delete a folder for saving
data. Regarding the user-created folder, you
can manage files by allocating them in 10
folders per category. You can also change the
name of a folder.
ˎ For MUSIC, 10 folders can be created under each
folder in MUSIC.
ˎ You can neither delete the preset folders nor change
the name of them. However, the [スーパーモンキー
ボール] folder that is preset in My picture can be
deleted and renamed.
Press
(Func) in the category folder list.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Edit folder] → [Create folder],
press , and enter a folder name.
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 half-width
characters (seven full-width or 15 half-width
characters in case of MUSIC).
The folder is added.
To change a folder name
Move the cursor to the folder and from the
Function menu, select [Edit folder] → [Edit folder
name]. Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20
half-width characters (seven full-width or 15 halfwidth characters in case of MUSIC).
To delete a folder
Move the cursor to the folder and from the
Function menu, select [Edit folder] → [Delete
folder], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete several folders, from the Function
menu, select [Edit folder] → [Select&delete],
enter the Security code, and select folders.
Press
(Complete) and select [Yes]. To delete
all folders, from the Function menu, select [Edit
folder] → [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
To delete all data in the [WMA] folder in the microSD
memory card
From the Function menu in the folder list, select
[Delete all WMA], enter the Security code, and
select [Yes].
To move data from the microSD memory card to the
FOMA terminal
Move the cursor to the data and from the
Function menu, select [Move to main] → [Move
one]. To move several data, select [Move to
main] → [Select&move] and select data. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes]. To move all data,
select [Move to main] → [Move all].
ˎ You cannot perform the Select&move and
Move all to move copyrighted data.
To move a Chaku-Uta Full ® from the microSD
memory card to the FOMA terminal
Move the cursor to a Chaku-Uta Full®, from the
Function menu, select [Move to main] → a place
to move to, and press
(Complete).
To move a file of the still image/movie file list
displayed in the Camera mode
In the file list, move the cursor to a file and from
the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move one]
→ a place to move to. To move several files, in
the file list, from the Function menu, select [Move]
→ [Select&move] → a place to move to and
select files. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes].
To move all files, in the file list, from the Function
menu, select [Move] → [Move all] → a place to
move to.
● When you perform the Delete all WMA, the
[WM] and [WM_SYSTEM] folders of the microSD
memory card and all data in the folders are
deleted. Note that data which is not used for the
MUSIC Player may be deleted as well.
Moving Data to a Different
Folder
You can use three methods to move data to
another folder or the microSD memory card.
ˎ You cannot move the Chara-den and data saved in
the [Preinstall] folder.
ˎ You cannot move copyrighted data if it is not
permitted by the provider of this data.
ˎ You cannot move data such as an i-motion or
Kisekae tool downloaded partway to the microSD
memory card.
Select [Move] → [Move one] and press
Select [microSD] and press
The selected data is moved to the microSD memory
card.
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
The screen for selecting where to move appears.
[Data Box]:
Move data to a folder in the Data Box. To move a
folder within the Data Box, select a place to save
to → a folder.
[microSD]:
Move data to a folder in the microSD memory
card. Copyrighted data is moved to [SO906i] of
[Movable contents].
[Back to origin]:
Restore data to its original folder.
From the Data Box, select a category → a
folder and press .
To move all data in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Move] → [Move
all] → a place to move to.
To move several data
From the Function menu, select [Move] →
[Select&move] → a place to move to and select
(Complete) and select [Yes].
data. Press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Example: Moving data from the Data Box to the
microSD memory card
Select data and press
313
● When you move an image saved in My picture of
the Data Box to the microSD memory card, if the
Mini-Photo creator is set to [Not replicate], the
replicated image is automatically saved in the
Data Box (P.319).
Sorting Data
Data in a folder can be sorted for display.
ˎ You cannot sort data in MUSIC.
From the Data Box, select a category → a
folder, press , and press
(Func).
Select [Sort] → a sorting order and press
Deleting Data
The Function menu appears.
You can delete data using three methods.
ˎ You cannot delete some preinstalled data.
Example: Deleting one data item
From the Data Box, select a category → a
folder and press .
To delete all data in the folder
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete all], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes].
To delete several data
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete] and select data. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes].
To delete a file of the still image/movie file list
displayed in the Camera mode
In the file list, move the cursor to a file and from
the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete
one] → [Yes]. To delete several files, in the file
list, from the Function menu, select [Delete]
→ [Select&delete] and select files. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes]. To delete all files,
in the file list, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
Select data and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Data Display/Edit/Management
314
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]
and press .
The selected data is deleted.
[Title(up)]:
Sort data by the management title in Japanese
alphabetical ascending order.
[Title(down)]:
Sort data by the management title in Japanese
alphabetical descending order.
[Date(new → old)]:
Sort data from newest to oldest saved date.
[Date(old → new)]:
Sort data from oldest to newest saved date.
[Size(big → small)]:
Sort data in decreasing order of file size, the
largest file first.
[Size(small → big)]:
Sort data in increasing order of file size, the
smallest file first.
[Originated(icon)]:
Sort data by the icon of the source in the order of
“ ” (Preinstall) → “ ” (i-mode) → “ ” (Camera)
→ “ ” (Data exchange).
The data is listed in the selected order.
● When you sort data by titles, sorting may not
be performed exactly in Japanese alphabetical
order for reasons such as because some titles
contain a mixture of full-width and half-width
characters.
Setting How to Display a List of
Images
You can select the display style of My picture,
i-motion, Music&Video Channel, and Kisekae
Tool file lists using the following three methods.
The set display style is applied to all folders.
6 images
Ｃａｍｅｒａ
20 images
１／２５
Ｃａｍｅｒａ
１／２５
Ｍｙ ｆａｖｏｒｉｔｅ ｃａｔ
Ｙｏｕｒ ｃａｔ
Ｍｅｍｏｒｉａｌ ｓｈｏｔ
Ｓａｓｈａ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘ
Ａ ｆｒｉｅｎｄ ｏｆ Ｓａｓｈ
Ａ ｓｔａｇｅ ｆａｃｅ
Ｍｙ ｆａｖｏｒｉｔｅ ｃａｔ
Display by
6 images
Display by
20 images
Displaying Information of Folders in Data
Box
The Function menu appears.
List only
Ｃａｍｅｒａ
Ｍｙ ｆａｖｏｒｉｔｅ ｃａｔ
Ｙｏｕｒ ｃａｔ
Ｍｅｍｏｒｉａｌ ｓｈｏｔ
Ｓａｓｈａ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ ｎｅｘｔ
Ａ ｆｒｉｅｎｄ ｏｆ Ｓａｓｈａ
Ａ ｓｔａｇｅ ｆａｃｅ
Ａ ｃａｔ Ｉ ｍｅｔ ｏｎ
Ｎｉｇｈｔ ｗａｌｋｉｎｇ
Ｓｎａｐｓｈｏｔ
Ｓｏｍｅｔｈｉｎｇ ｅｎｎｕ
Ｔｉｍｅ ｔｏ ｓａｙ ｇｏ
Ｉｔ’ｓ ｕｎｌｕｃｋｙ ｔｏｄａｙ
２７９．７MＢ
Ｕｓｉｎｇ
２．８MＢ
Display in the
list form
Ｍａｘ
Ｒｅｇｉｓｔｅｒｅｄ
From the Data Box, select a category → a
folder, press , and press
(Func).
Select [Change display] → the display
style and press .
Select [Folder info] and press
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｒｅｍａｉｎｉｎｇ
１／２５
２５００
５３３
To change the unit
Press
(Unit chg) to switch temporarily
between the MB and KB displays.
The Function menu appears.
From the Data Box, select a category,
press , and press
(Func).
● D a t a i n t h e [ D i s t r i b . p ro g r a m ] f o l d e r o f
Music&Video Channel are not counted.
The display style of a file list is set.
Displaying/Editing Data Information
Displaying the Data Box/Data
Information
You can change the data management title
and file name, and set file restrictions. The
management title is displayed in the file list.
Displaying the Data Box Information
ˎ You may not be able to edit the detailed information
of some preinstalled data.
Press
(Property) in the Data Box.
Ｄａｔａ Ｂｏｘ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｆｕｌｌ ｃａｐ．
３１６．１ＭＢ
１３．２ＭＢ
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ
２．８ＭＢ
ＭＵＳＩＣ
２．６ＭＢ
Ｍｕｓｉｃ＆Ｖｉｄｅｏ ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
０．０MＢ
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
４．２ＭＢ
To change the unit
Press
(Unit chg) to switch temporarily
between the MB and KB displays.
From the Data Box, select a category →
. Select a data item
a folder and press
and press
(Detail) or
(Detail).
Ｄｅｔａｉｌ ｉｎｆｏ
Data Display/Edit/Management
Ｕｓｉｎｇ
［Ｍａｎａｇｅｍｅｎｔ ｔｉｔｌｅ］
Ｙｏｕｒ ｃａｔ
［Ｆｉｌｅ ｎａｍｅ］
２００８０２１２０９１８３６
［Ｆｉｌｅ ｆｏｒｍａｔ］
ＪＰＥＧ
［Ｒｅｓｔｒｉｃｔｉｏｎ］
Ｎｏｔ ｒｅｓｔｒｉｃｔｅｄ
［Ｓｉｚｅ］
Ｗ ３５２×Ｈ ２８８
［Ｆｉｌｅ ｓｉｚｅ］
３５ＫＢ
The detailed information of data appears.
Continued
315
2
Press
(Edit).
Ｅｄｉｔ ｆｉｌｅ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｍａｎａｇｅｍｅｎｔ ｔｉｔｌｅ
Ｙｏｕｒ ｃａｔ
Ｆｉｌｅ ｎａｍｅ
２００８０２１２０９１８３６
Ｎｏ
Ｒｅｓｔｒｉｃｔｉｏｎ
For Chaku-Uta Full®
Press
(Edit). Edit each item. To reset each
item, move the cursor to an item, and press
(Reset).
ˎ Yo u c a n e n t e r a m a n a g e m e n t t i t l e a t
[Management title] within 25 full-width or 50
half-width characters.
Enter a title at [Management title].
Enter a title within 18 full-width or 36 half-width
characters.
To reset the management title
Press
(Rset Ttl).
ˎ You can reset the management title only of the
data that has an original title to be displayed.
Enter a file name at [File name].
Enter a file name within 36 half-width alphanumeric
characters and symbols.
ˎ You cannot use half-width symbols “ / : < > ? ¥｜.
You cannot enter “.” at the beginning of a file name.
Select [Yes]/[No] at [Restriction].
[Yes]:
Set file restriction. Once you send the file as a
mail attachment, it cannot be sent or forwarded
from the recipient’s FOMA terminal.
[No]:
Do not set file restriction.
Data Display/Edit/Management
316
Press
(Complete).
● The image size expressed in width×height at
[Size] in the Detail info display is based on the
orientation of an image in which it is saved. Since
an image recorded while the Auto orientation is
set to [ON] is displayed rotated according to the
orientation of the FOMA terminal held when it is
recorded, the orientation of the displayed image
may differ from expressed at [Size] (P.151, 179).
■ List of display items and items that can be edited
◎: Can be edited
○: Display only
−: Not displayed
Music&Video Channel
ChakuMy Chara- Kisekae
Chapter Chapter Movie/
Display item
Uta
Melody
Description
document den
Tool
JPEG GIF SWF
Program (Chaku- (Movie/ i-motion
Full®
Uta Full®) i-motion)
Management
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
−
−
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎ Title to be displayed on the FOMA terminal
title
File name
Name of file to be displayed when the mail
◎
◎
○
○
−
−
−
◎
◎
○
○
○
has a data attachment.
Original title
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
−
○
○ Original title
File format
○
○
−
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
−
− File type
Restriction
Whether the file can be sent or forwarded
from the recipient’s FOMA terminal when it is
sent as a mail attachment
You may not be able to change the
◎
◎
◎
○
○
−
−
◎
◎
○
○
○ ˎ
restriction for an i-motion and melody
obtained from a site, etc.
ˎ You cannot change the restriction for a
frame image and stamp image.
Size
Data display size
This
item is not displayed for i-motion
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
○
− ˎ
with sound track only (i-motion without
video track, such as singer’s voice).
File size
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○ Data file size
Mail attach
File size of an Exif-format file excluding the
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
size
size of its thumbnail
Replay
Playback restriction
−
−
−
○
○
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
restriction
My picture
Ring tone
Receive
display
Full song ring
tone
Point ring
tone
Savable
Jacket image
Savable
Image
Savable Lyric
Music by
Lyric by
Rights holder
Selling agency
Rights
information
Label
URL※2
Creator
Copyright
Description
Video
Audio
Text
Play time
Originated
Download date
Create date
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
◎
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
○
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
◎
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
−
−
−
−
○
○
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
○
−
○
○
−
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
Whether setting as the ring tone is permitted
Whether setting as the receive display is
permitted
Whether setting as the Full song ring tone is
permitted※1
Whether setting as the Point ring tone is
permitted※1
With/without a CD jacket image that can be
saved※1
With/without a stand-by display image that
can be saved※1
With/without a song image that can be
saved※1
Track title
Name of artist
Name of album
Year composed (Christian calendar)
Genre
Comment
Track number in the album and the total
number of tracks
Name of composer
Name of lyricist
Copyright holder
Distributor
Copyright information
Album label
URL information
Author information of a file
Copyright information of a file
Description of a file
Yes/No (with/without video track)/Not
supported※1
Format and bit rate for Chaku-Uta Full ®,
Audio format/No (without sound track)/Not
supported for movies※1
Yes/No (with/without text track)
Estimated playback time
Source from where the file is obtained
Date on which the file was saved
Date on which the file was created
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
Title
Artist
Album
Year
Genre
Comment
Track number
−
−
317
My picture
Display item
JPEG GIF SWF
Music&Video Channel
ChakuMy Chara- Kisekae
Chapter Chapter Movie/
Uta
Melody
document den
Tool
Program (Chaku- (Movie/ i-motion
Full®
Uta Full®) i-motion)
Move to
microSD
○
Record time
Setting
Shooting date
Digitized date
AE
Shutter speed
EV
ISO
Photometry
Time link
distribution
Move
restriction
FF restriction
Rew
restriction
Chapter skip
restriction
Chapter back
restriction
Program
image
Program title
Distributor
Program size
Data Display/Edit/Management
318
○
○
○
○
−
−
○
○
○
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
−
−
−
○
○
−
○
○
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Description
Yes/Yes(Same model only)/No/Unknown for
transferring data to the microSD memory
card※1
ˎ [Yes(Same model only)] indicates that
the data can be moved only when the
same model as used for obtaining the
data is used.
Recording time
Type of stand-by display or ring tone
currently set
Date on which the image was recorded
Date on which the image was edited
The value that indicates the amount of light
passing through a lens (F4/F2.8).
Period during which light is stored in CMOS
EV correction
The value that indicates the level of
sensitivity to light (equivalent to the ISO
sensitivity of a film).
Photometry mode
Set or not the playback starting time,
Program repeat interval
Whether saving again is permitted
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
With/without a chapter back restriction
With/without a fast-forward restriction
With/without a rewined restriction
With/without a chapter skip restriction
−
−
−
−
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Program image
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Program title
Distributor
Memory space saved for the delivery area
※1 Depending on the data, the displayed contents may not represent exact information about it.
※2 For the Chaku-Uta Full®, it is displayed as “URL info”.
ˎ When there is no information for the displayed item, “unknown” or a blank is indicated.
ˎ Even if “◎: Can be edited” is indicated for an item in the above table, you may not be able to change some of
the data.
ˎ Detailed information of data saved in the microSD memory card may be different from the information displayed
on the FOMA terminal.
Checking the Memory of the
FOMA Terminal 
You can display the memory use status of the
FOMA terminal. You can also check the volume
used up by the category-specific Data Box
and i-αppli memories.
ˎ The displayed data amount is an estimated value
and not accurate.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [Storage info] and press
In Case of Insufficient Memory
If there is not enough memory when you save
or download data or software in My picture,
MUSIC, i-motion, melody, My document,
Chara-den, and Kisekae Tool of the Data
Box, or i-αppli, select and delete data that is
no longer required from the same category,
allocate the save area, and then save the new
data/software.
Example: When there is not enough memory while
downloading software
Ｓｔｏｒａｇｅ ｉｎｆｏｒｍａｔｉｏｎ
Ｆｕｌｌ ｃａｐ．
３２１．８MＢ
Ｕｓｉｎｇ
１９．０ＭＢ
Download the software.
The screen informing memory shortage appears.
[Sel. delete data]:
Delete unnecessary software and continue to
download the software.
[Cancel]:
Cancel downloading.
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ
２．８ＭＢ
ＭＵＳＩＣ
２．６ＭＢ
Ｍｕｓｉｃ＆Ｖｉｄｅｏ Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
０．０MＢ
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎ
４．２ＭＢ
Select [Sel. delete data] and press
ｐｐｌｉ
１２／２４
ソフト一覧
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄｅｄ ｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅ
To change the unit
Press
(Unit chg) to switch temporarily
between the MB and KB displays.
Select an item and press
Ｕｓｅｄ（Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ）
Ｓｈｏｒｔａｇｅ
Ｍｙ ｐｉｃｔｕｒｅ ｉｎｆｏ
Ｒｅｍａｉｎｉｎｇ
３２０ＫＢ
６４ＫＢ
２７９．７MＢ
Ｕｓｉｎｇ
２．８MＢ
Select a folder → software and press
ソフト一覧
２５００
５３３
● Preinstalled i-αppli, [Deco mail pict.] and [スー
パーモンキーボール] folders in My picture, and
data of MUSIC and My document are included in
the data amount.
ＸＸＸ ｇａｍｅ
ＸＸＸ ｑｕｉｚ
Ａｑｕａ ＸＸＸ ｆｒｉｅｎｄ
ＸＸＸ Ｓａｎｇｕｏｚｈｉ
Ｆｕｔｕｒｅ ｏｆ Ｙｏｕ
Ａｄｖｅｎｔｕｒｅ ＸＸＸ
Ｗａｒｒｉｎｇ Ｓｔａｔｅｓ
Ｓｕｒｖｉｖａｌ ＸＸＸ ｓｔ
Ｕｓｅｄ（Ｄａｔａ）
Ｓｈｏｒｔａｇｅ
ソフト一覧
ＸＸＸ ｇａｍｅ
ＸＸＸ ｑｕｉｚ
Ａｑｕａ ＸＸＸ ｆｒｉｅｎｄ
ＸＸＸ Ｓａｎｇｕｏｚｈｉ
Ｆｕｔｕｒｅ ｏｆ Ｙｏｕ
Ａｄｖｅｎｔｕｒｅ ＸＸＸ
Ｗａｒｒｉｎｇ Ｓｔａｔｅｓ
Ｓｕｒｖｉｖａｌ ＸＸＸ ｓｔ
６４ＫＢ
６４ＫＢ
１／１２
Ｕｓｅｄ（Ｄａｔａ）
Ｓａｖｉｎｇ ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ
６４ＫＢ
To cancel the selection
Press
(Rel.).
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
Ｍａｘ
Ｒｅｇｉｓｔｅｒｅｄ
１／１２
319
4
Press
(Delete), select [Yes], and press
The selected software is deleted and then
downloading starts.
● If you delete preinstalled Chara-den files, it does
not help you increase the save area.
What is the Infrared
Communication? 
You can send and receive the Phonebook,
Schedule, Text memo, Bookmark, mail, image,
movie, melody, PDF data, and ToruCa card to/
from a mobile phone equipped with the infrared
communication function. To send/receive
all entries, you need a 4-digit authentication
password preset with a communication target
recipient/sender.
The FOMA terminal can also do much more in
conjunction with other devices equipped with
the infrared communication function by using
the infrared communication feature of i-αppli.
Data Display/Edit/Management
320
ˎ There are some data that cannot be exchanged
even if the other device is equipped with the infrared
communication function.
ˎ The infrared communication of the FOMA terminal
follows IrMC™ version 1.1. Even if the other device
follows IrMC™ version 1.1, there may be data that
cannot be exchanged properly depending on the
software.
ˎ You cannot perform infrared communication during
a call or i-mode/packet/64K data communication,
or when the Lock all, Omakase Lock, Personal data
lock, Lock key, or Self mode is set.
ˎ During the infrared communication, the status of
the FOMA terminal is the same as the outside of the
service area status. Therefore, you cannot place a
call or perform i-mode and data communication.
ˎ When the other device does not support IrSimple™
function, the communication speed slows.
ˎ The infrared receiving function of the FOMA terminal
and infrared sending function of contents of the
Data Box support IrSimple™ function.
ˎ JPEG images saved in My picture of the Data
Box can be sent by using the high-speed infrared
communication (IrSimpleShot™ function※) (P.330).
※ IrSimpleShot™ function is the one-way
communication function (Home Appliance Profile)
that is compliant with IrSimple™ function.
Using the Infrared
Communication
ˎ The FOMA terminal and the other device can be
used within about 20 cm apart. The infrared data
port must be kept pointed at the other device until
the data exchange ends.
ˎ If used under direct sunlight, fluorescent lamp
or near other infrared devices, the infrared data
exchange may not function properly.
Within about
20 cm
Infrared data
port
Reception angle:
±15 degrees off
axis
Infrared data
port
Data That Can Be Sent/Received via Infrared Communication
You can send and receive your Own number, Phonebook, Schedule, Text memo, Bookmark, mail,
image, movie, melody, PDF data, and ToruCa card between mobile phones and other devices
equipped with the infrared communication function.
ˎ It may take time to exchange or save data depending on the data size.
ˎ Data received using the infrared communication may not be displayed/played back properly.
Reception Transmission
Type of data
Own number
One All One All
item items item items
×
−
○
−
FOMA terminal
phonebook
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
Text memo
○
○
○
Bookmark
○
○
○
Schedule※2
ˎ You cannot send ON/OFF of the holiday setting for a
repeated schedule.
ˎ When you send one data item, the data is sent by setting
the Secret to [OFF].
○
Text Memo※3
○
Bookmark※4
−
ˎ You cannot send/receive a folder name.
ˎ You cannot send a folder name, i-αppli To link, and file
attachment not yet obtained.
ˎ Mail exceeding 100K bytes is sent until the size being sent
reaches 100K bytes after deleting a file attachment, etc.
ˎ Protected mail and i-αppli mail are sent as regular mail.
ˎ You cannot send the SMS report .
[Inbox]※5
○
○
○
○
Saved
JPEG/GIF
image/Flash
movie
[Outbox]※5
[Draft]※5
×
○
×
Movie/i-motion
○
×
○
×
Melody
○
×
○
×
PDF data
○
×
○
×
○
○
○
○
[Data exchange]
folder in My picture
※4
ˎ You cannot receive an image exceeding 2M bytes.
ˎ You cannot receive a GIF image and a GIF animation
exceeding [UXGA(1600×1200)] and [Stby(480×864)]
respectively, and some JPEG images.
ˎ You cannot send a frame image, stamp image.
[Data exchange]
folder in i-motion※4
ˎ You cannot receive a movie/i-motion exceeding 10M bytes
and that with playback restriction.
[Data exchange]
folder in Melody※4
ˎ You cannot receive a melody exceeding 200K bytes.
ˎ You cannot receive PDF data exceeding 2M bytes.
ˎ You cannot send PDF data that you downloaded by page
or failed to download.
ˎ The document definition file is sent together with PDF data.
[ToruCa] folder in ˎ You cannot receive a ToruCa and ToruCa(detail) card
ToruCa※4
exceeding 1K bytes and 100K bytes respectively.
ˎ You may not be able to send some ToruCa cards.
[Data exchange]
folder in My
document※4
ˎ When you send/receive bookmark or mail data, the folder allocation setting may not be applied depending on the terminal
model of a caller/recipient.
ˎ When you send mail data, all of the title may not be displayed depending on the recipient’s terminal.
ˎ You cannot send data saved in the microSD memory card except JPEG images. To send JPEG images, you can use the
infrared communication or high-speed infrared communication (IrSimpleShot™ function).
ˎ You cannot send/receive a file prohibited from being retrieved out of the FOMA terminal.
※1 Saved in a memory space with the smallest vacant memory number.
※2 Saved in the order of date and time when they start.
※3 Saved in the order of date and time when they were created.
※4 Saved at the top of the list.
※5 Saved in the order of date and time when they were received/sent/saved.
Data Display/Edit/Management
○
ToruCa
ˎ You cannot send Additional No.1 and No.2 and images.
ˎ Data is sent by setting the Secret to [OFF].
ˎ You cannot send Des call display, Des substitute image,
Des phone tone, Des mail tone, Select phone Illum., and
Select mail Illum.
ˎ When you send one data item, the group number, group
name, memory number, and data of the PushTalk phonebook
are not sent. Data is sent by setting the Secret to [OFF].
ˎ When all data is sent/received, the data of the PushTalk
phonebook is also sent/received.
ˎ When all data is sent/received, the first Phonebook entry
is sent/received as the Own number.
ˎ When you receive one data item, the group name is not
transmitted.
Received
Sent
Items that cannot be sent/received, etc.
FOMA terminal
phonebook※1
Schedule
Mail
FOMA terminal
phonebook※1
FOMA terminal
phonebook※1
○
UIM phonebook
Storage for received
data
321
Receiving Data Using the Infrared
Communication

“ ” changes to “
” a n d t h e s c re e n f o r
confir ming whether to begin the infrared
communication appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The received data is saved.
When you receive Phonebook data
The screen for confirming whether to save data
in the PushTalk phonebook appears. If you select
[Yes], the data is saved in both the PushTalk
and FOMA terminal phonebooks. If you select
[No], the data is saved in the FOMA terminal
phonebook only. When there are several phone
numbers, select the phone number to be saved
in the PushTalk phonebook.
Sending Data
Data Display/Edit/Management
322
(Func).
Select [Send Ir data] and press
” a n d t h e s c re e n f o r
“ ” changes to “
confir ming whether to begin the infrared
communication appears.
To send data from the still image file list in My
picture of the Data Box or displayed in the Camera
mode
Move the cursor to the data and from the
Function menu, select [Send Ir data] → [Send Ir
data].
To send a still image displayed in the Camera mode
From the Function menu, select [ ](Send data)
→ [ ](Send Ir data).
To send a movie displayed in the Camera mode
From the Function menu, select [ ](Send data)
→ [ ](Send Ir data).
To send one entry in the Phonebook/Text Memo
Move the cursor to the data and from the
Function menu, select [Send Ir data] → [Send Ir
data].
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Receive Ir data] → [Receive all] and
press .
”.
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｗａｙ
ｔｏ ｓａｖｅ
Ａｄｄ
Ｏｖｅｒｗｒｉｔｅ
[Add]:
Save received data by adding to the existing
data.
[Overwrite]:
The screen for confirming whether to delete the
existing data appears. Note that all existing data
is deleted if you select [Yes].
Select data to be sent and press
The Function menu appears.
Example: Adding received data
” changes to “
Sending Data Using the Infrared
Communication

ˎ It is necessary that you and the sender determine
the 4-digit authentication password beforehand.
“
Select [Yes] and press
The infrared communication is started. Data
exchange is started and the data is added to the
existing data.
To cancel receiving
Press
(Cancel).
Receiving All Data
Enter the authentication password.
The screen for confirming whether to begin the
infrared communication appears.
The infrared communication is started and data
exchange is started.
The screen for confirming whether to save data
appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The Authentication password screen appears.
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Receive Ir data] → [Receive] and press
Select [Yes] and press
The Security code screen appears.
Receiving Data
Select [Add] and press
Select [Yes] and press
The infrared communication is started and data
exchange is started.
Sending All Data
ˎ It is necessary that you and the receiver determine
the 4-digit authentication password beforehand.
Press
(Func) in the folder list of data
to be sent.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Send all Ir data] and press
” and the Security code
“ ” changes to “
screen appears.
To send all entries in the Phonebook/Text Memo
From the Function menu in the list of data, select
[Send Ir data] → [Send all Ir data].
To send all entries in the Schedule
From the Function menu in the calendar display,
select [Send all Ir data].
To send all ToruCa cards
From the Function menu in the folder list, select
[Send all Ir data] → [Yes] → [Yes].
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Sending a Still Image Using the
High-Speed Infrared Communication
You can send a JPEG image saved in My
picture of the Data Box or microSD memory
card to the IrSimpleShot™ function-compatible
d e v i c e s u s i n g t h e h i g h - s p e e d i n f r a re d
communication.
ˎ IrSimpleShot™ function is the one-way
communication, so send data without checking the
answer from the receiver. Therefore, the sender side
is completed normally even if the receiver cannot
receive data.
Example: Sending an image in My picture of the Data
Box
The Function menu appears.
Enter the authentication password.
The screen for confirming whether to begin the
infrared communication appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The infrared communication is started and data
exchange is started.
To cancel sending
Press
(Cancel).
Select [Send Ir data] → [Send IrSS] and
press .
” a n d t h e s c re e n f o r
“ ” changes to “
confirming whether to begin the IrSimpleShot™
communication appears.
To send a still image displayed in the Camera mode
From the Function menu, select [ ](Send data)
→ [ ](Send IrSS).
To send an image in the microSD memory card
Select [Send IrSS].
The Authentication password screen appears.
From My picture file list, select an image
and press
(Func).
Select [Yes] and press
The high-speed infrared communication is started
and data transfer begins.
After completing to send data, the screen informing
the completion appears.
Select [End] and press
Data Display/Edit/Management
The high-speed infrared communication ends.
To send the same data again
Select [Retry].
323
Using the Infrared Remote
Control
What is iC Communication
Function?
Once infrared remote control software is
downloaded from a site and saved in the
FOMA terminal, the FOMA terminal can be
used as the TV or DVD player remote control.
You can send and receive data by placing
the FOMA terminal provided with the iC
communication function over the FeliCa mark
of another FOMA terminal.
ˎ To use the infrared remote control, it is necessary to
download the software corresponding to the target
equipment. Even if the corresponding software is
used, some equipment may not be operated.
ˎ The infrared remote control key operations vary
depending on the software.
ˎ D a t a t h a t c a n b e s e n t a n d re c e i v e d b y i C
communication is the same as the data exchanged
using infrared communication (P.328).
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t p e r f o r m t h e i C c o m m u n i c a t i o n
during a call, i-mode/packet/64K data/infrared
communication, or when the Lock all, Omakase
Lock, Personal data lock, Lock key, Self mode, or IC
card lock is set.
ˎ To receive data using iC communication, make
sure that the FOMA terminal is in stand-by status.
You cannot receive data when operation of another
function is in progress.
ˎ During the iC communication, the status of the
FOMA terminal is the same as the outside of the
service area status. Therefore, you cannot place a
call or perform i-mode and data communication.
ˎ Data may not be sent/received depending on the
recipients’ terminals. In this case, move the FOMA
terminals so that both FeliCa marks “ ” are closer
or farther together, or move the FOMA terminals ups
and downs or back and forth.
ˎ When you send mail data, all of the title may not be
received depending on the recipient’s terminal.
■ Remote control operation
When using this function, point the FOMA terminal’s
infrared data port at the remote control receiver
of the TV or DVD player and operate the FOMA
terminal within about 4 m remote control range. Note
that communication may be affected by the target
equipment or ambient brightness.
Reception angle:
±15 degrees
off axis
Within
about 4 m
Infrared
data port
Performing iC Communication
ˎ Place the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA terminal
over that of the other terminal. Do not move either
of the FOMA terminals until the data exchange is
completed.
Data Display/Edit/Management
324
FeliCa mark
Receiving Data Using iC
Communication
Place the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA
terminal over that of the other terminal in
the stand-by display on both terminals.
Select [Yes] and press
The received data is saved.
When you receive Phonebook data
The screen for confirming whether to save data
in the PushTalk phonebook appears. If you select
[Yes], the data is saved in both the PushTalk
and FOMA terminal phonebooks. If you select
[No], the data is saved in the FOMA terminal
phonebook only. When there are several phone
numbers, select the phone number to be saved
in the PushTalk phonebook.
Sending Data Using iC
Communication
Sending Data
Ａｄｄ
Ｏｖｅｒｗｒｉｔｅ
Select [iC transmission] and press
Select [Yes] and press
The message “Place
over another one” appears.
Place the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA
terminal over that of the other terminal.
The FeliCa Sign lights.
Data exchange is started.
[Add]:
Save received data by adding to the existing
data.
[Overwrite]:
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite
the existing data with the received data appears.
Note that all existing data is deleted if you select
[Yes].
Continued
Data Display/Edit/Management
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｔｈｅ ｗａｙ
ｔｏ ｓａｖｅ
(Func).
” a n d t h e s c re e n f o r
“ ” changes to “
confirming whether to begin data exchange
appears.
To send a still image/movie displayed in the Camera
mode
From the Function menu, select [ ](Send data)
→ [ ](iC transmission).
To send one entry in the Phonebook/Text Memo
Move the cursor to the data and from the
Function menu, select [iC transmission] → [iC
transmission].
Example: Adding received data
The vibrator vibrates and the FeliCa Sign lights.
”.
“ ” changes to “
Select data to be sent and press
The Function menu appears.
ˎ It is necessary that you and the sender determine
the 4-digit authentication password beforehand.
Place the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA
terminal over that of the other terminal in
the stand-by display on both terminals.
Enter the authentication password.
Data exchange is started and the data is added to
the existing data.
To cancel receiving
Press
(Cancel).
Receiving All Data
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The Authentication password screen appears.
The vibrator vibrates and the FeliCa Sign lights.
” and data exchange is
“ ” changes to “
started.
The screen for confirming whether to save data
appears.
The Security code screen appears.
Receiving Data
Select [Add] and press
325
Sending All Data
Displaying PDF Data
ˎ It is necessary that you and the receiver determine
the 4-digit authentication password beforehand.
Press
(Func) in the folder list of data
to be sent.
The Function menu appears.
Select [iC trans.(all)] and press
” and the Security code
“ ” changes to “
screen appears.
To send all entries in the Phonebook/Text Memo
From the Function menu in the list of data, select
[iC transmission] → [iC trans.(all)].
To send all entries in the Schedule
From the Function menu in the calendar display,
select [iC trans.(all)].
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The Authentication password screen appears.
Enter the authentication password.
Select [Yes] and press
The message “Crossover the
appears.
with counterpart”
Place the FeliCa mark “ ” of the FOMA
terminal over that of the other terminal.
The FeliCa Sign lights.
Data exchange is started.
To cancel sending
Press
(Cancel).
Data Display/Edit/Management
326
You can display PDF data saved in My
document of the Data Box or microSD memory
card. You can also download PDF-compatible
data from a site to the FOMA terminal and
display/save it.
ˎ It may take time to display some PDF data. Note
also that PDF data written in a format incompatible
with the PDF-compatible viewer or containing a
complicated design may not be displayed correctly.
ˎ To display PDF data protected with a password, you
need to enter the password.
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [My document], and press .
Select a folder and press
My document folder list appears.
Ｐｒｅｉｎｓｔａｌｌ
The screen for confirming whether to begin data
exchange appears.

１／１
スーハ゜ーモンキーホ゛ールの遊
Management title
My document file list appears.
ˎ The following icons show the type of PDF data.
Icon
Type
PDF data retrieved all pages
(White) PDF data retrieved in pages
(Gray)
PDF data that you canceled
retrieving or could not retrieve
ˎ “ ” appears on the upper right of the icon for
PDF data prohibited from being retrieved out
of the FOMA terminal.
3
Select PDF data and press
To use a link
From the Function menu, select [Display link].
ˎ You can use a link set in PDF data to use the
Phone To, Mail To, and Web To functions and
move to another page within the PDF data.
To display the detailed information
From the Function menu, select [Property].
To save PDF data
From the Function menu, select [Save] → a
place to save to.
To download all PDF data that you downloaded by
page
From the Function menu, select [Download all]
→ [Yes].
©SEGA
Operating method
Operation
Key operation
D i s p l a y t h e d a t a i n Press
(Fit/Tr img).
original size or by
adjusting the page
width to the display size
Scroll
Use
Zoom in
Press
Zoom out
Press
Move to previous page
Press
or
, enter a page
Move to the specified Press
number, and press
page
(OK).
Move to next page
Press
or
Rotate counterclockwise
by 90 degrees
Rotate clockwise by 90
degrees
Turn on/off the Ratio/
Page No.
Turn on/off the scrollbar
display
Display the list of key
operations
Press
Press
Press
Press
Press
(Help).
Setting How to Display PDF Data
Press
(Func) in the PDF data display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Detail info disp] and press
The Disp detail info display appears.
[Ratio/Page No.]:
Set whether to display the ratio and page no.
[Scroll bar]:
Set whether to display the scroll bar.
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Ratio/Page No.].
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Scroll bar].
The Detail info disp is set.
Data Display/Edit/Management
To change the page layout
From the Function menu, select [Page layout] →
[Single page]/[Continuous]/[Continuous-facing].
To move to the first/last page
From the Function menu, select [Move page] →
[First page]/[Last page].
● If you have deleted preinstalled PDF data, you
can download it from “PlayNow by SO”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search)
→ [ ケータイ電話メーカー] ( M o b i l e P h o n e
Manufacturers) → [PlayNow by SO] (Japanese
only)
Continued
327
Searching a Character String of
PDF Data
Press
(Search) in the PDF data display.
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｃｒｉｔｅｒｉａ
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｔｅｘｔ
Ｍａｔｃｈ ｆｕｌｌ
ＯＦＦ
Ｃａｓｅ ｓｅｎｓｉｔｉｖｉｔｙ
ＯＦＦ
[Search text]:
Enter a character string you want to search for.
[Match full]:
Set whether to search for an exact character
string match.
[Case sensitivity]:
Set whether to distinguish uppercase and
lowercase characters.
Enter a character string at [Search text].
Enter a character string within eight full-width or 16
half-width characters.
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Match full].
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Case sensitivity].
Press
Using a Bookmark/Mark
Once you save a bookmark or mark in pages
that you use frequently, you can display the
linked page by simply selecting the bookmark
or mark. You can save a mark for the number
of the currently displayed page and location
in the page. Some PDF data is preset with
bookmarks or marks.
ˎ The two types of bookmarks that you can use are as
follows.
- Bookmark: Saved in PDF data in advance. You
cannot change it.
- i bookmark: You can add/delete this bookmark.
Adding an i Bookmark/Mark
You can add up to 10 i bookmarks and marks
each.
Example: Adding an i bookmark
The Function menu appears.
To add a mark
From the Function menu, select [Mark] → [Add
mark]. “ ” appears at the location where the
mark is added.
(OK).
The searched character string is displayed in
reverse video.
To display the previous/next search result
Press
(Back)/
(Next).
In the PDF data display, display the page
for which you want to add an i bookmark
and press
(Func).
Select [Bookmark] → [Add i bookmark]
and press .
The i bookmark is added.
Data Display/Edit/Management
328
● The i bookmarks/marks that you have added
may be deleted if you attempt to copy them to
a PC or other FOMA terminals using infrared/iC
communication or the microSD memory card.
Displaying the i Bookmark/Mark List
Clipping a Still Image
Example: Displaying the i bookmark list
Press
(Func) in the PDF data display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Bookmark] → [i bookmark list]
and press .
The list of i bookmarks is displayed.
To display the list of marks
Select [Mark] → [Mark list].
To check the details of a bookmark/i bookmark
Press
(Confirm).
To change the title of an i bookmark
Move the cursor to the i bookmark and from the
Function menu, select [Edit title]. Enter a new title
within 64 full-width or 128 half-width characters.
To delete an i bookmark/mark
Move the cursor to the i bookmark/mark and from
the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete
one] → [Yes]. To delete several i bookmarks/
marks, from the Function menu, select [Delete]
→ [Select&delete] and select i bookmarks/marks.
Press
(Complete) and select [Yes]. To delete
all i bookmarks/marks, from the Function menu,
select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security
code, and select [Yes].
Select an i bookmark and press
You can clip a part of the currently displayed
PDF data and save it as a JPEG image.
ˎ You may not be able to clip an image of some PDF
data.
Press
(Func) in the PDF data display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Capture screen] → [Yes] and
press .
Select a folder and press
The image clip is saved in My picture of the Data
Box.
(Disp).
The page set with the i bookmark appears.
Data Display/Edit/Management
329
Music&Video Channel/
Music Playback
Handling the music data
®
ˎ Chaku-Uta Full and WMA (Windows Media Audio) files which are played back on the MUSIC Player are
stated as “music data” in this manual.
®
ˎ The FOMA terminal can play back WMA files and Chaku-Uta Full which are protected by the copyright
protection technology.
ˎ When you download music data from a website over the Internet, make sure to check the usage
conditions (licensing, prohibited acts, etc.) before you use it.
ˎ The WMA files protected by the copyright protection technology are played back by the FOMA terminal
using its own information. When the FOMA terminal’s own information is changed due to malfunction,
repair, or change, the existing WMA files may not be played back again.
ˎ Under no condition will DoCoMo be held liable for handling CCCD (copy controlled CD) or when music
data cannot be converted to a WMA file or other file format.
ˎ Music data saved in the FOMA terminal and microSD memory card is used only for your personal use.
Please take care that you never violate other party’s intellectual property right and other rights such
as copyright when you use it. Also, do not copy or move music data saved in the FOMA terminal and
microSD memory card to a PC or other devices.
What is Music&Video Channel? ...............................................................................
Setting a Program.....................................................................................................
Playing Back a Program ...........................................................................................
Playing Back a Program from the Data Box .............................................................
338
338
340
342
■ Listening to Music
What is MUSIC Player? ............................................................................................
Transferring Music Data ............................................................................................
Downloading Chaku-Uta Full® ..................................................................................
Playing Back Music Data ..........................................................................................
Managing the Playlist ...............................................................................................
Changing the MUSIC Player Settings.......................................................................
342
343
344
345
348
349
331
What is Music&Video
Channel?
Music&Video Channel is a service that a music
program of up to one hour is automatically
distributed during the night only by setting
your favorite channel in advance. You can also
enjoy high-quality movie programs up to 30
minutes. Programs are updated regularly and
you can enjoy the distributed program anytime
such as during commuting time to work or
school.
Setting a Program
When you set a desired program in advance,
the program data is automatically distributed at
night.
Ｍｕｓｉｃ＆Ｖｉｄｅｏ Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
Ｎｏ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
Ｎｏ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
Ｓｅｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
■ Before using the Music&Video Channel
service
ˎ Music&Video Channel is a paid service that requires
a subscription. (To apply for the Music&Video
Channel service, the subscriptions to i-mode and
Pake-Houdai/Pake-Houdai Full service are required.)
ˎ The packet communication charge may be
required depending on a program in addition to the
Music&Video Channel service charge.
ˎ For details on the Music&Video Channel service,
see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】
FOMA version”.
ˎ After you subscribe to the Music&Video Channel
service, inserting the UIM into the FOMA terminal
which is incompatible with the Music&Video Channel
service does not allow you to use the service. Even
in this case, note that the service charge is required
unless you unsubscribe from the service.
ˎ You cannot set or download programs during
international roaming.※ Stop the distribution service
before you go abroad. Restart the distribution
service after you come back.
※ Note that the packet communication charge for
connecting to i-mode is required when you try to
set or download programs during international
roaming.
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
332
From the Menu, select [Music] →
[Music&Video Channel] and press .
Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｌｉｓｔ
Ａｂｏｕｔ
ｔｈｉｓ ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ
The Music&Video Channel menu appears.
[Set program]:
Connect to a site to set/cancel a program.
[Program list]:
Connect to a site that contains a program list.
[About this service]:
Connect to a site that explains about
Music&Video Channel.
Select [Set program] and press
Operate as instructed on the display to
set a program.
For more details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s
Guide【i-mode】FOMA version”.
● To set a program, you need to add a site which
provides the Music&Video Channel service to My
Menu (P.190).
● You can set two programs at a time.
Checking/Canceling a Set
Program
From the Music&Video Channel menu,
select [Set program] and press .
Operate as instructed on the display.
You can check or cancel a set program. For more
details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】FOMA version”.
● Even if you cancel a set program, the site is not
deleted from My Menu.
After Setting a Program
“ ” appears in the stand-by display 12 hours
before the downloading starts.
A program is automatically downloaded at
night and the notification icon “ ” (Download
completed) appears in the stand-by display
right after downloading successfully.
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅｄ
Downloading a Program
Manually
When failed to download a program
automatically, you can download it manually.
From the Music&Video Channel menu,
select a program → [Yes] and press .
● During certain hours of a day, you may not be
able to download a program manually.
● When downloading is interrupted, the partly
downloaded program until the interruption can
be saved. You can operate the FOMA terminal to
resume the downloading for the remaining data
except during certain hours.
● You cannot re-download a program whose
playback restriction has expired. You cannot also
update until the next distribution date.
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
To play back a program immediately
In the stand-by display, press
(Link) and
select “ ”. The Music&Video Channel menu
appears.
When failed to download a program
The notification icon “ ” (Download failed)
appears.
● If the communication is interrupted due to
weak radio wave, etc. while downloading a
program, the FOMA terminal attempts to resume
the downloading up to five times at 3-minute
intervals. If the program cannot be downloaded
completely after the reacquisition, the FOMA
terminal attempts to download the program at
nighttime of the next day.
● If downloading fails because of the following
reasons: outside of the service area, the terminal
is powered off, the battery level is low, etc., the
FOMA terminal will download the program at the
next night.
● Downloading a program may take time so make
sure that the FOMA terminal is fully charged and
used in an area where the radio wave condition
is good.
● The downloaded program cannot be copied.
● Programs cannot be downloaded automatically
in the following cases. Set a program again from
the Music&Video Channel menu.
- When inserting the UIM which is not the one
used for setting a program
- When inserting the UIM into another
Music&Video Channel compatible FOMA
terminal after setting a program.
- When performing the Rset all data&set.
● Only one program data can be saved in
per channel. When new program data is
downloaded, the previously downloaded
program data is deleted and cannot be played
back.
● When you unsubscribe from the Music&Video
channel or i-mode service, the program data in
the [Distrib. program] folder may be deleted.
333
Playing Back a Program
From the Menu, select [Music] →
[Music&Video Channel] and press .
Ｍｕｓｉｃ＆Ｖｉｄｅｏ Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
○○ライブ
２０：００
△△特集
１５：００
Ｓｅｔ ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
Ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ ｌｉｓｔ
Ａｂｏｕｔ
ｔｈｉｓ ｓｅｒｖｉｃｅ
Ｎｅｘｔ ｄｉｓｔｒｉｂｕｔｉｏｎ
２００８／０２／２０
The Music&Video Channel menu appears.
ˎ The following icons show the program type,
status, and playback restrictions.
Type/status
Icon
Type/status
Program downloaded successfully
Program failed to download/Program
partly downloaded successfully
Program for which the starting time of
playback is set
Program not yet played back
Playback restrictions
Icon
ʓ Image/movie of chapter
ͧ Current status (Playing back/Stopping/Pausing/
Forwarding/Reversing)
ͨ The number of the chapter being played back/
The total number of chapters of the program
ͩ Images in the program
ͪ The elapsed playback time/The total playback
time of the program
ͫ Program title
ͬ Chapter title/Original title
ͭ Name of artist/Name of composer
ͮ Repeat playback (ON/OFF)
ͯ Volume
The program is played back.
Operating method
Operation
Play
Press
Pause
Press
F ro m t h e F u n c t i o n m e n u ,
select [Stop].
Volume adjustment Use
Beginning of the
next chapter※
Beginning of the
current chapter※
Beginning of the
previous chapter※
Fast-forward
Playback restrictions
Program with playback restrictions
Fast-reverse
Program whose time limit on playback
has expired
Full screen※
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
334
Select a program and press
ͦ
ͫ
○○ライブ
イントロダクション
△△△
ͭ
ＶＯＬ １６
ͮ
ͯ
Use Web To
Repeat playback
ͧ
ͨ
ͩ
(Pause).
Stop
To display the detailed information on a program
Move the cursor to a program and press
(Detail).
Key operation
(Play).
Press
Press
Press
repeatedly.
K e e p p re s s i n g
during
playback.
K e e p p re s s i n g
during
playback.
(Full scrn).
Press
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t s w i t c h t h e
display to be full-sized
when a program is a ChakuUta Full® file.
(Web to).
Press
If a program contains URL
information, you can connect
to a site.
F ro m t h e F u n c t i o n m e n u ,
select [Settings] → [Repeat]
→ [ON]/[OFF].
※ You cannot operate it while stopping.
ͪ
ͬ
● If a program with some restrictions such as the
number of playback times, period of playback,
and term limitation for playback, you cannot play
it back once exceeding the restrictions.
● When you select a program that failed to be
downloaded, the screen for confirming whether
to download the program again appears. If you
select [Yes], the downloading starts. Even if the
update is failed but the original program is able
to be played back, the program is played back
when you select [Play prev. prog].
● When you select a program partly downloaded,
the screen for confirming whether to download
the remaining of the program appears. If you
select [Yes], the downloading starts. If you select
[Play halfway], the downloaded part is played
back. However, if the program has the playback
starting time, you cannot play it back unless it is
fully downloaded.
● When the program has the playback starting
time, the time is set to play back so that you
cannot play it back out of the time. The playback
starts at the time on the clock set by the Auto
time adjust.
● When you select a program for which the
playback starting time is set before the time
when it is set to start, the message “This program
is unable to play at this hour” appears and shows
the next playback starting time. The message “It
is coming soon. Please wait for a while.” appears
about 60 seconds before the program starts and
soon you can play it back.
● Some programs may have some limitations on
pausing, skipping chapters, fast-forwarding, and
fast-reversing.
● When you try to play back a program while the
battery level is low, the screen for confirming
whether to play it back appears. Also, when the
battery level becomes low during playback, the
playback is paused and the screen for confirming
whether to continue to play back appears. Fully
charge the battery before playback.
Checking the Program Chapter
By displaying the program chapter list, you can
check a title of each chapter, name of artist,
and playback time.
From the Music&Video Channel menu,
select a program and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Chapter list] and press
○○ライブ
１／４
イントロダクション
０４：００
△△△
トラック１
△△△
０５：２０
トラック２
△△△
０６：１５
トラック３
△△△
０４：２５
To display the detailed information of a chapter
Move the cursor to a chapter and press
(Detail).
Deleting a Program
From the Music&Video Channel menu,
select a program and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Yes] and press
● Even if you delete a program, the Set program is
not canceled.
Moving a Program to a Different
Folder
From the Music&Video Channel menu,
select a program and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Move program] → [Yes] and press
Continued
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
Downloaded programs are saved in the
[Distrib. program] folder in Music&Video
Channel of the Data Box. Every time the
program is updated, the program saved in the
folder is overwritten and you cannot play back
the older one. You can move the program to
a different folder before the update. You can
save up to 10 programs.
335
3
Select a folder and press
(Complete).
● You cannot move a downloaded program to the
microSD memory card.
● The following programs cannot be moved.
- Program which is partly downloaded
- Program for which the playback starting time
is set
- Program whose time limit on playback has
expired
■ Music data that can be played back
Data Box
Place to save to
MUSIC
Files that
can be
Format
played back
Chaku-Uta AAC-LC/
Full®
HE-AAC
Extension
.3gp
microSD memory card
Files that
can be
Format
Extension
played back
[Distrib.
WMA/
WMA/AAC-LC/ .wma/
contents] folder 3GPP
HE-AAC
.3gp
of MUSIC
[Movable
Chaku-Uta AAC-LC/
.SB2
contents] folder Full®
HE-AAC
of MUSIC
[WMA] folder of WMA
WMA
.wma
MUSIC
Place to save to
Playing Back a Program
from the Data Box
You can play back a program saved in
Music&Video Channel of the Data Box.
Press
( ) in the stand-by display,
select [Music&Video Channel], and press
Ｍｕｓｉｃ＆Ｖｉｄｅｏ Ｃｈａｎｎｅｌ
■ Format supported for playback
Format
WMA
Ｄｉｓｔｒｉｂ． ｐｒｏｇｒａｍ
Ｆｏｌｄｅｒ１
ｍｕｓｉｃｃｈ１
The list of the Music&Video Channel folders and
files appears.
ˎ For information on operations while displaying
the list of folders/files, see “Managing Data Box”
(P.317).
To play back a program within a folder
Select a folder and press .
Select a program and press
The selected program is played back.
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
336
What is MUSIC Player?
You can use the MUSIC Player to play back
Chaku-Uta Full® downloaded from an i-mode
site. You can also play back music data that
was saved from a PC in the microSD memory
card inserted in the FOMA terminal.
ˎ You can play back music data in the background
while operating other functions such as displaying
a site or sending/receiving mail (Background
playback).
AAC-LC
HE-AAC
Description
A sound compression technology
developed by Microsoft Corporation,
which is employed as the Windows
standard sound compression
technology.
A sound compression technology used
in MPEG2 and MPEG4, enabling a
high compression rate while keeping
the sound quality.
A sound compression technology
used in MPEG4, which is an extended
version of AAC and also employed in
the Chaku-Uta Full®.
■ Bit rate supported for playback
File
Format
Chaku-Uta AAC-LC
Full®
HE-AAC(v1)
HE-AAC(v2)
3GPP
AAC-LC
WMA
HE-AAC(v1)
WMA
Bit rate (kbps)
8−128
8−128
8−48
80, 96, 128, 160, 192,
256, 320
40, 48, 64, 80, 96
20−320
ˎ Typically, the higher the bit rate is, the better the
sound quality, however, also the larger the data size
is, resulting in the smaller number of tracks that can
be saved.
■ Maximum number of tracks that can be
stored for operation on the MUSIC Player
Maximum number
of tracks
200
1,500
Connect the FOMA terminal and PC
using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional).
Transfer music data from Windows Media
Player 10/11.
Place to save to
Data Box
microSD memory card: 2G bytes
● Copy-righted music data in the “WMA” format
saved in the microSD memory card can only be
played back on your SO906i.
● Some music data saved in the microSD memory
card may not be played back on other FOMA
terminals.
Transferring Music Data
You can transfer music data from a PC to the
microSD memory card inserted in the FOMA
terminal using Windows Media Player or
Napster® appli.
Transferring a WMA File to a PC
Using Windows Media Player
You can use Windows Media Player 10/11
to import music data from a music CD to a
PC and save it in the microSD memory card
inserted in the FOMA terminal.
Install Windows Media Player 10/11 on
your PC.
ˎ When installing Windows Media Player 10/11
on a PC running Windows XP, use Windows XP
Service Pack 2 or later version.
ˎ When installing Windows Media Player on a PC
running Windows Vista, use Windows Media
Player 11.
Remove the FOMA USB Cable with
Charge Function 01/02 (optional) from the
FOMA terminal and PC.
● A WMA file which is transferred to the microSD
memory card by other FOMA terminal may not
be displayed or played back on your SO906i.
● When you use the microSD memory card in
which a WMA file is transferred by other FOMA
terminal even if the USB mode setting is set
to [MTP mode] and the FOMA ter minal is
connected to a PC, the PC may not recognize it.
In this case, either perform the Delete all WMA
(P.320) or format the microSD memory card
(P.313). If you format the microSD memory card,
please note that not only music data but also all
other data are deleted.
About Napster® appli
You can also transfer music data using
Napster® appli.
®
ˎ You can download Napster appli from the website
below.
http://www.napster.jp/ (as of December 2007)
®
ˎ For more information, see the website for Napster
appli below.
http://www.napster.jp/support/ (as of December
2007)
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
ˎ When you transfer a playlist, the playlist can be
used as a WMA playlist on the FOMA terminal.
Save a WMA file in the PC.
For the operations on Windows Media Player 10/11,
see the Help of Windows Media Player 10/11.
Change the USB mode setting of the
FOMA terminal to [MTP mode].
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Using the FOMA
Terminal with a PC” (P.314, step 1 to 3).
ˎ Make sure to insert the microSD memory card
before changing to the MTP mode.
Continued
337
Directly Copying Music Data to
the FOMA Terminal on a PC
The microSD memory card can be used as an
external drive of a PC by connecting the FOMA
terminal to the PC, allowing you to read/write
data from/to the microSD memory card.
With an AAC file (.3gp), you can play it back
on the MUSIC Player also by saving it directly
in the microSD memory card without using
Windows Media Player.
Downloading Chaku-Uta
Full®
You can download a Chaku-Uta Full ® file of
up to 5M bytes and save it in the Data Box or
microSD memory card.
Example: Saving Chaku-Uta Full® in the Data Box
Ｍｕｓｉｃ
ˎ Music data that is saved in the microSD memory
card without using Windows Media Player may not
be played back properly on SO906i.
ˎ Do not delete music data that is saved in the
microSD memory card using Windows Media Player
by performing the direct operation of the microSD
memory card.
ˎ For details on the folder setup of the microSD
memory card, see P.309.
Change the USB mode setting of the
FOMA terminal to [microSD mode].
Ｐｌａｙ
Ｓａｖｅ
Ｆｉｌｅ ｐｒｏｐｅｒｔｙ
Ｂａｃｋ
The Chaku-Uta Full® is downloaded to the FOMA
terminal. For Uta-hodai, the information of time
limit on playback is obtained and then the FOMA
terminal starts to download an Uta-hodai.
Connect the FOMA terminal and PC
using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional).
Double-click [リムーバブル ディスク] of マ
イ コンピュータ.
C r e a t e f o l d e r s n a m e d “ P R I VAT E ” ,
“DOCOMO”, “MMFILE”, and “MUSIC” in
this order.
ˎ You do not need to create the folders if they
already exist.
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
338
Save the music data in the “MUSIC” folder
created.
Remove the FOMA USB Cable with
Charge Function 01/02 (optional) from the
FOMA terminal and PC.
Select [Save] and press
Ｓａｖｅ ｔｏ
Ｄａｔａ Ｂｏｘ
ｍｉｃｒｏＳＤ
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Using the FOMA
Terminal with a PC” (P.314, step 1 to 3).
While displaying a site, select a ChakuUta Full® and press .
[Data Box]:
Save data in MUSIC of the Data Box.
[microSD]:
Save data in [Movable contents] of MUSIC in
the microSD memory card. (Insert the microSD
memory card.)
To play back Chaku-Uta Full®
Select [Play].
To display detailed information
Select [File property].
Select [Data Box] and press
Select a folder and press
(Save).
The downloaded Chaku-Uta Full® is saved.
● If you have deleted preinstalled Chaku-Uta Full®,
you can download it from “PlayNow by SO”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search)
→ [ ケータイ電話メーカー] ( M o b i l e P h o n e
Manufacturers) → [PlayNow by SO] (Japanese
only)
Playing Back Music Data
You can use the MUSIC Player to play back
music data saved in MUSIC of the Data Box
and microSD memory card.
You can also search a song you want to listen
to easily by specifying an artist, album, genre,
etc. in the Music menu.
From the Menu, select [Music] → [MUSIC
Player] and press .
ˎ You can also activate the MUSIC Player by
for over a second in the stand-by
pressing
display.
[Resume play]:
When there is music data that was played back
last time, the current track is played back from
the last stopped position. If you delete the music
data, however, you cannot select [Resume play].
ˎ When the Music menu is displayed by
pressing
during playback, [To playback
disp] appears. Select this option to return to
the playback display.
[Shuffle all songs]:
Perform random playback of all music data.
[Albums]:
Display the list of albums. Select an album →
music data.
[Artists]:
Display the list of artists. Select an artist → an
album → music data.
[Genres]:
Display the list of genres. Select a genre → artist
→ an album → music data.
[Playlists]:
Display the playlist. Select [Original playlist]/
[WMA playlist]/[Imported playlist] → a playlist →
music data.
[Songs]:
Display the list of all music data. Select the music
data.
Continued
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
ˎ While music data in the MUSIC Player is updated,
“ ” appears. If another function is activated,
updating the data may take time. The MUSIC Player
operation may be slower while the data is being
updated. While the data is updated, all tracks may
not be displayed. After the update is completed, redisplay the Music menu.
ˎ It may take time to start playback of some music
data.
ˎ Jacket images may not be displayed depending on
music data.
ˎ Sound skip or noise may occur depending on the
format and bit rate of music data.
ˎ When the battery level is low, you may not be
able to operate the MUSIC Player. If the battery
level becomes low during playback, the player is
stopped. Fully charge the battery before using this
function.
ˎ Do not insert/remove the microSD memory card into/
from the FOMA terminal while you are playing back
music data on the MUSIC Player. The playback is
interrupted.
ˎ If you receive a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call
or mail, or the Alarm/Schedule alarm is activated
while you are playing back music data on the
MUSIC Player, the playback is interrupted and
one of the above operations is performed. After
the operation is completed, when you return to the
MUSIC Player, the playback resumes automatically,
however, with some exceptions.
®
ˎ If you save a Chaku-Uta Full or display the music
folder while you are playing back music data on the
MUSIC Player, the MUSIC Player is terminated.
ˎ It may take time to display a music data list
depending on music data.
Example: Playing back music data by selecting the
artist
339
[Top50]:
Display up to 50 tracks in the order of the
number of the playback times, from the highest
to the lowest. Select the music data.
[Recent 50]:
Display up to 50 tracks in the order of the
playback date/time, from the most recent to the
oldest. Select the music data.
[Saved areas]:
Select a place to save to and select the music
data.
[Music settings]:
Display the menu of the Music settings.
Select [Artists] and press
The artist list appears.
Select music data and press
(Play).
Current status (During playback/
Stopped)
The number in the list of the
current track/The total number of
tracks in the current playback list
The elapsed playback time/
The total playback time of the
current track
Track title
Album title
Name of artist
Status of the MUSIC Player setting
The selected music data is played back.
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
340
Operation
Play
Press
Key operation
(Play).
Stop
Press
(Stop).
Volume
adjustment
Beginning of the
next track
Beginning of the
current track
Beginning of the
previous track
Fast-forward
Use
Fast-reverse
Select an artist → an album and press
To display detailed information
Move the cursor to the music data and from the
Function menu, select [Detail info].
To check the jacket
Move the cursor to the music data and from the
Function menu, select [Display img].
To check the lyrics
Move the cursor to the music data and from the
Function menu, select [Display lyrics].
Operating method
Switch display
Move to the
previous display
Press
Press
after more than three
seconds since the music starts.
within less than three
Press
seconds since the music starts.
Keep pressing
during
playback.
during
Keep pressing
playback.
Press
. The player screen
switches between the visualizer
display and jacket display.
Press
To end the Music Player
Press
to end the Music Player and go back
to the stand-by display.
● Some jacket or lyric may be saved. To save it,
press
(Save) while displaying it and select
[Yes] → a folder.
● If you select [File mng. Mode] from the Function
menu in the Music menu, you can stop the
MUSIC Player to display the music data saved in
the MUSIC folder that is to be prepared in each
place to save.
Playback Restrictions of Music
Data
Some music data is set the playback
restrictions. When you play back music
data with playback restrictions, the different
confirmation screen may appear depending on
a type of music data.
■ Chaku-Uta Full®
When you play back music data with playback
restrictions, the followings are displayed.
Playback restriction
Display
Playback time left “This data can be replayed XX
times. Replay?” appears. Select
[Yes] to play back the music data.
Playback time over “This data can no longer be
replayed. Delete?” appears.
Select [Yes] to delete the music
data.
Time limit on
“Replay period has expired.
playback over
Delete?” appears. Select [Yes] to
delete the music data.
Before playback
“Replay period has not yet
period
started” appears.
■ Uta-hodai
Setting How to Display the
Music Data List
You can select how to display the music data
list from two types.
ˎ When no jacket information is available in the music
data, the jacket is not displayed.
List display
Jacket display
Press
(Func) in the music data list
display, select [Change jackets], and
press .
The list display is changed to the jacket display or
vice versa.
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
ˎ When you play back an Uta-hodai whose time
limit on playback has expired, “Some data need
to update replay period. Send phone/terminal and
UIM ID, and connect to site?” or “Need to update
replay period. Send phone/terminal and UIM ID, and
connect to site?” appears. Select [Yes] to update
the time limit on playback. If you select [No], you
cannot play back music data.
ˎ The packet communication charge is required when
updating the time limit on playback.
ˎ When you use the FOMA terminal in other countries,
the time limit on playback may expire before or after
the displayed time limit.
ˎ Pake-Houdai or Pake-Houdai Full does not cover the
packet communication charge for updating the time
limit on playback during international roaming.
ˎ The playback restrictions for some Uta-hodai may be
set the renewal period for a few days after the time
limit on playback has expired. During the period,
you can play back music data without updating the
time limit on playback. After the renewal period on
playback has passed, the file cannot be played
back. Also, when you download music data while
updating the time limit is not proceeded, playback
cannot be performed before saving it.
ˎ When the maximum number of music services
(members only) which can be saved has been
exceeded, the screen for confirming whether to
overwrite a service appears. If you select [Yes], the
new service overwrites the service which has the
oldest time limit on playback. Also, you cannot play
back music downloaded from the service which is
overwritten.
ˎ The date and time of the time limit information in the
display which notifies the time limit on playback is
displayed in Japan time.
341
To save several music data
From the Function menu, select [Add to playlist]
→ [Select&save] → music data and press
(Complete).
To save all music data
From the Function menu, select [Add to playlist]
→ [Save all].
Managing the Playlist
There are three types of playlists that can be
played back using the FOMA terminal.
Original playlist
The playlist is created on the FOMA terminal. You can
create or edit up to 20 playlists and save up to 50
tracks of music data per file.
WMA playlist/Imported playlist
The playlist is created on an external device such as a
PC. You can display up to 100 playlists. A WMA playlist
or imported playlist can display up to 500 tracks or 200
tracks of music data per file, respectively. You cannot
create/edit these playlists on the FOMA terminal.
You can create a WMA playlist using Windows
Media Player 10/11. You use an imported playlist by
transferring a playlist file in the M3U format created by
a PC, etc. to the microSD memory card.
Creating a Playlist
The screen for selecting the saving method
appears.
[Add]:
Newly add selected music data to the music
data saved in a playlist.
[Overwrite]:
The screen for confirming whether to overwrite
all music data saved in a playlist with selected
music data appears. Note that all data existing in
the playlist is deleted when you select [Yes].
From the music data list, select music
data and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Add to playlist] → [Save one] and
press .
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｄｄ ｔｏ
ＸＸＸ Ｂｅｓｔ Ｈｉｔｓ １
ＸＸＸ Ｂｅｓｔ Ｈｉｔｓ ２
ＸＸＸ Ｌｉｖｅ
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
342
To create a new original playlist
Press
(Create) and enter a name for the
playlist. Enter the name within nine full-width and
19 half-width characters.
Select [Add] and press
The selected music data is saved in the original
playlist.
You can save your favorite music data in an
original playlist.
Example: Adding and saving one track of music data
in an original playlist
Select an original playlist to be saved and
press .
Deleting/Reordering Music Data
of the Playlist
You can delete music data from a playlist or
reorder it within a playlist. Even if you delete
music data from a playlist, the files of the music
data are not deleted.
ˎ You cannot delete music data from a WMA playlist/
imported playlist or reorder it.
Example: Deleting one track
From the Music menu, select [Playlists] →
[Original playlist] → a playlist and press
The music data list of the Original playlist appears.
To delete all music data
From the Function menu, select [Delete from list]
→ [Delete all] → [Yes].
To delete several music data
From the Function menu, select [Delete from
list] → [Select&delete] → music data. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes].
Select music data and press
(Func).
Select [Delete from list] → [Delete one] →
[Yes] and press .
The selected music data is deleted from the playlist.
Copying/Deleting/Editing the
Name of the Playlist
You can delete a playlist or edit its name.
ˎ You cannot copy/edit a WMA playlist or imported
playlist.
Example: Deleting one playlist
Select [Delete playlist] → [Delete one] →
[Yes] and press .
The selected playlist is deleted.
Changing the MUSIC
Player Settings
From the Music menu, select [Playlists]
→ [Original playlist] and press .
A list of all playlists appears.
To delete a WMA playlist
Select [WMA playlist].
To delete an imported playlist
Select [Imported playlist].
To delete all playlists
From the Function menu, select [Delete playlist]
→ [Delete all] → [Yes].
To delete several playlists
From the Function menu, select [Delete playlist]
→ [ S e l e c t & d e l e t e ] → p l a y l i s t s . P re s s
(Complete) and select [Yes].
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
To edit the name of a playlist
Move the cursor to the playlist and from the
Function menu, select [Edit name]. Enter a
new name within nine full-width or 19 half-width
characters.
To copy a playlist
Move the cursor to the playlist and from the
Function menu, select [Copy Playlists] → [Yes].
To display the detailed information of a playlist
Move the cursor to a playlist and from the
Function menu, select [Detail info].
The Function menu appears.
To reorder music data
From the Function menu, select [Reorder] →
music data. Move the cursor to the place to move
(Move), and press
(Complete).
to, press
Select a playlist and press
From the Music menu, select [Music
settings], and press .
Ｍｕｓｉｃ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ
Ｐｌａｙ ｍｏｄｅ
Ｎｏｒｍａｌ
Ｒｅｐｅａｔ
ＯＦＦ
ＡＶＬＳ
ＯＦＦ
Ｒｅｓｅｔ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ
Select a playback mode for music data at
[Play mode].
Continued
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
[Normal]:
Play back the selected music data list in the
order of appearance.
[Shuffle]:
Perform random playback of the selected music
data list.
343
3
Select the repeat type at [Repeat].
[All tracks]:
Repeat playback of all tracks in the selected
music data list.
[1 track]:
Repeat playback of the selected track.
[OFF]:
Play back only once.
Select whether to restrict the playback
volume at [AVLS].
[ON]:
Restrict the playback volume. You cannot turn up
the volume to level 16 or higher.
[OFF]:
Do not restrict the playback volume.
To reset the music settings to the default status
From the Music settings display, select [Reset
settings] → [Yes] and enter the Security code.
Music&Video Channel/Music Playback
344
Other Convenient
Functions
Multiaccess Feature ............................................................................  352
Multitask Feature .....................................................................................  353
Displaying the Edit Display by Sliding the FOMA Terminal ............. 354
Using the Lifetime Calendar ........................................................  355
Posting on a Blog...................................................................................................... 358
Starting the Alarm at a Specified Time ........................................................  360
Saving Schedules ...................................................................................  363
Performing Frequently Used Functions Quickly .................................. 368
Setting a Function to Be Activated in the TV Style ...................  368
Recording Recipient’s or Your Own Voice ...........................................  369
Checking the Call Duration and Charge ......................................  369
Setting the Limit for Alert on the Total Call Charge ........................  371
Using the Calculator ..............................................................................  372
Using a Memo ......................................................................................  372
Displaying the Settings of Various Functions ........................................  373
Using the Earphone/Microphone with Switch .......  374
Receiving a Call Automatically with Earphone .........................  375
Setting Which Mic to Use.........................................................  376
Resetting to the Default Settings ...................................................... 376
Deleting All Saved Data ..............................................................  377
List of Reset Items ................................................................................................... 378
345
Multiaccess Feature
Receiving Mail during a Voice Call

Ｔａｌｋｉｎｇ
Multiaccess is a function that enables you to
use a voice call, packet communication, and
SMS functions at the same time.
Ｃａｌｌ ｄｕｒａｔｉｏｎ
１２：３４
ˎ For multiaccess combinations, see P.435.
Voice call
1 line
i-mode, i-αppli, i-mode mail, and packet 1 line
communication by connecting a PC
SMS
1 line
● C h a r g e i s re q u i re d f o r t h e u s e o f e a c h
communication line during multiaccess.
● You cannot use multiaccess during a videophone
call or 64K data communication, but you can
receive SMS.
Main Functions That Can Be
Performed Using Multiaccess
Starting Other Communication during a
Voice Call
You receive mail while the call is being connected.
● If you receive i-mode mail, SMS, or Message R/F
while you are talking on the phone, the ring tone,
incoming indicator, and vibrator do not operate.
Placing a Voice Call during i-mode/Packet
Communication
Example: Placing a voice call during i-mode
The menu display appears and the cursor moves to
the TASK MENU.
Example: Connecting to i-mode during a voice call
Press
press
Select [i-mode] → [i Menu] → [メニュー/検
索] (Menu/Search) and press .
(MENU) during a voice call and
(New TASK).
Press
(MENU) during i-mode or packet
communication.
Select “ ” (Stand-by) and press
The menu display appears.
Other Convenient Functions
346
You can access i-mode while the call is being
connected.
To send mail
Select [Mail] → [Compose message] and
compose mail and send it.
To perform packet communication using a connected
PC
Establish connection for packet communication
using PC operation.
To switch the display
Press
(MENU) and select a task icon.
Enter a phone number and press
Place a voice call while you continue to use i-mode
or packet communication.
To switch the display during a call
Press
(MENU) and select a task icon.
● When you place a videophone call while
i-mode is being used, the i-mode connection
is disconnected and your videophone call is
placed.
Receiving a Voice Call during i-mode/
Packet Communication
When you receive a call, press
When you receive a voice call, the receive call
display appears.
You can answer a voice call while you continue to
use i-mode or packet communication.
To switch the display during a call
Press
(MENU) and select a task icon.
Multitask Feature

Multitask is a function that enables you to
perform several functions at the same time,
each of which you can access by switching the
displays.
Icon
Function name
Mail/i-mode common setting
i-mode setting
Settings
Storage information
USB mode setting
Input method setting
Full Browser
Icon
Function name
Data Box
MUSIC Player
Music&Video
Channel
Music&Video
Channel Download
Mail
Display mail
Message
IC card
Mail box
Own number
Compose message
Bar code reader
Compose SMS
microSD
Templates
Lifetime Calendar
Receive mail
Check new messages
Receive SMS
Check new SMS
Data transmission
Alarm setting
Mail setting
Schedule alarm
i αppli
Text Memo
Phonebook
Calculator
Call record
Data Security
Service
PushTalk
phonebook
GPS
Record message
NW Services
ToruCa
ˎ For multitask combinations, see P.437.
Using the Display during the
Multitask Operation
/ / : One/two/three or more
tasks are being executed.
changes to
while
playback is in progress on the
MUSIC Player)
TASK MENU
Press
(MENU) to display
the TASK MENU.
■ Task icons
Icon
Function name
Stand-by
Function name
Schedule
Viewer
easy BlogUp
Other Convenient Functions
Phone
Phone number entry
PushTalk
Dial PushTalk
Icon
Alarm
Music slide show
Camera
i-mode
Movie
i-Channel
Continued
347
Activating a New Function
Press
(MENU) during the activation of
a function.
● When you execute multiple functions, you can
press
to quit the current function.
Displaying the Edit Display by Sliding
the FOMA Terminal

You can set to display the Edit mail display,
Edit schedule display, and Edit Text Memo
display just by sliding the FOMA terminal to
open.
Example: Displaying the Edit mail display for replying
from Inbox
Press
From the Menu, select a new function and
press .
(New TASK).
Switching Functions
While running multiple functions, you can
switch to the display that provides access to
the function you want to use.
Press
(MENU).
Function name
The cursor moves to a task
icon on the TASK MENU.
Other Convenient Functions
Use
to select a task icon and press
The selected function display appears.
Stopping All Functions
Currently Activated
Press
(MENU).
Press
(Quit all).
Select [Yes] and press
All functions currently activated are stopped.
348
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [Slide setting] → [Edit
slide setting] and press .
Ｅｄｉｔ ｓｌｉｄｅ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｉｎｂｏｘ（Ｌｉｓｔ／Ｄｅｔａｉｌ）
Ｑｕｏｔｅ ｒｅｐｌｙ
Ｏｕｔｂｏｘ（Ｌｉｓｔ／Ｄｅｔａｉｌ）
Ｅｄｉｔ
Ｄｒａｆｔ（Ｌｉｓｔ）
Ｅｄｉｔ
Ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ
Ｃｒｅａｔｅ／Ｅｄｉｔ
Ｍｅｍｏ（Ｌｉｓｔ／Ｄｅｔａｉｌ）
Ｃｒｅａｔｅ／Ｅｄｉｔ
[Inbox(List/Detail)]:
Set whether to display the Edit mail display for
replying when you open the FOMA terminal in
the received mail list or Inbox display.
[Outbox(List/Detail)]:
Set whether to display the Edit display of sent
mail when you open the FOMA terminal in the
sent mail list or Outbox display.
[Draft(List)]:
Set whether to display the Edit display of saved
mail when you open the FOMA terminal in the
saved mail list or Draft display.
[Schedule]:
Set whether to display the Edit schedule
display when you open the FOMA terminal in
the Calendar of the Schedule, schedule list, or
Schedule detail display.
[Memo(List/Detail)]:
Set whether to display the Edit Text Memo
display when you open the FOMA terminal in the
text memo list or Text Memo display.
2
Select [Quote reply]/[Reply] at [Inbox(List/
Detail)].
[Quote reply]:
Quote the main body.
[Reply]:
Do not quote the main body.
[OFF]:
Do not display the Edit mail display.
ˎ Even if you select [Quote reply], the Reply
is applied when the Quote reply cannot be
performed. Also, even if you select [Reply],
the Quote reply is applied when the Reply
cannot be performed.
To edit a send mail
Select [Edit]/[OFF] at [Outbox(List/Detail)].
To edit a saved mail
Select [Edit]/[OFF] at [Draft(List)].
To edit a schedule
Select [Create/Edit]/[OFF] at [Schedule].
To edit a text memo
Select [Create/Edit]/[OFF] at [Memo(List/Detail)].
Using the Lifetime Calendar
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Lifetime Calendar] and press .
２００８／02／１3
Ｓｕｎ Ｍｏｎ Ｔｕｅ Ｗｅｄ Ｔｈｒ Ｆｒｉ Ｓａｔ
２７
２８
２９
３０
３１
１
２
３
４
５
６
７
８
９
１０
１１
１２１3 １３
１４
１５
１６
Number of mail display
Recorded contents
１７
１８
１９
２０
２１
２２
２３
２４
２５
２６
２７
２８
２９
１
２
３
４
５
６
７
８
The Lifetime Calendar appears.
to display the calendar of the next
ˎ Use
month and
to display the calendar of the
previous month.
ˎ The following icons show the displayed or saved
items.
Display status
Still image (All)/(Selected)/(Selected
off)/(OFF)
Received mail (All)/(Selected)/
(Selected off)/(OFF)
Sent mail (All)/(Selected)/(Selected
off)/(OFF)
Schedule (All)/(OFF)
Birthday (All)/(OFF)

The Lifetime Calendar displays an image, mail,
Schedule, and birthday data stored in the
FOMA terminal in the Calendar format. This
function helps you more effectively to keep
track of items to remember.
You can also automatically display the items
to remember, and display mail, Schedule, etc.
from the Lifetime Calendar.
Display status
Recorded contents
The saved schedule data
The saved birthday data
ˎ When there are mail, the color defines the
number of mail.
Number of mail display
Number of mail
1 to 4
5 to 9
10 to 19
20 to 99
More than 100
When the Lifetime Calendar is set as the stand-by
display
When you press
(Link) in the stand-by display
and select the Lifetime Calendar, the Lifetime
Calendar is activated.
Continued
Other Convenient Functions
Background color
Cream
Beige
Orange
Silver
Gold
349
To display the index
Press
(Index). When you select a year and
month, the Lifetime Calendar for the selected
year and month appears.
To create a new schedule
From the Function menu, select [Create new]
and save the schedule.
To display the Lifetime Calendar by specifying a
date
From the Function menu, select [Select date] and
enter the date. Enter the date within the range
from 2000/01/01 to 2050/12/31.
To update the displayed data
From the Function menu, select [Data update].
Select the date and press
The Lifetime Calendar appears displaying one year
including the selected day (Detail view).
２００8／０２／13 Ｗｅｄ
Ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ ｆｏｒ ｔｏ
１５ ２５
携帯なつ子
Ｎｅｗ ｍｅｌｏｄｙ
１０ ２４
ｄｏｃｏｍｏ．ｔａｒｏ．△△＠
Ｉｔ’ｓ ａ ｌｏｎｇ ｔｉｍ
１１
Display status
● The Phonebook, Own number, and Schedule
saved as Secret are not displayed in the Lifetime
Calendar. Set the Secret display to [ON] to
display the data.
● When you have more still images, mail, and
schedule data saved in the FOMA terminal, you
can build a more interesting Lifetime Calendar.
We recommend saving data in the FOMA
terminal using infrared communication and the
microSD memory card if you are going to use this
function immediately after you purchase SO906i.
When Items to Remember Are Displayed
If no operation is performed for a specific
period, still images, mail, and Schedule data
saved in the FOMA terminal are displayed
randomly as past memories.
２００８／02／１3
Recorded contents
Ｓｕｎ Ｍｏｎ Ｔｕｅ Ｗｅｄ Ｔｈｒ Ｆｒｉ Ｓａｔ
１２
２７
２８
２９
３０
３１
１
２
３
４
５
６
７
８
９
１０
１１
１２１3 １３
１４
１５
１６
１７
１８
１９
２０
２１
２２
２３
２７
２８
２９
１
５
６
７
８
携帯はる子
１２ ００
１３
１０ ３０
１３ １７
１３ １８
Ｄｉｓｃｕｓｓ ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓ
ＯＮ
ドコモ二郎
Ｓｎａｐｓｈｏｔ
Ｓａｓｈａ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
携帯はる子
To display the index
Press
(Index). When you select a date, the
Lifetime Calendar (Detail view) appears.
To display a still image
Select [ ] (P.290).
To display received mail
Select [ ] or [ ] (P.219).
To display sent mail
Select [ ] (P.219).
To display the schedule
Select [ ] (P.366).
To display a birthday
Select [ ]. The Phonebook display (P.101) or the
Own number display (P.45) appears.
Other Convenient Functions
350
２４
２５
２６
２００８／０２／１３
２
３
４
Items to remember
To display details of the item to remember
Press
(Memory). When you select an item to
remember, the Lifetime Calendar (Detail view)
appears.
Data Displayed in the Lifetime Calendar
The following data is displayed in the Lifetime
Calendar.
- JPEG and GIF images saved in My picture of the
Data Box
- Received and sent mail saved in the FOMA terminal,
or images attached to SMS and received/sent mail
※1
- Schedule saved in the FOMA terminal
- Name, Des call display, and birthday saved in the
FOMA terminal phonebook※2
- Name, image, and birthday saved in the Own
number
※1 When 2in1 is set to the A mode, data for Address
A is displayed. When the B mode is set, data for
Address B is displayed.
※2 When 2in1 is set to the A mode, data set as
[Common] and [A] at the Phonebook 2in1 setting
is displayed. When the B mode is set, data set as
[Common] and [B] is displayed.
■ Typical display examples
ˎ When the image attached to mail cannot be
displayed, “ ” appears.
Still image
Ｓａｓｈａ ｏｆ ｔｈｅ
１３ １７
Management title
ˎ When you send mail to several recipients using
address type “To”, “ ” appears next to the address.
Schedule
１２ ００
Ｄｉｓｃｕｓｓ ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓ
ＯＮ
Event outline
Category icon
Alarm
Birthday
１２
携帯はる子
Des call display saved
in the Phonebook
Name saved in the
Phonebook
● Data saved in the microSD memory card cannot
be displayed in the Lifetime Calendar.
● When the date and time of mail are corrected to
the local time during international roaming, “ ”
appears next to the time (P.44).
● Images in the [Preinstall] and [Stamp&Frame]
folders cannot be displayed in the Lifetime
Calendar.
● While displaying the Lifetime Calendar, when
receiving new mail or deleting/changing saved
data such as images, Phonebook, or Schedule
using Multitask, the displayed contents of the
Lifetime Calendar may differ from the actual data.
In this case, from the Function menu, select [Data
update] to update the displayed contents of the
Lifetime Calendar.
Source (P.319)
Type/size of an
image (P.290)
Received mail
１３
１０ ３０
ドコモ二郎
Ｓｎａｐｓｈｏｔ
Sender (name saved
in the Phonebook)
Image attached
to mail or Des call
display saved in
the Phonebook
With a file attachment
Subject
Mail status (P.220)
ドコモ三郎
Ｉｔ’ｓ ａ ｌ
Recipient (name saved
in the Phonebook)
Image attached
to mail or Des call
display saved in
the Phonebook
With a file attachment
Subject
Mail status (P.220)
Press
(Func) in the Lifetime Calendar.
The Function menu appears.
Select [LTC setting] and press
The LTC setting display appears.
[Display setting]:
Set the data to be displayed in the Lifetime
Calendar.
Continued
Other Convenient Functions
１２
You can set the data to be displayed in
the Lifetime Calendar and set whether to
automatically display the items to remember.
Sent mail
１０ ２４
Setting the Display of Lifetime
Calendar
351
[Memory auto display]:
Set the time before the item to remember is
automatically displayed when a key is not
operated for a specific period.
[Security data display]:
Set whether to display a folder which is set the
Mail security or Data security. If you set [Display],
you need to enter the Security code when you
display the Lifetime Calendar.
To display the Help of the LTC setting
Press
(Help).
Select [Display setting] and press
Other Convenient Functions
352
Select the display for each item.
Press
(Complete).
The LTC setting display appears.
Set the time before the item to remember
is automatically displayed at [Memory
auto display].
Select from [Fast], [Normal], [Slow], and [OFF].
To disable automatic display of the item to remember
Select [OFF].
Select [Security data display] and press
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Select [Display]/[OFF] and press
The Display setting display appears.
[Photo]:
Set the display of the still image to [All]/
[Selected]/[Selected off]/[OFF]. To or not to
display still images saved in a specific folder
only, select [Selected]/[Selected off] → [Select
folder] → a folder.
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t s e l e c t t h e [ P r e i n s t a l l ] o r
[Stamp&Frame] folder.
[Received mail]:
Set the display of the received mail to [All]/
[Selected]/[Selected off]/[OFF]. To or not to
display mail received from a specific address
only, select [Selected]/[Selected off] → [Select
mail address] and set a mail address.
[Sent mail]:
Set the display of the sent mail to [All]/[Selected]/
[Selected off]/[OFF]. To or not to display mail
sent to a specific address only, select [Selected]/
[Selected off] → [Select mail address] and set a
mail address.
[Schedule]:
Set the display of the schedule to [All]/[OFF].
[Birthday]:
Set the display of the birthday to [All]/[OFF].
To restore the default settings
Press
(Reset).
The Security code screen appears.
The LTC setting is set.
Posting on a Blog
If you save a blog service, you can post on a
blog using i-mode mail easily.
Saving a Blog Service
You can save a blog service to which you post
a blog. Up to 22 blog services can be saved.
Example: Saving a blog service manually
From the Menu, select [Imaging] → [easy
BlogUp] and press .
The blog service list appears.
ｅａｓｙ ＢｌｏｇＵｐ
１／４
○○○
Ｐｈｏｔｏ ｄｉａｒｙ
△△△
□□□
×××
Ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｂｙ ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
To use an easy BlogUp service information file
Connect to the blog service site you want to
use by i-mode and download an easy BlogUp
service information file (P.195).
ˎ An easy BlogUp service information file can
be downloaded when you connect to a site
by i-mode. You cannot download it by Full
Browser.
2
Press
press
(Func), select [Added], and
The service setting display appears.
To edit a blog service
Move the cursor to a blog service and from the
Function menu, select [Edit].
ˎ When you set an easy BlogUp service
information file, you can edit the service name
and service details.
To delete a blog service
Move the cursor to a blog service and from the
Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
To check the information of a blog service
Move the cursor to a blog service and from the
Function menu, select [Property].
ˎ When you set an easy BlogUp service
information file, you can check the version and
user’s ID of the service.
Enter a service name at [Service].
Enter a service name within 25 full-width or 50 halfwidth characters.
ˎ Select whether to post a still image/movie
depending on a type of contents which is
supported by a blog service.
[Yes]:
Post a still image/movie.
[No]:
Do not post a still image/movie.
You can post a still image (JPEG) or movie
(3GP) other than a text on a blog.
Example: Posting a still image in the Data Box and
texts
Icon
Still image supported
Movie supported
Enter a URL for Full Browser connection
at [Full Browser URL].
Enter a mail address for posting at [Mail
address].
Type
Text supported
Select a blog service which supports
both posting a still image and text, and
press
(BlogUp).
The screen for confirming whether to attach a file
appears.
When you select a blog service which supports
posting only texts
The Edit mail display appears. Go to step 5.
Select [File attach] and press
To post texts only
Select [Input text]. Go to step 5.
E n t e r a m a i l a d d re s s w i t h i n 5 0 h a l f - w i d t h
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
Continued
Other Convenient Functions
From the Menu, select [Imaging] → [esay
BlogUp] and press .
The blog service list appears.
ˎ A type of contents which is supported by a blog
service can be checked by the following icons or
the combinations of them.
Enter a URL for i-mode connection at
[i-mode URL].
Enter a URL including “http://” within 512 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
ˎ If you have entered a URL before, the last
entered URL is displayed.
ˎ “http://” at the beginning of a URL is entered on
the field automatically.
(Complete).
Posting on a Blog
Enter service details at [Service details].
Enter a URL including “http://” within 512 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
ˎ If you have entered a URL before, the last
entered URL is displayed.
ˎ “http://” at the beginning of a URL is entered on
the field automatically.
Press
The blog service is set.
Enter service details within 25 full-width or 50 halfwidth characters.
Select whether to post a still image/movie
on a blog at [Attach picture]/[Attach
movie].
353
4
From the Data Box, select a category → a
folder → a file and press .
The Edit mail display appears.
For a still image recorded when the Auto orientation
is set to [ON]
The screen for confirming whether to rotate the
still image to align the display direction of the
FOMA terminal appears. To post a rotated image,
select [Matching&BlogUp]. When the image size
exceeds [VGA(640×480)], the size of the image
is automatically reduced to [VGA(H640×W480)]
or [VGA(W640×H480)] depending on which
orientation the original image is, landscape or
portrait.
To post an image as is, select [Keeping&BlogUp].
For a still image exceeding [VGA(640×480)]
The screen for confirming whether to reduce the
image size to [VGA(640×480)] appears. To post
a reduced image, select [Reduces&BlogUp].
To post an image as is, select [Keeping&BlogUp].
ˎ When you select a still image exceeding 2M
bytes, the still image is not attached because
of the size restriction of the mail attachment
file.
For a movie exceeding 2M bytes
A movie is automatically clipped to be less than
2M bytes from the beginning.
To select a still image or movie in the microSD
memory card
From the microSD category list, select a category
→ a file.
Enter texts and press
(Send).
Mail is sent and it is posted on a blog.
● When 2in1 is set to the B mode, you cannot
compose any i-mode mail.
● You cannot send i-mode mail using Address B.
Browsing a Blog
Other Convenient Functions
354
Example: Browsing a blog using i-mode
ˎ When a blog service has neither the i-mode URL nor
the Full Browser URL specified, you cannot select
the blog service.
From the Menu, select [Imaging] → [easy
BlogUp] and press .
The blog service list appears.
Select a blog ser vice and press
(i-mode).
The screen for confirming whether to connect to
i-mode appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The selected blog is displayed.
To browse a blog using Full Browser
Move the cursor to a blog service, press
Brs), and select [Yes].
(Full
Starting the Alarm at a
Specified Time

The alarm is activated for about one minute at
a specified time. You can set up to 12 alarms
to be activated.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Alarm]
and press .
Ａｌａｒｍ
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｌａｒｍ
Ａｕｔｏ ｐｏｗｅｒ ｏｎ
ＯＦＦ
To set the operation of the alarm during power off
Select [Auto power on] → [ON]/[OFF].
ˎ If you select [ON], when the alarm time
comes during power off, the FOMA terminal
is automatically powered on and the alarm
works.
Select [Select alarm] and press
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ａｌａｒｍ
１０：００
１１：３０
１２：００
１３：３０
１４：００
１６：００
１８：３０
００：００
００：００
００：００
００：００
００：００
Ｅｙｄ
Ｅｙｄ
Ｅｙｄ
Ｅｙｄ
ＯＦＦ
Ｄａｙ
Ｄａｙ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＦＦ
ＯＦＦ
ˎ The following icons show the setting status of the
Alarm.
The Alarm is set
The Snooze is set
To switch between setting/canceling the Alarm
Move the cursor to the Alarm and press
(Set)/
(Rel.).
3
Select an alarm to be set and press
When you select a Chaku-Uta Full ® that has a
choice of specified playback ranges from [MUSIC]
The screen for selecting a type of setting
appears. If you select [Full song], the entire track
of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the alarm tone. If you
select [Point], the specified playback range of
Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the alarm tone.
To mute the alarm tone
Select [Silent].
To check the alarm tone
Move the cursor to the alarm tone and press
(Play).
Ａｌａｒｍ１
Ｓｅｔ
Ｔｉｍｅ
Ｒｅｐｅａｔ
Ａｌａｒｍ ｔｏｎｅ
ＯＦＦ
００：００
ＯＦＦ
Ａｌａｒｍ（ｓｔｄ）
４
Ａｌａｒｍ ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ａｌａｒｍ ｉｍａｇｅ
めざましアラーム鳴動
Ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
ＯＦＦ
Ｃ５
Ｃｏｌｏｒ
Ｓｎｏｏｚｅ
ＯＦＦ
Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Set].
[ON]:
Activate the alarm.
[OFF]:
Do not activate the alarm.
Set the volume at [Alarm volume].
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 6].
To set the volume to [OFF]
Press
at level 1.
Enter a time to start the alarm at [Time].
Select an alarm image from My picture/
i-motion of the Data Box at [Alarm image].
Enter a time in 24-hour format.
ˎ You can set the following files.
Select the repeat type at [Repeat].
[OFF]:
Do not repeat the alarm.
[Eyd]:
Repeat the alarm every day.
[Day]:
Repeat the alarm on the same day of the week.
(OK).
Select a day of the week and press
S e l e c t a n a l a r m t o n e f ro m M U S I C /
i-motion/Melody of the Data Box at [Alarm
tone].
ˎ You can set the following files. You can select a
Chaku-Uta® from [i-motion].
※ Some files may not be set.
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
To check an alarm image
Move the cursor to an alarm image and press
(Play).
10 Select a vibration type at [Vibrator].
[Pattern1]:
Set short intermittent vibration.
[Pattern2]:
Set long intermittent vibration.
[Link melody]:
Vibrates in accordance with the alarm tone. If you
have set the alarm tone to [Silent] or to a melody
that cannot be synchronized with the vibrator
operation, the vibrator vibrates using [Pattern1].
Continued
Other Convenient Functions
File
File size
Image size
format
MUSIC※ AAC-LC/ Max. 5M
−
HE-AAC bytes
i-motion※ MP4
Max. 10M Max. [VGA(640
bytes
×480)]
Melody
SMF/
Max. 350K
−
MFi
bytes
Category
File
File size
Image size
format
My picture GIF/
Max. 250K Max. [Stand-by
JPEG
bytes
(480×864)],
Max. W480×
H288 for GIF
animation
Max. 100K
−
SWF
bytes
Max. 10M Max. [VGA(640
i-motion※ MP4
bytes
×480)]
Category
355
[OFF]:
Do not set the vibrator.
To check the vibration
Move the cursor to the pattern and press
(Confirm).
11 Select an indicator color at [Color].
Select from 12 indicator colors or [C13:ALL]
(indicator flashes in 12 colors in sequence).
When you move the cursor, the indicator flashes
accordingly.
12 Select [ON]/[OFF] at [Snooze].
[ON]:
The alarm operates for about one minute and
repeats operation up to six times every five
minutes.
[OFF]:
Do not repeat the alarm operation.
13 Press
(Complete).
The Alarm is set and “
display.
” appears in the stand-by
● When the Alarm and Schedule alarm are set
simultaneously, “ ” is displayed instead of “ ”.
● When the Alarm and Schedule alarm are set to
start at the same time, the Schedule alarm has
priority.
● When you set an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® for
the alarm tone or set an i-motion for the alarm
image, the settings may be changed in some
cases.
At the Alarm Time
The alarm tone sounds for about one minute
with the indicator flashing.
Ａｌａｒｍ
０６：３０
Other Convenient Functions
356
To stop the alarm tone
Press any key.
When you do not stop the
alarm tone
The display infor ming
the release of the alarm
appears. To turn off the
display, press
or
To stop the Snooze
Press
● If you set an i-motion with video and sound
tracks to the alarm tone, a movie in the i-motion
is displayed.
● If the alarm time comes during a voice call or
PushTalk communication, the default alarm tone
sounds and the default alarm image is displayed.
The vibrator does not operate.
● The Alarm does not operate in the following
cases.
- While the Lock all is set
- While the Personal data lock is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- While updating the software
● If the alarm time comes in the following cases,
the Alarm may operate when the status changes
to during a call or stand-by.
- While placing/receiving a voice/videophone
call or originating/receiving a PushTalk call
- During packet communication
- During the infrared communication/while the
infrared remote control is being used
- During the iC communication
- During data communication or while reading/
writing data from/into a microSD memory card
on a PC with the FOMA terminal connected
using the USB cable
- While recording a still image/movie
- While the Schedule alarm is sounding
- B e e p w h i l e re c e i v i n g A re a M a i l , w h i l e
sounding Area Mail ring tone, or displaying
Area Mail
● If another function is executed during the Alarm
or Snooze operation, the alarm is stopped. The
Snooze keeps operating within five times.
● When the PIN1 code setting and the Auto power
on for the Alarm are set to [ON], the FOMA
terminal is automatically powered on at the alarm
time and the PIN1 code input screen appears
after the Alarm operation. If you set any data for
which the UIM operation restriction function is set
to the alarm tone, the default melody sounds.
● If you leave the FOMA terminal with the battery
pack removed or fully expended for a long
period of time, the date and time is reset, and the
Alarm may not operate correctly.
● If you remove the battery pack and turn off the
FOMA terminal, the FOMA terminal is not turned
on automatically even if the Auto power on is set
to [ON].
Saving Schedules

Up to 300 schedules, such as date and events/
appointments can be saved for management.
When a Schedule alarm is set, the FOMA
terminal activates the alarm at the scheduled
time.
ˎ An entry is required at [
] (Event).
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Schedule] and press .
Select a star ting date and press
(Create).
The calendar is displayed.
Ｅｄｉｔ ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ
２００８／０２／０１ Ｆｒｉ
００：００
Ａｌｌ ｄａｙ ＯＦＦ
２００８／０２／０１ Ｆｒｉ
００：００
Ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ
Ｎｏｎｅ
ＯＦＦ
００ｍｉｎ．ｂｅｆｏｒｅ
ＯＦＦ
０ １ Ｃｏｕｎｔ
The selected date is automatically entered.
To change the starting date
Select [ ] and change the date. Enter the date
within the range from 2000/01/01 to 2050/12/31.
Enter a starting time at [
].
Enter a time in 24-hour format.
To set the schedule period to all day
Select [ON] at [All day]. When it is set to [ON],
you cannot set the starting time, ending date,
ending time, and alarm.
Enter an ending date at [
].
Enter from the starting date to 2050/12/31.
Enter an ending time at [
].
Enter the event at [
].
Enter the event within 128 full-width or 256 halfwidth characters.
Select a category icon at [
Enter an event outline at [
].
Enter an outline within 20 full-width or 40 half-width
characters.
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the alarm at [
].
[ON]:
Sound the alarm tone. Select how many minutes
before the starting time of schedule the alarm
should sound. Select [00min.before] if you want
to sound the alarm at the same time as the
starting time.
[OFF]:
Do not sound the alarm tone.
10 Select the schedule repeat type at [
].
[OFF]:
Do not repeat the schedule. Go to step 12.
[Eyd]:
Repeat the schedule every day.
[Week]:
Repeat the schedule on the same day of the
week.
[Month]:
Repeat the schedule every month on the same
day.
[Year]:
Repeat the schedule every year on the same day
of the same month.
When the schedule repeat type is set to other than
[OFF]
Enter the repeat count within 01 to 99 times.
11 Select [ON]/[OFF] of a holiday at [Holiday].
[ON]:
The schedule repeats even on a holiday.
[OFF]:
The schedule does not repeat on a holiday, but it
is included in the repeat count.
12 Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Secret at [
].
[ON]:
Save the schedule as Secret. Details of the
schedule are masked with “＊” except for the
time at the schedule alarm time.
[OFF]:
Do not save the schedule as Secret.
To display the data saved as Secret
Set the Secret display to [ON].
].
Continued
Other Convenient Functions
Enter a time in 24-hour format.
357
13 Press
(Complete).
The schedule is saved. When the Alarm is set to
[ON], “ ” appears in the stand-by display.
The schedule dates are highlighted on the calendar.
● When you set [Create/Edit] at [Schedule] of the
Edit slide setting, just opening the FOMA terminal
in the calendar or schedule list allows you to
save the schedule (P.354).
● When the Schedule alarm and Alarm are set
simultaneously, “ ” is displayed instead of “ ”.
● If the repeat type of the schedule set for the 31st
is set to [Month], the schedule is set for the last
day of the month for months with less than 31
days. It is also applied when the repeat type of
the schedule set for the 29th of February in a
leap year is set to [Year].
● When you set an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® for
the alarm tone or set an i-motion for the alarm
image, the settings may be changed in some
cases.
At the Schedule Alarm Time
The alarm sounds for about 30 seconds with
the indicator flashing and the schedule data is
displayed.
If there are several overlapping schedules with
the same start time of the alarm, the number
of schedules you have in addition is shown as
“XXX” on the upper right of the display.
Ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ
１２：００
Ｌｕｎｃｈ ｍｅｅｔｉｎｇ
To stop the alarm tone
Press any key.
When you do not stop the
alarm tone
The Schedule display
appears. To turn off the
Schedule display, press
(OK),
, or
● If you set an i-motion with video and sound
tracks to the alarm tone, a movie in the i-motion
is displayed.
● If the alarm time comes during a voice call or
PushTalk communication, the default alarm tone
sounds and default alarm image is displayed.
The vibrator does not operate.
● The Schedule alarm does not operate in the
following cases.
- When the FOMA terminal is powered off
- While the Lock all is set
- While the Personal data lock is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- While updating the software
● If the alarm time comes in the following cases,
the Schedule alarm may operate when the status
changes to during a call or stand-by.
- While placing/receiving a voice/videophone
call or originating/receiving a PushTalk call
- During packet communication
- During the infrared communication/while the
infrared remote control is being used
- During the iC communication
- During data communication or while reading/
writing data from/into a microSD memory card
on a PC with the FOMA terminal connected
using the USB cable
- While recording a still image/movie
- B e e p w h i l e re c e i v i n g A re a M a i l , w h i l e
sounding Area Mail ring tone, or displaying
Area Mail
● If you leave the FOMA terminal with the battery
pack removed or fully expended for a long
period of time, the date and time is reset, and the
Schedule alarm may not operate correctly.
Setting the Schedule Alarm
Operations
You can set the details of the operations of the
Schedule alarm.
Other Convenient Functions
358
Press
(Func) in the calendar.
The Function menu appears.
2
Select [Schedule setting] → [Schedule
alarm] and press .
ˎ You can set the following files.
Ａｌａｒｍ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ａｌａｒｍ ｔｏｎｅ
File
File size
Image size
format
My picture GIF/
Max. 250K Max. [Stand-by
JPEG
bytes
(480×864)],
Max. W480×
H288 for GIF
animation
SWF
Max. 100K
−
bytes
Max. 10M Max. [VGA(640
i-motion※ MP4
bytes
×480)]
Ａｌａｒｍ（ｓｔｄ）
４
Ａｌａｒｍ ｖｏｌｕｍｅ
Ａｌａｒｍ ｉｍａｇｅ
スケシ゛ュールアラーム鳴動中
Ｖｉｂｒａｔｏｒ
ＯＦＦ
Ｃｏｌｏｒ
Ｃ５
Category
S e l e c t a n a l a r m t o n e f ro m M U S I C /
i-motion/Melody of the Data Box at [Alarm
tone].
ˎ You can set the following files. You can select a
Chaku-Uta® from [i-motion].
File
File size
Image size
format
MUSIC※ AAC-LC/ Max. 5M
−
HE-AAC bytes
i-motion※ MP4
Max. 10M Max. [VGA(640
bytes
×480)]
Melody
SMF/
Max. 350K
−
MFi
bytes
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
To check an alarm image
Move the cursor to an alarm image and press
(Play).
Category
※ Some files may not be set.
When you select a Chaku-Uta Full ® that has a
choice of specified playback ranges from [MUSIC]
The screen for selecting a type of setting
appears. If you select [Full song], the entire track
of Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the alarm tone. If you
select [Point], the specified playback range of
Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the alarm tone.
To mute the alarm tone
Select [Silent].
To check the alarm tone
Move the cursor to the alarm tone and press
(Play).
Select a vibration type at [Vibrator].
[Pattern1]:
Set short intermittent vibration.
[Pattern2]:
Set long intermittent vibration.
[Link melody]:
Vibrates in accordance with the alarm tone. If you
have set the alarm tone to [Silent] or to a melody
that cannot be synchronized with the vibrator
operation, the vibrator vibrates using [Pattern1].
[OFF]:
Do not set the vibrator.
To check the vibration
Move the cursor to the pattern and press
(Confirm).
Select an indicator color at [Color].
Select from 12 indicator colors or [C13:ALL]
(indicator flashes in 12 colors in sequence).
When you move the cursor, the indicator flashes
accordingly.
Set the volume at [Alarm volume].
Select from [OFF] and [1 to 6].
To set the volume to [OFF]
Press
at level 1.
Select an alarm image from My picture/
i-motion of the Data Box at [Alarm image].
Press
(Complete).
The Schedule alarm operations are set.
Other Convenient Functions
Continued
359
Displaying the Schedule
Select the schedule and press
Ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ ｄｅｔａｉｌ
The saved schedule can be checked using the
calendar.
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Schedule] and press .
２００８／０２
２／１
Ｓｕｎ Ｍｏｎ Ｔｕｅ Ｗｅｄ Ｔｈｕ Ｆｒｉ Ｓａｔ
Today
２７ ２８ ２９ ３０ ３１ １ ２
３ ４ ５ ６ ７ ８ ９
１０ １１ １２ １３ １４ １５ １６
The details of the schedule appear.
To edit the saved schedule
Press
(Edit).
１７ １８ １９ ２０ ２１ ２２ ２３
２４ ２５ ２６ ２７ ２８ ２９ １
２ ３ ４ ５ ６ ７ ８
Schedule icons
The calendar is displayed.
to display the calendar of the next
ˎ Use
month and
to display the calendar of the
previous month.
When the calendar is set for the stand-by display
Press
(Link) in the stand-by display and select
the calendar to start the schedule.
To display the calendar for a specified date
From the Function menu, select [Select date] and
enter the date. Enter the date within the range
from 2000/01/01 to 2050/12/31.
Select a date and press
２００８／０２／０１ Ｆｒｉ
−−：−− Ｂｉｒｔｈｄａｙ
１２：００ Ｌｕｎｃｈ ｍｅｅｔｉｎｇ
１８：００ Ｂａｓｅｂａｌｌ
Starting time
Event outline (Contents of the
saved schedule, when you did
not save the event outline)
The schedule list is displayed.
to display the next day’s schedule and
ˎ Use
to display the previous day’s schedule.
Other Convenient Functions
360
２００８／０２／０１ Ｆｒｉ
１２：００
２００８／０２／０１ Ｆｒｉ
１２：５０
Ｄｉｓｃｕｓｓ ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓ ｐｌａ
ｎ ｏｖｅｒ ｌｕｎｃｈ
Ｃｏｎｆｅｒｅｎｃｅ
Ｌｕｎｃｈ ｍｅｅｔｉｎｇ
ＯＮ
６０ｍｉｎ．ｂｅｆｏｒｅ
Ｎｏ
ＯＦＦ
● When you set [Create/Edit] at [Schedule] of the
Edit slide setting, just opening the FOMA terminal
in the schedule list or Schedule detail display
allows you to edit the schedule (P.354).
● If you set a repeat count beyond 2050/12/31, [To
2050/12/31] is displayed as the last day of the
repeat when you display the schedule.
Deleting a Schedule
You can delete schedules using the following
five methods.
Delete one
Delete a schedule. If you delete a
schedule set to repeat, all its repeats
are also deleted.
Select&delete Delete the selected schedules.
You can select up to 30 schedules
over days at a time. If you delete a
schedule set to repeat, all its repeats
are also deleted.
Delete a day Delete all schedules for the selected
date. Schedules set to repeat cannot
be deleted.
Del up to ysd Delete all schedules before the
selected date. Schedules set to
repeat on and after the selected date
cannot be deleted.
Delete all
Delete all schedules.
Example: Deleting a schedule
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Schedule] and press .
Example: Setting a specific day as a holiday or
canceling the holiday setting of a day
To delete all schedules
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Delete all], enter the Security code, and select
[Yes].
To delete all schedules before the selected date
Move the cursor to the date and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Del up to
ysd]. Enter the Security code and select [Yes].
To delete all schedules for the selected date
Move the cursor to the date and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete a day]
→ [Yes].
Select a date and press
To set/cancel holidays by a day of the week
From the Function menu, select [Schedule
setting] → [Set holidays] → [Day of the week].
Select the day of the week and press
(Complete).
To cancel all holidays before the selected date
Move the cursor to the date and from the
Function menu, select [Schedule setting] → [Set
holidays] → [Rel up to yesterday] → [Yes].
To cancel all holidays
From the Function menu, select [Schedule
setting] → [Set holidays] → [Release all], enter
the Security code, and select [Yes].
To reset to the default settings
From the Function menu, select [Schedule
setting] → [Set holidays] → [Reset], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete several schedules
From the Function menu, select [Delete] →
[Select&delete] and select schedules. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes].
Select a schedule and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]
and press .
You can set a day or a day of the week as a
holiday and cancel the holiday settings. A day
set as a holiday is displayed in red.
For today
(Func).
Select [Schedule setting] → [Set holidays]
and press .
Select [For today] → [Yes] and press
The Set holidays display appears.
The selected day is set as a holiday or the holiday
setting of the day is canceled.
● The public holidays are based on the “Law
Partially Revising the National Holidays Law and
the Old-Age Welfare Law” (Law No.59, 2001) and
(Law No.43, 2005). Note that the Vernal Equinox
Day and Autumn Equinox Day may fall on the
dates other than those set on the FOMA terminal
because they depend on the announcement
by the official gazette on February 1st of the
previous year (as of December 2007).
Perform the required setting when a holiday is
changed or newly added.
Other Convenient Functions
Set a specific day as a holiday or cancel
a holiday. Up to 1,000 days can be set or
canceled.
Day of the Set a specific day of the week as a
week
holiday or cancel a holiday of the week.
Rel up to
Cancel all holidays set by the For today
yesterday before the selected date.
Release all Cancel all holidays set by the For today
and Day of the week.
Reset
Reset the holiday settings to the default
settings.
Select a date and press
The Function menu appears.
The selected schedule is deleted.
Setting Holiday
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Schedule] and press .
Continued
361
Performing Frequently Used
Functions Quickly 
Checking the Number of
Schedules Saved
The number of schedules saved can be
checked as well as the number of schedules
still available to be saved or saved as Secret.
Press
(Func) in the calendar.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Memory status] and press
Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ ｓｔａｔｕｓ
Ｒｅｍａｉｎｅｄ
Ｕｓｅｄ
Ｓｅｃｒｅｔ
２７９
２１
５
You can save frequently used functions in My
Selection and select a saved function directly.
Up to 12 functions can be added to My
Selection.
ˎ When the Menu displays the Kisekae menu or
Standard menu, you need to set the Start menu
setting to [My Selection] (P.123).
Press
(MENU) in the stand-by
display, select a function, and press
(Exchange).
Ｒｅｐｌａｃｅｍｅｎｔ
[Remained]:
Display the number of schedules still available to
be saved.
[Used]:
Display the number of schedules saved
(including schedules as Secret).
[Secret]:
Display the number of schedules saved as
Secret (this data is displayed only when the
Secret display is set to [ON]).
Ｉｍａｇｉｎｇ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
Ｍａｉｌ
ｐｐｌｉ
Ｐｈｏｎｅ
Ｄａｔａ Ｂｏｘ
Ｍｕｓｉｃ
Ｏｓａｉｆｕ−Ｋｅｉｔａｉ
Ｏｗｎ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
ＬｉｆｅＫｉｔ
Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇｓ
To delete the saved function
Press
(MENU) in the stand-by display, move
the cursor to the function, press
(Delete), and
select [Yes].
To reset My Selection to the default setting
Reset the settings (P.376).
Select a function and press
(Save).
The screen for confirming whether to replace My
Selection appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The selected function replaces My Selection.
Other Convenient Functions
362
Recording Recipient’s or
Your Own Voice

Your own voice during stand-by and the
recipient’s voice during a voice call can be
recorded.
Up to three voice memos of up to about 15
seconds each can be recorded.
ˎ When you record a voice memo during a call in
addition to the already recorded three voice memos,
the oldest memo is automatically overwritten by the
new one. When you record a voice memo during
stand-by, the screen for confirming whether to
overwrite the oldest voice memo appears.
ˎ For information on playing back and deleting the
voice memo, see P.74.
Recording Your Own Voice
during Stand-by
Press
in the stand-by display, select
[Rec voice memo] → [Yes] and press .
Ｒｅｃ ｖｏｉｃｅ ｍｅｍｏ
２／１０ ２１：０８
Recording Recipient’s Voice
during a Call
● When the FOMA ter minal is closed while
recording a voice memo during a call, the
recording is stopped and the recorded voice
memo is saved if the Setting when folded is set
to [Holding] or [Disconnect] and the recording is
continued if set to [Mute].
Checking the Call Duration
and Charge

You can check the call duration and charge for
the last and total voice and videophone calls.
ˎ The call duration and charge displayed are
estimated and may not be real values. The call
charge does not include consumption tax.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Cost/Duration] and press .
The Call Cost/Duration display appears.
[Last call cost]:
Display the call charge for the last voice call at
[Voice call] and the last videophone call/64K
data communication at [Digital]. The call charge
is counted only when you place a call.
[Last call duration]:
Display the call duration for the last voice call
at [Voice call] and the last videophone call/64K
data communication at [Digital]. The call duration
is counted when you receive a call as well as
place a call.
[Total calls cost]:
Display the total call charge from the last reset to
the present time.
[Total calls duration]:
Display the total call duration from the last reset
to the present time.
Continued
Other Convenient Functions
● If there is an incoming call/mail or the Alarm/
Schedule alarm time comes while recording a
voice memo during stand-by, the recording stops
and the voice memo recorded until then is saved.
during a call.
The recording starts. When the recording ends, a
beep sounds.
To stop the recording on the way
Press
(Stop).
The recording starts. When the recording ends, a
beep sounds.
To stop the recording on the way
Press
(Stop).
Press
363
2
Select the item and press
● When you place a call to a toll-free number such
as NTT Free Dial or Directory Assistance (104),
“0YEN” or “＊＊＊＊＊＊YEN” indicated for the call
charge.
● The accumulated call charges are stored in
the UIM. Therefore, if you switch the UIM, the
accumulated total call charge (starting from
December 2004) is displayed.
※ FOMA terminals manufactured earlier than the
901i series are not capable of displaying the
accumulated call charges stored in the UIM.
(The charges, however, are stored in the UIM
used by the older terminals.)
● The duration and charge for PushTalk, i-mode,
and packet communication are not counted. For
details on how to check charges for i-mode, etc.,
see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【i-mode】
FOMA version” that you receive when you
subscribe to i-mode.
● When the call duration for the last voice call or
digital communication exceeds 99 hours, 59
minutes, and 59 seconds or the total call duration
for voice calls or digital communication exceeds
9,999 hours, 59 minutes, and 59 seconds, “Over”
is displayed.
● The ring time for incoming and outgoing calls are
not counted.
● The transmission charge for Chaku-moji is not
counted.
● When you use WORLD CALL, the international
call charge is counted. When you use other
international call services other than WORLD
CALL, the call charge is not counted.
● When you switch between voice and videophone
calls during a call, the call duration and call
charge are counted separately for each call
type and incremented at [Voice call] or [Digital]
alternately every time you switch the call.
● When 2in1 is used, the total call duration and
charge of both Number A and Number B are
summed up and displayed.
Other Convenient Functions
364
Resetting the Total Call Duration
and Charge
The display of the total call duration and
charge can be reset. The count starts from 0
after the reset.
Example: Resetting the total call duration
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Cost/Duration] → [Reset] and press .
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｒｅｓｅｔ
ｉｔｅｍ
Ｔｏｔａｌ ｄｕｒａｔｉｏｎ
Ｔｏｔａｌ ｃｏｓｔ
Select [Total duration] and press
The Security code screen appears.
To reset the total call charge
Select [Total cost], enter the PIN2 code, and
select [Yes].
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to reset appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The total call duration is reset and the reset date/
time are updated.
Automatically Resetting the
Total Call Charge
You can set to automatically reset the total call
charge at 00:00 a.m. on the first day of every
month.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Cost/Duration] → [Auto reset] and press
The PIN2 code input screen appears.
Enter the PIN2 code and press
(OK).
The Auto reset display appears.
Select [ON]/[OFF] and press
The Auto reset is set.
Setting the Limit for Alert on the
Total Call Charge 
When the Call Charge Exceeds the Limit
You can set an upper limit amount of call
charges to alert yourself with an icon or alarm
tone when the total call charge exceeds this
limit value.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Cost/Duration] → [Cost limit notice] and
press .
Ｅｘｃｅｅｄ ｃｏｓｔ ｌｉｍｉｔ
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Ｃａｌｌ ｃｏｓｔ ｌｉｍｉｔ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｌｉｍｉｔ
ＯＦＦ
０ＹＥＮ
（１０−１０００００）
Ｎｏｔｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ａｌａｒｍ＋Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ
● The alarm for the Call cost limit is heard at the
same volume level as set for the incoming call
ring volume. It is heard at the volume level 2
when you set the volume of the ring tone to [3] or
higher level, [STEP DOWN], or [STEP UP].
Canceling the Icon for Limit Alert
Select [ON]/[OFF] for the Call limit notice
at [Set].
Turn off the notification icon “
Enter a value at [Limit].
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Cost/Duration] → [Delete max cost icon]
and press .
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
Enter from ¥10 to ¥100,000 (in increments of ¥10).
Select a notification method at
[Notification].
[Alarm+Stand-by]:
Display the icon in the stand-by display and
sound an alarm tone to alert you at the same
time.
[Stand-by]:
Display the icon in the stand-by display to alert
you.
When the upper limit value
of the call charge you have
set is exceeded during a
call or data communication,
the notification icon “ ”
(Exceed cost limit) appears
in the stand-by display.
When you set the notification
method to [Alarm+Stand-by],
an alarm tone sounds
when the stand-by display
reappears.
To check the call charge
Press
(Link) in the
stand-by display and
select “ ”.
Press
(Complete).
The Security code screen appears.
The screen for confirming whether to delete the
maximum cost icon appears.
Select [Yes] and press
“
” disappears.
Other Convenient Functions
The Call cost limit is set.
”.
365
Using the Calculator 
You can use the FOMA terminal to perform the
four basic operations of arithmetic (＋, −, ×,
÷) for up to nine digits.
Example: Calculating 64×5
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ L i f e K i t ] →
[Calculator] and press .
Using a Memo

Necessary information can be saved in the Text
Memo. Up to 10 text memos can be saved.
ˎ When you enter [Contents] of a memo,
(Complete) appears and you can save the memo.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Text
Memo], press , and press
(Create).
Ｅｄｉｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
０
Ｃｏｎｔｅｎｔｓ
Ｃａｔｅｇｏｒｙ
Ｎｏｎｅ
Enter a memo at [Contents].
Enter a memo within 256 full-width or 512 half-width
characters.
Enter numbers and operators to display
the result.
Press
0 to 9
, and
in this order.
to
Subtract (−)
Multiply (×)
Divide (÷)
Decimal (.)
or
Clear (C)/Clear All (AC)
Other Convenient Functions
366
Select a category icon at [Category].
Press
(Complete).
The memo is saved.
● When you set [Create/Edit] at [Memo(List/Detail)]
of the Edit slide setting, just opening the FOMA
terminal in the Text Memo list allows you to enter
a text memo (P.354).
Add (+)
Calculate (=)
● If the number is indivisible or the result of the
calculation contains a decimal point and proves
to be 10 digits or more, 10th digit and any more
digits than this are discarded for display from the
rightmost digit.
● If the result of the calculation is 10 digits or
more, or if you attempt an illegal calculation (e.g.
division by 0), the error code “0E” appears.
● Minus numbers can be calculated only when you
enter a minus number first.
Displaying a Memo
The contents of a saved memo can be
checked.
From the Menu, select [LifeKit] → [Text
Memo] and press .
Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ ｌｉｓｔ
１／５
Ｆｅｂ ２３ ａｔ Ｋａｒｕｉｚａｗａ
Ｂｏｏｋ ａｉｒｌｉｎｅ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ
Ｍｉｌｋ ａｎｄ ｓｕｇａｒ
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
１２３４５
Select a memo and press
Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
２／５
Ｂｏｏｋ ａｉｒｌｉｎｅ ｔｉｃｋｅｔ ｔｏ
Ｏｋｉｎａｗａ．
Ｃａｔｅｇｏｒｙ
Ｔｒａｖｅｌ
Ｃｒｅａｔｅ ｄａｔｅ
２００８／０２／１０ ０９：１５
Ｌａｓｔ ｕｐｄａｔｅ ｏｎ
２００８／０２／１０ ０９：１５
You can directly display the settings of
each function and set each item. For more
information about settings, see the relevant
pages.
Display
Lifetime Cal.
To copy [Contents] of a memo
Move the cursor to a memo and from the
Function menu, select [Copy Text Memo] →
[Yes].
To delete memos
Move the cursor to a memo and from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one] → [Yes]. To
delete several memos, from the Function menu,
select [Delete] → [Select&delete], and select
memos. Press
(Complete) and select [Yes]. To
delete all memos, from the Function menu, select
[Delete] → [Delete all], enter the Security code,
and select [Yes].
Displaying the Settings of
Various Functions 
Contents
Category
Create date
Last update on
The memo appears.
To edit the memo
Press
(Edit).
Other Convenient Functions
● When you set [Create/Edit] at [Memo(List/Detail)]
of the Edit slide setting, just opening the FOMA
terminal while displaying the text memo list
allows you to edit the text memo (P.354).
Setting data
Set the data to be displayed in
the Lifetime Cal., set whether to
automatically display the items to
remember, or etc. (P.357).
Mail
Set the functions used for i-mode mail,
SMS, and Area Mail (P.225, 233, 236,
etc.).
i-mode
Set the functions used for i-mode
(P.112, 197, etc.).
i αppli
Set automatic activation of software
and software description display
during a download (P.112, 239, 246).
Phonebook
Set the display style and font size of
the Phonebook (P.102).
Call record
Set the Redial/Received record display
ON/OFF (P.141).
PushTalk
Set the operation for originating/
receiving a PushTalk call (P.89).
Record msg Set ON/OFF and the answer time of the
Record message and the answering/
recording image of the Videophone
message (P.73).
ToruCa
Set the operation to be performed
when a ToruCa card is obtained
(P.259).
IC act. notice Set the operation for notifying you that
the FOMA terminal comes within the
FeliCa communication range (P.261).
Schedule
Set the operation of holidays and the
Schedule alarm (P.365, 367).
Input method Set the function for character input
(P.384, 386, etc.).
Continued
367
1
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] and press .
Ａｐｐｌｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
Ｌｉｆｅｔｉｍｅ Ｃａｌ．
Ｍａｉｌ
ｉ−ｍｏｄｅ
ｐｐｌｉ
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ
Ｃａｌｌ ｒｅｃｏｒｄ
ＰｕｓｈＴａｌｋ
Ｒｅｃｏｒｄ ｍｓｇ
ＴｏｒｕＣａ
ＩＣ ａｃｔ． ｎｏｔｉｃｅ
Ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｍｅｔｈｏｄ
Select a function and press
Using the Switch to Place a Call
You can place a voice call to the first phone
number saved as the Memory number (P.375)
of the Phonebook using the switch on the
Earphone/Microphone.
ˎ When the Personal data lock is set, the call cannot
be placed.
ˎ Open the cover of the Earphone/Microphone
Jack and insert the plug of the Earphone/
Microphone into the jack.
The setting display of each function appears.
Using the Earphone/Microphone
with Switch 
When you connect the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (optional), etc. to the
Earphone/Microphone Jack, you can answer
a voice, videophone, or PushTalk call, place
a voice call by simply pressing its switch. You
can also set Earphone/Microphone operation.
● Do not wind the cord of the Earphone/
Microphone around the FOMA terminal. Doing
so may cause the radio wave condition to be
degraded.
● Placing the cord of the Earphone/Microphone
close to the antenna may cause noise.
Connect the Earphone/Microphone to the
FOMA terminal.
Press the switch on the Earphone/
Microphone for over a second in the
stand-by display.
The beep sounds and the call is connected to the
recipient. Talk when the recipient answers the call.
Press the switch on the Earphone/
Microphone for over a second to hang up.
The beep sounds and the call is disconnected.
● If a Phonebook memory number that is saved
as Secret is set for the Memory number, set the
Secret display to [ON] if you want to use the
switch on the Earphone/Microphone to place a
call.
● When you use the MUSIC Player while the FOMA
terminal is closed, you cannot use the switch to
place a call.
Using the Switch to Receive a Call
When receiving a call, press the switch
on the Earphone/Microphone for over a
second.
The beep sounds and the call is connected.
Other Convenient Functions
368
Press the switch on the Earphone/
Microphone for over a second to hang up.
The beep sounds and the call is disconnected.
● When you answer a videophone call using the
switch on the Earphone/Microphone, a substitute
image is sent to the caller.
● You cannot end communication using the
switch on the Earphone/Microphone during
PushTalk communication. Press
to end
communication.
Setting the Operation of the
Earphone/Microphone with Switch
Receiving a Call Automatically
with Earphone 
You can set to automatically answer a voice or
videophone call when the Flat-plug Earphone/
Microphone with Switch (optional), etc. is
connected.
You can set whether to permit the switch on
the Earphone/Microphone to place a voice call.
You can also set a Phonebook memory number
to be used for placing a voice call by pressing
the switch on the Earphone/Microphone.
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call]
→ [Headset setting] → [Headset sw. to
call] and press .
Ａｕｔｏ ａｎｓｗｅｒ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｔｏ ａｎｓｗｅｒ
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Auto answer
setting at [Set].
Enter the time before receiving a call
automatically at [To answer].
Enter from 000 to 120 seconds.
９９９
Select [Voice call]/[OFF] of the switch on
the Earphone/Microphone at [Set].
[Voice call]:
Use the switch on the Earphone/Microphone to
place a voice call.
[OFF]:
Do not use the switch on the Earphone/
Microphone.
Enter a memory number from the
Phonebook used for placing a voice call
at [Memory number].
ＯＦＦ
００５ ｓｅｃ
（０００−１２０）
Ｈｅａｄｓｅｔ ｓｗ． ｔｏ ｃａｌｌ
Ｓｅｔ
ＯＦＦ
Ｍｅｍｏｒｙ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Call]
→ [Headset setting] → [Auto answer
setting] and press .
Press
(Complete).
The Auto answer setting is set.
● When you receive a videophone call, a substitute
image is sent to the caller.
● When the Record message, Voice Mail Service,
Call Forwarding Service, and Auto answer
setting are set simultaneously, and if you want to
give priority to the Auto answer setting, set the
time before starting the answering message for
the Auto answer setting shorter than that for the
Record message and the ring time for the Voice
Mail and Call Forwarding Services.
Enter from 000 to 999.
Press
(Complete).
The Headset sw. to call is set.
Other Convenient Functions
● If you delete phonebook data of the phone
number that is set for the Memory number, the
default Memory number setting 999 is restored.
369
Setting Which Mic to Use
Deleting All Saved Data

You can set to use a microphone during a call
when the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with
Switch (optional), etc. is connected.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Call] → [Headset setting] → [Headset
microphone] and press .
[Valid main]:
Use the earpiece (microphone) of the FOMA
terminal.
[Valid Headset]:
Use the Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with
Switch (optional).
Select a microphone to be used and
press .
The Headset microphone is set.
Resetting to the Default
Settings

You can reset the settings of each function to
the default settings. For the functions that are
reset by the Reset settings and the default
settings of these functions, see the list of reset
items (P.378) and the list of menus (P.420).
Other Convenient Functions
370
ˎ The following data is not deleted.
- Preinstalled data in My picture, MUSIC, i-motion,
Melody, My document, some Kisekae tools, and
Chara-den of the Data Box
(The [スーパーモンキーボール] in My picture is
deleted by folder.)
- Preinstalled Deco-mail templates
- Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli
ˎ The preinstalled i-αppli software “デコ絵つくーる”,
“スーパーモンキーボールモバイル for SO”, “地図ア
プリ”, “Gガイド番組表リモコン”, “ｉアプリバンキ
ング”, and “楽オク出品アプリ2” are deleted.
ˎ Even if you delete a preinstalled Deco mail pict.,
MUSIC, My document, and Chara-den data files,
they are restored if you execute the Reset all
data&set.
ˎ The preset folders are not deleted. The folder names
at the time of purchase are restored, however.
ˎ If you execute the Reset all data&set when 2in1 is
used, the 2in1 is set to OFF.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to ON, all data are deleted
regardless of the 2in1 modes.
Select [Yes] and press
The settings are reset.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [Reset] → [Reset all
data&set] and press .
The Security code screen appears.
ˎ The Reset display also appears by pressing
for over a second in the stand-by display. Select
[Reset all data&set] and press .
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to reset all
settings appears.
You can delete saved data and reset the
settings of each function to the default settings.
For the functions to be reset by the Reset all
data&set, see the list of reset items (P.378) and
the list of menus (P.420).
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [Reset] → [Reset
settings] and press .
The Security code screen appears.
ˎ The Reset display also appears by pressing
for over a second in the stand-by display. Select
[Reset settings] and press .

Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to reset all data
and settings appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The screen for confirming whether to execute
restart operation appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The FOMA terminal is initialized and restarts.
List of Reset Items
The items in which settings, that are made through the associated Function menus, etc., are reset
by executing the Reset settings or Reset all data&set are as follows. For functions that can be
accessed through the menu display, see the list of menus (P.420).
○: Items restored to their default settings
●: Items deleted
Menu
Default setting
Standard menu
Phonebook
PushTalk
phonebook
Data Box
My picture
i-motion
Melody
Music&Video
Channel
Kisekae Tool
Menu guide display
Group setting
Group setting
OFF
Sort
Data security
Mini-Photo creator
Change display
Display quality
Music slide show
Date (new → old)
Data security
Change display
Display quality
Volume adjustment
Volume adjustment
Change display
Reset
settings
○
−
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
●
○
○
○
●
−
Not replicate
6 images
Normal
Repeat: OFF, Effect: Sweet, BGM:
What Can U Do(Mashup Style)※,
Change image quality: Normal, Volume
adjustment: 25
−
6 images
Normal
25
6 images
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
P.321
P.142
P.319
P.322
P.290
P.291
P.142
P.322
P.296
P.305
P.322
P.290
−
P.340
P.338
P.347
P.346
P.349
P.345
P.159
P.162
P.171
P.173
P.172
P.174
P.177
Other Convenient Functions
Change display
6 images
Display quality
Normal
microSD (Same as described for the Data Box)
Music&Video
Volume adjustment
16
Channel
Repeat
OFF
Reservation information
−
MUSIC Player
Change display
Jacket display
Volume adjustment
16
Music settings
Play mode: Normal, Repeat/AVLS: OFF
Usage history
−
Camera
Select size
Still image (Out-camera): Stby(480×
864), Still image (In-camera): VGA(640
×480), Movie: QCIF(176×144)
Face detection
ON
Set attach loc. info
Auto attach loc. info: OFF, Attach loc.
info meth.: From act. camera
Auto Focus
Macro OFF
Multi focus
Multi AF
Flash
OFF
Select save to
Still image: [Camera] folder in My
p i c t u re o f t h e D a t a B o x , M o v i e :
[Camera] folder in i-motion of the Data
Box
Reset all
Page
data&set
P.33
○
P.100
○
P.85
○
※ When you delete [What Can U Do(Mashup Style)] preinstalled at the time of purchase, [Silent] is used as the
default setting if you perform the Reset settings or Reset all data&set.
Continued
371
Menu
Camera
Deco-Snap
Auto save
Mini-Photo creator
Image quality
Digital Zooming
Image stabilize
Auto orientation
Shutter sound
File size
Shoot mode
Select size
Flash
Deco-Snap beep
Whitening mode
Mail security
Alarm
Default setting
OFF
Not replic.
Standard
OFF
AUTO
ON
Sound1
Attach(L)
Image+Sound
QVGA(240×320)
OFF
Smile (Eng.)
OFF
−
Set: OFF, Time: 00:00, Repeat: OFF,
Alarm tone: Alarm (std), Alarm volume:
4, Alarm image: めざましアラーム鳴
動中, Vibrator: OFF, Color: C5:Color 5,
Snooze: OFF
SW Update
Scheduled update time
−
Public mode (Drive mode)
OFF
Input text
Learning data
−
Clipboard
−
i αppli
Change display
Icon(L)
Mail
Alarm
Other Convenient Functions
372
Reset
settings
Reset all
data&set
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Page
P.178
P.179
P.180
P.179
P.180
P.181
P.182
P.164
P.142
P.360
○
●
○
●
●
○
P.460
P.69
P.389
P.387
P.249
Character Entry
For kuten codes, see the “Kuten Code List” (PDF format) included in the supplied CDROM. You need Adobe® Reader® to read the “Kuten Code List” in the PDF format. If Adobe®
Reader® is not installed on your PC, install it from the supplied CD-ROM, which also contains
the Adobe® Reader® software.
For details on using Adobe® Reader®, see “Adobe Reader Help” that is installed with the
software.
About Entering Text ................................................................................................. 382
Entering Text ............................................................................................................ 383
Entering Common Phrases ..................................................................................... 385
Entering Pictographs/Symbols ................................................................................ 386
Editing/Saving Common Phrases ..........................................  386
Quoting Data from the Phonebook, etc. .................................................................. 387
Cutting/Copying/Pasting Text ................................................................................... 387
Entering Text Using Kuten Codes .........................................................  388
Saving the Frequently Used Kanji Words ................................  388
Restoring the Default Settings ..............................................................  389
Using the Downloaded Dictionary ...........................................  389
373
About Entering Text
The overview of the text entry is described
here.
ˎ Characters including JIS level 1 and level 2, 6,355
kanji are available.
ˎ Some complicated kanji characters are abridged or
simplified in part.
■ Text input display
ͦ
ͧ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
あ
■ Changing the character mode or pictograph/
symbol mode
Character mode for half-width
Every time you press
(Mode), the character
mode changes in the order of [漢] → [ｶﾅ] → [Ａａ]
→ [１２].
Character mode for full-width
Every time you press
(Mode), the character
mode changes in the order of [漢] → [カ] → [Ａ]
→ [１].
Pictograph/symbol mode
Every time you press
(Pict/Sym), the character
mode changes in the order of [Ranking] → [Pict.]
→ [Pict-D] → [Symbol].
■ Changing the character mode between fullwidth and half-width
From the Function menu, select [Full/Half size].
ͨ
Ｒ．５１０
Ｆｕｎｃ
ＭＥＮＵ
漢カナＡａ１２
ＯＫ
Ｍｏｄｅ
Ｐｉｃｔ／Ｓｙｍ
※ The screen shown
is an image for
ͩ
explanatory
purpose.
ͦ The name of a function for which characters are
input
ͧ Entered characters
ͨ Number of bytes of characters that can be entered
A half-width character is counted as one byte and
a full-width character as two bytes. The number
of characters is displayed for the SMS main body.
While composing mail, it appears with a “−” (minus
sign) when the number of entered characters
exceeds the limit. The word “ap” (approximately)
may appear.
ͩ Character mode or pictograph/symbol mode
ˎ The character mode or pictograph/symbol mode
available varies depending on the contents to be
edited.
Character mode
Half-width
Full-width
: Kanji/Hiragana ※ ［漢］
: Kanji/Hiragana
［漢］
: Full-width katakana
［ｶﾅ］: Half-width katakana ［カ］
: Full-width alphabet
［Ａａ］: Half-width alphabet ［Ａ］
: Full-width numeric
［１２］: Half-width numeric［１］
Character Entry
※ Characters are always entered in full-width in the
kanji/hiragana mode even if the character mode is
set to half-width.
Ranking
Pictograph/Symbol mode
Pictograph Deco mail
Symbols
pict.※
※ Deco mail pict. is a Deco-mail pictograph that can
be entered in the Edit mail, Edit template display,
and Edit signature displays.
374
■ Entering a character assigned to the same
key twice or more in succession
or wait
After entering the first character, either press
for a while, and the cursor moves automatically.
■ Deleting a character
Move the cursor to the character and press
ˎ The character at the cursor is deleted by pressing
for less than a second. The last character is
deleted when the cursor is at the end of the text.
ˎ All characters at and after the cursor position are
deleted by pressing
for over a second. All
characters are deleted when the cursor is at the end
of the text.
■ Inserting a character
Move the cursor to the position to insert a character
and enter the character. The characters after the
cursor position are shifted to the right of the inserted
character.
■ If the matching kanji word does not appear
If you cannot get the desired conversion, change the
block of characters to be converted. Moving the cursor
with
changes the matching words list/conversion
target words displayed according to the cursor
position.
■ Undoing text
If you have performed an incorrect operation, you can
select, from the Function menu, [Undo] to cancel the
last operation and restore the previous status.
ˎ [Undo] is available for the following actions:
- Confirming character entry ( )
- [Undo]
- Entering common phrases
- Entering pictographs/symbols
- Entering kuten codes (P.388)
- Cutting or pasting (P.387)
- Deleting characters (
- Quoting data from Phonebook, My data, etc.
(P.387)
Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ
four times.
Ａａ１２カナ ＩｍｇＳｙｍ
The characters “んと” are entered and the matching
words list is displayed.
To set the User conversion mode temporarily
When you press
(Convert), the conversion
target words for the User conversion mode
appear.
To change the matching words lists
Press
). Every time you press
), the matching words list changes in the
order of “Aa12カナ” → “ImgSym” → “Direct” →
“Pre.”.
Press
The cursor moves to the matching words list.
Check that the kanji/hiragana mode is selected.
Press
Ｐｒｅ．
検討 健闘 剣道 見当
県道 限度 言動 原動
原動力 ケント 検討中
件と 県と 券と
権と 兼と 健と 圏と
Example: Entering “健闘” (けんとう)
five
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
Entering Text in the Prediction
Conversion Mode
Check the character mode in the text
input display.
three times and press
けんと
Entering Text
Press
times.
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
Press
press
to select [健闘] and
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
け
健闘
Ｄｉｒｅｃｔ
Ｐｒｅ．
Ａａ１２カナ ＩｍｇＳｙｍ
けど 携帯 掲載 掲示板
結果 結構 研究 検索
けどね 件 けれど 決定
KO 県 結婚 健康 系
計画 形式 結局 化粧
Ｐｈｒａｓｅ Ｉｔｅｍ
の は を に で と です
も ね し た て から
する した だ か が
まで へ かも ない とき
る こと ？ ！ 。 、
Matching words list
“健闘” is entered. A selection of words that are
expected to succeed the word “健闘” appears in
the matching words list.
Press
The matching words list closes and “健闘” is
finalized.
● The selected words from the matching words list
are displayed with priority over other words next
time.
● When you enter too many words at once,
“ Convert” is displayed instead of displaying
the matching words list. When you press
, the
conversion target words for the User conversion
mode appear. When you select a word, the word
is displayed in the matching words list from the
next time.
Continued
Character Entry
The first character “け” is entered and the matching
words list is displayed.
To return to the previous character
When passing the target character by pressing
extra keys, press
. Every time you press it,
the character returns to the previous one.
375
Entering Text in the User
Conversion Mode
Example: Entering “健闘” (けんとう)
Change the conversion mode to [User
conversion].
Changing the Conversion Mode
Select the conversion mode from Prediction
conversion or User conversion when the
character mode is the kanji/hiragana mode.
ˎ Follow the same steps as in “Changing the
Conversion Mode” (P.384).
[Prediction]:
When entering characters, a selection of words
predicted by the characters appears in the
matching words list. This is a conversion mode
that a look-ahead strategy is applied to by the
FOMA terminal.
[User conversion]:
Enter the entire reading of the word before
conversion.
Check the character mode in the text
input display.
Check that the kanji/hiragana mode is selected.
Enter a text.
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
けんとう
four times: け
three times: ん
five times: と
three times: う
Press
Press
Press
Press
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] → [Input method] → [Select
conversion] and press .
Select a conversion mode and press
The selected conversion mode is set.
漢カナＡａ１２
Ｒ．５１２
Press
● To change the conversion mode in the text input
display, from the Function menu, select [Input
method] → [Select conversion].
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
検討
Ｕｓｅｒ Ｃｏｎｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ Ｉｔｅｍ
健闘 見当 健投 拳闘
献灯 賢答 けんとう
ケントウ ケントウ
The matching words list for “けんとう” is displayed.
To finalize this word
Press
(Select).
Press
The cursor is moved to the matching words list.
Character Entry
376
Select [健闘] and press
“健闘” is finalized.
To cancel the conversion
Press
(Cancel).
Setting the Movement Method for the
Cursor in the Matching Words List
Entering Common Phrases
For common phrases, see P.434.
You can select a movement method for the
cursor in the matching words list.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] → [Input method] →
[Operation in item] and press .
4 directions/ hor.]:
Use
to move the cursor upward,
downward, to the right, and to the left. When you
scroll the JOG upward and downward, the cursor
moves to the left and right.
[ 4 directions/ vert.]:
Use
to move the cursor upward,
downward, to the right, and to the left. When you
scroll the JOG upward and downward, the cursor
moves upward and downward.
[ hor./ hor.]:
Use
to move the cursor to the left and
right. When you scroll the JOG upward and
downward, the cursor moves to the left and right.
[ hor./ vert.]:
Use
to move the cursor to the left and
right. When you scroll the JOG upward and
downward, the cursor moves upward and
downward.
ˎ Common phrases that are available vary depending
on the contents to be edited. Unavailable categories
are disabled for selection.
Press
(Func) in the text input display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Input phrases] → a category → a
common phrase and press .
Ｃａｔｅｇｏｒｙ
Ｉｎｔｅｒｎｅｔ
Ｅｍｏｔｉｃｏｎ１
Ｅｍｏｔｉｃｏｎ２
Ｅｍｏｔｉｃｏｎ３
Ｇｒｅｅｔｉｎｇｓ
Ｂｕｓｉｎｅｓｓ
Ｐｒｉｖａｔｅ
Ｒｅｐｌｙ
Ｏｒｉｇｉｎａｌ
The selected common phrase is entered.
To check a common phrase
Move the cursor to the common phrase and
press
(Confirm).
Select a movement method for the cursor
and press .
The Operation in item is set.
Setting the Cursor to Move
Automatically
You can set the time before moving the cursor
automatically after entering words.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] → [Input method] → [Auto
cursor] and press .
Select a time before moving the cursor
automatically and press .
Select from [1 to 5].
To set the cursor not to move automatically
Select [OFF].
Character Entry
377
Entering Pictographs/
Symbols
Editing/Saving Common
Phrases

Pictographs and symbols, which displayed in
the order of number of entering in the Pict/Sym
ranking, you entered can be selected when
you enter characters.
For pictographs and symbols, see P.431, 432.
The preinstalled common phrases can be
edited according to the intended use. Your
own common phrases can also be added as
new entries. For the list of common phrases,
see P.434.
Example: Editing “.co.jp” saved in the “Internet”
category
Press
display.
(Pict/Sym) in the text input
(Pict/Sym), the pictograph/
Every time you press
symbol mode changes in the order of [Ranking] →
[Pict.] → [Pict-D] → [Symbol].
Press
(Pict/Sym), select a pictograph,
and press .
The Common phrases display appears.
Ｉｎｐｕｔ
The selected pictograph is displayed on the top of
the text input display. To select the next pictograph,
move the cursor to the desired one and press .
To cancel the all selected pictographs
Press
for over a second.
Press
(Close).
The selected pictographs are entered all at once.
Character Entry
378
● In the Edit mail, Edit template, and Edit signature
displays, every time you select a pictograph, it
is entered at a time. Press
(Close) to end the
pictograph/symbol mode.
● Deco mail pict. can be entered in the Edit mail,
Edit template, and Edit signature displays. You
can enter a Deco mail pict. to compose Decomail (P.208).
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] → [Input method] → [Edit
common phrases] and press .
Select [Internet] → [.co.jp] and press
To reset the common phrase to the default setting
Move the cursor to the common phrase and from
the Function menu, select [Reset] → [Reset one]
→ [Yes]. To restore the default set of common
phrases in a category, from the Function menu,
select [Reset] → [Reset all], enter the Security
code, and select [Yes]. To restore the default set
of common phrases in all categories, press
(Rset all) in the Common phrases display, enter
the Security code, and select [Yes].
To delete a common phrase
Move the cursor to the common phrase and from
the Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes].
Press
(Edit) and edit the contents.
Enter a common phrase within 64 full-width or 128
half-width characters.
Editing is completed.
Quoting Data from the
Phonebook, etc.
Cutting/Copying/Pasting
Text
You can quote data saved in the Phonebook or
Own number (My data) or characters scanned
by the bar code reader to enter in the main
body of mail or in the text input display while
displaying a site.
Example: Quoting from the Phonebook
Press
(Func) in the text input display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Quote phonebook] and press
The Phonebook appears.
To quote the Own number
Select [Quote my data].
To quote texts using the bar code reader
Select [Bar code reader].
Select a name → an item to be quoted
and press .
The selected item appears in the text input display.
● When the selected item contains more characters
than the maximum number of characters that can
be entered, the extra characters are deleted.
The entered characters can be pasted to the
other input display by cutting or copying.
The characters cut or copied are saved in the
clipboard and pasted when the Paste function
is selected. The contents of the clipboard can
be pasted as many times as needed.
ˎ The clipboard is a special memory area where cut
or copied characters are temporarily saved. The
clipboard can hold only one item and it is replaced
with new data when copying or cutting next data to
it.
ˎ The characters in the clipboard are deleted when
the FOMA terminal is powered off.
ˎ A character that cannot be entered to the destination
display is replaced with a half-width space when
pasted. Any extra characters that exceed the
maximum allowable number of characters are
deleted.
ˎ You cannot cut/copy and paste Deco mail pict. or
images inserted in the Deco-mail main body.
■ Cutting
Cut the selected characters and save them in the
clipboard (the selected characters are deleted from
the source display).
Function menu
Cut
Setting option
Cut the selected text.
■ Copying
Copy the selected characters and save them in the
clipboard (the selected characters are not deleted
from the source display).
Function menu
Copy
Attach No.
Item copy
Copy Text Memo
Setting option
Copy the selected text.
Copy a phone number.
C o p y a p h o n e n u m b e r, m a i l
address, etc. item by item.
Copy the contents of the text
memo.
Paste the characters in the clipboard.
Function menu
Paste
Setting option
Paste the copied or cut data.
Continued
Character Entry
■ Pasting
379
Copying/Cutting Text
Press
(Func) in the text input display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Copy] and press
To cut
Select [Cut].
Select the Start point and press
The first character to be copied is set.
To select all characters
Press
(Sel. all).
Select the End point and press
The range of characters to be copied is set and
saved in the clipboard.
Frequently used Kanji words can be saved
in the Prediction or User dictionary. Saved
words are displayed in the matching words list/
conversion target words by priority when you
convert characters.
Prediction Save words that you want to display in the
dictionary matching words list by priority when you
use the Prediction conversion. Up to 300
words can be saved.
User
Save words that you want to display in the
dictionary conversion target words by priority when
you use the User conversion. Up to 200
words can be saved.
Select the position to paste in the text
input display and press
(Func).
ˎ The words saved in the User dictionar y are
automatically saved in the Prediction dictionary, but
not vice versa.
ˎ When you delete a saved word, delete it from the
dictionary to which it is saved.
The Function menu appears.
Example: Saving a word in the Prediction dictionary
Pasting Text
Saving the Frequently Used
Kanji Words

Select [Paste] and press
The copied/cut text is pasted.
The Prediction dictionary display appears.
To add a word to the User dictionary
Select [Settings] → [Application] → [Input
method] → [Edit user dict].
To delete a word
Move the cursor to the word and from the
Function menu, select [Delete one] → [Yes]. To
delete several words, from the Function menu,
select [Select&delete] and select words, press
(Complete), and select [Yes]. To delete all
words, from the Function menu, select [Delete
all], enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
To edit a word
Move the cursor to the word and press .
Entering Text Using Kuten
Codes

You can enter characters, numbers and
symbols using corresponding 4-digit kuten
codes as listed in the Kuten code list.
ˎ For kuten codes, see the “Kuten Code List” (PDF
format) included in the supplied CD-ROM.
Press
(Func) in the text input display.
The Function menu appears.
Select [Input kuten] and press
Ｉｎｐｕｔ ｋｕｔｅｎ
Character Entry
380
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] → [Input method] → [Edit
prediction] and press .
Press
(Create).
Ｅｄｉｔ ｐｒｅｄｉｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｒｅａｄｉｎｇ（Ｋｅｙｗｏｒｄ）
Reading field
Ｗｏｒｄ（Ｐｒｅｄｉｃｔｉｏｎ）
Enter a kuten code.
The character corresponding to the entered kuten
code is entered.
Word field
3
Enter the reading in the reading field.
Enter a reading within 16 hiragana characters.
Enter the word in the word field.
Enter a word within 16 full-width or 32 half-width
characters.
Press
(Complete).
The entered word is saved in the Prediction
dictionary.
Using the Downloaded
Dictionary

Up to 20 dictionaries can be downloaded using
i-mode for use with the FOMA terminal. When
enabling a downloaded dictionary, words
saved in it appear in the matching words list.
Restoring the Default
Settings

Ｄｉｃｔｉｏｎａｒｙ ｆｏｌｄｅｒ
流行語辞書
エリア辞書
大阪弁辞書
The FOMA terminal’s dictionary has a data
learning feature. The data leaning feature
memorizes the frequency in which individual
words are used and give priority to the
frequently used words when displaying them
in the matching words list/conversion target
words.
If you reset the learning data, the order of
priority is reset to the default setting.
To display the detailed information
Move the cursor to the dictionary and from the
Function menu, select [Information].
To change the name
Move the cursor to the dictionary and from the
Function menu, select [Edit name]. Enter a name
within eight full-width or 17 half-width characters.
To delete a dictionary
Move the cursor to the dictionary and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one]
→ [Yes]. To delete several dictionaries, from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Select&delete]
and select dictionaries, press
(Complete),
and select [Yes]. To delete all dictionaries, from
the Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all],
enter the Security code, and select [Yes].
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] → [Input method] → [Reset
data] and press .
The Security code screen appears.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
The screen for confirming whether to reset the
learning data appears.
Select [Yes] and press
The learning data is reset.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Application] → [Input method] →
[Dictionaries] and press .
Select a dictionary and press
(Set).
The Valid/Invalid display appears.
Select [Valid]/[Invalid] and press
When it is set to [Valid], the dictionary is enabled
and “ ” (gray) changes to “ ” (green).
Continued
Character Entry
● If many dictionaries are enabled simultaneously,
some words may not be displayed in the
matching words list.
● T h e d i c t i o n a r y c a n b e d o w n l o a d e d f ro m
“PlayNow by SO”.
[i Menu] → [メニュー/検索] (Menu/Search)
→ [ ケータイ電話メーカー] ( M o b i l e P h o n e
Manufacturers) → [PlayNow by SO] (Japanese
only)
381
Sorting the Downloaded
Dictionaries
When you download several dictionaries, you
can change the order of the dictionaries in
the list to display words of a frequently used
dictionary by priority.
Press
display.
(Func) in the Dictionary folder
The Function menu appears.
Select [Reorder] and press
Select a dictionary and press
The Reorder display appears.
Select a position to move to and press
(Move).
Press
(Complete).
The searching priority is set.
Character Entry
382
Network Services
Available Network Services
You can use the following DoCoMo network services on the FOMA terminal.
For details on the outline and how to use each service, see the relevant pages indicated in
the table below.
Service name
Application
The Voice Mail Service
The Call Waiting Service
The Call Forwarding Service
The Nuisance Call Blocking Service
Notify Caller ID
The Caller ID Display Request Service
The Dual Network Service
Required
Required
Required
Not required
Not required
Not required
Required
Monthly
charge
Paid
Paid
Free
Free
Free
Free
Paid
Page
Service name
Application
P.392
P.393
P.393
P.394
P.45
P.395
P.395
The English Guidance Service
The Multi Number Service
2in1
OFFICEED
Public mode (Drive mode)
Public mode (Power off)
Melody Call
Not required
Required
Required
Required
Not required
Not required
Required
Monthly
charge
Free
Paid
Paid
Paid
Free
Free
Paid
Page
P.395
P.397
P.398
P.402
P.69
P.70
P.115
ˎ You cannot use the network services when you are outside of the service area or in a location without the
radio wave.
ˎ For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【Network services】”.
ˎ For subscription and inquiry, call the “General Contact” on the backcover of this manual.
ˎ “Deactivating the service” of the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service, etc. does not cancel your
subscription to the service itself.
ˎ “OFFICEED” is a paid service that requires a subscription. For more information, see the DoCoMo’s
website for business customers (http://www.docomo.biz/d/212/).
Using the Voice Mail Service ................................................................................... 392
Using the Call Waiting Service ................................................................................ 393
Using the Call Forwarding Service .......................................................................... 393
Using the Nuisance Call Blocking Service ............................................................... 394
Using the Caller ID Display Request Service .......................................................... 395
Using the Dual Network Service .............................................................................. 395
Using the English Guidance Service ....................................................................... 395
Using the Service Numbers ..................................................................................... 396
Selecting an Operation for an Incoming Call during a Call ..............  396
Setting Remote Control .................................................................  397
Using the Multi Number Service .............................................................................. 397
Using 2in1................................................................................................................. 398
Using OFFICEED ................................................................................. 402
Saving a New Service to Use It ....................... 402
383
Using the Voice Mail Service
The Voice Mail Service takes messages for
you, as long as it answers a call with the
answering message, if there is an incoming
voice or videophone call when you are in a
location without the radio wave, while the
FOMA terminal is powered off, or when you are
in a situation where you cannot answer a call.
ˎ When the Voice Mail Service and Record Message
(P.72) are set simultaneously, and if you want to give
priority to the Voice Mail Service, set the ring time for
the Voice Mail Service shorter than the time before
starting the answering message for the Record
Message.
ˎ When the Voice Mail Service is set to “Activate”
and if you do not answer an incoming voice or
videophone call, the call is saved in the Received
record as a “Missed call” and the notification icon
“ ” (Missed call) appears in the stand-by display.
ˎ When the Call Forwarding Service is set to “Activate”,
the Voice Mail Service is automatically deactivated.
■ Basic flow of the Voice Mail Service
Step 1 Activate the service.
Step 2 The caller leaves a message.
Step 3 Play back the Voice Mail message.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Voice
Mail] and press .
Set each item.
Menu item
Activate※
Network Services
384
Set ring time
Operation
Select [Activate] → [Activate]/
[Ring+Activate] (→ Enter the ring
time) → [Yes].
ˎ When you select [Ring+Activate],
you can set the ring time (000 to
120 seconds) and activate the
Voice Mail Service.
ˎ When you select [Ring+Activate],
t h e Vo i c e M a i l S e r v i c e i s
activated by Number A.
When
2in1 is set to the B mode,
ˎ
you cannot select the method of
activating the Voice Mail Service.
Select [Set ring time] → Enter the
ring time (000 to 120 seconds) →
(Complete).
Menu item
Deactivate※
Check setting
Operation
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes].
Select [Check setting].
ˎ When 2in1 is set to either the
B or Dual mode, the screen for
selecting either Number A or
Number B appears.
Play messages※ Select [Play messages] → [Yes]
→ Operate as instructed by the
guidance.
ˎ The displayed number is the
number that the guidance
announces when playing back
n e w Vo i c e M a i l m e s s a g e s .
A l r e a d y s a v e d Vo i c e M a i l
messages are not included.
ˎ You can also play back the
record message by pressing
(Link) in the stand-by display and
selecting “ ”.
Select [Voice Mail setting] → [Yes]
→ Operate as instructed by the
guidance.
Select [Check messages].
Check
messages
ˎ When a new message is stored
at the Voice Mail Service Center,
the notification icon “ ” (Voice
Mail message) appears in the
stand-by display.
Tone/Vibrate
Set whether to alert you of a new
notice
message with the mail tone when it
(Default: ON)
is received at the Voice Mail Service
Center.
Select [Tone/Vibrate notice] →
[ON]/[OFF].
Delete VM icon Select [Delete VM icon] → [Yes].
Missed Activate Notify you of a new message by
Call
SMS when it is received while the
notice
FOMA terminal is powered off or
outside of the service area.
Select [Missed Call notice] →
[Activate] → [All calls]/[With Caller
ID] → [Yes].
ˎ Even if the caller is saved in the
Phonebook, the caller ID of the
caller is notified and the name
saved in the Phonebook is not
displayed.
Deactivate Select [Missed Call notice] →
[Deactivate] → [Yes].
Select [Missed Call notice] →
Check
[Check setting].
setting
Voice Mail
setting※
※ When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, the screen for
selecting either Number A or Number B appears.
Notes on the service for the videophone
● When the Voice Mail Service takes a videophone
message for you, it is notified to you by SMS.
● To change the settings of the Voice Mail Service
for videophone support, press
in the stand-by display and operate as
instructed by the guidance.
● A videophone of AV32K type is disabled for
connection to the Voice Mail Service Center.
● When you connect to the Voice Mail Service
Center using Chara-den, the DTMF operation
is not available. From the function menu, select
[DTMF send mode] (P.75).
Using the Call Waiting
Service
When there is another incoming call while you
are on a call, the in-call ring tone notifies you
of the second call. You can answer the second
call by putting the first call on hold. You can
also put your current call on hold and place a
call to another party.
ˎ When you receive a videophone call during a
voice call, you can answer the videophone call
by disconnecting the voice call. You cannot
answer a voice/videophone call that arrives during
a videophone call. However, it is saved in the
Received record.
ˎ To use the Call Waiting Service, set the Arrival Call
Act (P.396) to [Answer]. If it is set to other operation,
you cannot answer a second voice call received
while you are on a voice call even if the Call Waiting
Service is activated.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Waiting] and press .
Set each item.
Menu item
Activate
Deactivate
Check setting
Operation
Select [Activate] → [Yes].
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes].
Select [Check setting].
● To put the current call on hold and answer an
incoming call, press
(Call). When you put a
call on hold, the message “Connecting” appears.
Every time you press
(Switch), you can switch
between the calls. To disconnect the put on hold
call, from the Function menu, select [Release
Hold Call].
● To disconnect the current call and answer an
incoming call, press
and
Using the Call Forwarding
Service
The Call Forwarding Service forwards a voice
or videophone call to a preset forwarding
number when you are in a location without the
radio wave, the FOMA terminal is powered off,
or you do not answer the call within the preset
ring time.
ˎ When the Call Forwarding Service and Record
Message (P.72) are set simultaneously, and if you
want to give priority to the Call Forwarding Service,
set the ring time for the Call Forwarding Service
shorter than the time before starting the answering
message for the Record Message.
ˎ When the Call Forwarding Service is set to “Activate”
and if you do not answer an incoming voice or
videophone call, the call is saved in the Received
record as a “Missed call” and the notification icon
“ ” (Missed call) appears in the stand-by display.
ˎ When you receive a videophone call, the call is
disconnected if the forwarding number does not
support a videophone feature compliant with
3G-324M.
■ Basic flow of the Call Forwarding Service
Step 1
Step 2
Step 3
Step 4
Save the forwarding number.
Activate the Call Forwarding Service.
Receive a call on your FOMA terminal.
If you do not answer the call, it is
automatically forwarded to the specified
forwarding number.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Forwarding] and press .
Network Services
Continued
385
2
Set each item.
Menu item
Activate※
Deactivate※
Change FWD
number
If FWD number
busy
Check setting
Operation
Select [Activate] → [Activate]/
[Set+Activate](→ Enter the
forwarding number and ring time) →
[Yes].
ˎ When you select [Set+Activate],
y o u c a n s e t t h e f o r w a rd i n g
number (within 26 digits) and
ring time (000 to 120 seconds)
and activate the Call Forwarding
Service.
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode,
you cannot select the method of
activating the Call Forwarding
Service.
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes].
Select [Change FWD number]
→ Enter the forwarding number
(within 26 digits) → Select [Set]/
[Set+Activate].
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B mode,
select [Change FWD number]
→ enter the forwarding number
(within 26 digits) → select [Yes].
Set whether to connect to the
Voice Mail Service Center when the
forwarding number is busy.
Select [If FWD number busy] → [Not
connect]/[Connect].
Select [Check setting].
ˎ When 2in1 is set to either the
B or Dual mode, the screen for
selecting either Number A or
Number B appears.
※ When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, the screen for
selecting either Number A or Number B appears.
● To set on/off of the Call Forwarding guidance,
press
in the stand-by
display and operate as instructed by the
guidance.
Network Services
386
Using the Nuisance Call
Blocking Service
The Nuisance Call Blocking Service prevents
receiving a “nuisance call” such as prank
phone calls. When you set the Bar Nuisance
Calls, further calls from registered nuisance
call numbers are automatically rejected and
the call rejection guidance is played back on
the caller’s phone.
ˎ The ring tone does not sound when there is an
incoming call from the saved phone number. The
call is not saved in the Received record, either.
ˎ When you receive a videophone call from a caller
who is saved as a nuisance caller, it is disconnected
after playing back the call rejection video guidance
on the caller’s phone.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Bar
Nuisance Calls] and press .
Set each item.
Menu item
Register Caller
Operation
Save the phone number of the last
received call.
Select [Register Caller] → [Yes].
Select [Reg. selected No.] → Enter
Reg. selected
the phone number (within 22 digits)
No.
→ Select [Yes].
Delete all entries Select [Delete all entries] → [Yes].
Delete last entry D e l e t e t h e l a s t s a v e d p h o n e
number. You can delete another
phone number from the last
saved one by repeating the same
operation.
Select [Delete last entry] → [Yes].
Select [Check No. of entry].
Check No. of
entry
Using the Caller ID Display
Request Service
When you receive a voice or videophone
call without a caller ID, the Caller ID Display
Request Service answers the call with a
guidance requesting the caller to send the
caller ID and then automatically disconnects
the call.
ˎ When there is an incoming call from the caller
who does not notify the phone number, the ring
tone does not sound. The call is not saved in the
Received record either.
ˎ When you receive a videophone call without a caller
ID, it is disconnected after playing back the caller
ID display request video guidance on the caller’s
phone.
ˎ When you receive a PushTalk call without a caller
ID, the caller ID display request guidance is not
played back on the caller’s phone and the call is
disconnected.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Caller
ID Request] and press .
Set each item.
Menu item
Activate
Deactivate
Check setting
Operation
Select [Activate] → [Yes].
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes].
Select [Check setting].
Menu item
Switch Dual
Network
Check setting
Operation
Switch the Dual Network Service to
enable using the FOMA terminal for
this service.
Select [Switch Dual Network] →
Enter the network security code →
Select [Yes].
Select [Check setting].
Using the English
Guidance Service
You can set English voice guidance to be
played during various network service settings
such as the Voice Mail Service and when you
are outside of the service area.
If a caller is also using this service, the settings
of a call from this caller have priority over the
settings on the recipient’s phone.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[English Guidance] → [Guidance setting]
and press .
Select a target for the English Guidance
Service and press .
[Call+Income]:
Set both the guidance that you hear when you
place a call and that a recipient hears upon
receiving your call.
[Call]:
Set the guidance that you hear when you place a
call.
[Income]:
Set the guidance that a recipient hears upon
receiving your call.
Using the Dual Network
Service
The Dual Network Service enables you to use a
Mova terminal using the phone number of the
FOMA terminal you use at present. This service
enables you to select and use both the FOMA
and Mova service areas as required.
Set each item.
Select a language for the guidance to be
played during outgoing calls and press
Network Services
ˎ You cannot use the FOMA and Mova terminals at
the same time.
ˎ Make sure to perform the operation for switching the
Dual Network Service from the FOMA terminal not
using the service.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Dual
Network] and press .
Continued
387
4
Select a language for the guidance played
during incoming calls and press .
[Japanese]:
Set the guidance to Japanese.
[Japanese+English]:
Set the guidance in the order of Japanese →
English.
[English+Japanese]:
Set the guidance in the order of English →
Japanese.
To check the settings
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [English
Guidance] → [Check setting].
Using the Service Numbers
Selecting an Operation for an Incoming
Call during a Call

If you are subscribing to the Voice Mail, Call
Forwarding, or Call Waiting Service, you can
set the operation you want to perform when
you receive the second voice or videophone
call during a call.
ˎ If you do not subscribed to the Voice Mail, Call
Forwarding, or Call Waiting Service, you cannot
answer a second incoming call received while you
are on a current call.
ˎ To use the Arrival Call Act function, set the In-call
arrival act to “Activate”.
You can call DoCoMo General Inquiries,
Contact for Repairs, etc.
[Answer]:
You can answer a call or forward it manually to
the Voice Mail Service Center or a forwarding
number.
[Voice Mail]:
An incoming call is connected to the Voice Mail
Service Center.
[Call Forwarding]:
An incoming call is forwarded to a saved
forwarding number.
[Call Rejection]:
An incoming call is rejected.
ˎ Depending on the UIM being used, the items to be
displayed may be different or some items may not
be displayed.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Service Numbers] and press .
The Service Numbers display appears.
[ドコモ故障問合せ] (Contact for Repairs):
Call the DoCoMo representative of Contact for
Repairs.
[ドコモ総合案内・受付] (General Inquiries):
Call the DoCoMo information desk of General
Inquiries (DoCoMo Information Center).
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Arrival Call Act] and press .
Select a contact number → [Yes] and
press .
Select an operation for an incoming call
and press .
The operation for an incoming call during a call is
set.
The call is connected to the contact number.
● When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, the screen for
selecting either Number A or Number B appears.
Starting/Stopping the In-call
Arrival Act
You can start or stop the operation you have
selected for the Arrival Call Act.
Network Services
388
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [In-call
arrival act] and press .
Set each item.
Menu item
Activate
Deactivate
Check setting
Operation
Select [Activate] → [Yes].
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes].
Select [Check setting].
Setting Remote Control

You can set to be able to operate the Voice
Mail or Call Forwarding Service, etc. from a
general push-button telephone, public phone,
DoCoMo mobile phones, etc.
Setting Phone Number Details
ˎ You cannot change the phone number displayed
under “Basic Number”. However, you can set the
ring tone/incoming image using the Incoming set,
etc.
ˎ To use the Voice Mail or Call Forwarding Service
overseas, the Remote Control function must be set
in advance.
Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Remote Control] and press .
Ｍｕｌｔｉ Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ ｃａｌｌ
ＯＦＦ
＜Ｂａｓｉｃ Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ＞
基本契約番号
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
＜Ａｄｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ Ｎｏ．１＞
付加番号１
Set each item.
Menu item
Activate
Deactivate
Check setting
Operation
Select [Activate] → [Yes].
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes].
Select [Check setting].
着信音１
付加番号１着信画像
＜Ａｄｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ Ｎｏ．２＞
付加番号２
Using the Multi Number
Service
The Multi Number Service enables you to
add up to two numbers, Additional No.1
and Additional No.2 in addition to the Basic
Number, as your FOMA ter minal phone
numbers.
ˎ You cannot use the Multi Number Service and 2in1
simultaneously.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Multi
Number] → [Number Setting] and press
Set each item.
Item
Description
Multi
Select [ON]/[OFF] of the Multi Number call.
Number [ON] : Enable to select a phone number to
call
be used for placing a call from the
Option call display.
[OFF] : You cannot select a phone number
when you place a call.
Enter a name within 10 full-width or 20 halfwidth characters.
Enter a phone number within 26 digits.
Select a ring tone from MUSIC/i-motion/Melody
of the Data Box.
ˎ You can set the following files. You can
select a Chaku-Uta® from [i-motion].
Category File format
MUSIC※ AAC-LC/
HE-AAC
i-motion※ MP4
Melody
SMF/
MFi
File size Image size
Max. 5M
−
bytes
Max. 10M Max. [VGA
bytes
(640×480)]
Max. 350K
−
bytes
※ Some files may not be set.
ˎ To mute the ring tone, select [Silent].
Network Services
Continued
389
Item
Description
Select an incoming image from My picture/
i-motion of the Data Box.
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category File format File size Image size
Max. 250K Max. [Stby
My picture GIF/
bytes
(480×864)],
JPEG
Max. W480×
H288 for GIF
animation
SWF
Max. 100K
−
bytes
i-motion※ MP4
Max. 10M Max. [VGA
bytes
(640×480)]
※ Some i-motion may not be set.
Press
(Complete).
The details of a phone number are set.
● If you do not yet subscribe to the Multi Number
Service, use the FOMA terminal with the Multi
Number call set to [OFF].
● If the Multi Number call
Ｃａｌｌｉｎｇ
is set to [ON], a phone
number and name
associated with the Multi
Number (Basic Number/
Additional No.1/Additional
Ａｄｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ Ｎｏ．１
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
No.2) selected in the
Option call display are
displayed while placing a
call.
● When you receive a call,
a phone number and
name associated with the
used Multi Number (Basic
Number/Additional No.1/
Additional No.2) being
used are displayed.
Ｉｎｃｏｍｉｎｇ ｃａｌｌ
Ａｄｄｉｔｉｏｎａｌ Ｎｏ．２
Setting an Originating Phone
Number
You can select a phone number to be used
when you place a call.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Multi
Number] → [Set Multi Number] and press
Select an originating phone number →
[Yes] and press .
The phone number you use for placing a call is set.
To check the phone number you use for placing a
call
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Multi
Number] → [Check Multi Number].
● You can select a phone number manually in the
Option call display when you place a call (P.60).
Using 2in1
You can separately use two phone numbers,
two mail addresses, and exclusive modes for
each on your FOMA terminal as if you have two
terminals.
For the default settings, see the List of menus
(P.420).
Mode
A mode
０９０ＸＸＸＸＸＸＸＸ
B mode
Dual mode
● When you place a call from the Redial or
Received record, the Multi Number previously
used for placing/receiving a call is displayed and
the call is placed using this number.
Network Services
390
Description
You can dial with your phone number
(Number A), send i-mode mail with
Address A, and browse related data.
You can dial with 2in1 phone number
(Number B), access to sites where WEB
mail is available with Address B, and
browse related data.
The mode that supports both functions
of A and B modes.
ˎ Sending/receiving mail for Address B is performed
on the specified WEB mail site.
ˎ Packet communication in B mode is available while
subscribing to the i-mode service.
ˎ For details on 2in1, see the “Mobile Phone User’s
Guide【2in1】”.
ˎ When you replace the UIM (From 2in1 subscriber
to 2in1 subscriber) while 2in1 is used, to obtain a
correct Number B, you need to perform the 2in1
function OFF (P.400) first, and then set the 2in1 to
ON again.
When you replace the UIM (From 2in1 subscriber to
2in1 non-subscriber), perform the 2in1 function OFF.
ˎ When placing a voice/videophone call or originating
64K data communication from an external device,
if 2in1 is set to either the A mode or Dual mode, it
is done by Number A. When the B mode is set, it is
done by Number B.
Set each item.
You can set the operations such as the Stand-by
display and Receive avoid. setting by setting
the ON for 2in1.
Menu
Operation
item
Mode
Switch the 2in1 modes.
switching Select [Mode switching] → [A mode]/[B mode]/
[Dual mode].
Phonebook Change the 2in1 settings saved for the Phonebook.
2in1
ˎ When an entry is saved in the Phonebook,
the Phonebook 2in1 setting compatible with
setting
the 2in1 mode is automatically saved.
● Set each entry
Select [Phonebook 2in1 setting] →
phonebook data →
(Set) → Select
[A]/[B]/[Common].
● Set for a group
Select [Phonebook 2in1 setting] →
(Func) → Select [Set all groups] → a group
(Set) → Select [A]/[B]/[Common].
→
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [2in1
setting] and press .
Stand-by Set the stand-by display for the B and Dual modes.
display Select [Stand-by display] → [B mode]/[Dual mode]
→ an image from My picture of the Data Box.
ˎ You can set the following files.
Setting 2in1
The Security code screen appears.
ˎ The 2in1 setting display also appears by
pressing
for over a second in the stand-by
display.
Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
When 2in1 is already set to ON
The 2in1 setting display appears.
Select [Yes] and press
Category File format File size Image size
Max. 250K Max. [Stby
My picture GIF/
bytes
(480×864)],
JPEG
Max. W480×
H288 for GIF
animation
SWF
Max. 100K
−
bytes
ˎ To specify no image, select [None].
２ｉｎ１ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｍｏｄｅ ｓｗｉｔｃｈｉｎｇ
Ｐｈｏｎｅｂｏｏｋ ２ｉｎ１ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ｓｔａｎｄ−ｂｙ ｄｉｓｐｌａｙ
Ｓｅｔ ｃａｌｌ／ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ Ｎｏ．
２ｉｎ１ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ ＯＦＦ
Ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ａｖｏｉｄ． ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
2in1 is set to ON and the 2in1 setting display
appears.
Network Services
Continued
391
Menu
Operation
item
Set call/ To identify the call placed or received using
receive Number B, set the font color and ring tone of
No.
the incoming/receiving call display.
● Set the font color
Select [Set call/receive No.] → [Disp. call/rcv.
No.] → [dark]/[light].
● Set the ring tone
Select [Set call/receive No.] → [Ringtone
for Number B] → [Incoming call]/[Incoming
V.phone] → a r ing tone from MUSIC/
i-motion/Melody of the Data Box.
ˎ You can set the following files.
Category File format
MUSIC※ AAC-LC/
HE-AAC
i-motion※ MP4
Melody
Network Services
392
SMF/
MFi
File size Image size
Max. 5M
−
bytes
Max. 10M Max. [VGA
bytes
(640×480)]
Max. 350K
−
bytes
※ Some files may not be set.
ˎ If you select [ON] at [Link incoming call],
the ring tone for the Incoming V.phone
follows the setting for the Incoming call.
ˎ When you receive a call without the caller
ID, the ring tone follows the setting of
[Ringtone for Number B].
2in1
Quit using the 2in1 functions.
function Select [2in1 function OFF] → [Yes].
OFF
Receive Set the restriction for incoming call of Number
avoid. A and Number B.
setting ● Set the restriction for incoming call for
Number A and Number B individually
Select [Receive avoid. setting] → [Change
receive avoid.] → [Rcv. avoid. (Number
A)]/[Rcv. avoid. (Number B)] → [Receive]/
(Complete).
[Avoid]/[Unchange] →
● Check the current setting
Select [Receive avoid. setting] → [Check
receive avoid.] → [Yes].
● Activate/deactivate the Mode link
When the A mode is used, allow to receive
a call only for Number A. When the B mode
is used, allow to receive a call only for
Number B. When the Dual mode is used,
allow to receive a call for both Number A
and Number B.
Select [Receive avoid. setting] → [Mode link
setting] → [Yes].
ˎ When the Mode link setting is set to
“Activate”, you cannot change the mode
while the FOMA is outside of the service
area.
● S e t t h e R e c e i v e a v o i d . s e t t i n g f ro m
overseas
Select [Receive avoid. setting] → [Rcv.
avoid. set(Int.)] → Operate as instructed by
the guidance.
Selecting a Phone Number
When Placing a Call
When the Dual mode is set, you can select a
phone number to place a call.
Enter a phone number in the stand-by
display and press
To place a videophone call
Press
(V.phone).
ドコモ次郎
Ｓｅｌｅｃｔ ｎｕｍｂｅｒ
ｔｏ ｃａｌｌ
Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ Ａ
Ｎｕｍｂｅｒ Ｂ
Ｃａｎｃｅｌ
Select [Number A]/[Number B] and press
Place a call from the selected phone number.
● When you place a call using the Redial/Received
record, the phone number which was used to
receive/place a call previously is displayed and
the call is placed using this phone number.
Functions Available for Each Mode
The funcions which only differ from each mode are listed (the functions which are common with
the A mode are excluded).
Service
Voice/
videophone
call
Phonebook
Call
Number A
Number B
Dual mode
Selectable when placing a call
※1
Receive
Display
Change name※2
Phonebook 2in1 setting
when saving new data
Receive all from Infrared/iC
communication/microSD
memory card※3
Receive one from Infared/iC
communication/microSD
memory card※3
UIM
Copy from
phonebook FOMA terminal
to UIM
Copy from
UIM to FOMA
terminal
Display
All
A/Common
A/Common
B/Common
B/Common
All
All
Redial
record
Received Display
record
Mail/SMS Display
Send
Receive
i-αppli
Own number
B mode
Copy the Phonebook 2in1 setting of the sender※4
Call from Number A
Call from Number B
All
Call for Number A
Call for Number B
All
Common
ˎ Mail sent for/from Address A FOMA terminal
ˎ SMS sent for/from Number A ˎ Received mail sent for
Address B saved in the
FOMA terminal (at the WEB
mail site, mail set to [端末
に保存] (save to the FOMA
terminal)), newly arrived
notification mail, or alarm
notification mail
ˎ SMS sent for Number B
WEB mail site
ˎ Mail sent for/from Address
FOMA terminal
ˎ Mail from Address A
ˎ SMS from Number A
ˎ Cannot send mail/SMS
WEB mail site
ˎ Mail from Address B
ˎ Mail for Address A/SMS for ˎ Mail for Address A/SMS for
Number A (with sound)
Number A (without sound)
ˎ Received mail sent for ˎ Received mail sent for
Address B saved in the
Address B saved in the
FOMA terminal, newly
FOMA terminal, newly
arrived notification mail, or
arrived notification mail, or
alarm notification mail/SMS
alarm notification mail/SMS
sent for Number B (without
sent for Number B (with
sound)
sound)
Copy mail/SMS following the sender status※4
FOMA terminal
ˎ Mail sent for/from Address
A, received mail sent for
Address B saved in the
FOMA terminal, newly
arrived notification mail, or
alarm notification mail
ˎ SMS sent for/from Address
ˎ SMS sent for Number B
WEB mail site
ˎ Mail sent for/from Address
FOMA terminal
ˎ Mail from Address A※5
ˎ SMS from Number A
WEB mail site
ˎ Mail from Address B
ˎ Mail for Address A/SMS for
Number A (with sound)
ˎ Received mail sent for
Address B saved in the
FOMA terminal, newly
arrived notification mail, or
alarm notification mail/SMS
sent for Number B (with
sound)
Network Services
PushTalk
Receive all from Infrared/iC
communication/microSD
memory card※3
Receive one from Infared/iC
communication/microSD
memory card※3
SMS in
Copy from
UIM
FOMA terminal
to UIM
Copy from
UIM to FOMA
terminal
Originate
Receive
PushTalk phonebook
A mode
Number A
Number A
Display
Available all
Number A/Address A
Not available
Number A
Cannot display
Available※6
Number B/Address B
Display
Available※7
Number A/B/Address A/B
Continued
393
※1 To place a call, Number A is the default setting
for the Phonebook of the A/Common setting, and
Number B is the one for the Phonebook of the B
setting.
※2 When the phone number of placing/receiving
a call or sending/receiving SMS and mail
address of receiving/sending mail are saved
in the Phonebook, after comparing them with
the phonebook data, the name saved in the
Phonebook of each phone number and mail
address is displayed.
※3 When you save the phonebook entries or mail from
the microSD memory card to the FOMA terminal,
you can save them based on each file in the
microSD memory card.
※4 When the sender’s mobile phone is not compatible
with the 2in1 functions, Number A is applied.
※5 When you compose new mail in the Dual mode,
you can select a mail address from the Phonebook
of the B mode setting but note that mail is sent
from Address A.
※6 Except i-αppli with mail, i-αppli using mail, and
i-αppli stand-by display.
※7 Except i-αppli stand-by display.
Using OFFICEED
Saving a New Service to
Use It 
When DoCoMo adds a new network service,
you can save the service in the Menu and use
it.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Additional service] and press .
Set each item.
Menu item
Register USSD
● To use a service
Select [Register USSD] → a
service.

“OFFICEED” is a fixed-rate service within
a group provided by IMCS (Indoor Mobile
Communication System). You may need to
apply separately to use this service.
ˎ For more information (provided only in Japanese),
see the DoCoMo’s website for business customers
(http://www.docomo.biz/d/212/).
Operation
[Register USSD] → [Unregistered]
(Edit) → Enter a name of the
→
service at [Service] (within 10 fullwidth or 20 half-width characters) →
Enter a USSD command at [USSD]
(Complete).
(within 20 digits) →
Register ans
word
● To delete a service
[Register USSD] → Move the
cursor to a service and press
(Func) → Select [Delete one] (to
delete all services, select [Delete
all] → enter the Security code) →
Select [Yes].
[Register ans word] →
(Edit) → Enter
[Unregistered] →
an answering message at [Answer
wording] (within 10 full-width or 20
half-width characters) → Enter a
USSD command at [USSD] (within
20 digits) →
(Complete).
● To delete an answering message
[Register ans word] → Move
t h e c u r s o r t o a n a n sw e r i n g
message and press
(Func)
→ Select [Delete one] (to delete
all answering messages, select
[Delete all] → enter the Security
code) → Select [Yes].
Network Services
394
PC Connection
For detailed information on Data Communication, see the “Manual for PC connection setting”
(PDF format) included in the supplied CD-ROM or available on the DoCoMo’s website. You
need Adobe® Reader® to read the “Manual for PC connection setting” in the PDF format. If
Adobe® Reader® is not installed on your PC, install it from the supplied CD-ROM, which also
contains the Adobe® Reader® software.
For details on using Adobe® Reader®, see “Adobe Reader Help” that is installed with the
software.
About Data Communication .....................................................................................
Before Using Data Communication ..........................................................................
Preparations and Flow of Data Transfer (OBEX™ Communication) ........................
Preparations and Flow of Data Communication ......................................................
AT Commands .........................................................................................................
About the Supplied CD-ROM ..................................................................................
Introduction of DoCoMo keitai datalink ....................................................................
404
406
407
407
408
408
408
395
About Data Communication
You can use the FOMA terminal for three types
of data communication, packet communication,
64K data communication, and data transfer
(OBEX™ communication).
ˎ The FOMA terminal does not support Remote
Wakeup.
ˎ T h e F O M A t e r m i n a l d o e s n o t s u p p o r t FA X
communication.
ˎ If you are going to connect the FOMA terminal to
DoCoMo’s “sigmarionⅡ”/“sigmarionⅢ”/“musea”
PDA to perform data communication, you should
update “sigmarionⅡ”/“musea”. For details about
updating, see the DoCoMo’s website.
ˎ 64K data communication to be performed by
connecting to a PC is not available overseas. When
you originate the packet communication, use the IP
connection to communicate (the PPP connection
cannot originate the packet communication).
Data Transfer (OBEX™ Communication)
Data such as an image, music, Phonebook,
or mail can be sent and received between the
FOMA terminal and other FOMA terminal or
device such as a PC.
■ Infrared communication (P.329, 330)/iC
communication (P.332, 333)
FOMA terminal
FOMA terminal
PC, etc.
■ FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function
01/02 (optional) (P.314, 344)/microSD
memory card (P.306)/DoCoMo keitai datalink
(P.408)
FOMA terminal
PC Connection
396
PC, etc.
Packet Communication
A charge applies to this type of communication
based on the volume of exchanged data
(maximum reception speed 3.6Mbps,
maximum transmission speed 384kbps).
You can perform packet communication by
connecting the FOMA terminal to a PC using
the FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function
01/02 (optional) and making the necessary
settings. Use a FOMA packet communicationcompliant access point such as DoCoMo’s
Internet connection service “mopera U”/
“mopera”. You can also exchange data by
accessing an in-house LAN connected to the
FOMA network.
ˎ Note that packet communication could be expensive
if you exchange large volumes of data such as
viewing sites or Internet home pages that contain
images or downloading files.
ˎ The maximum transmission/reception speed is
384kbps outside of the FOMA HIGH-SPEED Area.
ˎ When you use DoCoMo’s “sigmarionⅢ”/“sigmarion
Ⅱ”/“musea” PDA to perform packet communication,
the maximum transmission/reception speed is
384kbps. It does not support the high-speed
communication compatible with HIGH-SPEED Area.
64K Data Communication
A charge applies to this type of communication
based on the duration of a communication.
You can perform 64K data communication
by connecting the FOMA terminal to a PC
using the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional) and making the
necessary settings. Use a FOMA 64K data
communication-compliant access point such
as DoCoMo’s Internet connection service
“mopera U”/“mopera” or ISDN synchronous
64K access points.
ˎ Note that 64K data communication could be
expensive if it is performed for a long period of time.
Precautions on Use
Usage Fee of Internet Service Provider
When you use the Internet, a usage fee is
required for your Internet service provider. This
usage fee, which is separate from the FOMA
service charges, must be paid directly to the
Internet service provider. For details about
usage fees, contact your Internet service
provider.
You can use DoCoMo’s Internet connection
service “mopera U”/“mopera”.
To use “mopera U”, you need to subscribe to
this service (paid service). No monthly charge
is required to use “mopera” and you do not
need to subscribe to it.
Setting a Host (Such as an Internet
Service Provider)
The host for packet communication is different
from the host for 64K data communication.
To use packet communication, use a packet
communication-compliant host; to use 64K
data communication, use a FOMA 64K data
communication-compliant host or ISDN
synchronous 64K-compliant host.
ˎ You cannot connect to a DoPa access point.
User Authentication for Network Access
User authentication (ID and password) may
be required when connecting to some hosts.
If user authentication is required, enter your ID
and password on the communication software
(dial-up network) for connecting to the host.
The Internet service provider or network
administrator of the host assigns an ID and
password. For details, contact your Internet
service provider or network administrator of the
host.
Access Authentication for the Use of a
Browser
When a FirstPass-compatible site that you
access through the Internet browser on your
PC requires the FirstPass (user certificate) as
an access authentication, install the FirstPass
PC software from the supplied CD-ROM
and perform necessary settings. For details,
see “FirstPassManual” (PDF format) in the
[FirstPassPCSoft] folder on the CD-ROM. You
need Adobe® Reader® (Version 6.0 or later is
recommended) to read “FirstPassManual” (PDF
format). If Adobe ® Reader ® is not installed
on your PC, install it from the same CD-ROM,
which also contains the Adobe ® Reader ®
software.
For details on using Adobe ® Reader ®, see
“Adobe Reader Help” that is installed with the
software.
Conditions of Packet and 64K Data
Communication
The following conditions are necessary to
perform communication using the FOMA
terminal (for using in Japan).
- The FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(optional) can be used on your PC.
- Your PDA must have FOMA packet and 64K data
communication support.
- You must be inside of the FOMA’s service area.
- The host for packet communication must have
FOMA packet communication support.
- The host for 64K data communication must
have FOMA 64K or ISDN synchronous 64K data
communication support.
Note, however, that even if you comply with
the above conditions, you may not be able to
perform communication if the base station is
congested or radio wave condition is poor.
PC Connection
397
Before Using Data
Communication
About the Operating Environment
Operating environment of a PC to be used for
data communication is as follows.
Item
Required environment
PC main unit ˎ PC/AT compatible machine with a
built-in or removable CD-ROM drive
ˎ USB port (Universal Serial Bus
Specification 1.1 compliant)
OS※1
Windows 2000 Professional,
Windows XP,
Windows Vista (Japanese version)
Required
Windows 2000 Professional: 64MB or
memory※2 more
Windows XP: 128MB or more
Windows Vista: 512MB or more
Hard drive
5MB or more free space
capacity※2
Display
High color (65,536 colors) and high
resolution (800×600 dots) or over
(recommended)
※1 Operation on a PC running upgraded OS is not
guaranteed.
※2 The required memory and hard drive capacity may
vary depending on the PC system configuration.
Other Necessary Items
Other than the FOMA terminal and a PC, the
following hardware and software are necessary.
ˎ FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02
(optional) or FOMA USB Cable (optional)
ˎ Supplied CD-ROM “FOMA SO906i CD-ROM”
● This manual assumes that you use the FOMA
USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 (optional).
● Use the exclusive “FOMA USB Cable with
Charge Function 01/02” or “FOMA USB Cable”.
A generic USB cable for a PC connection cannot
be used because it has a different connector
shape.
● If you use USB HUB, it may not work properly.
PC Connection
398
■ Definition of terms
● Administrator
An administrator is authorized access to all
Windows XP, Windows 2000 Professional, and
Windows Vista systems. At least one user with
Administrator privilege is set for each PC. Normally,
a user without Administrator privilege cannot install
the FOMA communication configuration files. For
more information on Administrator privilege, contact
the manufacturer of your PC or a representative of
Microsoft Corporation.
● APN (Access Point Name)
A character string used for identifying the Internet
service provider host or in-house LAN for packet
communication. For example, the APN of “mopera U”
is “mopera.net”.
● cid (Context Identifier)
A registration number available when you save a
packet communication host (APN) in the FOMA
terminal. You can save up to 10 numbers from one
to 10 for the FOMA terminal.
Default cid of the FOMA terminal
Registration number (cid)
4-10
Host (APN)
mopera.ne.jp (mopera)
Undefined
mopera.net (mopera U)
Undefined
● DNS (Domain Name System)
DNS is a system that converts a domain name
(example: nttdocomo.co.jp) into an IP address,
which is used by a PC.
● QoS (Quality of Service)
Service quality technology that enables the
user to use a communication line in accordance
with requirements. If you are using the FOMA
terminal, you can set the communication speed for
connection.
● 通信設定最適化 (Optimizing the communication
settings)
“通信設定最適化” is a “TCP parameter setting”
tool that makes optimal use of TCP/IP transmission
capabilities for packet communication on the FOMA
network. To make the most of the communication
performance of the FOMA terminal, you need to
configure the communication settings using this
software.
Preparations and Flow of Data
Transfer (OBEX™ Communication)
To use the FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional), install the FOMA
communication configuration files.
Install the FOMA communication configuration files
(USB drivers).
ˎ Install from the supplied CD-ROM
or
ˎ Download from the DoCoMo’s website and install
Preparations and Flow of
Data Communication
The preparations required for performing
packet and 64K data communication by
connecting the FOMA terminal to a PC are
given below.
Install the FOMA communication configuration files (USB drivers).
ˎ Install from the supplied CD-ROM
or
ˎ Download from the DoCoMo’s website and install
Connect the FOMA terminal to a PC.
Data transfer
Check the installed FOMA communication configuration files.
When you do not
use the FOMA PC
setup software
When you use the
FOMA PC setup
software
Install the FOMA PC setup software.
Set a host.
Packet
communication
ˎ “mopera U” or
“mopera”
ˎ Other provider
64K data
communication
ˎ “mopera U” or
“mopera”
ˎ Other provider
Perform communication.
Start up communication software that is
compatible with AT commands.
Set a host.
Set ON/OFF for the Notify caller ID.
PC Connection
Set up the dial-up network.
Perform dial-up connection.
399
AT Commands
AT commands are the commands (instructions)
that are executed on a PC for setting and
changing the functions of the FOMA terminal.
For more information on the AT commands, see
the “Manual for PC connection setting” (PDF
format) included in the supplied CD-ROM.
● When you set the supplied CD-ROM in the PC,
a warning window as shown below may appear.
This warning appears because of the security
setting on the Internet Explorer, however, causing
no problem for use.
Click [はい].
※ The window example assumes that Windows
XP is used as an operating system. The actual
window that appears may differ depending on
your PC environment.
About the Supplied CD-ROM
The supplied CD-ROM contains the software
required for data communication using
the FOMA ter minal and the “Manual for
PC connection setting”/“Kuten Code List”
operation instructions (PDF format). For details,
see the supplied CD-ROM.

◆ FOMA communication configuration files
◆ FOMA PC setup software
◆ FOMA byte counter
◆ General information about DoCoMo keitai datalink
◆ FirstPass PC software
◆ General information about mopera U (mopera U start
up tool/mopera U connection & setting tool/mopera
U requesting original data/FOMA byte counter)
◆ General information about Napster®
◆ “Manual for PC connection setting” in PDF format
◆ “Kuten Code List” in PDF format
◆ Adobe® Reader®
◆ Picture Motion Browser Ver.2.2.01
◆ Declaration of Conformity (DoC)
PC Connection
400
Introduction of DoCoMo
keitai datalink
“DoCoMo keitai datalink” software is used to
make backup files of the Phonebook and mail,
etc. to a PC from your FOMA terminal and edit
the data on the PC. This software is provided
on the DoCoMo’s website. For more information
about this software and how to download this
software, see the following website. You can
also access the following website from the
supplied CD-ROM. (Japanese only)
http://datalink.nttdocomo.co.jp/
For more details about the downloading method, data
that can be transferred, supporting OS, operating
environment, installation method, operation method,
and restrictions, see the above website.
For the operation procedure after installing the
software, see the Help of the software.
A FOMA USB Cable (optional) is required to use the
DoCoMo keitai datalink software.
Overseas Use
Overview of International Roaming (WORLD WING) .............................................. 410
Services Available Overseas ................................................................................... 410
Before Using the FOMA Terminal Overseas ............................................................ 411
Placing a Call from Your Overseas Location ............................................................ 414
Receiving a Call ....................................................................................................... 414
Setting the Network to be Used ...................................................... <3G/GSM setting> 415
Setting the Carrier Search Method ........................................  415
Setting the Higher-priority Carrier for Connection ............................. 416
Setting the Display for International Roaming ......................  416
Checking the Communication Status ......................................... 417
Starting the Roaming Guidance Service ................................... 417
Rejecting an Incoming Call during Roaming ...............................  417
Using the Network Services during Roaming ................................  418
401
Overview of International
Roaming (WORLD WING)
The international roaming (WORLD WING) is
a service that enables you to use the same
phone number and mail address as used
in Japan to have phone conversations or
communicate using the networks of overseas
carriers even if you are abroad.
For more information on available
communication services while the international
roaming service is used, see the “Mobile
Phone User’s Guide【International services】”.
Also, at the DoCoMo’s “International service
website”, you can check the latest information
of international services as well as download
t h e l a t e s t “ M o b i l e P h o n e U s e r ’s G u i d e
【International services】”.
http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/service/world/
ˎ The FOMA terminal works in a 3G Roaming Area
and GSM/GPRS service area.
ˎ The FOMA terminal is set to automatically change a
network at the time of purchase (P.415).
Subscribing to WORLD WING
ˎ If you subscribed to the FOMA services after
September 1, 2005, you already have “WORLD
WING” and no application is required. If you
declined to use “WORLD WING” when you
subscribed to the FOMA services or canceled the
“WORLD WING” service halfway, you need to make
a separate application.
ˎ If you subscribed to the FOMA services before
August 31, 2005 and have not yet made an
application to “WORLD WING”, you need to make
an application.
ˎ This service is not available in some service charge
plans.
Overseas Use
402
■ Country codes for major countries
When you use an international call or set to the Int’l
dial assist, use the following country codes (as of
December 2007).
Country
code
Australia
61
Austria
43
Belgium
32
Brazil
55
Canada
China
86
Czech Republic 420
Egypt
20
Fiji
679
Finland
358
France
33
Germany
49
Greece
30
Hong Kong
852
Hungary
36
India
91
Indonesia
62
Italy
39
Japan
81
Korea
82
Macau
853
Area
Country
code
Malaysia
60
Maldives
960
Netherlands
31
New Caledonia 687
New Zealand
64
Norway
47
Peru
51
Philippines
63
Russia
Singapore
65
Spain
34
Sweden
46
Switzerland
41
Tahiti (French
689
Polynesia)
Area
Taiwan
Thailand
Turkey
United Kingdom
USA
Vietnam
886
66
90
44
84
● For other country codes and details, see the
DoCoMo’s “International service website”.
Services Available Overseas
Communication services that you can use
overseas are described in the following table.
ˎ Some of the communication services may not be
available depending on the carrier or network to
which you connect. For the communication services
that can be used during international roaming, see
DoCoMo’s “International service website”.
Communication service
3G
Voice call※1
You can use the same mobile
phone number as used in Japan
even from an overseas location to
○
place international calls to Japan
and other countries as well as
ordinary calls in your country of
stay.
Videophone call※1
Yo u c a n p l a c e i n t e r n a t i o n a l
videophone calls to specific 3G ○
carrier users overseas and to
FOMA users.
i-mode
You can use i-mode even from an ○
overseas location.
i-mode mail
Yo u c a n u s e t h e s a m e m a i l
address as used in Japan even ○
overseas and send/receive i-mode
mail.
SMS※2
You can use the same mobile
phone number as used in Japan ○
even from an overseas location to
send/receive SMS messages.
i-Channel※3
○
Data communication
○
(Packet communication)※4
GSM GPRS
○
○
×
×
×
○
×
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
● The GPS function is not available overseas. Also,
if you access to the site for performing settings
to use the GPS service, the display informing an
error appears but packet communication charge
is required.
Before Using the FOMA
Terminal Overseas
You must check the following items before
departure, during your stay overseas, and after
returning to Japan.
ˎ The overseas communication charge is included in
your monthly charge. In some cases, however, the
overseas communication charge is included in the
charge of the following month depending on the
system used by the carriers in the country of your
stay. Also note that in some cases the charge is not
included in the relevant month even if you use the
FOMA terminal overseas during the same billing
target period.
Checks before Departure
To use the FOMA terminal overseas, please
check the following items in Japan.
ˎ When you use the network services from an
overseas location, set the Remote Control to
“Activate” before leaving Japan (P.397).
■ About charging the battery
About charging the battery, see the followings.
ˎ Precautions on handling the AC adapter (P.20)
ˎ How to charge with the AC adapter (P.40, 41)
■ About i-mode
To view sites using i-mode overseas, perform
“海外利用設定” (the settings for using i-mode
overseas) accessible from i Menu.
ˎ For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【i-mode】FOMA version”.
Overseas Use
※1 When 2in1 is used, you cannot place a call from
Number B.
※2 You can send and receive SMS to/from a user who
uses the FOMA terminal in Japan and overseas
and a user who is using an overseas carrier, even
if you are using the international roaming service.
ˎ When you send SMS to the recipient who uses
an overseas carrier, enter “+” and the recipient’s
country code before entering the phone number
of the recipient as his address. Make sure to
omit the first “0” when you enter the phone
number, if it starts with “0”.
ˎ If you include characters in your SMS message
that are not supported by the recipient’s
terminal, those characters may not be displayed
correctly when you send this SMS message to
a recipient who is using an overseas carrier.
For details, see the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【International services】” and “Mobile Phone
User’s Guide【Network services】”.
※3 Auto update is automatically and temporarily
canceled when you connect to an overseas carrier.
To restart the Auto update of i-Channel overseas,
you need to perform the i-Channel setting again.
Note that there is a communication charge every
time you receive i-Channel while you are overseas
(domestic free-of-charge communication is not
applicable overseas).
※4 64K data communication to be performed by
connecting to a PC is not available overseas.
When you originate the packet communication,
use the IP connection to communicate (the
PPP connection cannot originate the packet
communication).
Continued
403
■ About setting the network services
When you are subscribing to the network
services, you can perform the network service
setting/cancellation from overseas, except for
some functions.
ˎ You may not be able even to use the network
services that you are supposed to be able to set/
cancel, depending on the overseas carrier you
use. Also, some of the network services can be
performed only in Japan.
To use the network services overseas, see
the “Mobile Phone User’s Guide【International
services】” and “Mobile Phone User’s Guide
【Network services】” before departure.
Menu name
Voice Mail (P.392)
Call Waiting (P.393)
Call Forwarding
(P.393)
Bar Nuisance Calls
(P.394)
Notify Caller ID
(P.45)
Caller ID Request
(P.395)
Dual Network
(P.395)
English Guidance
(P.395)
Multi Number
(P.397)
Description
You may not be able to set the
services in some service areas.
You may not be able to set the
service in some service areas.
Also, a caller ID may not be
notified correctly in some cases.
You may not be able to set the
service in some service areas.
You cannot set this service.
You may not be able to set the
service in some service areas.
You may not be able to set the
service in some service areas.
Note also that you cannot place
a c a l l f ro m y o u r a d d i t i o n a l
number. You can receive an
incoming call to your additional
number, but you may not be able
to identify the number being
used for receiving the call.
2in1 (P.398)
You cannot place a call from
Number B.
Chaku-moji (P.58)
You can set the service, but you
cannot use it.
Roaming Guidance You may not be able to set the
(P.417)
service in some service areas.
Bar Incoming call
You may not be able to set the
(P.417)
service in some service areas.
Public mode
You can set the service, but you
(Drive mode) (P.69) cannot use it. Cancel the setting
overseas.
Overseas Use
404
Checks in the Location of Stay
The FOMA terminal works in a 3G Roaming
Area and GSM/GPRS service area.
The FOMA ter minal is set by default to
automatically search the network and connect
to the local carrier when you power it on in an
overseas location.
About inquiries
For inquiries about loss, theft, the charge
settlement, and repairs overseas, see “For Loss,
Theft, and Charge Settlement for Overseas” or
“About Troubles and Repairs for Services Overseas”
on the backcover of this manual. Note that you are
still liable for the call and communication charge
incurred after the loss or theft occurred.
ˎ For the latest information on the international
access number and international prefix number
for the universal number, see the DoCoMo’s
“International service website”.
■ International access number for major countries
(Table1)
The international access number for major countries
is as follows (as of August 2007).
Area
Australia
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
China
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Greece
Hong Kong
Hungary
India
Indonesia
Ireland
Italy
Korea
Luxembourg
Macau
Number
0011
00
0041/0014
011
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
001
00
00
001
00
00
001
00
00
Area
Malaysia
Monaco
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Philippines
Poland
Portugal
Russia
Singapore
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
Turkey
United Arab Emirates
United Kingdom
USA
Vietnam
Number
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
810
001
00
00
00
002
001
00
00
00
011
00
■ International prefix number for the universal
number (Table2)
The international prefix number for the universal
number of each country is as follows (as of August
2007).
Area
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Brazil
Bulgaria
Canada
China
Colombia
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Hong Kong
Hungary
Ireland
Israel
Italy
Number
00
0011
00
00
0021
00
011
00
009
00
990
00
00
001
00
00
014
00
Area
Korea
Luxembourg
Malaysia
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Peru
Philippines
Portugal
Singapore
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
USA
Number
001
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
001
09
00
00
00
00
001
00
011
ˎ Some of them may not be used.
ˎ The universal number is available only for
countries listed on the table above.
ˎ When you place a call from a hotel, the hotel may
charge the phone call (it is liable for you to pay).
Before placing a call, make sure to check with
the hotel.
ˎ Please note that, in many cases, the universal
number may not be available when you place a
call from a mobile phone, public phone, hotel, or
other places.
Display to Be Shown Overseas
While you use the FOMA terminal overseas,
the name of the connected network carrier
appears in the stand-by display.
ˎ You can also set the FOMA terminal not to display
the name of the carrier (P.416).
ˎ To display the current date/time of the location of
stay on the main clock and additionally to display
the sub-clock, set the Auto time adjust to [ON] (P.44).
However, the time may not be corrected in some
networks overseas.
Connected network
○○○○
Carrier name
Main clock
ˎ Display the current date/
time of the location of stay.
Sub-clock
ˎ Display the current date/
time of Japan.
ˎ The following icons show the current network
connection.
Icon
Network you can use
3G network (supported packet
communication)
3G network (not supported packet
(Red)
communication)
GSM network
(Blue)
GPRS network
Checks after Returning to Japan
When you power on the FOMA terminal after
returning to Japan, it is set by default to
automatically search the network and connect
to the FOMA network (NTT DoCoMo, Inc).
ˎ If the Network search mode is set to [Manual],
manually switch to the FOMA network (NTT
DoCoMo, Inc) or change the setting to [Auto].
ˎ You need to set to [Auto] or [3G] at the 3G/GSM
setting.
Overseas Use
405
Placing a Call from Your
Overseas Location
You can use the international roaming service
and place a call from an overseas location.
Placing a Local Call in Your
Overseas Location
You can place calls in your country of stay in
the same way you do in Japan.
Placing a Call to Another Country (Including
Japan) from Your Overseas Location
You can place a call to Japan or another
country from your country of stay.
ˎ You can easily place an international call if you save
the country codes of frequently dialed countries
using the Country code of the Int’l dial assist setting
(P.62).
Press “+” (press
for over a second)
in the stand-by display. Enter a country
code, area code, and a recipient’s phone
number, in that order.
ˎ If an area code begins with “0”, omit the “0”
when dialing (excepting when calling ordinary
phones, etc. in Italy).
ˎ To place an international call to Japan, enter the
country code “81”.
To place a call to a country saved using the Country
code
Enter a phone number in the stand-by display,
(Option), select [Call method] →
press
[Voice call]/[Videophone] → [Country code] → a
(Call).
country code, and press
To place a call to a recipient saved in the Phonebook
Select a recipient form the Phonebook and
press
. To place a videophone call, select a
recipient, press , and press
(V.phone). The
first digit of the phone number “0” is converted
into a country code automatically added by the
Int’l dial assist before the call is dialed.
To place a call from the Redial/Received record
Select a recipient from the Redial/Received
record and press
or
(V.phone).
Press
The international call is dialed.
To place a videophone call
Press
(V.phone).
Make sure to include the area code, even for a local
call.
If a recipient uses “WORLD WING”, place a call to
the recipient as an international call to Japan.
Press
The call is dialed.
To place a videophone call
Press
(V.phone).
● If both you and the recipient of your videophone
call are using a carrier that supports FOMA
videophone calls, you can perform an
international videophone call by first using the
international call dialing method and then placing
a videophone call.
※ For information about countries and
carriers you can connect to, see DoCoMo’s
“International service website”.
※ The videophone image displayed on the
FOMA terminal may be distorted or the
videophone call may not be connected
depending on the terminal being used by the
other party for the international videophone
call.
Placing a Call to a WORLD WING
Overseas User
If the recipient is a “WORLD WING” overseas
user, enter the country code “81” and place the
call as an international call to Japan regardless
of the current location at home and abroad.
Receiving a Call
You can receive a call using the international
roaming service when you are overseas.
Overseas Use
406
Enter a phone number in the stand-by
display.
When receiving a call, press
You can talk to a caller.
When you receive a videophone call
Press
or
(V.phone). To answer a call with
a substitute image, press
(Sub).
● If you receive a call during international roaming,
the call is forwarded to the country of your
stay from Japan. There is a communication
charge to the caller for the call to Japan and
an international call forwarding charge to the
recipient.
Procedure for a Caller Who
Wants to Call You
■ When the caller places a call from Japan
Ask the caller to dial only your phone number
in the same manner as it is done in Japan.
090–XXXX–XXXX
or
080–XXXX–XXXX
■ When the caller places a call from countries
other than Japan
Ask the caller to dial the international access
number and country code of Japan “81” and
then your phone number without the first “0”
and place the call as an international call to
Japan regardless of your country of stay.
International access number–81–90–XXXX–XXXX
or
International access number–81–80–XXXX–XXXX
The network communication method is set.
● When the 3G/GSM setting is set to [Auto] and
the Network search mode is set to [Auto], if
you search a carrier that supports both the
3G and GSM/GPRS networks, the terminal is
automatically connected to the 3G network.
● In Japan or 3G network compatible areas, it is
recommended to set the 3G/GSM setting to [3G]
to suppress the consumption of the battery.
● Even if you are in the GSM network, you cannot
perform the packet communication if the network
does not support GPRS.
Setting the Carrier Search
Method

You can set whether to search the network
automatically and connect to another carrier
when the network currently used falls outside
of the service area.
Example: Changing a carrier for manual connection
Setting the Network to be
Used
<3G/GSM setting>
Ａｕｔｏ
Ｍａｎｕａｌ
Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ ｒｅ−ｓｅａｒｃｈ
ＰＬＭＮ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
[Auto]:
Automatically connect to another carrier.
[Manual]:
Manually select a carrier.
[Network re-search]:
Search the carrier to be connected again.
[PLMN setting]:
S e t a c a r r i e r w i t h t h e h i g h e r- p r i o r i t y f o r
connection (P.416).
ˎ The default setting is set to [Auto].
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [3G/GSM setting] and press
３Ｇ／ＧＳＭ ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Ａｕｔｏ
３Ｇ
ＧＳＭ／ＧＰＲＳ
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Network search mode] and
press .
Ｎｅｔｗｏｒｋ ｓｅａｒｃｈ ｍｏｄｅ
You can set a communication method to be
supported in an area or by a carrier you use.
Select [Auto]/[3G]/[GSM/GPRS] → [Yes]
and press .
Select [Manual] and press
The menu for selecting a network appears.
Overseas Use
[Auto]:
Search all networks that can be connected to.
[3G]:
Search only 3G-compatible networks.
[GSM/GPRS]:
Search only GSM- or GPRS-compatible networks.
Continued
407
3
Select a carrier and press
To delete a carrier
Move the cursor to the carrier and from the
Function menu, select [Delete] → [Delete one]
→ [Yes]. To delete all carriers, from the Function
menu, select [Delete] → [Delete all], enter the
Security code, and select [Yes].
The carrier to be connected is changed.
● You may not be able to set this function
depending on the radio wave condition or
network restrictions.
● As of December 2007, you cannot select a
carrier other than NTT DoCoMo in Japan.
● If “ ” appears in the display after you return to
Japan, check if the Network search mode is set
to [Auto].
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Network search mode] and
press .
The Network search mode display appears.
Select [PLMN setting] and press
The PLMN setting display appears.
Select [Unregistered] and press
(Func).
The Function menu appears.
Entering a carrier manually
From the Function menu, select [PLMN manual
sel.], enter a country code (MCC) and network
number (MNC), press
(Complete), and select
a network communication method → [Yes].
To save the carrier being connected
From the Function menu, select [VPLMN to
PLMN] → [Yes].
To change the priority
From the Function menu, select [Change priority]
→ a carrier → a desired position, press
(Complete), and select [Yes].
To display detailed information
Move the cursor to the carrier and from the
Function menu, select [Detail info].
Overseas Use
408
Select a carrier and press
The screen for selecting 3G/GSM appears.
[3G/GSM/GPRS]:
Set as the 3G and GSM/GPRS compatible
carrier.
[3G]:
Set as the 3G compatible carrier.
[GSM/GPRS]:
Set as the GSM/GPRS compatible carrier.
Setting the Higher-priority Carrier
for Connection

Example: Saving a carrier from the carrier list
The PLMN slct from List display appears.
To search for a carrier by country name
Press
(Search) and select a country name.
You can set a priority for the carriers to be
automatically connected when the Network
search mode is set to [Auto]. You can save a
priority setting for up to 20 carriers.
Select [Select from List] and press
Select a network communication method
→ [Yes] and press .
A carrier with the higher-priority for connection is
set.
Setting the Display for International
Roaming

You can set whether to display the name of the
connected carrier in the stand-by display while
you are using the international roaming service.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Operator name display] and
press .
The display of the Operator name display appears.
Select [Display on]/[Display off] and press
The carrier name display is set.
● Even if you set the Operator name display to
[Display on], the carrier name is not displayed
when you are using the “DoCoMo” network or
you are outside of the service area.
Checking the Communication
Status

Rejecting an Incoming Call
during Roaming 
You can check the available network services
in your overseas location.
You can set whether to reject incoming calls
during roaming. You can select whether to
reject either all incoming calls or only incoming
videophone calls.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [Check serv. area] and
press .
The available network services appear.
Starting the Roaming Guidance
Service

If you receive a call during international
roaming, you can inform a caller that you are
using the international roaming service by
playing back the guidance.
The Bar Incoming call display appears.
To cancel the Bar Incoming call service
Select [Deactivate barring], enter the network
security code, and select [Yes].
To check the setting
Select [Request Status].
ˎ The guidance may be played back in a foreign
language depending on the conditions of the
overseas carrier.
ˎ You need to set the service in Japan.
Select [Activate] → [Yes] and press
The roaming guidance service is activated.
Select [Activate barring] and press
The Activate barring display appears.
[Bar all incm call]:
Reject all incoming calls.
[Bar. V.phone/64K]※:
Reject incoming videophone calls.
※ 64K data communication cannot be used
overseas.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Roaming Guidance] and press .
The Roaming Guidance display appears.
To cancel the roaming guidance
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes]. A caller hears the
ring tone set by the overseas carrier.
To check the setting
Select [Request Status] → [Yes].
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Bar Incoming call] and press
Select the type of call to be rejected and
press .
The network security code screen appears.
Enter a network security code.
Select [Yes] and press
The Bar Incoming call is activated.
● You may not be able to set it depending on the
overseas carrier you use.
Overseas Use
409
Using the Network Services
during Roaming 
You can use network services such as the
Voice Mail and Call Forwarding Services from
an overseas location.
ˎ To use the network services overseas, set the
Remote Control to “Activate” (P.397).
ˎ An international call charge applies in the country
where you use the service when you operate the
FOMA terminal overseas.
Operating the Voice Mail Service
from Your Overseas Location
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Voice Mail(Int.)] and press
Set each item.
Menu item
Activate
Operation
S e l e c t [ A c t i va t e ] → [ Ye s ] →
Operate as instr ucted by the
guidance.
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes] →
Deactivate
Operate as instr ucted by the
guidance.
Select [Play messages] → [Yes]
Play messages
→ Operate as instructed by the
guidance.
Voice Mail setting Select [Voice Mail setting] → [Yes]
→ Operate as instructed by the
guidance.
Select [Set ring time] → [Yes]
Set ring time
→ Operate as instructed by the
guidance.
Menu item
Activate
Operation
S e l e c t [ A c t i va t e ] → [ Ye s ] →
Operate as instr ucted by the
guidance.
Select [Deactivate] → [Yes] →
Deactivate
Operate as instr ucted by the
guidance.
Call FWD settings Select [Call FWD settings] → [Yes]
→ Operate as instructed by the
guidance.
Operating the Roaming Guidance
Service from Your Overseas Location
Overseas Use
410
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Call FWD(Int.)] and press .
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Roaming guide(Int.)] → [Yes]
and press .
Perform the setting as instructed by the guidance
after this process.
Setting the Remote Control from
Your Overseas Location
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Remote access(Int.)] → [Yes]
and press .
Perform the setting as instructed by the guidance
after this process.
Operating the Caller ID Display Request
Service from Your Overseas Location
Operating the Call Forwarding
Service from Your Overseas Location
Set each item.
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Caller ID req(Int.)] → [Yes]
and press .
Perform the setting as instructed by the guidance
after this process.
Appendix/External
Devices/Troubleshooting
List of Menus ...........................................................................................................
Characters Assigned to Keys ..................................................................................
Special Symbols ......................................................................................................
Pictographs ..............................................................................................................
Emoticons ................................................................................................................
Common Phrases ....................................................................................................
Multiaccess Combinations .......................................................................................
Multitask Combinations ...........................................................................................
Services Available on the FOMA Terminal ..............................................................
Optional and Related Devices .................................................................................
420
430
431
432
433
434
435
437
438
439
■ External Device Interface
Introduction of Movie Player Software ..................................................................... 440
Enjoying with Picture Motion Browser ...................................................................... 440
■ Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting ....................................................................................................... 444
Error Messages ....................................................................................................... 446
Warranty and After Sales Services .......................................................................... 454
ｉモード故障診断 (i-mode Trouble Diagnosis) Site ................................................. 456
Updating the Software ................................................................... 456
Protecting Your Mobile Phone from Harmful Data ............................  462
Specifications ........................................................................................................... 465
Number of Saved and Protected Data Items ............................................................ 466
About the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of Mobile Phones, etc............................ 467
Export Controls and Regulations.............................................................................. 475
411
List of Menus
ˎ You can press a key on the keypad of the number or symbol next to some menu names listed
below in the menu display to execute the associated function.
■ Standard menu
○: The default setting/s is/are restored.
●: Items deleted
Menu
My
Selection
[1]
Imaging
[2]
Default Setting
Receive Ir data, Bar code reader, Select alarm,
Full Browser, Jog setting, Stand-by display,
−
Incoming set
Camera
[21]
−
Movie
[22]
−
easy BlogUp
[23]
−
Music slide show
[24]
−
Stand-by pictures [25] Frame
Bulletin Board(↑)
Screen update
Every 1hours
Select folder
Folder : Camera, Folder
- : OFF
i Menu
[31]
Bookmark
[32]
Screen Memo
[33]
Last accessed URL
[34]
Go to
Enter URL
location [35] URL history
i-Channel Channel list
[36] Ticker
Stand-by
Reset i-Channel
Message
[37]
Check new message
[38]
i-mode
Common
Melody auto play
setting
setting
i-mode inquiry set
[39]
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Connection timeout
Host selection
Dur multi task disp
Auto-display
Font size(Brs Com.)
Display img
Auto detect
Use phone info
i-motion auto replay
Sound effect
i-mode arrival act
SSL list
CA cert.
DoCoMo cert.1
DoCoMo cert.2
User certificate
Select host
※1 Hosts you added are deleted.
412
○
Std
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
−
−
−
ON
Mail/MessageR/MessageF:
Valid
60sec
i-mode (UIM)
Prefer alarm
Prefer msgR
ON
ON
Yes
ON
Prefer PushTalk
Valid
Valid
−
−
ドコモ
○
●
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Update image
i mode
[3]
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
●
Page
P.368
P.155
P.170
P.358
P.291
P.119
P.120
P.186
P.191
P.193
P.187
P.191
P.202
P.203
P.231
P.216, 231
P.228
P.227
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○※1
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
P.199
○※1 P.200
P.197
P.229
P.230
P.127
P.198
P.201
P.112
P.90
P.198
Menu
i mode
[3]
Mail
[4]
Default Setting
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
Page
P.280
−
P.286
−
●
Enter URL
P.280
−
●
URL history
P.283
−
●
Last accessed URL
P.280
−
●
Full Browser Home URL
http://www.google.co.jp
P.286
○
○
setting
Cookie setting
Valid
○
○※2
Script setting
Valid(Confirm)
P.287
○
○
Display mode setting PC mode
○
○
Display img
ON
○
○
Display magnification 100%
○
○
PagePilot setting
Invalid
○
○
Pointer speed setting 4
○
○
Window Open Guard Invalid
P.288
○
○
Referer setting
Send
○
○
Access setting
No
○
○
Check settings
−
Reset settings
−
Inbox
[41]
P.219
−
●
Outbox
[42]
−
●
Draft
[43]
−
●
Compose message
[44]
P.207
−
WEB mail
[45]
P.206
−
Compose SMS
[46]
P.234
−
Templates
[47]
−
●※3 P.211
Check new message
[48]
P.216, 231
−
Check new SMS
[49]
P.236
−
Receive option
[40]
P.215
−
Mail
Common setting (See [i mode] → [i-mode setting] → [Common setting])
−
setting
Mail list setting
2lines+body
P.225
○
○
[4 ] Edit signature
P.227
−
●
Signature
Auto
○
○
Mail list
List: List 0-9, Member list:
P.228
●
None
Font size
P.127
○
○
Sort inbox
Sorting criteria/Select folder
P.226
●
to: None
Sort outbox
Sorting criteria/Select folder
●
to: None
SMS
Language
JPN
P.236
setting
SMS report
Invalid
Validity
3days
SMSC
DoCoMo
Type of Number
International
Address
81903101652
Full
Home
Browser
Bookmark
[30] Go to
location
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
※2 The Cookie files you add are deleted.
※3 Preinstalled data is not deleted.
413
Menu
Mail
[4]
Mail
setting
Area Mail
setting
Default Setting
Receive setting
Receive entry
[4 ]
Beep setting
Beep time
Recv option setting
Attached
Image
file pref.
Melody
i-motion
ToruCa
PDF
Tool data
Others
Clear Recv ranking
Clear Send ranking
i appli
[5]
Phone
[6]
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
414
Data Box
[7]
※3
※4
※5
※6
i αppli list
i αppli
setting
Auto-start
SW description
Volume setting
Pref. i αppli sound
i αppli
Stand-by err hist
history
Security err. Hist.
Trace result
Auto-start err hist
i αppli(microSD)
Phonebook
[61]
Call record
[62]
PushTalk phonebook
[63]
Record
Play rec msg
message
Play Vphone msg
[64] Set rec
Set
msg
To answer
Answer img(V.phone)
Record img(V.phone)
Rec voice memo
Play voice memo
My picture
MUSIC
Music&Video Channel
i-motion
Melody
My document
Kisekae Tool
Chara-den
OFF
Area Mail name:
Emergency information,
Message ID:A000∼A3FF
Permission
10sec
OFF
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
Valid
−
−
−
Yes
No
unpreference
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
OFF
13sec
テレビ電話動作中
テレビ電話動作中
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Preinstalled data is not deleted.
Receive entries you added are deleted.
Osaifu-Keitai-compatible i-αppli is not deleted.
[Manual Custom] preinstalled at the time of purchase is not deleted.
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
○
○
○※4
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
●
●
●※5
○
○
○
○
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
●
○
○
○
○
●
●※3
●※3
●
●※3
●※3
●※3
●※6
●※3
Page
P.233
P.234
P.227
P.229
P.239
P.246
P.239
P.112
P.113
P.250
P.101
P.55
P.85
P.74
P.73
P.369
P.74
P.290
P.303
P.342
P.295
P.304
P.333
P.305
P.302
Menu
Music
[8]
OsaifuKeitai
[9]
MUSIC Player
Music&Video Channel
IC card content
DCMX
ToruCa
Settings
IC card
[94] lock
IC act.
notice
ToruCa
setting
Default Setting
−
−
−
−
−
[81]
[82]
[91]
[92]
[93]
IC card lock
IC lock(power-off)
By vibrator
By LED
ToruCa receive
Sort folder
Auto recognition
Duplication check
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
○
○
○
○
○
OFF
Last status
ON
ON
Yes
−
○
○
ON
ON
●
○
○
○
○
○
●
○
○
Page
P.342
P.338
P.255
P.245
P.257
P.262
P.261
P.259
P.260
P.261
Receive Ir Receive
data [ 2] Receive all
microSD
[ 3]
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
Camera
[ 4]
−
P.155
Movie
[ 5]
−
P.170
Lifetime Calendar
[ 6]
−
Search by i-mode
Own number
LifeKit
Bar code
Scan code
[ ]
reader [ 1] Send data
[95]
[0]
P.306
P.355
P.360
−
●
P.363
−
●
P.372
[ 8]
[ 9]
Calculator
[ 0]
−
GPS
P.255
P.45
P.183
P.184
P.329
○
○
Text Memo
OFF
OFF
P.105
●
○
○
○
●
○
●
○
○
○
○※1
P.264
P.274
P.265
P.276
P.278
P.275
P.276
P.271
※1 Hosts you added are deleted.
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Connect to Center
−
Exchanging history
−
Service
Send phonebook img Unsend
] setting
[ #] Position location
−
Location notice
−
i appli
−
Location history
−
GPS
GPS button setting
Read a Map
settings
Reg. service client
Loc. serv. client/Service
client ID/Phone number: −
Auto Notice setting: Confirm
Loc. request menu
Location request: OFF,
Host setting: Initial host,
Service settings: −
Data
Security
Service
●
○
○
Select alarm
[ 7] Auto power on
Schedule
Alarm
○
415
Menu
LifeKit
[ ]
GPS
[ #] GPS
settings
Default Setting
Sound/Color setting
Positioning mode
Settings
[#]
Display
Stand-by
display
Stand-by
Image quality
Calendar/Clock
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
416
Position location:
Volume: OFF, Vibrator:
OFF, Color: ON
Location notice:
Volume: 4, Vibrator: OFF,
Color: ON
Loc. provide/accept/Loc.
provide/check:
Volume: 4, Vibrator: OFF
Position location/Location
notice/Location provision:
Standard mode
Image: Kisekae tool※7
Stand-by pictures:
Frame: Bulletin Board(↑),
Screen update: Every
1hours
Select folder:
Folder : Camera,
Folder - : OFF
Sharp
Calendar: OFF, Cal. font
color: Blk, Clock: Digital
clock5, Clock style: 12h
Soft key
OFF
Camera in key locking Not activate
Backlight
Auto setting
ON
Adjust light
Keypad light
ON
Backlight always on
Charging/Internet: OFF,
Videophone/Pict. shoot/
Movie shoot/Movie play:
ON
Power saver
1min
Menu
Start menu setting
Kisekae menu
setting
Icon setting
My selection/Imaging/
i-mode/Mail/i αppli/Phone/
Data Box/MUSIC/OsaifuKeitai/Own number/LifeKit/
Settings: None specified
Kisekae
Kisekae Tool
Kisekae tool※8
setting
Color theme setting
Main body color “SILVER”:
Black, Main body color
“WHITE”: White & Gold,
Main body color “PINK”:
Pink
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
Page
P.113
○
○
○
○
P.278
P.117
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
P.121
P.122
P.123
P.124
※7 The setting varies depending on the main body color of the FOMA terminal. When you perform the Reset
settings or Reset all data&set, the image of [Cyber-shot Logo] preinstalled at the time of purchase is used as
the default setting.
※8 The setting varies depending on the main body color of the FOMA terminal. When you perform the Reset
settings or Reset all data&set, the setting of [Manual Custom] is used as the default setting.
Menu
Settings
[#]
Display
Animation
Font size
Call
Default Setting
Calling
V.phone calling img
Mail sending img
Check new message
All font size setting
Individual font size
Kisekae tool※9
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Page
P.120
P.127
P.108
P.126
P.76
P.77
P.78
P.121
※9 The setting varies depending on the main body color of the FOMA terminal. When you perform the Reset
settings or Reset all data&set, one of the images from the [Preinstall] folder in My picture of the Data Box is
used as the default setting.
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Standard disp.
Phonebook/Call record/
Mail/Internet/Input text: M
Incoming
Incoming call
Ring tone: 着信音1, Ring
set
volume: 4, Incoming image:
Kisekae tool※9, Vibrator:
OFF, Color: C9:Color9
Incoming V.phone
Link incoming call: OFF,
Ring tone: 着信音1, Ring
volume: 4, Incoming image:
Kisekae tool※9, Vibrator:
OFF, Color: C9:Color9
PushTalk
Ring tone: 着信音1, Ring
volume: 4, Vibrator: OFF,
Color: C9:Color9
Mail
Receiving img: Kisekae
tool※9, Received image:
Kisekae tool※9, Ring tone:
着信音1, Ring volume: 4,
Vibrator: OFF, Color: C9:
Color9
Ring time setting:
Set: ON, Ring time: 4sec
MessageR
L i n k re c e i v e m a i l : O N ,
Receiving img: Kisekae
tool※9, Received image:
Kisekae tool※9, Ring tone:
着信音1, Ring volume: 4,
MessageF
Vibrator: OFF, Color: C9:
Color9
Ring time setting:
Set: ON, Ring time: 4sec
Missed call
ON
Videophone Display setting
Main-Other side
setting
Set outgoing image
Camera image: ON,
Substitute image: アイアイ
Visual preference
Normal
Auto redial(voice)
OFF
Hands-free
ON
V.ph while packet
Prefer V.phone
Call display Phonebook image
ON
Name
ON
Disp. call/receive No. None specified
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
417
Menu
Settings
[#]
Call
Call assist
Sub-address
Prefix setting
Any key ans
Set ring start time
Call setting Volume
Recnct ALM
Call quality Quality alarm
Reduce noise
Headset
Auto answer setting
setting
Headset usage
setting
Headset sw. to call
Headset microphone
Self mode
Melody Call
Application Lifetime
Display setting
Cal.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
418
Reset Reset all
Page
settings data&set
ON
P.63
○
○
P.61
−
○
ON
P.67
○
○
Set: OFF, Start time: 4sec,
P.145
○
○
Missed call display: OFF
P.112
○
○
OFF
P.64
○
○
OFF
P.114
○
○
ON
P.64
○
○
Set: OFF, To answer: 5sec
P.375
○
○
Headset+speaker
P.114
○
○
Default Setting
Set: OFF, Memory number:
999
Valid Headset
OFF
−
Photo:
Disp: All, Select folder:
i-mode
Received mail/Sent mail:
Disp: All, Select mail
address: None
Schedule/Birthday:
Disp: All
Normal
OFF
Memory auto display
Security data display
Mail (See [Mail] → [Mail setting])
i-mode (See [i mode] → [i-mode setting])
i αppli (See [i appli] → [i αppli setting])
Phonebook Which PB to use
Phonebook
Font size
Set image display
ON
Save/attach image
Valid
Call record Record display
ON
Font size
PushTalk
Auto answer setting
OFF
Set ring time
30sec
i-mode arrival act
Prefer PushTalk
P-Talk arrival act
Answer
Hands-free
ON
Record msg (See [Phone] → [Record message] → [Set rec msg])
ToruCa (See [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings] → [ToruCa setting])
IC act. notice (See [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings] → [IC act. notice])
Schedule Set holidays
For today: Annual holidays
established by the
Japanese National Holidays
Law, Day of the week: Sun
○
○
P.375
○
○
○
○
P.376
P.137
P.115
P.358
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
−
−
−
P.102
P.141
P.127
P.89
P.90
−
−
−
P.367
○
○
Menu
Settings
[#]
Application Schedule
Input
method
Default Setting
Alarm tone: Alarm(std),
Alarm volume: 4, Alarm
i m a g e : スケジュールア
ラーム鳴動中, V i b r a t o r :
OFF, Color: C5:Color5
Edit user dict
−
Edit prediction
−
Dictionaries
−
Select conversion
Prediction
Edit common phrases See Common Phrases (P.434)
Auto cursor
1(Slow)
Font size
Operation in item
4 directions/ hor.
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
Schedule alarm
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
●
●
●
○
○
○
○
○
Lock/
Security
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
●
●
○
○
○
○
○
P.388
P.389
P.384
P.386
P.385
P.127
P.385
P.389
P.135
−
P.137
P.141
P.139
P.143
P.146
P.144
P.392
P.393
P.394
P.45
P.395
P.369
P.399
○
○
○
○
●
P.58
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Reset data
−
Lock all
OFF
IC card lock (See [Osaifu-Keitai] → [Settings] → [IC card lock])
Pers. data lock
OFF
Secret display
OFF
Key dial lock
OFF
A c p t / R j c t Set
OFF
call
Phone No.
−
Group list
−
Reject unknown
OFF
Denied no User Unset
OFF
ID
PublicPhone
OFF
Not supported
OFF
Management NW
Voice Mail
Tone/Vibrate notice: ON
Services
Call Waiting
−
Call Forwarding
−
Bar Nuisance Calls
−
Notify Caller ID
−
Caller ID Request
−
Call Cost/Duration
−
2in1 setting
Mode switching: Dual
mode, Stand-by display:
B mode: Bモード待受画面
D u a l m o d e : デュアル
モード待受画面
Set call/receive No.:
Disp. call/receive No.: dark
Ringtone for Number B:
Incoming call: Ring
tone: 着信音2
Incoming V.phone: Link
incoming call: OFF,
Ring tone: 着信音2
Receive avoid. Setting:
Mode link setting: OFF
Chaku-moji
Create message: −
Set Message display: Only
calls w/ID
Page
P.365
419
Menu
Settings
[#]
Management NW
Services
Default Setting
In-call arrival act
Arrival Call Act
Remote Control
Dual Network
English Guidance
Service Numbers
Additional service
Multi Number
Roaming Guidance
Int'l roaming
Int’l dial assist
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Date/time
V.ph switch notice
Auto time adjust
Manual clock set
Select language
Manner
Set
mode
Mode
Original manner
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
−
○
−
−
−
−
Register USSD:
Service: Unregistered
USSD: −
Register ans word:
Answer word: Unregistered
USSD: −
Number Setting:
Multi Number call: OFF
Basic Number:
Name: 基本契約番号
Additional No.1:
N a m e : 付加番号1 ,
P h o n e n u m b e r : −,
R i n g t o n e : 着信音1 ,
○※10
Incoming image: 付加
番号1着信画像
Additional No.2:
N a m e : 付加番号2 ,
P h o n e n u m b e r : −,
R i n g t o n e : 着信音1 ,
Incoming image: 付加
番号2着信画像
−
N e t w o r k s e a rc h m o d e :
Auto, 3G/GSM setting: Auto
Operator name display:
○
Display on
Auto conversion: ON
○
Int’l prefix: ͦWorld Call
009130010, Country code:
See P.410.
−
ON
○
Date: ----/--/-- ---, Time: --:-Time zone: GMT+9
Japanese
OFF
○
Manner
○
V i b r a t o r : O F F, P h o n e
volume: SD (STEP DOWN),
Mail volume/Alarm volume:
4, Keypad sound: 1,
○
Keyguard release tone/
Charge sound/Battery
ALM: ON, Whisper mode:
OFF
Answer
Page
P.396
○
P.397
P.395
P.396
P.402
○
P.397
○
P.417
P.415
○
P.416
○
P.62
○
○
○
○
○
○
P.78
P.44
P.128
P.116
P.117
○
※10 Only the settings of the Multi Number call, ring tones/incoming images of the Additional No.1 and Additional
No.2 are reset.
420
Menu
Settings
[#]
Default Setting
Management S e t b a s i c Keypad sound
tone
Keyguard release
tone
Stereo&3D
Charge sound
Jog setting Rotate set
Mail view
i-mode
Full Browser
Upward rotation
Downward rotation
Slide
Auto key lock/rel
setting
Slide open setting
Setting when folded
Edit slide setting
Change code
UIM setting PIN1 code setting
Change PIN1 code
Change PIN2 code
Scan
Update
function
Set auto-update
Set scan
Version
SW Update Update
Set auto-update
ON
ON
ON
Medium
Medium
Medium
Data Box
Phonebook
ON
Answer
V o i c e c a l l / V. p h o n e /
PushTalk: Continuous call
Inbox(List/Detail): Quote
reply, Outbox(List/Detail)/
Draft(List): Edit, Schedule/
Memo(List/Detail): Create/
Edit
0000
OFF
−
−
−
−
Scan function/Message
scan: Valid
−
−
Set: Auto-update, Day:
None specified, Time:
03:00
−
−
−
Communication mode
−
−
−
−
−
−
Yet (0000)
Yet (OFF)
Yet (Standard disp.)
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Page
P.111
P.376
P.141
P.67
P.354
○
○
○
P.132
P.133
P.463
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
●
○
○
○
○
P.462
P.464
P.459
P.458
P.417
P.42
P.326
P.314
P.126
P.124
P.125
P.376
P.377
P.43
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Check serv. area
Battery level
Storage info
USB mode setting
Reset
Reset menu log
Reset menu screen
Reset display/sound
Reset settings
Reset all data&set
Initial
Date/time
setting
Change code
Keypad sound
Location request
All font size setting
ON
Reset Reset all
settings data&set
421
Characters Assigned to Keys
Character
mode
Keys
Kanji/Hiragana mode
※
Katakana mode
あいうえお
ぁぃぅぇぉ
アイウエオ
ァィゥェォ
. @／：−∼ ~1
かきくけこ
カキクケコ ヵ ヶ
ABCabc2
さしすせそ
サシスセソ
DEFdef3
たちつてとっ
タチツテトッ
GHIghi4
なにぬねの
ナニヌネノ
JKLjkl5
はひふへほ
ハヒフヘホ
MNOmno6
まみむめも
マミムメモ
PQRSpqrs7
やゆよゃゅょ
ヤユヨャュョ
TUVtuv8
ラリルレロ
WXYZwxyz9
，
□！ ? – , ；（ ）
”_ ∼ ~ ＆ ￥ 0
らりるれろ
わをんゎ□、
。
・！？
、。
※
ワ ヲ ン ヮ □ 、。
・ ！ ？「 」
・ ゛ ゜！ ？ ゛ ゜、 。 ・ ！ ?「 」
Alphabetic mode
※
Numeric mode
，
！ ? – , ；（ ）”
_ ∼ ~ ＆￥
Display character assignments in the reverse order (before acceptance
of characters)/Line feed (after acceptance of characters)
＃
Move cursor left
Move cursor right/Insert half-width space (blank) (only when there is no character after the
cursor)
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
422
※ If you press a key for over a second, the assigned characters are switched one after another.
ˎ □ indicates a space (blank). A space (blank) is provided in two sizes: a full-width and halfwidth sizes and counted as one full-width or half-width character.
ˎ Characters marked with ■ appear in the full-width character mode only.
ˎ Blue colored characters appear in the half-width character mode only.
ˎ Every time you press a key, the character changes to the next one that is assigned to that key.
If you press and hold the key, the characters change continuously.
after finalizing a character to start a new line. “ ” appears to indicate it. A new line
ˎ Press
is counted as a full-width character.
before finalizing a character to insert a voice or semivoice sound symbol. Press
ˎ Press
to change its case from upper to lower case or vice versa. Press
to change the character
assigned to a key in the reverse order.
ˎ In the Alphabetic mode, the case attribute of the character entered last or converted by
pressing
is inherited to the next character.
Special Symbols
ˎ Symbols marked with ■ may not be displayed correctly when sending to i-mode noncompatible mobile phones or PCs.
■ Full-width symbols
■ Half-width symbols
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
423
Pictographs
ˎ Pictographs may not be displayed correctly when sending to i-mode non-compatible mobile
phones or PCs.
ˎ Some pictographs may not be displayed correctly depending on the type of recipient’s i-mode
compatible mobile phone.
ˎ For SMS, pictographs other than “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” are replaced with a half-width space (blank).
■ Pictographs
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
424
Emoticons
When you enter the following words in the kanji/hiragana mode, emoticons are
entered.
ˎ Some of the following emoticons may be different from those actually displayed.
ˎ Emoticons may be displayed in the ImgSym tab rather than in the Pre. tab.
Word
あいたっ
Emoticon
Word Emoticons Word
がーん
かお
あくび
Emoticon
Word
すみません
Emoticon
Word
にこにこ
Emoticon
Word
Emoticon
ぺこり
たのしい
にやり
あせ
ねてる
かお
ほーい
はーい
ばいばい
たら
ほし
ぽりぽり
ちゅっ
あら
むにゃむにゃ
いっぷく
めがね
うぃんく
かんぱい
つっこみ
きす
てれ
きゃー
どきっ
ぱちぱち
どてっ
ばんざい
うーん
うひょひょ
きゃはは
ながれぼし
ぐー
なく
はずかしい
めもめも
よしよし
らじゃ
りょうかい
びくっ
うん
わーい
えーん
ぐーぐー
えっ
くすん
くたばる
なぜ
ひやあせ
えと
えへへ
にげろー
さあ
おお
さかな
おーい
さざえ
じーっ
にこにこ
ふぁいと
ぶい
しくしく
おこる
わーん
ふっ
おねがい
わくわく
ぷんぷん
おりゃ
ぺこり
じと
わたしかな
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
おいおい
425
Common Phrases
Common phrase
Category
Internet
.co.jp
.go.jp
.ne.jp
@docomo.ne.jp
.com
http://
.or.jp
https://
.ac.jp
www.
おはようございます
お疲れさまでした
おやすみなさい
昨日は、
どうもありがとうございました
こんにちは
行ってきます
こんばんは
いってらっしゃい
よろしくお願い致します
Emoticon1
Emoticon2
Emoticon3
Greetings
Business
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
426
Private
Reply
Original
お世話になっております
直行します
本日の会議は中止となりました
直帰します
出欠をご連絡ください
休暇をとります
次の指示を待ってください
半休します
携帯の電源を切ります
電車遅延のため、
遅れます
メールで連絡してください
遊びに行こう
先に行きます
飲みにいきませんか？
先に帰ります
遅れます
時間です
変更します
何してるの？
中止です
どこにいるの？
OKです
今忙しい
NGです
後で連絡を入れます
ありがとう
保留です
ごめんなさい
キャンセルです
待ってて！
時間がありません
Multiaccess Combinations
The table below indicates whether another event or task is available for each task in
progress.
ˎ The FOMA terminal may not operate as indicated in the table below depending on its condition.
○: Available
×: Unavailable
△: Available depending on the conditions
Another event or task
Voice V.phone
i-mode
64K data
PushTalk
SMS
Full
call
call
mail
comm.
i-mode
Browser
Call Rcv Call Rcv Orig Rcv
Send Rcv Send Rcv Call Rcv
During a △ △
×
×
× × ×
○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ×
voice call ※1 ※2
※4
※4
During a
×
×
×
videophone ×
×
× × ×
× × × × ○ ×
※4
※4, 5
※4
call
During
○
× × ×
×
PushTalk
×
×
×
× × × × ○ ×
※6
※4 ※7 ※4
※4
communication
Current
status
○ ○ × ○
×
○ ○
○
× × × ×
×
× ×
×
× × × ×
×
× ×
×
△
× × ×
× × ×
○ ○ ○ ○
※13
※10 ※4 ※10
×
○ ○
×
○
×
○ ○ ○ ×
× × × ×
※3
※4
×
○
○
※3
×
○
×
○ ○ ○
×
× × × ×
×
※14
※11 ※11 ※11
※4
×
○ ○
×
○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○
※3 ※8 ※3 ※9
×
○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○
※3 ※8 ※3 ※9
×
○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○
※3 ※8 ※3 ※9
○
○ ○ ○ ○ ○ ○
○
○
○ ○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○ × ×
※11 ※11 ※11 ※11
×
× ×
○
×
×
×
× ×
※4
※4
×
×
× × × ○ ×
×
× × × ×
※4
×
× ×
×
×
○
○ ×
× ×
※15
※4
×
×
× × ○ ○ ×
×
× × × ×
※4
×
× ×
×
×
×
×
×
× ×
×
×
×
×
× ×
×
×
○
× × × × ×
× × × ×
※4
※14
×
× ×
×
×
× × × ×
※4
×
× ○
×
×
×
× ×
※4
○
×
×
×
× ×
※3
※4
× ○ ×
○ ○
○ ○ ○ ○
※3 ※8 ※3 ※9
○
○
○
○
※8
※9
○
○ ○ ○
×
×
×
×
× × ×
× × × ×
※12
※4
×
×
×
× ○ ×
× × × ×
※12
※4
○ ○ ○ ○ ×
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
During
i-mode
connection
Full
Browser
During
sending/
receiving
i-mode
mail
During
sending/
receiving
SMS
During 64K
data
communication
During
packet
comm.
(Data
comm.)
Updating
software
Communication
for scanning
During Data
Security
Service
communication
During
downloading
Music&Video
Channel
Packet comm. Software Comm. Data Security Music&Video
(Data comm.) update
Service
for
Channel
Call Rcv Now Rsv scanning Send Rcv Download
427
※1
※2
※3
※4
※5
※6
※7
※8
※9
※10
※11
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
428
※12
※13
※14
※15
If you subscribe to the Call Waiting Service, you can place a call to another recipient while
you already have a call in progress.
If you subscribe to the Call Waiting Service, you can receive another call while you already
have a call in progress. If you do not yet subscribe to the Call Waiting Service, you can
receive another call after you disconnect the first call.
You can place a voice or videophone call or originate a PushTalk call after disconnecting
the current communication.
The FOMA terminal does not perform the receiving operation and a received call is saved
in the Received record as a missed call.
If you do not yet subscribe to the Voice Mail Service, Call Waiting Service, or Call
Forwarding Service, a received call is not saved in the Received record.
In either of the following cases, the FOMA terminal notifies you of an incoming voice call
and you can select either to “answer a voice call” or to “continue with PushTalk call”. (The
one that was not selected is terminated.)
ˎ When the P-Talk arrival act is set to [Answer]
ˎ When the P-Talk arrival act is set to [Voice Mail] or [Call Forwarding] and you do not
subscribe to these services
If you originate a PushTalk call, you can place another call to add a member.
The FOMA terminal performs the operation set by the V.ph while packet.
ˎ When the V.ph while packet is set to [Prefer packet] or when the V.ph while packet is set
to [V.ph voicemail] or [Call forwarding] and you do not subscribe to these services, the
packet communication is continued.
ˎ When the V.ph while packet is set to [Prefer V.phone], packet communication is
disconnected and you can receive a videophone call.
The FOMA terminal performs the operation set by the i-mode arrival act.
ˎ When set to [Prefer i-mode], i-mode communication is continued.
ˎ When set to [Prefer PushTalk], i-mode communication is disconnected and you can
receive a PushTalk call.
While you are performing i-mode communication using i-αppli, you can send data after
disconnecting the i-mode communication in progress.
A combination of the same communication direction, either sending or receiving, is not
available.
When you set the Host selection to [i-mode(UIM)], “ ” appears.
After the current communication is terminated, the Full Browser communication is started.
When switching from i-mode to Full Browser, after the i-mode communication is terminated,
the Full Browser communication is started.
You can only place a call by entering a phone number directly in the stand-by display.
Multitask Combinations
The table below indicates whether another function is available for each function from
the menu display.
ˎ The FOMA terminal may not operate as indicated in the table below depending on the status of
each function.
ˎ Some functions may pause temporarily when they are not displayed in the display even if
already activated.
○: Available
×: Unavailable
−: Unavailable from the menu display
Mail/SMS
i-mode/Full Browser
i-αppli
Data Box/Lifetime
Calendar
Camera/Movie
MUSIC Player
GPS
Settings/NW Services/
Receive Ir data
During a voice call
During PushTalk
comm.
During a videophone call/
during 64K data comm./
during packet comm.
Call record/
Phonebook
ToruCa/Alarm/
Schedule/Text Memo/
Calculator
Mail/SMS
i-mode/Full Browser
i-αppli
Data Box/Lifetime
Calendar
Camera/Movie
MUSIC Player
GPS
Settings/NW Services/
Receive Ir data
−
−
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
○
×
−
−
−
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
○
×
×
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
×
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
×
×
○
○
○
×
×
×
×
−
−
−
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
PushTalk
−
Currently
activated function
ToruCa/Alarm/Schedule/
Text Memo/Calculator
Call record/
Phonebook
Videophone call/64K data
comm./Packet comm.
Voice call
Function to be
activated
429
Services Available on the FOMA Terminal
Service
Number guide service (paid: service charge + call charge)
(Phone numbers of customers who declined to disclose
their number information cannot be guided.)
Telegram service (paid: telegram fee)
Time (paid)
Weather (paid)
Emergency call to Police
Emergency call to Fire/Ambulance
Emergency call to Maritime rescue
Disaster Message Board Service (paid)
Collect Call (paid: service charge + call charge)
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
430
Phone number
(no area code) 104
(no area code) 115
(no area code) 117
Area code of the area you want to
hear the weather forecast for + 177
(no area code) 110
(no area code) 119
(no area code) 118
(no area code) 171
(no area code) 106
● When placing a Collect Call through 106, the recipient pays for the call charge and a
handling fee of 90 yen (94.5 yen including tax) per call (as of December 2007).
● When calling the Directory Assistance at 104, you are required to pay a service charge of
100 yen (105 yen including tax) besides the call charge (as of December 2007). Note that
Operator Services are free to the people with impairment in the vision or upper limbs. For
more details, contact 116 (NTT Sales Office) from an ordinary phone.
● If you have an ordinary phone with subscription to the Call Forwarding Service and you
designate your mobile phone number to forward your calls to, the caller may hear a ringing
sound even if the mobile phone is busy, outside of the service area, in the Self mode, or
powered off, etc. depending on the settings of the ordinary phone/mobile phone.
● Note that 116 (NTT Sales Office), Dial Q2, Message Dial, Credit calls cannot be called from
the FOMA terminal (note that Automatic Credit Calls may be used when calling from ordinary
phones to the FOMA terminal).
● This FOMA terminal supports “Emergency call location information”.
If you use the FOMA terminal to place a call to emergency numbers such as 110, 119,
or 118, the information of a location where you are calling from (location information) is
automatically notified to the Emergency call acceptance organization such as the Police
Station. The Emergency call acceptance organization may not be able to figure out your
exact location depending on the location where you place a call or radio wave condition.
If you notify your current location information, the name of the notified Emergency call
acceptance organization appears in the stand-by display.
If you place a call without the caller ID, such as by entering a phone number with “184” for
each call, the location information and phone number are not notified. However, the Emergency
call acceptance organization may decide to obtain the location information and phone number
regardless of your settings when they consider it is necessary for lifesaving, etc.
Note that the areas/time for which the “Emergency call location information” is ready to be used
vary depending on the preparatory state of each Emergency call acceptance organization.
● When you call the Police (110), Fire/Ambulance (119), or Maritime rescue (118) from the
FOMA terminal, clearly indicate that you are calling from a mobile phone, then give your
present location and mobile phone number, since the Police or Fire/Ambulance may have to
get in contact with you. Also, make a point to call in a stationary position to prevent the call
from being dropped. Do not power off the FOMA terminal for at least 10 minutes after the
emergency call just in case the Police or Fire/Ambulance may have to get in contact with you.
● Note that you may not connect to the local Fire Department or Police Station depending on
where you are calling from. In this case, try to call from a public phone or an ordinary phone
in the neighborhood.
Optional and Related Devices
A variety of commercially available optional devices allows you to expand the FOMA
terminal’s capabilities by supporting a wide range of applications, including personal
and business uses. Some accessories are only available in some areas. For details,
please contact our service counter (DoCoMo shop, etc.). For details on optional
devices, see the user’s manual of each device.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
● Battery Pack SO02
● Back Cover SO09
● FOMA AC Adapter 01/02 ※1
● FOMA DC Adapter 01/02
● FOMA Portable Charging Adapter 01
● FOMA AC Adapter 01 for Global use ※2
● FOMA Dry Battery Adapter 01
● Desktop Holder SO10
● In-Car Holder 01
● Carry Case L 01
● In-Car Hands-Free Kit 01 ※3
● FOMA In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01
● FOMA USB Cable with Charge Function 01/02 ※4
● FOMA USB Cable ※4
● FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna ※5
● FOMA Indoor Booster Antenna (Stand Type) ※5
● Flat-plug Earphone/Microphone with Switch P01/02
● Flat-plug Stereo Earphone Set P01
● Earphone/Microphone with Switch P001/002 ※6
● Stereo Earphone Set P001 ※6
● Earphone Terminal P001 ※6
● Earphone Plug Adapter P001
● Bone conduction microphone/receiver
※1 For information on charging the AC adapter, see P.40 and P.41.
※2 For use overseas, a plug adapter that fits the electrical outlets in the country you stay is
needed.
※3 FOMA In-Car Hands-Free Cable 01 is required to connect to FOMA SO906i using USB or
charge FOMA SO906i.
※4 If you use USB HUB, it may not work properly.
※5 Use it only in Japan.
※6 The Earphone Plug Adapter is required.
431
Introduction of Movie Player Software
To play back a movie (MP4 format file) on a PC, you need QuickTime Player (free) ver.
6.4 or later (or ver. 6.3+3GPP) from Apple Computer, Inc.
You can download QuickTime from the following website.
http://www.apple.com/jp/quicktime/download/
ˎ To download this software, you need a PC connected to the Internet. A separate communication
charge is also required for downloading.
ˎ Check the above website for details about the operating environment, downloading method,
operation method, and other information.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
432
Troubleshooting
First, check if the software update is necessary for the FOMA terminal. If necessary,
perform the software update (P.456).
Trouble
Cannot power on the FOMA terminal.
(The FOMA terminal cannot be used.)
The FOMA terminal cannot be
used
The warning tone sounds and
does not stop even when you
press the Power key, and the
FOMA terminal is powered off.
The busy tone sounds and the
call is not connected, even if
you dial up.
“ ” is displayed and the busy
tone sounds.
Cannot place a call even if you
press the keypad.
Cause and Remedy
ˎ Check if the battery pack is attached properly (P.39).
ˎ Check if the battery pack is not run out (P.42).
ˎ Check if the Lock key is set (P.140).
ˎ The battery is running out. Charge the battery (P.41).
ˎ Check if “ ” appears (P.30).
ˎ Check if you enter the area code (P.51).
ˎ Check if you dial up in a hurry without hearing the ringing tone
(P.51).
ˎ Check if you are outside of the service area or in a location
with weak radio wave condition (P.30).
ˎ Check if the Self mode is set (P.137).
ˎ Check if the Key dial lock is set (P.139).
ˎ Check if the Lock key is set (P.140).
ˎ Check if the FOMA terminal is powered on (P.43).
ˎ Check if the Lock key is set (P.140).
ˎ The Lock key is set. Cancel the Lock key and retry the
operation (P.140).
ˎ Check if the Power saver mode is set (P.122).
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
The dark display appears and
cannot operate anything.
is displayed and cannot
operate anything.
The set stand-by display
does not appear and the dark
display appears.
Text is displayed in Japanese. ˎ Check if the Select language is set to [Japanese] (P.128).
Cannot receive a call or the ˎ Check if the Public mode (Drive mode) is set (P.69).
ring tone does not sound.
ˎ Check if the Ring volume is set to [OFF] (P.109).
ˎ Check if the Manner mode is set (P.116).
ˎ Check if the Self mode is set (P.137).
ˎ Check if the Accept/Reject call is set (P.143).
ˎ Check if the Denied no ID is set (P.144).
ˎ Check if the Set ring start time is set (P.145).
ˎ Check if the Reject unknown is set (P.146).
ˎ Check if the ring time of the Voice Mail/Call Forwarding Service
is set to 0 seconds (P.392, 393).
ˎ Check if the Caller ID Request is set (P.395).
ˎ Check if the Mova terminal is enabled for the Dual Network
Service (P.395).
The mail and alar m tones ˎ Check if the Ring volume is set to [OFF] (P.109).
sound but the ring tone for an ˎ Check if a longer interval (such as 99 sec) is set at [Start time]
of the Set ring start time. Set it to a shorter interval (P.145).
incoming call does not sound.
The mail tone sounds but there ˎ Check if the Tone/Vibrate notice of the Voice Mail Service is
set to [ON]. If it is ON, you are notified of the increase in the
is no incoming mail.
number of record messages by the mail tone (P.392).
433
Trouble
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
434
Cause and Remedy
A n i m a g e o t h e r t h a n t h a t ˎ If multiple images are set for the incoming image for voice/
you set is displayed for an
videophone call, the image is displayed in the following order
incoming call.
of priority (P.96, 100, 108).
1. Des call display set in the Phonebook
2. Des call display set in the Group setting
3. Incoming image set in the Incoming set
When an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the ring tone or
an i-motion is set for the incoming image, however, the order
of priority may vary.
A ring tone other than that you ˎ If multiple ring tones are set for voice/videophone call, the ring
tone sounds in the following order of priority (P.97, 100, 109,
set sounds for an incoming
397, 400).
call.
1. Ring tone set in the Number Setting (when a call is placed
to an Additional No. for the Multi Number)
2. Des phone tone set in the Phonebook
3. Des phone tone set in the Group setting
4. Ring tone of the Ringtone for Number B of 2in1
5. Ring tone set in the Incoming set
When an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the ring tone or
an i-motion is set for the incoming image, however, the order
of priority may vary.
A ring tone other than that you ˎ If multiple ring tones are set for mail, the ring tone sounds in
set sounds for an incoming
the following order of priority (P.97, 100, 109).
mail.
1. Des mail tone set in the Phonebook
2. Des mail tone set in the Group setting
3. Ring tone set in the Incoming set
When an i-motion or Chaku-Uta Full® is set for the ring tone,
however, the order of priority may vary.
The incoming indicator in the ˎ If multiple incoming indicators are set for voice call/
color other than that you set
videophone call/mail, the incoming indicator flashes in the
lights for an incoming call or
following order of priority (P.97, 100, 110).
mail.
1. Select phone/mail Illum. set in the Phonebook
2. Select phone/mail Illum. set in the Group setting
3. Indicator color set in the Incoming set
The incoming indicator flashes ˎ Check if the Missed call is set to [ON] (P.126).
in certain cycle.
The charge indicator stays lit. ˎ Check if [Charging] of the Backlight always on is set to [ON] (P.122).
In this setting, it may take time to complete charging, but this
is not a malfunction.
ˎ Check if you use a function such as the videophone, data
communication, and i-αppli while charging the battery.
In this case, it may take time to complete charging, but this is
not a malfunction.
T h e k e y p a d s o u n d i s n o t ˎ Check if the Keypad sound volume is set to [OFF] (P.111).
heard.
ˎ Check if the Manner mode is set (P.116).
The display is slow to react on ˎ This may occur when a large amount of data is stored in the
FOMA terminal.
pressing a key.
The Total calls cost does not ˎ It does not increment if the counter reaches the upper limit
increment.
value (about ¥16,770,000) of total calls cost of UIM. Reset the
counter to ¥0 (P.370).
Data communication does not ˎ Check if you use USB HUB. If you use USB HUB, it may not
start.
work properly.
Error Messages
ˎ In some cases, a 3-digit number may be displayed together with a message. This is a DoCoMo
own code that DoCoMo displays on the FOMA terminal.
A mail address is unregistered
Camera function error. Quit
the application
ˎ No mail address for posting
is saved for the selected blog
service. Save a mail address
(P.358).
Accessing IC card. Cannot
delete
ˎ Failed to delete the software
because data in the OsaifuKeitai-compatible i-αppli IC
card is being accessed.
Address is not valid (451)
ˎ Failed to send the mail
because of unknown mail
address. Enter the correct mail
address and send it again.
Another function is active.
Cannot activate this at the
same time
ˎ Another function that cannot
be run simultaneously by
multitask-ing is active. Quit the
function, if it is not being used,
and then retry the operation
(P.353).
Authentication failed
Authentication type is not
supported (401)
ˎ Failed to connect to the site or
website, etc. because of the
unsupported authentication
type.
ˎ Failed to set to the microSD
or MTP mode because of
a communication using the
FOMA USB Cable with Charge
Function 01/02 (optional) in
progress.
Certificate is rejected
(tampered)
C a m e r a f u n c t i o n e r r o r.
Save the data and quit the
application
ˎ There are some problems with
the certificate.
ˎ The Camera mode is
terminated after the image
is saved because of an error
occurrence. To continue to use
the camera, restart the Camera
mode.
ˎ The SMS address exceeds 21
digits or 186/184 is entered at
the beginning of the address.
Enter the correct address and
send it again (P.234).
Camera function error. Switch
to Substitute image
ˎ The incorrect host is set at the
SMSC. Restore the host to
“DoCoMo”, the default setting
at the time of purchase (P.236).
ˎ The videophone image is
switched to the substitute
image because of an error
occurrence. Switch it again to
the camera image (P.51).
Cannot execute because of
memory shortage
ˎ Failed to execute the function
because of insufficient
memory.
Cannot move. Not enough
memory
ˎ The remaining memory
in the microSD memor y
card is insufficient. Delete
unnecessary data (P.103, 193,
194, 223, 258, 321, 366, 373).
Cannot read. You need to
format
Check address
Check SMS Center setting
Connection failed
ˎ The host number set for the
Host selection is incorrect.
Restore the host number to
“iモード”, the default setting at
the time of purchase (P.197).
ˎ Failed to connect because of
weak radio wave condition.
R e t r y t o c o n n e c t f ro m a
place with better radio wave
condition.
ˎ Failed to connect to a line due
to a network problem. Retry to
connect after a while.
ˎ Failed to connect to a line for
some reason when placing a
videophone call.
ˎ The microSD memory card is
not formatted correctly. Format
it using the FOMA terminal
(P.313).
Connection failed (403)
Cannot support content
Connection failed (503)
ˎ Data that is not supported
by the FOMA ter minal is
contained in the contents.
ˎ Failed to connect to a line due
to a network problem. Retry to
connect after a while.
ˎ Failed to connect to i-mode for
some reason. Retry to connect
(P.186).
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
ˎ Failed in verifying the
authentication password.
Set the password so that it
matches the one of the other
device and then retry the
operation (P.329, 330, 332,
333).
ˎ The authentication type (one/
all) does not match the one set
for the other device. Set the
same authentication type (one/
all) on both party to exchange
data using the infrared or iC
communication (P.329, 330,
332, 333).
ˎ The Camera mode is
terminated because of an error
occurrence. To continue to use
the camera, restart the Camera
mode.
Cannot switch mode
435
Connection failed (562)
ˎ Failed to connect to the i-mode
center. Move to a location with
better radio wave condition
and then retry the operation.
Connection interrupted
ˎ The communication is
interrupted because of an
error occurrence during data
communication.
Content length exceeds
maximum size for i-motion
ˎ Failed to retrieve the data
because its volume has
exceeded the maximum size.
Content length exceeds
replayable size for i-motion
ˎ Failed to retrieve the data
because its volume has
exceeded the maximum size.
Continue using
transmit data?
ppli and
ˎ This message appears
when the number of times of
communication performed
while an i-αppli software
is used has increased
significantly for a certain
period of time. To continue
using the i-αppli software,
select [Yes]. To continue using
the i-αppli software after the
communication is terminated,
select [No]. To quit the i-αppli
software, select [Terminate].
Could not move
ˎ Failed to move data because
of an error occurrence.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
436
Could not save
ˎ Failed to save the image,
m u s i c d a t a , o r i - αp p l i
software.
ˎ Failed to save to the microSD
memory card.
ˎ Failed to receive data during
the infrared/iC communication
or data communication with a
PC.
ˎ Failed to save the image or
melody scanned by the bar
code reader.
ˎ Failed to save the i-motion
because the size exceeded
10M bytes. You can set a
Chaku-Uta Full® with up to 10M
bytes of i-motion for the ring
tone/Alarm using [Point].
Error in image. Does not work
correctly
Data in IC card is full. Unable
to download. Delete service?
ˎ The Flash movie cannot be
played back correctly due to
some errors in the Flash movie.
ˎ Failed to download the data
because the Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli IC card is
full of data. When you select
[Yes], the names of the OsaifuKeitai services on the card
appear. Select a service name
and delete its Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli software
and data from the IC card.
Data transmission is frequent.
Continue transmission?
ˎ This message appears
when the number of times of
communication performed
while an i-αppli software
is used has increased
significantly for a certain
period of time. To continue
using the i-αppli software,
select [Yes]. To continue using
the i-αppli software after the
communication is terminated,
select [No]. To quit the i-αppli
software, select [Terminate].
Deleted invalid text
ˎ Characters other than digits
cannot be accepted for
the postal code. They are
discarded.
Download failed
ˎ Failed to download because of
an error occurrence.
Draft is full. Cannot create
ˎ The number of saved mail
has reached 50 or there is
not enough memory. Delete
unnecessary saved mail
(P.223).
Error in IC card data. Unable
to delete software
ˎ Failed to delete the software
because data in the OsaifuKeitai-compatible i-αppli IC
card contains an error.
Error in the dictionary
ˎ There are some words or
phrases that have failed to
be saved because of an error
in part of the dictionary data
(words or phrases that have
been saved successfully can
be used as dictionary data).
Exceeds max number of
simultaneous call
ˎ This message appears when
you originate a PushTalk call
to more than four members.
Reduce the number of
members you select to four
or less and originate the call
again.
Final number exists. Cannot shoot
ˎ The microSD memory card
contains a file with the
maximum number (999-9999),
so no more files can be saved
in it. Delete the image files from
the largest file numbers (P.321).
p p l i s t a n d - by d i s p l ay
terminated due to security
error
ˎ The i-αppli stand-by display
was canceled since it has
attempted an unauthorized
operation. Check the security
error history (P.250).
ppli To function is not set
ˎ The i-αppli To is set to [No].
Set the i-αppli To to [Yes] and
then retry the operation (P.241).
IC card is locked
ˎ The IC card lock is set. Cancel
the IC card lock and then retry
the operation (P.262).
Image display setting OFF.
Cannot download
ˎ Failed to download the image
because the Display img is
set to [OFF]. Set the Display
img to [ON] and then retry the
operation.
i-mode mail service is busy.
Please try again later (553)
ˎ The line is extremely
congested. Wait for a while
and then retry the operation.
Input error (205)
ˎ Incorrect input data. Check the
input contents.
Insert UIM
ˎ The UIM is not inserted. Insert
the UIM and then retry the
operation (P.36).
Invalid data (XXX)
ˎ You tried to connect to the site
or website, etc. not supporting
i-mode.
ˎ The URL you entered may be
invalid.
ˎ Failed to display because of
an error in the received data.
I n va l i d d a t a . C o n n e c t i o n
cannot be established (400)
ˎ The host number you set for
the Host selection is incorrect.
Restore the host number to
“iモード”, the default setting at
the time of purchase (P.197).
ˎ Failed to connect to i-mode for
some reason. Retry to connect
(P.186).
ˎ You tried to connect to the site,
etc. not supporting i-mode.
ˎ The URL you entered may be
invalid.
ˎ Failed to display because of
an error in the received data.
Invalid UIM, requested
software failed to start
ˎ Failed to start the i-αppli
software due to the function
for restricting UIM operation.
Insert the UIM that was used
when you retrieved the data or
file and then retry the operation
(P.36).
ˎ Unable to delete software
because the information on
a UIM inserted in the FOMA
terminal and its corresponding
information on the IC card are
different. Use the UIM that was
inserted in the FOMA terminal
when you downloaded and
activated the Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli for the first
time.
Invalid UIM. Download failed
ˎ Unable to download software
because the information on
a UIM inserted in the FOMA
terminal and its corresponding
information on the IC card are
different. Use the UIM that was
inserted in the FOMA terminal
when you downloaded and
activated the Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli for the first
time.
Invalid UIM. Requested
service not available
ˎ Failed to perform the operation
due to the function for restricting
UIM operation. Insert the
UIM that was used when you
retrieved the data or file and
then retry the operation (P.36).
Invalid UIM. Start failed
ˎ U n a b l e t o s t a r t s o f t w a re
because the information on
a UIM inserted in the FOMA
terminal and its corresponding
information on the IC card are
different. Use the UIM that was
inserted in the FOMA terminal
when you downloaded and
activated the Osaifu-Keitaicompatible i-αppli for the first
time.
Invalid URL
ˎ When you entered a URL,
you did not enter “http://”
or “https://”, or entered it
incorrectly. Enter the correct
URL and then retr y the
operation (P.191).
ˎ Failed to display a link
because the URL contains an
error.
Key dial locked
ˎ The Key dial lock is set. Cancel
the Key dial lock and then retry
the operation (P.139).
Lock all
ˎ The Lock all is set. Cancel
the Lock all and then retry the
operation (P.135).
Low battery. Cannot update
data information
ˎ When the battery level is
very low, you cannot add
an i bookmark/mark in the
PDF data saved in [Movable
contents] of My document in
the microSD memory card.
Mail security is set
ˎ The Mail security is set. Cancel
the Mail security and then retry
the operation (P.142).
以下の宛先にはメール送信で
きませんでした（561） Mails
could not be sent to following
address
○○@△△△.ne.jp
※M a i l a d d r e s s e s v a r y
depending on each recipient.
ˎ Failed to send mails to some
mail addresses. Move to a
location with better radio wave
condition and then send them
again.
Main memory shortage
ˎ The remaining memory on the
FOMA terminal is insufficient.
Change the image quality
or image size, or delete
unnecessary images (P.159,
178, 321).
Main memory shortage. May
not save
ˎ An image you edit may not be
saved because of insufficient
memory on the FOMA terminal.
Delete unnecessary images
or move some images to the
microSD memory card (P.312,
321).
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Invalid data. Data size is not
supported (XXX)
Invalid UIM. Delete not possible
437
MainMenu cannot be activated
now
ˎ Failed to display the menu
because a function that does
not support menu display is
executed.
Manner mode is set
ˎ Failed to adjust the volume
because the Manner mode is
set. Cancel the Manner mode
and then retry the operation
(P.116).
Memory shortage
ˎ The operation is interrupted
because of insufficient
memory. If the message is
frequently displayed, power off
the FOMA terminal once and
then power it on again.
Memor y shor tage. Cancel
operation
ˎ The operation is discontinued
because of insufficient
memory.
Message rejected and cannot
be received
ˎ Failed to send SMS because
the recipient rejects receiving
SMS.
Message rejected and cannot
be sent
ˎ Failed to send SMS because
sending SMS is rejected.
microSD error
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
438
ˎ Failed to access the microSD
memory card (loading error,
etc.). Remove the microSD
memor y card once and
insert it again (P.307). If this
message appears again, the
microSD memory card may be
damaged.
No content is available (204)
ˎ The site or website you
specified contains no display
data.
No files
No response
ˎ For the Music slide show,
only JPEG images can be
displayed. Either save a JPEG
image or specify other folder
w h e re J P E G i m a g e s a re
saved.
ˎ The UIM operation restriction
is set to the image. Insert the
UIM that was inserted when
the image was obtained, and
retry the operation (P.36).
ˎ Failed to identify a recipient
of iC communication. Check
if both FeliCa marks “ ”
are opposed correctly with
each other or the other device
operates properly (P.331).
ˎ Failed to recognize the
other device for the infrared
communication. Check if the
infrared data ports are pointed
at each other correctly or if the
other device operates properly
(P.327).
No memory space
ˎ The number of entries saved
in the Phonebook has reached
1,000. Delete unnecessary
entries in the Phonebook
(P.103).
ˎ The number of saved
schedules has reached 300.
Delete unnecessary schedules
(P.366).
ˎ Failed to save the data. This
message appears if there is
not enough memory when
you attempt to exchange
data using the infrared or iC
communication.
ˎ There is not enough memory
to save new data. Delete
unnecessary data (P.326).
No more file number. Please reset
ˎ The file number which is
attached to an image saved
in the microSD memory card
and incremented with the
number of saved images has
reached the maximum number
(999-9999). Perform the Reset
file No. (P.181).
No requested software
ˎ The i-αppli software to be
started from the site or mail, or
by the infrared communication
is not stored in the FOMA
terminal.
No response (408)
ˎ The communication is
interrupted because there is
no response from the site or
website. Retry the operation
after a while.
No space in main memory
ˎ Another image recorded by
the camera cannot be saved
because of no memory to
save it on the FOMA terminal.
Change the image quality
or image size, or delete
unnecessary images (P.159,
178, 321).
ˎ The remaining memory on the
FOMA terminal is insufficient.
Delete unnecessar y data
(P.103, 193, 194, 223, 258,
321, 366, 373).
No space to attach signature
ˎ Failed to attach the signature
because the total number of
characters in the mail main
body and signature exceeds
5,000 full-width or 10,000 halfwidth characters. Decrease
the number of characters in
the mail main body or send
mail with no signature attached
(P.207, 227).
Not enough space in microSD
ˎ Another image recorded by
the camera cannot be saved
because of no vacant space to
save it in the microSD memory
c a rd . C h a n g e t h e i m a g e
quality or image size, or delete
unnecessary images (P.159,
178, 321).
Not supported by this Reader/
Writer
ˎ T h e r e c i p i e n t ’s t e r m i n a l
does not support the iC
communication.
Public mode (Drive mode)
ˎ The Public mode is set. Cancel
the Public mode and then retry
the operation (P.69).
ˎ The PUK code is locked.
Contact the nearest DoCoMo
shop (P.131).
ˎ This file is provided with a time
limit on playback. It cannot be
played back because the term
permitted for playback has not
yet started. Check the starting
date of the term in the Detail
info display (P.322).
Requested software
unavailable
PUK blocked
Omakase Lock activated
ˎ The Omakase Lock is set.
While the Omakase Lock is set,
all key operations are disabled
except for answering an
incoming voice or videophone
call and powering on/off
(P.136).
Out of service area
ˎ The i-mode services are not
available since you are outside
of the service area or in a
location without the radio wave.
Move to a location where “ ”
disappears (P.30).
Page is not found (404)
ˎ The site, website, etc. cannot
be located. Check if the URL
you entered is correct.
Personal data locked
ˎ The Personal data lock is set.
Cancel the Personal data lock
and then retry the operation
(P.137).
Please wait for a while
Receiving data exceeds
maximum size for i-motion
ˎ Failed to retrieve the data
because its volume has
exceeded the maximum size.
ˎ Failed to retrieve the data
because its file size has
exceeded 10M bytes while
playing back a streaming type
i-motion.
Receiving data exceeds
replayable size for i-motion
ˎ Failed to retrieve the data
because its volume has
exceeded the maximum size.
ˎ Failed to retrieve the data
because its file size has
exceeded 500K bytes while
playing back a standard type
i-motion.
Registration is in progress
(554)
ˎ User registration of i-mode is in
progress. Retry the operation
after a while.
Remotely Controllable
services denied
Please wait for a while (packet)
Replay period has expired
ˎ Packet communication system
failure or very high congestion
in packet communication
network. Retry the operation
after a while.
ˎ This file is provided with an
expiry date or time limit on
playback. It cannot be played
back because the term
permitted for playback has
expired. Check the expiry
date in the Detail info display
(P.322).
ˎ Failed to position the current
location. Move to a location
with better radio wave
condition and then try it again.
ˎ Yo u c u r re n t l y d o n o t y e t
subscribe to services such
as the Voice Mail or Call
Forwarding Service that can
be operated by remote control.
To use the remote control,
subscribe to services.
ˎ Failed to start the i-αppli
software stored in the FOMA
terminal from a site or mail, or
by infrared communication.
Retention period has expired
(492)
ˎ The time for storage of the
pull-type file attachment has
expired. It cannot be obtained.
Root certificate has expired.
Connect?
ˎ The certificate of the FOMA
terminal is not yet valid or
has expired. Select [Yes] to
connect or [No] to cancel to
connect. This message may
also appear when the current
date and time are set wrong.
Set them correctly (P.44).
Root certificate is not valid
ˎ The SSL list is set to [Invalid].
Set the SSL list to [Valid]
(P.198).
R u n s o f t wa r e a n d d e l e t e
data on IC card. Then delete
software
ˎ Failed to delete the OsaifuKeitai-compatible i-αppli
software because of some
data being contained in the IC
card. Delete the saved data
after starting the software and
then retry the operation (P.255).
Same ToruCa exists. Unable to
receive ToruCa
ˎ You cannot obtain a ToruCa
card that already exists when
the Duplication check is set
(P.261).
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
ˎ Voice line/packet
communication system failure
or very high congestion
in voice line/packet
communication network. Retry
after a while. However, you can
still place a call to 110, 119,
or 118, with some exceptions
depending on the situation.
Positioning failed
Replay period has not yet
started
439
Server is busy
Setting unknown reject
ˎ The software update is not
available because the server is
busy. Wait for a while and then
retry the operation (P.459).
ˎ The Reject unknown is set.
Cancel the Reject unknown
and then retry the operation
(P.146).
Server is full (551)
Software already updated
ˎ When the number of mail held
for the recipient at the i-mode
center reaches the maximum
number, no more mail sent to
the recipient is accepted by
the i-mode center. Try to send
mail after the recipient makes
space for new mail at the
i-mode center (P.213).
ˎ No update is available for the
i-αppli software because it
has been already updated to
the latest.
Ser vice is used by the
previous software. Unable to
download. Delete a service?
ˎ Downloading/upgrading is
unavailable because software
using the same service has
been already downloaded.
Service not provided
ˎ SMS is not provided.
Service not registered
ˎ You do not have a subscription
for the i-mode service. To use
i-mode, subscribe to i-mode.
ˎ If you signed up for i-mode
after starting to use the FOMA
terminal, power off the FOMA
terminal once and then power
it on again.
Services are full. MUSIC of
overwritten service is unable
to play. Overwrite?
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
440
ˎ The maximum number of
music services (members only)
which can be saved has been
exceeded. If you select [Yes],
the new service overwrites the
service which has the oldest
time limit on playback. Also,
you cannot play back music
downloaded from the service
which is overwritten.
Setting keyguard
ˎ The Lock key is set. Cancel
the Lock key and then retry the
operation (P.140).
Setting self mode
ˎ The Self mode is set. Cancel
the Self mode and then retry
the operation (P.137).
Software terminated due to
security error
ˎ The i-αppli software was
terminated since it has
attempted an unauthorized
operation. Check the security
error history (P.250).
SSL session failed
ˎ Failed to connect to the
server because of a server
authentication error.
SSL session was terminated
ˎ The SSL communication is
disconnected because there is
a problem with the certificate
of the site.
This certificate is not valid for
this URL. Connect?
ˎ The CN-Name (server name)
of the certificate of the site
does not match the actual
server name. Select [Yes] to
connect or [No] to cancel to
connect.
This data can no longer be
replayed
ˎ This file is provided with a
limitation on the number of
times of playback. It cannot
be played back because the
number of times permitted for
playback has been exceeded.
Check the permitted number of
times in the Detail info display
(P.322).
This data may not be replayed
ˎ Yo u m a y n o t b e a b l e t o
play back this i-motion data
because it is invalid.
This function is unavailable
Syntax error (XXX)
ˎ The function you selected
cannot be used concurrently
with the function that is
currently executed (P.353).
ˎ Failed to display because of
an error in the received data.
This site is not cer tified.
Connect?
ˎ The certificate of the site is
not supported by the FOMA
t e r m i n a l . S e l e c t [ Ye s ] t o
connect or [No] to cancel to
connect.
Text volume exceeds. Cannot
send
ˎ The number of characters
in the mail main body has
exceeded the limit and mail
cannot be sent. Reduce the
number of characters.
There is no corresponding
service
ˎ No blog service that supports
a service you want to use is
saved. Save an appropriate
blog service (P.358).
This certificate has expired.
Connect?
ˎ The certificate of the site is not
yet valid or has expired. Select
[Yes] to connect or [No] to
cancel to connect.
This software contains an
error
ˎ Failed to download or upgrade
because information required
for it is not set on the i-αppli
software.
This software contains an
error. Unable to download
ˎ Failed to download because of
an error in the software data.
This software is currently
unavailable for use
ˎ IP (information service
providers) stopped the use of
the i-αppli software. Contact
IP.
This software is not supported
by this phone
ˎ The software you want to
download or upgrade does not
support the FOMA terminal.
This UIM cannot be recognized
ˎ Make sure that the correct UIM
is inserted (P.36).
ˎ The UIM contains an error.
Contact our service counter
(DoCoMo shop, etc.).
Time out
ˎ Failed to connect within the
time set for the Connection
timeout. Change the setting or
retry to connect after a while
(P.197).
Too many active functions.
Cannot activate
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t e x e c u t e t h e
selected function because
of too many functions being
executed by multitasking. Quit
a currently executed function
and then retry the operation
(P.353).
Too many active functions.
Cannot execute. Quit other
function and retry
ˎ You cannot execute a selected
function because of insufficient
memor y. Quit a currently
executed function and then
retry the operation (P.353).
Too much data was entered
ˎ Failed to send because of too
many characters. Reduce the
number of characters and try
to send again.
Transmission failed
Transmission failed (552)
ˎ Failed to connect to a line due
to a problem at the i-mode or
SMS center. Retry to connect
after a while.
Usage is currently restricted.
Try again later
ˎ The number of SMS saved
in the UIM has reached the
maximum number. Delete
unnecessary SMS (P.223).
ˎ Users of the flat-rate i-mode
packet service may not be
able to connect during certain
hours because of sharp
increase in communication
traffic. In this case, wait for a
while until you can use i-mode.
UIM is full
UIM is not inserted. Content is
unavailable
ˎ Failed to operate because the
UIM is not inserted. Insert the
UIM that was used when you
retrieved the data or file and
then retry the operation (P.36).
Use ToruCa automatic reading
func through the reader/writer?
ˎ Auto recognition is set to [OFF]
(P.260).
Unable to display this program
guide
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B
mode, you cannot run the
program guide i-αppli with
mail or using mail.
Your HTTP version is not
supported (505)
ˎ You tried to connect to the site,
etc. not supporting i-mode.
Unable to obtain data due to
replay restriction data error
ˎ Failed to obtain the file
because of an error in the
playback restriction data.
Unable to retrieve the
requested URL (504)
ˎ Failed to connect to the site or
website for some reason. Retry
to connect.
Unable to run this software
ˎ When 2in1 is set to the B
mode, you cannot run i-αppli
with mail or i-αppli using mail.
Unable to update patter n
definitions
ˎ Failed to update patter n
definitions because of error
occurrence.
Unable to use in My Data B
ˎ Yo u c a n n o t o r i g i n a t e a
PushTalk call from the Own
number display of the B mode.
Unsupported microSD
ˎ A non-compatible microSD
memory card is installed in the
FOMA terminal. Install a FOMA
terminal-compatible microSD
memory card (P.307).
URL is too long to register
ˎ Failed to save the site as
a bookmark because the
URL exceeds 256 half-width
characters (P.191).
Symbol
error
ˎ A n e r ro r o c c u r re d w h i l e
running the i-αppli software.
Start to run again or check the
error history (P.250).
“ ○△□. n e . j p ” 宛のメールが混み
合っているため、送信すること
ができません（555） (Failed
to send mail to “○△□.ne.jp”
because the line is congested)
※Domain names vary
depending on each recipient.
ˎ The line is extremely
congested. Wait for a while
and then retry the operation.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
ˎ An error occured while sending
mail. Make sure that “ ” is not
displayed and send it again. If
the message appears again,
retry to send after a while
(P.213).
ˎ The address of SMS is
incorrect. Enter the correct
address (phone number) and
send again (P.234).
441
Warranty and After Sales Services
Warranty
● Make sure that the warranty is received with the FOMA terminal upon purchase.
Check to be sure that the name of the retailer, date of purchase, and other items have been
filled out on the warranty before storing it in a safe place. If any necessary information is not
provided, immediately contact the retailer and request to complete the warranty. The FOMA
terminal comes with a year’s free warranty starting from the date of purchase.
● Specifications of this product and its accessories are subject to change for improvement
without prior notice.
● Data saved in the Phonebook or other memory locations may be changed/lost due to the
trouble/repairs or handling of the FOMA terminal. Note down the data in the Phonebook or
other memory locations on a separate memo and keep it safely to prevent such problems.
When the FOMA terminal is replaced due to trouble, the information downloaded using i-mode
and i-αppli are not transferred to the repaired FOMA terminal because of copyright laws, with
some exceptions.
※ This FOMA terminal allows you to save data, such as the Phonebook, in the microSD
memory card.
※ This FOMA terminal allows you to save i-motion files and data that is used by i-αppli
software in the microSD memory card.
※ This FOMA terminal allows you to use the Data Security Service (a paid service that requires
a subscription) to store data, such as the Phonebook, at the Data Security Service Center.
※ If you have a PC, you can use the DoCoMo keitai datalink (P.408) and the FOMA USB Cable
with Charge Function 01/02 (optional) or FOMA USB Cable (optional) to transfer data saved in
the Phonebook and other memory from the FOMA terminal to the PC and save data in the PC.
After Sales Services
◎ If you have problems with the FOMA terminal
Before requesting for repairs, refer to “Troubleshooting” of this manual to see if the problem can
be remedied (P.444).
If the FOMA terminal still malfunctions, call the “Contact for Repairs” on the backcover of this
manual.
◎ If repair is required resultingly
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
442
Bring the FOMA terminal to the DoCoMo repair handling service counter. However, it must be
taken during business hours of the DoCoMo repair handling service counter. Make sure to
bring a warranty card with the product when you visit the shop.
◎ Within the warranty period
ˎ We repair the FOMA terminal free of charge based on the terms documented in the warranty.
ˎ When requesting a repair, make sure to bring the warranty card with the FOMA terminal.
Repair requests that are not accompanied by the warranty or that involve malfunction and
damage due to incorrect handling by the owner will only be repaired at the owner’s expense,
even if the warranty period is still effective.
ˎ Malfunction due to use of devices and consumable parts other than those specified by DoCoMo
will only be repaired at the owner’s expense, even if the warranty period is still effective.
ˎ Damages on the liquid-crystal screen, connecter, or other parts occurred after the purchase
will be repaired at the owner’s expense.
◎ Note that repair may be refused in the following cases.
We may not repair the FOMA terminal if the water leak seal is reacted or if the FOMA terminal
has corrosion due to water leakage, condensation, perspiration, etc. or if the internal circuit
board is damaged or deformed. Even if repair is possible, it will be done at the owner’s
expense, as this type of corrosion or damage is not covered by the warranty.
◎ If the warranty period expires
We will repair the FOMA terminal at the owner’s expense.
◎ Parts stock period
The functional parts necessary to repair the FOMA terminal will be basically available for
a minimum of six years after the manufacture is discontinued. However, depending on the
defective portion, repair may not be possible because of a shortage of repair parts.
Note that repair may still be possible depending on the defective portion even if the stock
period has expired. Call the “Contact for Repairs” on the backcover of this manual.
◎ Precautions
Precautions on Memory Dial (Phonebook Function) and Downloaded Data
● It is strictly recommended to back up all the data you have saved in the FOMA terminal or other
recording media. DoCoMo shall have no liability for any change or loss of the data.
● Note that data you created or data you retrieved or downloaded from sources other than your
FOMA terminal may be changed or lost when you change the model or have repairs done to
the FOMA terminal. DoCoMo shall have no liability for any change or loss of any kind. Under
some circumstances, DoCoMo may replace your FOMA terminal with its equivalent instead of
repairing it.
Only when the FOMA terminal is replaced, the images/melodies for incoming calls that you
downloaded to your FOMA terminal and user-defined data are transferred to a new terminal.
(However, depending on the data and seriousness of the trouble, data cannot be transferred to
a new terminal.)
※ Depending on the volume of data saved in the FOMA terminal, it may take time or it may not
be possible to transfer data to a new terminal.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
● Never modify the FOMA terminal or accessories.
ˎ Doing so may result in fire, injuries or malfunctions.
ˎ The modified FOMA terminal may be repaired only if the owner agrees on that all the
modified parts are restored to the original conditions. However, repairs may be refused
depending on the modifications.
The following cases may be considered as modifications.
- Put a seal on portions such as of the liquid-crystal screen or keypad.
- Glued decorations on the FOMA terminal using adhesion bond, etc.
- Change the parts such as exterior to other than DoCoMo Standard Parts.
ˎ Malfunction and damage due to modifications will be repaired at the owner’s expense,
even if the warranty period is still effective.
● The model plate must not be removed from the FOMA terminal.
The model plate certifies that the FOMA terminal satisfies technical standards. It should be
noted that if the plate is removed or is replaced with a different plate, and the original model
plate cannot be verified, it may disqualify the unit from repairs due to not being able to
determine the technical standards of that particular phone.
● Note that the settings, total call duration, and other information may be reset (cleared) as a
result of malfunction, repair or other handling. In this case, make the settings again.
● A material that generates a magnetic field is used in the following parts of the FOMA
terminal. Do not hold an object that is easily affected by magnetism, such as a cash card,
close to the FOMA terminal. You may not be able to use the card any more.
Where it is used: Earpiece, speaker, upper side of the back of the lens cover, both sides of
the JOG
● If the FOMA terminal has gotten wet or moist, immediately power off the terminal and remove
the battery pack from it, and then bring it to the DoCoMo repair handling service counter as
soon as possible. However, note that we may not repair the FOMA terminal depending on
the extent of the damage.
443
ｉモード故障診断 (i-mode Trouble Diagnosis) Site
This website allows you to check by yourself whether some operations, such as
sending/receiving mail and downloading images and melodies, are performed
normally on your FOMA terminal.
Top page
(Only in Japanese)
List of test menus page
(Only in Japanese)
ｉモート゛故障診断
ｉモート゛故障診断
画像・メロテ゛ィ・メールなどが正
常に動作しているか確認す
る事ができます。
このヘ゜ーシ゛をＢｏｏｋｍａｒｋ登録
される事をお勧めします
↓
↓
↓
テストメニュー一覧へ
ハ゜ケット通信料無料！
「ｉモート゛故障診断」につい
てのお問い合せ
※お問い合わせ先及び受付
時間は地域によって異なり
ます。
お問い合わせ先へ
テストメニュー一覧
ＧＩＦ画像表示テスト
ＪＰＥＧ画像表示テスト
アニメーション画像表示テスト
メール送受信テスト
画像メール表示テスト
メロテ゛ィメール受信テスト
着信メロテ゛ィ再生テスト
ｉアフ゜リタ゛ウンロート゛テスト
ｉ−ｍｏｔｉｏｎタ゛ウンロート゛テスト
戻る
● Access to the “ｉモード故障診断” (i-mode trouble diagnosis) site
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
ˎ
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
444
i-mode site : [i Menu] → [お知らせ] (Information) → [サービス・機能] (Service/
Function) → [ｉモード] (i-mode) → [ｉモード故障診断] (i-mode
trouble diagnosis)
No packet communication charge is required for the i-mode trouble diagnosis site.
※ Packet communication charge is required from abroad.
Available test items vary depending on the model of the FOMA terminal and may be subject to change.
When you check your mobile phone for normal operation on each test item, carefully read the
precautions described in the website before starting the diagnosis.
When you access the i-mode trouble diagnosis site and perform a mail sending test, your
FOMA terminal-specific information (such as model name and mail address) is automatically
sent to the server (server for the i-mode trouble diagnosis). DoCoMo will not use the information
sent from your FOMA terminal for any purposes other than for the i-mode trouble diagnosis.
If your mobile phone is diagnosed as having some troubles, call the “Contact for Repairs” on
the backcover of this manual for remedial action.
Updating the Software

About Updating the Software
This function allows you to check if the software update is necessary by connecting to
the network for the FOMA terminal and if necessary, download a part of the software
using packet communication to update the software.
※ No packet communication charge is required for updating software.
If the software update is necessary, we inform of it on DoCoMo’s home page and in “お
知らせ” (Information) accessible from i Menu.
You can use one of the three update types: “Auto-update”, “Now update”, “Reserve”
to update the software.
Auto-update Download new software automatically and rewrite at the previously set time.
Now update Update the software immediately at any time you want.
Reserve
Reserve a date/time you want to update the software. The software update starts
automatically at the reserved date and time.
● Do not remove the battery pack while updating the software. The software update may fail if
you do so.
● The software update can be made with data, such as Phonebook entries, images recorded
by the camera and downloaded data, remaining in the FOMA terminal. However, note
that the safety of the data may not be assured depending on the conditions of your FOMA
terminal (e.g. malfunction, damage and exposure to water). It is recommended to take a
backup copy of important data (some data such as downloaded data may be protected
from backup copy).
Before Using the Function
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
ˎ You can update the software even if the Host selection is set to other than [i-mode(UIM)].
ˎ Before updating the software, be sure to fully charge the battery pack of the FOMA terminal.
ˎ You cannot update the software in the following cases:
- When the date and time of the FOMA terminal are not set
- During a call
- When “ ” is displayed
- While the Self mode is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- When the Lock key is set (Auto-update and Reserve are available)
- When the battery level is low
- When the UIM is not inserted
- When another function is being used
- When the FOMA terminal is connected to an external device such as a PC
ˎ It may take time to update (download and rewrite) the software in some cases.
ˎ The Alarm and Schedule alarm do not operate while updating the software.
ˎ You cannot place or receive a call, and use various communication functions and other functions
while updating the software. (You can receive a voice call while downloading the software.)
ˎ The FOMA terminal uses SSL communication with the DoCoMo server to update the software.
Before starting update, set the SSL list to [Valid] (Default: [Valid]) (P.198).
ˎ It is recommended to update the software under strong radio wave condition with 3-antenna
marks displayed and not to move the FOMA terminal while updating the software.
※ When the weakening of the radio wave occurs while downloading the software or the
download is interrupted for any reason, perform the software update again in a location of
good radio wave condition.
ˎ If no new update is available, the message “No update is needed. Please continue to use as
before” appears when you check the necessity of the update.
ˎ After updating the software, icons that notify you about mail/messages stored at the i-mode
center disappears. When the Recv option setting is [ON], the screen notifying you of new mail
may not be displayed after completion of the update if there is new mail while updating the
software.
ˎ When you update the software, your FOMA terminal-specific information (such as model
and manufacturer’s serial number) is automatically sent to the server (server for updating the
software under DoCoMo’s supervision). DoCoMo will not use the information sent from your
mobile phone for any purposes other than to update the software.
ˎ When the software update fails, the message “Rewrite failed” appears and no further operation
is possible. In this case, please bring the FOMA terminal to the nearest DoCoMo repair
handling service counter.
ˎ You cannot use the software update overseas.
445
Updating the Software Automatically (Auto-update)
Download new software automatically and rewrite old one with it at the previously set
time.
When the status is changed to be ready to rewrite, “ ” appears. After you check the
time of rewriting, you can change the time or select whether to rewrite right away.
1 From
press
the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [SW Update] and
The Security code screen appears.
2 Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
3 Select [Set auto-update] and press
ˎ The Security code is masked by “＊＊＊＊”.
ˎ The Security code is set to “0000” at the time of purchase.
Ｓｅｔ ａｕｔｏ−ｕｐｄａｔｅ
Ｓｅｔ
Ｄａｙ
Ｔｉｍｅ
Ａｕｔｏ−ｕｐｄａｔｅ
Ｎｏｎｅ ｓｐｅｃｉｆｉｅｄ
０９：０５
4 Set whether to update the software automatically at [Set].
[Auto-update] : Update the software automatically.
[Only notice] : The notification icon “ ” (Update notification) appears in the stand-by
display when the software update is necessary.
[Disable]
: Do not update the software automatically.
5 Set a day of the week to perform the software update at [Day].
Select from [Mon to Sun] and [None specified].
6 Set a time to start the software update at [Time].
Enter a time in 24-hour format.
7 Press
(Complete).
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
The Set auto-update is set.
When the Set auto-update is set to [Disable]
Select [Yes].
After Receiving the Software Update Information
When the Set auto-update is set to [Auto-update], the notification icon
“ ” (Update schedule) appears in the stand-by display.
To check the date and time of the software update
Press
(Link) in the stand-by display and select “ ”. To change
the date and time of the update, select [Change]. To start the update,
select [Now rewrite].
Ｕｐｄａｔｅ ｓｃｈｅｄｕｌｅ
446
When the Set auto-update is set to [Only notice], the notification icon “ ”
(Update notification) appears in the stand-by display.
To activate the software update
Press
(Link) in the stand-by display, select “ ”, and select [Yes].
Ｕｐｄａｔｅ ｎｏｔｉｆｉｃａｔｉｏｎ
● The notification icon of the SW Update appears only when DoCoMo notifies software update.
Activating the Software Update
1 From
press
the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [SW Update] and
The Security code screen appears.
2 Enter the Security code and press
(OK).
ˎ The Security code is masked by “＊＊＊＊”.
ˎ The Security code is set to “0000” at the time of purchase.
3 Select [Update] and press
Ｅｓｔａｂｌｉｓｈｉｎｇ
ＳＳＬ ｓｅｓｓｉｏｎ
（Ａｕｔｈｅｎｔｉ−
ｃａｔｉｎｇ）
Ｃｈｅｃｋｉｎｇ
The FOMA terminal starts SSL communication to check if the software update is necessary.
4 If necessary, select the timing to start update and press
Ｕｐｄａｔｅ ｉｓ ｎｅｅｄｅｄ
● When the server is busy, the screen to the right appears. To reserve, select
[Reserve] and set a date/time for the update.
Ｓｅｒｖｅｒ ｉｓ ｂｕｓｙ
Ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅ
Ｃａｎｃｅｌ
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Ｎｏｗ ｕｐｄａｔｅ
Ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅ
Ｃａｎｃｅｌ
[Now update] : Start updating the software. The software update may not
be completed successfully if the server is busy.
[Reserve]
: Reserve a date/time to start the software update.
[Cancel]
: Do not start updating the software.
When the message informing there is no need to update the software
appears
You do not need to update the software. Continue to use the FOMA
terminal without updating.
447
Updating the Software Immediately (Now update)
1 From the screen for selecting the update type, select [Now update] and press
Ｒｅａｄｙ ｔｏ
ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄ？
Ｎｏｔｉｃｅ：
Ｎｏ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎｓ ａｒｅ
ａｖａｉｌａｂｌｅ ｅｘｃｅｐｔ
ｒｅｃｅｉｖｅ ｃａｌｌｓ
ＳＷ Ｕｐｄａｔｅ
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄｉｎｇ
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｎｇ
After a while, the software download starts.
ˎ When downloading starts, step 2 is performed automatically (no need to operate).
To cancel the download
Press
(Cancel) while downloading.
ˎ If you stop the download before it is completed, the data downloaded up until this point is deleted.
2 After the download is completed, press
Ｒｅａｄｙ ｔｏ
ｒｅｗｒｉｔｅ？
(OK).
書換え中
書換え完了しました
再起動します
Ｒｅｗｒｉｔｉｎｇ
Ｒｅｗｒｉｔｉｎｇ ｉｓ ｃｏｍｐｌｅｔｅ．
Ｒｅａｄｙ ｔｏ ｒｅｌｏａｄ？
The software rewriting starts and the incoming indicator lights. After rewriting is completed,
the FOMA terminal is restarted automatically.
ˎ While the software is being rewritten, all key operations are disabled. You even cannot stop
the update operation.
● When the FOMA terminal is restarted, “ ” (Update complete) appears in the stand-by display.
If there is any information that you must confirm, “ ” (Check for update) appears. The icon
and message disappear after you check the notification information by selecting the icon.
Reserving a Date/Time for the Software Update (Reserve)
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
448
If downloading takes too long or the server is congested, you can connect to the
server and preset a date/time to start the software update.
Example: Reserving the software update on February 13 (Wed) 1:05 a.m.
1 From the screen for selecting the update type, select [Reserve] and press
Ｌｉｓｔ ｏｆ ｃｈｏｉｃｅ
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
２／１３
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
Ｗｅｄ
１：０５
３：４４
４：１８
４：４４
５：２８
５：５５
６：２３
６：５７
７：１５
７：５０
８：２７
８：５８
The FOMA terminal connects to the server and displays a list of
reservation choices.
ˎ When reserving the software update, the time set on the server is
displayed.
To select another date/time
Press
(Others) and select the preferred date, time slot, and time.
You can confirm vacant time slot available for reservation in the
Preferred- time slot display as follows:
“○: Available”, “△: Almost full”, or “×: Full”.
To cancel the reservation operation
Press
(Cancel).
2 Select the date/time to be reserved → [Yes] and press
Ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅ ｆｏｒ
２００８／０２／１３ Ｗｅｄ
１：０５？
Ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ ｆｏｒ
２００８／０２／１３ Ｗｅｄ
１：０５
Ｃｏｎｎｅｃｔｉｎｇ
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
The FOMA terminal connects to the server and completes the reservation.
When the Reserved Time Comes
Ｒｅａｄｙ ｔｏ ｕｐｄａｔｅ
ｓｏｆｔｗａｒｅ？
The screen to the left appears. After about five seconds, the software
update starts automatically and the incoming indicator flashes.
ˎ Before the reserved time comes, turn the FOMA terminal to the stand-by
display and place it in a location of good radio wave condition.
● The software update may not start if another function is being used when the reserved time
comes.
● When the Alarm/Schedule alarm is set to start at the same time as the reserved time, the
software update has priority and the alarm may not sound.
● If you execute the Reset all data&set or leave the FOMA terminal without a battery pack
or with a fully expended battery pack for a long period of time after you complete the
reservation, the date and time is reset, and the software update does not start even if the
reserved time comes. Perform the reservation again.
Confirming the Reservation
1 From
press
the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [SW Update] and
The Security code screen appears.
2 Enter the Security code and press
3 Select [Update] and press
ＯＫ
Ｃｈａｎｇｅ
Ｃａｎｃｅｌ
If the software update is already reserved, the reserved information
appears.
To change the reservation
Select [Change]. The FOMA terminal connects to the server and you
can select another date/time.
To cancel the reservation
Select [Cancel] → [Yes]. The FOMA terminal connects to the server
and cancels the reservation.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Ａｌｒｅａｄｙ ｒｅｓｅｒｖｅｄ
ｆｏｒ
２００８／０２／１３ Ｗｅｄ
１：０５
(OK).
449
Protecting Your Mobile Phone from Harmful Data 
At first, update the pattern definitions to get the latest definitions.
You can detect information related to the data and programs obtained into the FOMA
terminal from an external source, such as data downloaded from a site or i-mode
mail, and delete data or end the start-up of application that can cause a trouble.
ˎ Use the pattern definitions for checking. Since the pattern definitions are upgraded every time
a new problem is discovered, be sure to update the definitions (P.463).
ˎ The scanning function provides explicit protection against intrusive data that causes mobile
phone trouble while you are viewing a website or receiving mail. Note that if the pattern
definitions corresponding to each trouble are not downloaded to the mobile phone, or if there
are no pattern definitions corresponding to each trouble, this function cannot prevent the
trouble occurrences.
ˎ The contents of the pattern definitions vary depending on the model of your mobile phone.
Note that the distribution of pattern definitions for models released more than three years ago
may be discontinued at our company’s discretion.
Setting the Scanning Function
You can set whether to automatically check data and programs when they are
executed.
1 From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Scan function] → [Set
scan] and press
Ｓｅｔ ｓｃａｎ
Ｓｃａｎ ｆｕｎｃｔｉｏｎ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｍｅｓｓａｇｅ ｓｃａｎ
Ｖａｌｉｄ
[Scan function] : Set whether to enable the scanning function.
[Message scan] : Set whether to enable the scanning function for SMS
when the Scan function is set to [Valid].
2 Select [Valid] at [Scan function].
: Execute the scanning function. If data that can cause a trouble is detected, a
warning is displayed in five levels.
[Invalid] : Do not execute the scanning function.
When you change the setting
Select [Yes].
[Valid]
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
450
3 Select [Valid] at [Message scan].
: Execute the scanning function for the SMS. If a phone number or URL is included
in the mail main body, the message appears.
[Invalid] : Do not execute the scanning function for the SMS.
When you change the setting
Select [Yes].
[Valid]
Updating the Pattern Definitions
the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Scan function] →
[Update] and press .
1 From
Ｕｐｄａｔｅ ｐａｔｔｅｒｎ
ｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎｓ？
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
2 Select [Yes] → [Yes] and press
Ｕｐｄａｔｅ
Ｄｏｗｎｌｏａｄｉｎｇ
Ｒｅａｄｙ ｔｏ
ｓｅｎｄ ｙｏｕｒ
ｔｅｒｍｉｎａｌ ＩＤ？
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
When the pattern definitions are the latest available
There is no need to update the pattern definitions. Use them as is.
Setting Whether Pattern Definitions Are Automatically Updated
You can set whether to update the pattern definitions automatically.
1 From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Scan function] → [Set
auto-update] and press
Ｓｅｔ ａｕｔｏ−ｕｐｄａｔｅ
ｏｆ ｐａｔｔｅｒｎ
ｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎｓ
[Valid] : Update the pattern definitions automatically.
[Invalid] : Do not update the pattern definitions automatically.
Ｖａｌｉｄ
Ｉｎｖａｌｉｄ
2 Select [Valid] → [Yes] → [Yes] and press
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
● When you update the pattern definitions, your FOMA terminal-specific information (such as
model and manufacturer’s serial number) is automatically sent to the server (server for the
scanning function under DoCoMo’s supervision). DoCoMo will not use the information sent
from your mobile phone for any purposes other than the scanning function.
● You cannot update the pattern definitions in the following cases:
- When the date/time is not set
- When “ ” is displayed
- During a call
- While the Self mode is set
- While the Lock all is set
- While the Omakase Lock is set
- While the Lock key is set
- When the UIM is not inserted
- When another function is being used
- When the FOMA terminal is connected to an external device such as a PC
- When the international roaming service is used
● If you cancel the downloading operation before it is completed, the data downloaded until
this point is deleted.
The Set auto-update is set.
Continued
451
● If the Set auto-update is set to [Valid], “ ” (Update completed) appears in the stand-by
display when the pattern definitions auto-update is completed. If the pattern definitions were
not auto-updated successfully, “ ” (Update definitions) appears. Confirm the information by
selecting the icon to clear the notification.
● If you leave the FOMA terminal without a battery pack or with a fully expended battery pack
for a long period of time, the date and time is reset, and the Auto-update may not operate
correctly.
About the Scanning Result Indication
If data that can cause a trouble is detected, the warning display appears.
■ Scanning result indication
Warning level 0
Ｐｒｏｂｌｅｍ ｆａｃｔｏｒ
Ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｍａｙ
ｎｏｔ ｒｕｎ ｐｒｏｐｅｒｌｙ
Warning level 1
Ｐｒｏｂｌｅｍ ｆａｃｔｏｒ
Warning level 2
Ｐｒｏｂｌｅｍ ｆａｃｔｏｒ
Ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｍａｙ
ｎｏｔ ｒｕｎ ｐｒｏｐｅｒｌｙ．
Ｃａｎｃｅｌ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ？
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
Ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｍａｙ
ｎｏｔ ｒｕｎ ｐｒｏｐｅｒｌｙ．
Ｃａｎｃｅｌｉｎｇ ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ
Warning level 3
Ｐｒｏｂｌｅｍ ｆａｃｔｏｒ
Ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｍａｙ
ｎｏｔ ｒｕｎ ｐｒｏｐｅｒｌｙ．
Ｄｅｌｅｔｅ ｄａｔａ？
Ｙｅｓ
Ｎｏ
Warning level 4
Ｐｒｏｂｌｅｍ ｆａｃｔｏｒ
Ｏｐｅｒａｔｉｏｎ ｍａｙ ｎｏｔ
ｒｕｎ ｐｒｏｐｅｒｌｙ．
Ｄｅｌｅｔｉｎｇ ｄａｔａ
The operation is Confirms whether Stops the operation. Confirms whether Stops the operation
continued.
you want to stop
you want to stop the a n d d e l e t e s t h e
the operation.
operation and delete target data.
the target data.
■ Display of detected problem factors
ＰａｄＨｔｍｌ０２６．Ｈ
ＰａｄＨｔｍｌ０２７．Ｈ
ＰａｄＨｔｍｌ０２５．Ｈ
ＰａｄＨｔｍｌ０２８．Ｈ
ＰａｄＨｔｍｌ０３０．Ｈ
Ｄｅｔｅｃｔｅｄ
ａｂｏｖｅ ｄａｔａ
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
452
When you press
(Detail) in the warning display, the title of the problem
factor appears.
ˎ If six or more problem factors are detected, the titles of the sixth and
later problem factors are omitted.
Displaying the Pattern Definition Version
the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] → [Scan function] →
[Version] and press .
1 From
Ｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ
Ｐａｔｔｅｒｎ Ｄｅｆｉｎｉｔｉｏｎｓ
Ｖｅｒｓｉｏｎ
１．１
Specifications
■ FOMA terminal
Product name
Dimensions
Weight
Continuous Network
stand-by
FOMA/
time
3G
GSM
Continuous Network
call time
FOMA/
3G
Image
pickup
device
Camera
Storage
Memory
capacity
Auto
※1 Image size: [QCIF(176×144 dots)] Image quality: [Standard] File size: 19K bytes
※2 It is the maximum recording time per one movie under the following conditions:
Image size: [sQCIF(128×96 dots)] Shoot mode: [Image+Sound]
Image quality: [Standard] File size restriction: Attach(L)
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Music
playback
3G/GSM setting
3G
Moving state: About 380 hours
Auto
Moving state: About 360 hours
Stationary state: About 520 hours
Auto
Stationary state: About 290 hours
3G/GSM setting
3G
Voice call: About 220 minutes
Videophone call: About 120 minutes
Auto
Voice call: About 230 minutes
AC adapter: About 140 minutes
DC adapter: About 140 minutes
Type
Display: TFT 16,770,000 colors
Size
Display: About 3.0 inches
Number of pixels
Display: 414,720 pixels (864 dots×480 dots)
Type
In-camera: CMOS
Out-camera: CMOS
Size
In-camera: 1/10 inches
Out-camera: 1/4 inches
Valid pixels
In-camera: About 330,000 pixels
Out-camera: About 3,200,000 pixels
Film valid pixels
In-camera: About 310,000 pixels
Out-camera: About 3,150,000 pixels
Zoom (Digital)
In-camera: Zoom is unavailable.
Out-camera: Maximum magnification about ×16.0
Recordable number of still About 1,500 (on the Data Box)※1
images
Recordable number of
continuous still images
File format of still images
JPEG
Recordable time of movies On the Data Box: About 434 seconds※2
On the microSD memory card (64MB): About 60
minutes※3
File format of movies
MP4
Continuous playback time i-motion: About 420 minutes
Chaku-Uta Full®: About 780 minutes※4
WMA: About 840 minutes※4
Music&Video Channel: About 1,140 minutes (sound)※4,
about 330 minutes (movie)
Chaku-Uta®/
About 300.6MB
Chaku-Uta Full®
GSM
Charging time
LCD
FOMA SO906i
103.5×49×18 mm (H×W×D) (when folded)
About 130 g (with battery pack attached)
453
※3 It is the maximum recording time per one movie under the following conditions:
Image size: [sQCIF(128×96 dots)] Shoot mode: [Image+Sound]
Image quality: [Standard] File size: No limit
※4 Playing back music in the background is supported.
■ Battery pack
Product name
Type of battery
Nominal voltage
Nominal amount
Battery Pack SO02
Lithium Ion Battery
DC 3.7V
870mAh
Number of Saved and Protected Data Items
Type
Phonebook※1
Schedule
Text memo
Mail
Received mail※2
(Total number Sent mail※2
of i-mode mail
Saved draft mail※2
and SMS)
Area Mail※2
Template※3
Message
Message R
Message F
Bookmark
i-mode
Full Browser
Screen memo※4
i-αppli※2※3
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
454
Image※2※5
Music&Video Channel
(Delivered program)※2
Music&Video Channel
(Re-saved program)※2
Movie/i-motion※2※6
Melody※2※6
Chara-den※2※6
PDF data※2※3
Kisekae Tool※2※6
ToruCa card
easy BlogUp service information file
※1
※2
※3
※4
※5
Number of protected
data items
Up to 1,000
−
Up to 300
−
Up to 10
−
Up to 1,000
Up to 500
Up to 500
Up to 250
Up to 50
−
Up to 30
−
Up to 50
−
Up to 20
Up to 20
Up to 20
Up to 20
Up to 200
−
Up to 200
−
Up to 100
Up to 50
Up to 100 (including up to 5 i-αppli
−
with mail software)
Up to 1,500
−
Up to 2
−
Number of saved data items
Up to 10
−
Up to 150
Up to 200
Up to 50
Up to 50
Up to 50
Up to 100
Up to 22
−
−
−
−
−
−
−
You can save up to 50 entries in the UIM.
The actual number of data items that can be saved may decrease depending on the data to be saved.
Includes the preinstalled data.
The actual number of data items that can be saved or protected may decrease depending on the data.
Includes the preinstalled Deco-mail pictographs and the images saved in the [スーパーモン
キーボール] folder at the time of purchase.
※6 Does not include the preinstalled data.
About the Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) of Mobile Phones, etc.
★ Mobile Phone GSM/GPRS 900/1800/1900&UMTS JP/EU/US
SAR Certification Information
This model phone FOMA SO906i meets the MIC’s* technical regulation for exposure
to radio waves.
The technical regulation established permitted levels of radio frequency energy, based on
standards that were developed by independent scientific organizations through periodic and
thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The regulation employs a unit of measurement known as
the Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR. The SAR limit is 2 watts/kilogram (W/kg)** averaged over
ten grams of tissue. The limit includes a substantial safety margin designed to assure the safety
of all persons, regardless of age and health. The value of the limit is equal to the international
guidelines recommended by ICNIRP***.
All phone models should be confirmed to comply with the regulation, before they are available
for sale to the public. The highest SAR value for this model phone is 0.346 W/kg. It was taken by
the Telecom Engineering Center (TELEC), a Registered Certification Agency on the Radio Law.
The test for SAR was conducted in accordance with the MIC testing procedure using standard
operating positions with the phone transmitting at its highest permitted power level in all tested
frequency bands. While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phones and
at various positions, they all meet the MIC’s technical regulation. Although the SAR is determined
at the highest certified power level, the actual SAR of the phone during operation can be well
below the maximum value.
For more information about SAR, please see the following websites:
World Health Organization (WHO):
http://www.who.int/peh-emf/
ICNIRP:
http://www.icnirp.de/
MIC:
http://www.tele.soumu.go.jp/e/ele/body/index.htm
TELEC:
http://www.telec.or.jp/ENG/index_e.htm
NTT DoCoMo: http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/english/product/
Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.:
http://www.SonyEricsson.co.jp/product/SAR/ (Japanese only)
Radio Wave Exposure and Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) Information
United States & Canada
THIS PHONE MODEL HAS BEEN CERTIFIED IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE GOVERNMENT’S
REQUIREMENTS FOR EXPOSURE TO RADIO WAVES.
The SO906i mobile phones have been designed to comply with applicable safety requirements for
exposure to radio waves. Your wireless phone is a radio transmitter and receiver. It is designed to
not exceed the limits* of exposure to radio frequency (RF) energy set by governmental authorities.
These limits establish permitted levels of RF energy for the general population. The guidelines are
based on standards that were developed by international scientific organizations through periodic
and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. The standards include a safety margin designed to
assure the safety of all individuals, regardless of age and health.
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
* Ministry of Internal Affairs and Communications
** The technical regulation is provided in Article 14-2 of the Ministry Ordinance Regulating Radio
Equipment.
*** International Commission on Non-Ionizing Radiation Protection
455
The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate (SAR). Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the phone
transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands. While there may be
differences between the SAR levels of various phone models, they are all designed to meet the
relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves. For more information on SAR, please refer to the
safe and efficient use chapter in the User Guide.
The highest SAR value as reported to the authorities for this phone model when tested for use by
the ear is 0.44 W/kg*, and when worn on the body is 0.50 W/kg* for speech and 0.49 W/kg* for
data calls. Body worn measurements are made while the phone is in use and worn on the body
with a Sony Ericsson accessory supplied with or designated for use with this phone. It is therefore
recommended that only Ericsson and Sony Ericsson original accessories be used in conjunction
with Sony Ericsson phones.
**Before a phone model is available for sale to the public in the US, it must be tested and certified
by the Federal Communications Commission (FCC) that it does not exceed the limit established
by the government-adopted requirement for safe exposure*. The tests are performed in positions
and locations (i.e., by the ear and worn on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. The
FCC has granted an Equipment Authorization for this phone model with all reported SAR levels
evaluated as in compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. While there may be differences
between the SAR levels of various phones, all mobile phones granted an FCC equipment
authorization meet the government requirement for safe exposure. SAR information on this phone
model is on file at the FCC and can be found under the Display Grant section of http://www.fcc.
gov/oet/fccid after searching on FCC ID PY7A3724011. Additional information on SAR can be
found on the Cellular Telecommunications & Internet Association (CTIA) website at
http://www.phonefacts.net.
* In the United States and Canada, the SAR limit for mobile phones used by the public is 1.6
watts/kilogram (W/kg) averaged over one gram of tissue. The standard incorporates a margin
of safety to give additional protection for the public and to account for any variations in
measurements.
** This paragraph is only applicable to authorities and customers in the United States.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
456
Europe
This mobile phone model SO906i has been designed to comply with applicable safety
requirements for exposure to radio waves. These requirements are based on scientific guidelines
that include safety margins designed to assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and
health.
The radio wave exposure guidelines employ a unit of measurement known as the Specific
Absorption Rate, or SAR. Tests for SAR are conducted using standardized methods with the
phone transmitting at its highest certified power level in all used frequency bands.
While there may be differences between the SAR levels of various phone models, they are all
designed to meet the relevant guidelines for exposure to radio waves.
For more information on SAR, please refer to the safety chapter in the User’s Guide.
SAR data information for residents in countries that have adopted the SAR limit recommended
by the International Commission of Non-lonizing Radiation Protection (ICNIRP), which is 2 W/kg
averaged over ten (10) gram of tissue (for example European Union, Japan, Brazil and New
Zealand):
The highest SAR value for this model phone tested by Sony Ericsson for use at the ear is 0.27 W/kg
(10g).
Radio Frequency (RF) Exposure and SAR
Your mobile phone is a low-power radio transmitter and receiver.
When it is turned on, it emits low levels of radio frequency energy (also known as radio waves or
radio frequency fields).
Governments around the world have adopted comprehensive international safety guidelines,
developed by scientific organizations, e.g. ICNIRP (International Commission on Non-Ionizing
Radiation Protection) and IEEE (The Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc.), through
periodic and thorough evaluation of scientific studies. These guidelines establish permitted levels
of radio wave exposure for the general population. The levels include a safety margin designed to
assure the safety of all persons, regardless of age and health, and to account for any variations in
measurements.
Specific Absorption Rate (SAR) is the unit of measurement for the amount of radio frequency
energy absorbed by the body when using a mobile phone. The SAR value is determined at the
highest certified power level in laboratory conditions, but the actual SAR level of the mobile phone
while operating can be well below this value. This is because the mobile phone is designed to use
the minimum power required to reach the network.
Variations in SAR below the radio frequency exposure guidelines do not mean that there are
variations in safety. While there may be differences in SAR levels among mobile phones, all Sony
Ericsson mobile phone models are designed to meet radio frequency exposure guidelines.
SAR information for this mobile phone model is included with the material that comes with this
mobile phone. This information can also be found, together with more information on radio
frequency exposure and SAR, on:
www.sonyericsson.com
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
Before a phone model is available for sale to the public, it must be tested and certified to the
FCC that it does not exceed the limit established by the government-adopted requirement for
safe exposure. The tests are performed in positions and locations (that is, at the ear and worn
on the body) as required by the FCC for each model. For body worn operation, this phone has
been tested and meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when the handset is positioned a minimum
of 15 mm from the body without any metal parts in the vicinity of the phone or when used with the
original Sony Ericsson body worn accessory intended for this phone. Use of other accessories
may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines.
457
Guidelines for Safe and Efficient Use
Please read this information before using your mobile phone.
These instructions are intended for your safety. Please follow these guidelines. If the product has
been subject to any of the conditions listed below or you have any doubt as to its proper function
make sure you have the product checked by a certified service partner before charging or using
it. Failure to do so might entail a risk of product malfunction or even a potential hazard to your
health.
Recommendations for safe use of product (mobile phone, battery, charger and other accessories)
□ Always treat your product with care and keep it in a clean and dust-free place.
□ Warning! May explode if disposed of in fire.
□ Do not expose your product to liquid or moisture or humidity.
□ Do not expose your product to extremely high or low temperatures. Do not expose the battery
to temperatures above +35°C (+95°F).
□ Do not expose your product to open flames or lit tobacco products.
□ Do not drop, throw or try to bend your product.
□ Do not paint your product.
□ Do not attempt to disassemble or modify your product.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
458
□ Do not close your product with an object inserted between keypad and display if you have a
clamshell phone; this may damage your product.
□ Do not use your product near medical equipment without requesting permission from your
treating physician or authorized medical staff.
□ Do not use your product when in, or around aircraft, or areas showing the sign “turn off two-way
radio”.
□ Do not use your product in an area where a potentially explosive atmosphere exists.
□ Do not place your product or install wireless equipment in the area above an air bag in your
car.
□ Caution: Cracked or broken displays may create sharp edges or splinters that could be harmful
upon contact.
CHILDREN
KEEP OUT OF CHILDRENS REACH. DO NOT ALLOW CHILDREN TO PLAY WITH YOUR MOBILE
PHONE OR ITS ACCESSORIES. THEY COULD HURT THEMSELVES OR OTHERS, OR COULD
ACCIDENTALLY DAMAGE THE MOBILE PHONE OR ACCESSORY. YOUR MOBILE PHONE
OR ITS ACCESSORY MAY CONTAIN SMALL PARTS THAT COULD BECOME DETACHED AND
CREATE A CHOKING HAZARD.
Power supply (Charger)
Connect the AC power adapter only to designated power sources as marked on the product.
Make sure the cord is positioned so that it will not be subjected to damage or stress. To reduce
risk of electric shock, unplug the unit from any power source before attempting to clean it. The AC
power adapter must not be used outdoors or in damp areas. Never alter the cord or plug.
Battery
We recommend that you fully charge the battery before you use your mobile phone for the first
time. A new battery or one that has not been used for a long time could have reduced capacity
the first few times it is used. The battery should only be charged in temperatures between +5°C
(+41°F) and +35°C (+95°F).
Use only original batteries intended for use with your mobile phone. Using other batteries and
chargers could be dangerous.
Talk and standby times depend on several different conditions such as signal strength, operating
temperature, application usage patterns, features selected and voice or data transmissions when
the mobile phone is being used.
Turn off your mobile phone before removing the battery. Do not put the battery into your mouth.
Battery electrolytes may be toxic if swallowed. Do not let the metal contacts on the battery touch
another metal object. Doing this could short-circuit and damage the battery. Use the battery for
the intended purpose only.
Personal medical devices
Mobile phones may affect the operation of pacemakers and other implanted equipment. Please
avoid placing the mobile phone over the pacemaker, e.g. in your breast pocket. When using the
mobile phone, use it at the ear on the opposite side of the body to the pacemaker. If a minimum
distance of 22 cm (8.7 inches) is kept between the mobile phone and the pacemaker, the risk
of interference is limited. If you have any reason to suspect that interference is taking place,
immediately turn off your mobile phone. Contact your medical doctor for more information.
Driving
Please check if local laws and regulations restrict the use of mobile phones while driving or
require drivers to use handsfree solutions.
For the use of mobile phones in the vehicle, please follow instructions from vehicle manufacturers.
Always pay full attention to driving and pull off the road and park before making or answering a
call if driving conditions so require.
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
For other medical devices, please consult your physician and the manufacturer of the device.
459
Emergency calls
Mobile phones operate using radio signals, which cannot guarantee connection in all conditions.
You should therefore never rely solely upon any mobile phone for essential communications (e.g.
medical emergencies).
Emergency calls may not be possible in all areas, on all cellular networks, or when certain network
services and/or mobile phone features are in use. Check with your local service provider.
Efficient use
Hold your mobile phone as you would any other phone. Do not cover the hinge area when the
phone is in use, as this affects call quality and may cause the phone to operate at a higher power
level than needed, thus shortening talk and standby times.
Disposal of old electrical and electronic equipment
This symbol indicates that all electrical and electronic equipment included shall not be treated
as household waste. Instead it shall be left at the appropriate collection point for recycling of
electrical and electronic equipment. By ensuring this product is disposed of correctly, you will
help prevent potential negative consequences for the environment and human health, which
could otherwise be caused by inappropriate waste handling of this product. The recycling of
materials will help to conserve natural resources. For more detailed information about recycling
this product, please contact your local city office, your household waste disposal service or the
shop where you purchased the product.
Disposing of the battery
Please check local regulations for disposal of batteries or call your local Sony Ericsson Call
Center for information.
The battery should never be placed in municipal waste. Use a battery disposal facility if available.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
460
Memory Card
If your product comes complete with a removable memory card, it is generally compatible with
the handset purchased but may not be compatible with other devices or the capabilities of their
memory cards. Check other devices for compatibility before purchase or use. If your product is
equipped with a memory card reader, check memory card compatibility before purchase or use.
Memory cards are generally formatted prior to shipping. To reformat the memory card, use a
compatible device. Do not use the standard operating system format when formatting the memory
card on a PC. For details, refer to the operating instructions of the device or contact customer
support.
WARNING:
If your device requires an adapter for insertion into the handset or another device, do not insert
the card directly without the required adapter.
Precautions on Memory Card Use
□ Do not expose the memory card to moisture.
□ Do not touch terminal connections with your hand or any metal object.
□ Do not strike, bend, or drop the memory card.
□ Do not attempt to disassemble or modify the memory card.
□ Do not use or store the memory card in humid or corrosive locations or in excessive heat such
as a closed car in summer, in direct sunlight or near a heater, etc.
□ Do not press or bend the end of the memory card adapter with excessive force.
□ Do not let dirt, dust, or foreign objects get into the insert port of any memory card adapter.
□ Check you have inserted the memory card correctly.
□ Insert the memory card as far as it will go into any memory card adapter needed. The memory
card may not operate properly unless fully inserted.
□ We recommend that you make a backup copy of important data. We are not responsible for
any loss or damage to content you store on the memory card.
□ Recorded data may be damaged or lost when you remove the memory card or memory card
adapter, turn off the power while formatting, reading or writing data, or use the memory card in
locations subject to static electricity or high electrical field emissions.
Protection of personal information
Accessories
DoCoMo recommends use of DoCoMo’s original accessories for safe and efficient use of its
products. Use of third-party accessories may decrease performance or pose a risk to your health
or safety.
LOUDNESS WARNING:
Please adjust the audio volume cautiously when using third-party audio accessories to avoid
volume levels that may be harmful to your hearing. DoCoMo does not test use of third-party audio
accessories with this mobile phone. DoCoMo recommends using only DoCoMo’s original audio
accessories.
Continued
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
To safeguard your privacy and prevent information being accessible to a third party, you should
erase all personal data before selling or disposing of the product. To delete personal data, perform
a master reset, remove the memory card or format the media memory. DELETION OF MATERIAL
FROM THE PHONE AND MEDIA MEMORIES DOES NOT ENSURE THAT SAID INFORMATION
CANNOT BE RECOVERED BY A SUBSEQUENT USER. DoCoMo/SONY ERICSSON DOES NOT
WARRANT AGAINST A SUBSEQUENT USER OF THE DEVICE ACCESSING YOUR INFORMATION
AND DOES NOT ASSUME ANY RESPONSIBILITY FOR SUBSEQUENT DISCLOSURE OF SAID
INFORMATION EVEN IF A MASTER RESET AND A MEDIA MEMORY FORMAT HAS BEEN
PERFORMED. If you are concerned about such potential disclosure retain your device or secure
its permanent destruction.
461
FCC Statement for the US:
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions :
(1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.
Any change or modification not expressly approved by Sony Ericsson may void the user’s
authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device,
pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection
against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions,
may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that
interference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can
be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the following measures:
-- Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
-- Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
-- Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is
connected.
-- Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
Industry Canada Statement:
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
462
This device complies with RSS-210 of Industry Canada.
Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference,
and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Declaration of Conformity for SO906i
We, Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications AB of Nya Vattentornet SE-221 88 Lund, Sweden
declare under our sole responsibility that our product
Sony Ericsson type AAD-3724011-BV
and in combination with FOMA global AC charger 01(MODEL:MAS-BH0008-A 002), to which this
declaration relates is in conformity with the appropriate standards EN 301 511:V9.0.2, EN 301
908-1:V2.2.1, EN 301 908-2:V2.2.1, EN 301 489-24:V1.3.1, EN 301 489-7:V1.3.1, EN 301 489-3:
V1.4.1, EN 302 291-2:V1.1.1, and EN 60950-1:2006, following the provisions of, Radio Equipment
and Telecommunication Terminal Equipment Directive 1999/5/EC
Lund, March 2008
0682
Signature
Yukio Kubota, Head of Product Business Unit JAPAN
われわれはR&TTE指令の要求事項を満たしています
（1999/5/EC）
We fulfill the requirements of the R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC)
Export Controls and Regulations
This product and its accessories may be covered and controlled by Japan’s export
control regulations (“Foreign Exchange and Foreign Trade Law” and related laws
and regulations). If you wish to export this product and/or its accessories, you must
complete the necessary procedures at your own responsibility and cost. Detailed
information on the procedure, contact the Ministry of Economy, Trade and Industry.
Appendix/External Devices/Troubleshooting
463
Index/Quick Manual
Index ........................................................................................................................ 478
Quick Manual ........................................................................................................... 490
465
Index
How to Look up in the Index
The index can be used as an “alphabetical table of contents”. Under each headword, terms
relevant to it are listed. Not only terms representing function names actually displayed on the
FOMA terminal, but also those that are a brief summary about the functions described in this
manual.
Example: Adjusting the volume of i-αppli software
Adjust volume
Auto-start...................... 246
Certificates ................... 240
SW description ............. 239
Melody ......................... 305
MUSIC .................. 304, 346
Ring volume ................. 109
Sound effect ................. 112
SW init. Setting ............. 238
Upgrade ....................... 248
Use icons ..................... 241
Volume setting.............. 112
AC adapter ......................... 41
Accept/Reject call ............. 143
Acquire image................... 194
Additional service ............. 402
Adjust light ........................ 121
Adjust volume
Index/Quick Manual
466
i-αppli .............................. 238
i-motion ........................ 296
i-αppli.......................... 112
Keypad sound.............. 111
GPS .............................. 113
i-motion ........................ 296
i-αppli.......................... 112
Keypad sound.............. 111
Melody ......................... 305
MUSIC .................. 304, 346
Music&Video Channel ... 340
Ring volume ................. 109
Sound effect ................. 112
Volume ......................... 112
After sales services .......... 454
Alarm
Alarm (clock) ................ 360
Cost limit notice............ 371
Schedule alarm ............ 365
Alarm (clock)..................... 360
All font size setting ............ 127
Animation.......................... 120
Antenna .............................. 27
Any key ans ........................ 67
Application ........................ 373
Area Mail ......................... 233
Add to phonebook ....... 184
Saved data ................... 184
Battery level ........................ 42
Battery pack........................ 39
Bookmark ................. 191, 285
Receive ........................ 233
Area Mail setting ....... 233, 234
Add bookmark ............. 191
Attach to mail ............... 212
Bookmark ..................... 192
Delete ........................... 193
Display ......................... 192
Edit ............................... 286
Edit folder ..................... 192
iC transmission............. 332
Move ............................ 192
Send Ir data ................. 329
Beep setting ................. 234
Beep time ..................... 234
Receive entry ............... 234
Receive setting ............ 233
Arrival Call Act .................. 396
Auto answer setting .......... 375
Auto key lock/rel ............... 141
Auto reset ......................... 370
Auto setting ....................... 121
AV Phone To function ....... 196
Available services ............. 438
Backlight ........................... 121
Backlight always on .......... 121
Bar code reader ................ 183
Add bookmark ............. 184
Cache ............................... 188
Calculator ......................... 372
Calendar ................... 118, 366
Calendar/Clock ................. 118
Call condition ..................... 60
Call display ....................... 121
Call Forwarding Service ... 393
Call method ........................ 60
Call Rejection ..................... 65
Call Waiting Service.......... 393
Call with ID/Call without ID
....................................... 60
Caller ID Display Request
Service ......................... 395
Camera ............................. 150
Adjust EV...................... 162
Adjust zoom ................. 161
Attach to mail ....... 156, 170
Auto Focus ................... 173
Auto orientation ............ 179
Auto save ..................... 178
Auto timer ..................... 173
Backlight always on ..... 121
Bar code reader ........... 183
BestPic™...................... 167
Create message ............. 58
Place a call..................... 59
Set Message display...... 58
Chaku-Uta Full® ................ 344
Change code .................... 132
Characters Assigned to Keys
..................................... 430
Chara-den......................... 302
Action input mode .......... 75
Action list................ 75, 302
Call Chara-den ....... 75, 303
Change action........ 75, 303
Delete ........................... 321
Detail ............................ 322
DTMF send mode .......... 75
Set Chara-den .............. 303
Set sub image .............. 303
Sort ............................... 321
Charge ................................ 40
Backlight always on ..... 121
Charge sound .............. 111
Charging time ................ 40
Check new message
............................. 216, 231
i-mode inquiry set ........ 227
Check new SMS ............... 236
Animation ..................... 120
Check service area ........... 417
Chg. to videophone............. 54
Chg. to voice call ................ 54
Chg.MENU ......................... 35
Color theme setting .......... 124
Common phrases ............. 385
Edit ............................... 386
List of common phrases ... 434
Communication mode....... 314
Compose message........... 207
Cost limit notice ................ 370
Country code ...................... 60
Cursor ................................. 28
Data Box ........................... 317
Chara-den .................... 302
i-motion ........................ 295
Kisekae Tool ................. 305
Melody ......................... 304
MUSIC .......................... 303
Music&Video Channel ... 342
My document ............... 333
My picture .................... 290
Property........................ 322
Data communication ......... 404
Data security..................... 142
Data Security Service
............................. 105, 147
Connect to Center ........ 105
Exchanging history ...... 105
Save mail...................... 221
Save phonebook .......... 105
Save photo ................... 294
Service setting ............. 105
Date/time ............................ 44
DC adapter ......................... 41
Deco mail pict. .................. 386
Deco-mail ......................... 208
Animation ..................... 120
Continued
Index/Quick Manual
Common replay mode... 175
Continuous mode ......... 168
Deco-Snap ................... 164
Digital Zooming ............ 179
Direct key ..................... 158
easy BlogUp ................ 358
Estimated number of
recordable images... 151
Estimated recording time
of movie ........... 152, 153
Face detection ............. 162
File size ........................ 181
Flash............................. 174
Graphical menu ........... 157
Grid Line ...................... 174
High sensitivity ............. 166
Icons ............................ 154
Image quality ............... 178
Image stabilize ............. 180
Mini-Photo creator ........ 178
Movie shoot .................. 170
Multi focus .................... 172
Panorama ..................... 165
Photo light .................... 174
Photometry ................... 176
Picture effect ................ 176
Picture Motion Browser ... 440
Reset all ....................... 177
Reset file No. ................ 181
Select save to............... 177
Select scene ................ 160
Select size .................... 159
Set attach loc. info ....... 171
Shoot by photo ............. 155
Shoot mode .......... 163, 182
Shoot with frame .......... 169
Shutter sound ............... 180
Smile shutter ................ 163
Switch camera ............. 159
Viewer .......................... 353
White balance .............. 175
Camera in key locking ...... 117
Certificates
..... 187, 198, 199, 240, 284
Chaku-moji ......................... 58
467
Compose and send
message .................. 208
Deco. slcted txt ............ 205
Decorate mail ............... 211
Quick deco. Mail .......... 210
Templates ..................... 211
Delete max cost icon ........ 371
Denied no ID..................... 144
Desktop holder ................... 41
Dial frequency record ......... 55
Dictionary
Delete ........................... 389
Dictionary folder ........... 389
Download ..................... 195
Edit name ..................... 389
Information ................... 389
Reorder ........................ 390
Save ............................. 388
Differences in UIM functions
....................................... 38
Disp. call/rcv. No................ 121
Display ................................ 30
Backlight ...................... 121
Guide display ......... 33, 117
Icon ........................ 30, 154
Display sites ..................... 187
DoCoMo keitai datalink..... 408
Download
Index/Quick Manual
468
Chaku-Uta Full® ........... 344
Chara-den .................... 195
Dictionary ..................... 195
easy BlogUp service
inforamtion file ......... 195
Graphics ...................... 194
i-motion ........................ 201
i-αppli.......................... 238
Kisekae Tool ................. 195
Melody ......................... 195
Music&Video Channel ... 338
PDF data ...................... 195
Template....................... 195
ToruCa .......................... 195
Dual Network Service ....... 395
Earphone/Microphone ...... 374
Earphone/Microphone with
Switch........................... 374
easy BlogUp ..................... 358
BlogUp ......................... 359
Browse ......................... 360
Save ............................. 358
Edit movie ......................... 298
Clip movie .................... 299
Clip picture ................... 299
Select size .................... 300
Edit photo ......................... 292
Frame ........................... 292
Image effect ................. 294
Image stamp ................ 292
Rotate ........................... 294
Select size .................... 294
Text stamp .................... 293
Zoom&trim.................... 293
Edit slide setting ............... 354
Emoticons ......................... 433
English Guidance Service
..................................... 395
Error messages ................ 446
Export Controls and
Regulations .................. 475
FeliCa ............................... 254
IC card lock.................. 262
Osaifu-Keitai................. 254
Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli ..................... 255
FirstPass ........................... 199
Flash ................................. 189
Sound effect ................. 112
FOMA card ......................... 36
FOMA card phonebook ...... 94
FOMA terminal phonebook
....................................... 94
Font size ........................... 127
Full Browser...................... 280
Access setting ............. 288
Bookmark ..................... 286
Check settings ............. 288
Cookie setting .............. 286
Display img .................. 287
Display magnification... 287
Display mode setting ... 287
Drag ............................. 284
Enter URL ..................... 280
Frame Page.................. 283
Full scrn/normal ........... 284
Function menu while
viewing..................... 281
Go to location ............... 280
Home URL.................... 286
Key Operations while
viewing..................... 280
PagePilot ...................... 284
PagePilot setting .......... 287
Pointer speed setting ... 287
Referer setting.............. 288
Reset settings .............. 288
Script setting ................ 287
Search .......................... 285
SSL/TLS page .............. 284
Text copy ...................... 284
To Full Browser ............. 189
Upload ......................... 285
URL history................... 283
Window ........................ 283
Window Open Guard ... 288
Full Browser setting
..................... 286, 287, 288
Function for restricting UIM
operation ........................ 37
Function menu .................... 35
Go to location ................... 191
Font size ....................... 127
GPS .................................. 264
Add location information... 277
GPS button setting ....... 278
Host setting .................. 274
i appli ........................... 265
Location history ............ 276
Location notice............. 274
Location provision ........ 270
Location request .......... 271
Position location ........... 265
Positioning mode ......... 278
Rcv loc. info ................. 277
Reg. service client ....... 275
Service settings............ 274
Sound/Color setting ..... 113
Use loc. info ................. 277
GPS settings
..... 113, 271, 274, 275, 278
Guide display .............. 33, 117
Handling precautions .......... 19
Hands-free .................... 53, 64
Headset microphone ........ 376
Headset setting......... 114, 375
Headset sw. to call ............ 375
Headset usage setting ...... 114
Hold
Holding........................... 68
Multiple connections .... 393
On hold .......................... 68
Holding ............................... 68
Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli ..................... 255
IC card content ................. 255
IC card lock....................... 262
iC communication ............. 331
Channel list .................. 202
Display ......................... 202
Reset i-Channel............ 203
Ticker ........................... 203
Icon ............................. 30, 154
Icon setting ....................... 123
Image quality .................... 118
i-mode............................... 186
Acquire image .............. 194
Add to phonebook ....... 217
Auto detect................... 198
Auto-display ................. 230
Backlight always on ..... 121
Bookmark ..................... 191
Cache........................... 188
Change i-mode password... 190
Compose message ...... 189
Connection timeout ...... 197
Display img .................. 198
Display sites ................. 187
Download ..................... 195
Enter URL ..................... 191
Font size ....................... 127
Go to location ............... 191
Host selection .............. 197
i-mode arrival act ........... 90
i-mode menu ................ 186
Last accessed URL...... 187
My Menu ...................... 190
Reload .......................... 188
Save backgnd img ....... 194
Screen memo ............... 193
Select host ................... 200
Sound effect ................. 112
SSL list ......................... 198
SSL page ..................... 187
Terminate i-mode ......... 190
To Full Browser ............. 189
URL .............................. 189
URL history................... 191
Use phone info ............. 198
Use sites ...................... 188
User certificate ............. 199
Word translate .............. 189
i-mode mail ....................... 206
Add receiver ................ 208
Add to phonebook ....... 217
Animation ..................... 120
Attached file pref.......... 229
Auto receive ................. 214
Check new message ... 216
Clear Recv ranking ...... 229
Clear Send ranking ...... 229
Compose and send ..... 207
Confirm title .................. 218
Deco-mail ..................... 208
Delete ........................... 213
Display ......................... 219
Dur multi task disp ....... 229
Edit folder ..................... 222
File attachment..... 212, 218
Font size ....................... 127
Forward ........................ 216
iC transmission............. 332
i-mode inquiry set ........ 227
i-mode mail form .......... 224
Incoming set ................ 108
Mail list ................. 208, 228
Mail list setting ............. 225
Mail security ................. 142
Melody auto play.......... 228
Memory status.............. 224
Move ............................ 222
Protect ON/OFF............ 223
Receive option ............. 215
Recv option setting ...... 227
Reply ............................ 216
Save ............................. 213
Save address ............... 217
Secret code.................... 96
Send Ir data ................. 329
Signature ...................... 227
Sort ............................... 225
Sort inbox ..................... 226
Continued
Index/Quick Manual
i Menu ............................... 187
i αppli setting ... 112, 239, 246
i αppli(microSD) .............. 250
IC act. notice ..................... 261
IC card .............................. 254
Reception ..................... 332
Transmission ................ 332
iC transfer service............. 252
i-Channel .......................... 202
469
Sort outbox ................... 226
Store in Center ............. 221
Templates ..................... 211
i-mode menu..................... 186
i-mode password .............. 131
Change ........................ 190
i-mode setting ........... 112, 197
i-mode Trouble Diagnosis Site
..................................... 456
i-motion ..................... 200, 295
Index/Quick Manual
470
Attach to mail ............... 212
Backlight always on ..... 121
Change display ............ 322
Change scr. Set............ 296
Chapter list ................... 297
Continuous play ........... 296
Data security ................ 142
Delete ........................... 321
Detail ............................ 322
Display quality.............. 296
Display setting ............. 296
Download ..................... 201
Edit folder ..................... 319
Edit movie .................... 298
Folder info .................... 322
iC transmission............. 332
i-motion auto replay ..... 201
Move ............................ 320
Play .............................. 295
Playlists ........................ 297
Save ............................. 312
Send Ir data ................. 329
Sort ............................... 321
i-motion auto replay .......... 201
In-call arrival act ............... 396
Incoming set ..................... 108
Individual font size ............ 127
Information on using the manual and
how to look up in the manual ... 1
Infrared communication .... 327
Infrared remote control ... 331
Receive ........................ 329
Send ............................. 329
Send IrSS™ .................. 330
Initial setting........................ 43
Input method
..... 384, 385, 386, 388, 389
Insufficient memory .......... 326
Intellectual Property Right
....................................... 22
International call ................. 61
International roaming ........ 410
Int’l dial assist ..................... 62
Int’l prefix ............................ 60
Int’l roaming
............. 415, 416, 417, 418
i-αppli .............................. 238
Auto-start...................... 246
Certificates ................... 240
Change display ............ 249
Cng. ring tone/img. ...... 242
Delete ........................... 249
Download ..................... 238
Edit folder ..................... 248
i αppli history .............. 250
i αppli To ..................... 241
Individual set ................ 241
Move ............................ 248
NW setting.................... 241
Phonebook/Records .... 242
Preinstalled software .... 242
Run ............................... 239
Stand-by display .......... 247
Stand-by NW setting .... 241
SW description ............. 239
SW init. Setting ............. 238
Upgrade ....................... 248
Use icons ..................... 241
Use location info .......... 242
Volume setting.............. 112
i-αppli stand-by................ 247
i-αppli To function ............ 196
i-αppli with mail ............... 238
i-mode mail form .......... 224
JAN code .......................... 183
Jog setting ........................ 376
Key dial lock...................... 139
Keypad light ...................... 121
Keypad sound ................... 111
Kisekae menu ................... 125
Kisekae setting ................. 123
Kisekae Tool ............. 124, 305
Change display ............ 322
Delete ........................... 321
Detail ............................ 322
Edit folder ..................... 319
Folder info .................... 322
Move ............................ 320
Sort ............................... 321
Kuten codes ...................... 388
Last accessed URL .......... 187
Last call cost ..................... 369
Last call duration .............. 369
Lifetime Cal. ...................... 373
Lifetime Calendar ............. 355
Display ......................... 356
Display setting ............. 358
LTC setting ................... 357
Memory auto display.... 358
Security data display ... 358
List of default settings
............................. 378, 420
List of menus .................... 420
List of reset items ..... 378, 420
Lock all ............................. 139
Lock key............................ 144
Keyguard release tone ... 111
Mail menu ......................... 206
Mail security...................... 142
Mail setting ...................... 225
Mail To function ................. 196
Manner mode ................... 115
Original manner ........... 117
Silent ............................ 115
Melody .............................. 304
Attach to mail ............... 212
Delete ........................... 321
Detail ............................ 322
Edit folder ..................... 319
Folder info .................... 322
iC transmission............. 332
Move ............................ 320
Play .............................. 304
Play portion .................. 305
Save ............................. 312
Send Ir data ................. 329
Sort ............................... 321
Melody Call ....................... 115
Menu................................... 33
Menu setting ..................... 123
Message
Auto-display ................. 230
Check new message ... 231
Delete ........................... 232
Display ......................... 231
Dur multi task disp ....... 229
i-mode inquiry set ........ 227
Incoming set ................ 108
Melody auto play.......... 228
Protect ON/OFF............ 232
Receive ........................ 230
Save attached .............. 218
Message F ........................ 231
Message R ....................... 231
microSD memory card ...... 306
Combinations ............... 435
Multitask ........................... 353
Combinations ............... 437
MUSIC ...................... 303, 342
Delete ........................... 321
Detail ............................ 322
Edit folder ..................... 319
Folder info .................... 322
Move ............................ 320
Play .............................. 303
MUSIC Player ................... 342
Change jackets ............ 347
Music settings .............. 349
Play .............................. 345
Playable music data..... 342
Playback restriction ...... 304
Playlist .......................... 348
Reset settings .............. 350
Transfer ........................ 343
Music slide show .............. 291
Music&Video Channel ...... 338
Change display ............ 322
Chapter list ................... 341
Delete ................... 321, 341
Detail ............................ 322
Downloading a program... 339
Edit folder ..................... 319
Folder info .................... 322
Move program .............. 341
Play ...................... 340, 342
Set program ................. 339
Sort ............................... 321
My data ............................... 45
My document .................... 333
Attach to mail ............... 212
Bookmark ..................... 336
Capture screen ............ 336
Delete ........................... 321
Detail ............................ 322
Detail info disp ............. 334
Display ......................... 333
Edit folder ..................... 319
Folder info .................... 322
iC transmission............. 332
i-mode bookmark ......... 336
Mark ............................. 335
Move ............................ 320
Save ..................... 312, 334
Search .......................... 335
Send Ir data ................. 329
Sort ............................... 321
My Menu ........................... 190
My picture ......................... 290
Attach to mail ............... 212
Change display ............ 322
Data security ................ 142
Delete ........................... 321
Detail ............................ 322
Display quality.............. 290
Edit folder ..................... 319
Edit photo ..................... 292
Folder info .................... 322
iC transmission............. 332
Move ............................ 320
Save ............................. 312
Send Ir data ................. 329
Send IrSS™ .................. 330
Sort ............................... 321
Store in Center ............. 295
My Selection ..................... 368
Name ................................ 121
Network search mode....... 415
Network security code ...... 130
Network service ................ 391
Notification display .............. 32
Notify caller ID .................... 45
Nuisance Call Blocking
Service ......................... 394
Continued
Index/Quick Manual
Delete ........................... 321
Display ......................... 308
Folder setup ................. 309
Format .......................... 313
Insert/Remove .............. 307
microSD info ................. 314
Reset file No. ................ 181
Save ............................. 312
Update mng. info ......... 314
microSD mode .................. 315
Missed call ........................ 126
Movie player software ....... 440
MTP mode ........................ 315
Multi Number Service ....... 397
Multiaccess ....................... 352
471
Number of protected data
items............................. 466
Number of saved data items
..................................... 466
NW Services ..................... 392
OBEX™ communication ... 404
OFFICEED ....................... 402
Omakase Lock.................. 136
On hold ............................... 68
Operator name display ..... 416
Optional and related devices
..................................... 439
Osaifu-Keitai ..................... 254
IC card lock.................. 262
Use ............................... 255
Osaifu-Keitai-compatible
i-αppli .......................... 255
Start .............................. 255
Oversea service................ 418
Overseas Use
Int’l roaming
......... 415, 416, 417, 418
Place a call................... 414
Receive a call............... 414
Own number ....................... 45
Attach to mail ............... 212
iC transmission............. 332
Quote my data ............. 387
Secret display .............. 141
Send Ir data ................. 329
Index/Quick Manual
472
Part names and functions ... 26
Pause (P) ............................ 53
PB setting ......................... 102
PDF data .......................... 333
Personal data lock ............ 137
Phone To function ............. 196
Phonebook ......................... 94
2-touch dial .................. 104
Attach to mail ............... 212
Copy to Main ................ 317
Copy to UIM ................. 316
Delete ........................... 103
Display ......................... 101
Edit ............................... 103
Font size ....................... 127
Group setting ............... 100
iC transmission............. 332
Memory status.............. 104
Originate a PushTalk call ... 101
Phonebook image ........ 121
Place a call................... 101
Quote ........................... 387
Save ......................... 95, 98
Save/attach image ....... 102
Search .......................... 102
Secret display .............. 141
Send Ir Data ................. 329
Send mail ..................... 101
Set image display ........ 102
Which PB to use ........... 102
Phonebook image............. 121
Pictographs....................... 386
List of pictographs ....... 432
Picture Motion Browser .... 440
PIN1 Code and PIN2 Code
..................................... 131
Cancel PIN lock ........... 133
Change PIN1 code ...... 133
Change PIN2 code ...... 133
PIN1 code setting ........ 132
Place a call ......................... 51
Play music ................ 303, 345
Playlist ...................... 297, 348
PLMN setting .................... 416
Plus JOG ............................ 28
Power.................................. 43
Power saver ...................... 122
Pref. i αppli sound ........... 113
Prefix ................................. 60
Prefix setting ....................... 61
Priority .............. 111, 126, 362
Public mode (Drive mode)
....................................... 69
Public mode (Power off)...... 70
PushTalk ............................. 80
Add member .................. 83
Any key ans.................... 67
Auto answer setting ....... 89
Hands-free ............... 81, 90
i-mode arrival act ........... 90
Incoming set ................ 108
Missed call ..................... 71
Originate ........................ 82
Originate from the
phonebook......... 87, 101
P-Talk arrival act ............. 90
Receive .......................... 84
Set ring time ................... 89
Setting when folded ....... 67
Slide open setting .......... 67
PushTalk phonebook .......... 85
Delete ............................. 88
Group setting ................. 86
NW connection............... 89
Originate ........................ 87
Save ............................... 85
PushTalk setting ................. 89
PushTalkPlus ...................... 89
QR code ........................... 179
Quality alarm .................... 114
Quick Manual .................... 490
Quick record message........ 74
Receive a call ..................... 65
Receive option .......... 225, 227
Received mail ................... 219
Received record ................. 55
Add to phonebook ......... 99
Delete ............................. 57
Detail info ....................... 57
Font size ....................... 127
Recnct ALM ........................ 64
Record display .................. 141
Record message ................ 72
Delete ............................. 75
Play ................................ 74
Quick record message... 74
Redial record ...................... 55
Add to phonebook ......... 99
Delete ............................. 57
Detail info ....................... 57
Font size ....................... 127
Reduce noise...................... 64
Reject unknown ................ 146
Remote Control ................ 397
Reset all data&set ............ 377
List of reset items ... 378, 420
Reset data ........................ 389
Reset display/sound ......... 125
Reset menu log ................ 126
Reset menu screen .......... 124
Reset settings ................... 376
List of reset items ... 378, 420
Reset total ........................ 370
Ring time .......................... 110
Safety precautions .............. 12
SAR .................................. 467
Saved mail ........................ 219
Scan code......................... 183
Scan function .................... 462
Set auto-update ........... 463
Set scan ....................... 462
Update ......................... 463
Version ......................... 464
Schedule
Delete ........................... 194
Display ......................... 193
Protect ON/OFF............ 194
Save ............................. 193
URL .............................. 193
Secret
Own number .................. 46
Phonebook ..................... 96
Schedule ...................... 363
Secret code ........................ 96
Secret display ................... 141
Security code .................... 130
Change ........................ 132
Security scanning function
(Scan function) ............. 462
Select host ........................ 200
Select language ................ 128
Self mode ......................... 137
Send IrSS™...................... 330
Sent mail........................... 219
Service numbers .............. 396
Set basic tone ................... 111
Set call record................... 141
Set rec msg ........................ 73
Set ring start time ............. 145
Setting when folded ............ 67
Slide open setting ............... 67
Slide setting
................. 67, 91, 141, 354
SMS .................................. 206
Animation ..................... 120
Compose and send ..... 234
Copy to Main ................ 317
Copy to UIM ................. 316
Receive ........................ 235
Save ............................. 235
SMS setting ...................... 236
Soft key ............................. 117
Software update ............... 456
Now update.................. 460
Reserve ........................ 460
Set auto-update ........... 458
Update ......................... 459
Sound effect ..................... 112
Specifications ................... 465
SSL list ............................. 198
SSL site ............................ 187
Standard menu ................. 420
Stand-by books................. 118
Stand-by display ............... 117
Stand-by pictures.............. 119
Start menu setting ............ 123
Stereo&3D ........................ 111
Storage info ...................... 326
Sub-address ....................... 63
Supplied and optional
accessories .................... 24
Symbols ............................ 386
List of special symbols ... 431
Template ........................... 211
Delete ........................... 211
Text input .......................... 382
Bar code reader ........... 387
Character mode ........... 382
Characters assigned to
keys ......................... 430
Common phrases... 385, 434
Copy............................. 388
Cut................................ 387
Delete ........................... 382
Dictionaries .................. 389
Edit common phrases ... 386
Edit prediction .............. 388
Edit user dict ................ 388
Full/Half size ................. 382
Insert ............................ 382
Kuten codes ................. 388
Operation in item.......... 385
Continued
Index/Quick Manual
Attach to mail ............... 212
Delete ........................... 366
Display ......................... 366
iC transmission............. 332
Memory status.............. 368
Save ..................... 312, 363
Schedule alarm ............ 365
Secret display .............. 141
Select date ................... 366
Send Ir data ................. 329
Set holidays.................. 367
Schedule setting ....... 365, 367
Screen memo
473
Paste ............................ 387
Pictograph/symbol mode ... 382
Pictographs .......... 386, 432
Prediction ..................... 383
Quote my data ............. 387
Quote phonebook ........ 387
Reset data .................... 389
Select conversion......... 384
Symbols ............... 386, 431
Undo ............................ 383
User conversion ........... 384
Text Memo ........................ 372
Copy Text Memo .......... 373
Delete ........................... 373
Display ......................... 373
iC transmission............. 332
Save ..................... 312, 372
Send Ir data ................. 329
Ticker ................................ 203
Timer (T) ............................. 54
ToruCa .............................. 256
Index/Quick Manual
474
Attach to mail ............... 212
Auto recognition ........... 261
Delete ........................... 258
Display ......................... 257
Duplication check ........ 261
Edit folder ..................... 258
IC act. notice ................ 261
IC card lock.................. 262
iC transmission............. 332
Move ............................ 258
Obtain .......................... 256
Save ............................. 312
Search .......................... 259
Send Ir data ................. 329
Sort ............................... 259
Sort folder..................... 260
ToruCa receive ............. 259
ToruCa setting .................. 259
Total calls cost .................. 369
Total calls duration ............ 369
Touch-tones ........................ 53
Troubleshooting ................ 444
UIM ..................................... 36
Copy to Main ................ 317
Copy to UIM ................. 316
Insert/Remove ................ 36
PIN1/PIN2 code ........... 133
UIM phonebook .................. 94
Save ............................... 98
UIM setting ....................... 132
URL
Display ......................... 189
History .................. 191, 273
Last accessed URL...... 187
USB mode setting............. 314
User certificate ................. 199
V.ph switch notice ............... 78
Vibrator ............................. 110
Videophone ........................ 50
Animation ..................... 120
Auto redial(voice) ........... 77
Backlight always on ..... 121
Call Rejection ................. 65
Chara-den ...................... 75
Chg. to voice call ........... 54
Display setting ............... 76
Hands-free ............... 53, 77
Holding........................... 68
Incoming set ................ 108
Missed call ..................... 71
On hold .......................... 68
Quick record message... 74
Select sub image ........... 51
Set call display ............. 121
Set outgoing image ........ 76
Setting when folded ....... 67
Slide open setting .......... 67
V.ph while packet ........... 78
Visual preference ........... 77
Videophone setting ............. 76
Voice call
Animation ..................... 120
Any key ans.................... 67
Call Rejection ................. 65
Chg. to videophone ....... 54
Hands-free ..................... 53
Holding........................... 68
Incoming set ................ 108
Missed call ..................... 71
On hold .......................... 68
Quick record message... 74
Set call display ............. 121
Setting when folded ....... 67
Slide open setting .......... 67
Whisper mode ................ 68
Voice Mail Service ............ 392
Bar Incoming call ......... 417
Roaming Guidance ...... 417
Voice memo ................ 74, 369
Volume.............................. 112
Volume setting .................. 112
Warranty and after sales
services ........................ 454
Web To function ................ 196
Whisper mode .................... 68
WORLD CALL .................... 61
WORLD WING.................... 38
Symbols and Numbers
＋ ........................................ 54
186/184............................... 60
2in1 ................................... 398
2in1 setting ....................... 399
2-touch dial ....................... 104
3G/GSM setting ................ 415
MEMO
MEMO
MEMO
Quick Manual
Using the Quick Manual
To bring the Quick Manual provided with this manual, separate it at the tear-off line
and fold as shown below.
You can conveniently bring the Quick Manual “Overseas Use” with you when you are
overseas and using the international roaming service (WORLD WING).
■ Cutting the pages
Separate the pages of the Quick Manual at the tear-off line.
Tear-off line
■ Folding the cut pages
Fold the Quick Manual at the folding line so that the frontcover of the document comes on top.
Frontcov
sheet er
Frontcov
sheet er
Index/Quick Manual
478
Frontcov
sheet er
FOMA SO906i
Quick Manual
■ General Contact

From DoCoMo mobile phones (in Japanese only)
(No prefix) 151 (toll free)
※ Not available from ordinary phones.
From ordinary phones
0120-800-000 (toll free) (in Japanese)
0120-005-250 (toll free) (in English)
※ Also available from mobile phones and PHSs.
■ Contact for Repair (in Japanese only)
From DoCoMo mobile phones
(No prefix) 113 (toll free)
※ Not available from ordinary phones.
From ordinary phones
0120-800-000 (toll free)
※ Also available from mobile phones and PHSs.
● Check the number you call and dial it correctly.
To save data in the
UIM phonebook
Select [UIM].
Press
( ) in the stand-by
display →
(Create).
[Main memory] → .
Saving an Entry in the FOMA Terminal Phonebook (P.95)
Ｄｅｔａｉｌ Ｓｅｔｔｉｎｇ
Save other items at the Basic display.
Press and save each item at the Detail display.
Press and save each item at the Setting display.
Press
(Complete).
ＯＦＦ
Ｍｏｂｉｌｅ１
Ｐｕｂｌｉｃ
０００
Ｎｏ Ｇｒｏｕｐ
Ｂａｓｉｃ
ͧ
漢カナＡａ１２
Ｍｏｄｅ
Ｐｉｃｔ／Ｓｙｍ
Entering Text (P.382)
ＯＫ
Ｉｎｐｕｔ Ｔｅｘｔ Ｍｅｍｏ
あ
Ｆｕｎｃ
ＭＥＮＵ
Ｒ．５１０
ͦ
※ The screen is an image.
ͦNumber of bytes that can be entered
ˎ A half-width character is
counted as one byte and a fullwidth character as two bytes.
ͧ Character mode or pictograph/
symbol mode
■ Items you can save
: Name (Required)
Enter a name within 16 fullwidth/32 half-width characters.
: Reading
Enter the reading within 32 halfwidth characters.
: Memory no.
Enter from 000 to 999.
: Group
Select from 20 different groups.
: Phone number
Up to three numbers per entry are available.
Enter each number within 26 digits.
: Phone number type
Select from nine different icons.
: E-mail address
Up to three mail addresses per entry are
available. Enter each address within 50 halfwidth alphanumeric characters and symbols.
: E-mail address type
Select from five different icons. 5
■ Changing the character mode
(Mode)
ˎ Character mode for half-width:
(Mode),
Every time you press
the character mode changes in the
order of [漢] → [ｶﾅ] → [Ａａ] → [１２].
ˎ Character mode for full-width:
(Mode),
Every time you press
the character mode changes in the
order of [漢] → [カ] → [Ａ] → [１].
■ Changing the pictograph/symbol mode
(Pict/Sym)
(Pict/
ˎ Every time you press
Sym), the character mode
changes in the order of [Ranking]
→ [Pict.] → [Pict-D] → [Symbol].
[Pict-D] can be selected only in the
Edit mail and Edit signature displays.
(Func) → [Full/Halfsize]
■ Changing the character mode
between full-width and half-width
: Secret code
Enter the Secret code which is saved
in the recipient’s mail address (phone
number@docomo.ne.jp) in four digits.
: Secret
Select whether to display the
Phonebook data.
: Des call display
Select or shoot a call image to be displayed
when placing/receiving a voice/videophone
call, right after receiving mail, and when
displaying the individual Phonebook entry.
: Location information
Add the location information.
: Postal code
Enter a code within seven half-width digits.
: Address
Enter an address within 64 fullwidth/128 half-width characters.
: Birthday
Enter a date within the range
from 1900/01/01 to 2050/12/31.
■ Entering a character assigned to the
same key twice or more in succession
■ Deleting a character
or
After entering the first character, either press
wait for a while, and the cursor moves automatically.
ˎ The character at the cursor is deleted
for less than a
by pressing
second. The last character is deleted
when the cursor is at the end of the text.
ˎ All characters at and after the cursor
for
position are deleted by pressing
over a second. All characters are deleted
when the cursor is at the end of the text.
■ Inserting a character
Move the cursor to the position to insert a character.
■ Changing the block of characters
Move the cursor with
(Func) → [Undo]
■ Undoing text
: Chara-den
Select a Chara-den character to
be sent during a videophone call.
: Des phone tone
Select a ring tone that sounds for
an incoming voice/videophone call.
: Des mail tone
Select a ring tone that sounds
immediately after receiving mail.
: Select phone Illum.
Select an indicator color that flashes
for an incoming voice/videophone call.
: Select mail Illum.
Select an indicator color that flashes
immediately after receiving mail.
From the Phonebook, select
an entry →
(Edit).
Edit each item →
(Complete).
Editing an Entry (P.103)
Tear-off line
.
(Save).
The still image is saved.
Press
A still image is recorded with the shutter
sound and the screen for confirming
whether to save the image appears.
Press
The white focus frame/frames
are used to adjust the focus, the
confirmation is heard and the
focus frame/frames turn green.
Point the camera at the object
(halfway).
→
Enter it within 50 half-width
alphanumeric characters and symbols.
To add an address
From the Function menu, select [Add
receiver] → address type (To/Cc/Bcc).
To delete an address
Move the cursor to an address and
from the Function menu, select
[Delete receiver] → [Yes].
12
].
Address
Subject
Main body
Number of
entered bytes
Enter an address at [
０
Ｅｄｉｔ ｍａｉｌ
Press
(Mail) in the stand-by
display → [Compose message].
Composing and Sending i-mode Mail (P.207)
The Camera mode is activated.
Camera (P.155, 170)
■ Recording still images
1 Slide the lens cover to open it
in the stand-by display.
to end recording.
(Save).
].
].
Press
(Send).
Enter it within 5,000 full-/10,000
half-width characters.
Enter the main body at [
Enter it within 100 full-/200 halfwidth characters.
Enter a subject at [
The movie is saved.
Press
The recording end tone is heard,
the recording is stopped, and the
screen for confirming whether to
save the movie appears.
Press
The recording star tone is heard
and the movie is recorded.
Point the camera at the object
→
Select from [Image], [i-motion],
[ M e l o d y ] , [ To r u C a ] , [ P D F ] ,
[Phonebook], [My data],
[Schedule], [Bookmark], [Others],
and [Activate camera].
13
Press
(Func) in the Edit
mail display → [Add attach
file] → .
File Attachment (P.212)
The display switches to the Movie
shoot display.
■ Recording a movie
1 Press
(Func) → [
(Shoot mode) → [
] (Movie
shoot) → .
(Send).
”, “ ”, “ ” (green), “ ” (orange),
”, “ ”, “ ”, or “ ” appears.
Compose mail →
“
“
Select a file type → a folder
→ a file → .
An inquiry result is displayed.
Press
(Mail) in the stand-by
display (for over a second).
“ ” flashes.
When receiving mail
14
Auto Receiving i-mode Mail (P.214)
Checking New i-mode Mail (P.216)
10
■ Placing a videophone call
1 Enter a phone number in
the stand-by display →
(V.phone).
Videophone (P.51, 65)
Press
to hang up.
The number of received mail is displayed.
The display before receiving
reappears after about 15 seconds.
When receiving is completed
Tear-off line
■ Setting/canceling the Manner mode
Press
in the stand-by
display (for over a second). 15
Confirm contents
Manner Mode (P.69, 70, 116)
■ Setting/canceling the Public mode (Drive mode)
Press
( ) in the stand-by
display (for over a second).
■ Public mode (Power off)
Set
Cancel
11
Key operation
Operation
(MySide/ Switch between camera
Sub)
image/substitute image
(In/Out)
Switch between In-/
Out-camera
( )
Hands-free ON/OFF
Out-camera zoom-in/-out
■ Operations during a videophone call
When you receive a call,
press
or
(V.phone).
From the Menu, select [Music]
→ [MUSIC Player] → .
Select [Artists] → .
Select an artist → an album
→ .
Select music data →
(Play).
■ Receiving a videophone call
to hang up.
Press
Music (P.345)
Example: Playing back music data by
selecting an artist
1
(MENU)
List of Menus (P.33, 420)
■ Selecting the menu
■ Changing the menu
16
(Chg.
E v e r y t i m e y o u p re s s
MENU), the display changes in the
order of Kisekae menu → Standard
menu → My Selection.
■ List of Standard menus
My Selection
Imaging
Camera
Movie
easy BlogUp
Music slide show
Stand-by pictures
Display
Data Security Service
GPS
Settings
Call
Stand-by display
Backlight
Power saver
Menu setting
Kisekae setting
Animation
Font size
Incoming set
Missed call
Videophone setting
Call display
Call assist
Call setting
Call quality
Headset setting
Self mode
Melody Call
20
i mode
i Menu
Bookmark
Screen Memo
Last accessed URL
Go to location
i-Channel
Message
Check new message
i-mode setting
Full Browser
Mail
Inbox
Outbox
Draft
Compose message
WEB mail
Compose SMS
Templates
Check new message
Check new SMS
Lifetime Cal.
Application Mail
i-mode
i αppli
Phonebook
Call record
PushTalk
Record msg
ToruCa
IC act. notice
Schedule
Input method
Lock all
IC card lock
Lock/
Pers. data lock
Security
Secret display
Key dial lock
Acpt/Rjct call
Reject unknown
Denied no ID
17
21
Receive option
Mail setting
i appli
i αppli list
i αppli setting
i αppli history
i αppli(microSD)
Phone
Phonebook
Call record
PushTalk phonebook
Record message
Data Box
My picture
MUSIC
Music&Video Channel
i-motion
Melody
My document
Kisekae Tool
Chara-den
18
NW Services
Management Date/time
Select language
Manner mode
Set basic tone
Jog setting
Slide setting
Change code
UIM setting
Scan function
SW Update
Check serv. area
Battery level
Storage info
USB mode setting
Reset
Initial setting
22
Music
MUSIC Player
Music&Video Channel
Osaifu-Keitai
IC card content
DCMX
ToruCa
Settings
Search by i-mode
Own number
LifeKit
Bar code reader
Receive Ir data
microSD
Camera
Movie
Lifetime Calendar
Alarm
Schedule
Text Memo
Calculator
19
The Voice Mail Service (P.392)
■ Starting the service※
■ Stopping the service※
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Voice Mail] → [Activate] → [Activate]
→ [Yes] → .
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Voice
Mail] → [Deactivate] → [Yes] → .
■ Playing back a new message※
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Voice
Mail] → [Play messages] → [Yes] → .
※ When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode,
the screen for selecting either
Number A or Number B appears.
23
Tear-off line
The Call Waiting Service (P.393)
ͫ
ͪ
ͩ
ͨ
ͦ
ͧ
͵Ͷͷ͸͹ͺͻͼͽ;
/ / / : Radio wave condition
: During i-mode
: During Full Browser
: Outside of the service area
: Self mode is set
: While using the infrared/iC communication function
: While the infrared remote control is being used
: While performing an SSL-related
function such as displaying an SSL site
/ / : Unread i-mode mail/Unread SMS/
Unread i-mode mail and unread SMS
: Mail at the i-mode center
: Unread Area Mail
/ : Unread Message R/F
28
ͦ∼ͨͪ ͬ ͮ∼ͰͲ ʹ
ͩ ͫ ͭ ͱ ͳ
Using the Display (P.30)
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management]
→ [NW Services] → [Call forwarding] →
[Deactivate] → [Yes] → .
24
■ Stopping the service※
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Call forwarding] → [Activate] →
[Activate] → [Yes] → .
■ Starting the service※
The Call Forwarding Service (P.393)
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Waiting] → [Deactivate] → [Yes] → .
■ Stopping the service
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Call
Waiting] → [Activate] → [Yes] → .
■ Starting the service
ͬ / : While providing location information
by GPS/During GPS positioning
(Blue)/ (Red) : While connecting to
the 3G network (Packet communication:
able)/(Packet communication: disable)
/ : While connecting to the GSM network/
While connecting to the GPRS network
ͭ / : While running i-αppli (i-αppli
stand-by display)/i-αppli DX
ͮ : USB mode setting is Communication mode
: USB mode setting is microSD mode
: USB mode setting is MTP mode connecting
ͯ : Secret display is [ON]
Ͱ : The microSD memory card is inserted
(Flashes during preparation for access
after insertion of the microSD memory card)
ͱ / / : During a voice call/During a videophone
call/During PushTalk communication
Ͳ / / : 1/2/3 or more tasks are executed
while playback is in progress on the MUSIC Player)
( changes to
ͳ / / / : Battery level
29
: Press in the stand-by display to display the Data Box.
: Press in the stand-by display to display the Phonebook.
: Press in the stand-by display to display the Received record.
25
List of Key Operation (P.26, 27, 28)
F ro m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ S e t t i n g s ] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Caller ID
Request] → [Deactivate] → [Yes] → .
■ Stopping the service
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Caller
ID Request] → [Activate] → [Yes] → .
The Caller ID Display Request Service (P.395)
■ Starting the service
From the Menu, select [Settings] → [Management] →
[NW Services] → [Call forwarding] → [Change FWD
number] → Enter the phone number → [Set] → .
※ When 2in1 is set to the Dual mode, the screen for
selecting either Number A or Number B appears.
■ Changing the forwarding number
ͽ
ͺ
ͻ
ͼ
ͷ
͸
͹
Ͷ
͵
ʹ
: Current time (Displayed in 24-hour format
in other than the stand-by display)
: The vibrator is set for incoming calls
: The vibrator is set for incoming mail
: The vibrator is set for incoming calls and mail
: Incoming call ring volume OFF
: Incoming mail ring volume OFF
: Incoming call and mail ring volume OFF
: Manner mode is set ( is pink)
: Public mode (Drive mode) is set
: Personal data lock is set
: Key dial lock is set
: Personal data lock and Key dial lock are set
: IC card lock is set
: During Music&Video Channel reservation
: Alarm is set
: Schedule alarm is set
: Alarm and Schedule alarm are set
: Record message is set (there are
non-played back record messages)
( is white, is light blue)
30
: Press in the stand-by display to display the Redial record.
: Press in the stand-by display to display the Mail
menu. Press for over a second in the stand-by
display to perform the Check new message.
: Press in the stand-by display to display the i-mode menu.
Press for over a second in the stand-by display
to display the i-αppli folder list display.
: Press to display the menu.
: Press in the stand-by display to
display the Channel list display.
Press for over a second in the stand-by
display to activate the MUSIC Player.
: Press for over a second in the stand-by
display to lock/cancel the IC card function.
: Press for over a second in the stand-by display
to set/cancel the Public mode (Drive mode).
: Press in the stand-by display to
display the Manner mode display.
Press for over a second in the stand-by
display to set/cancel the Manner mode.
: Press in the stand-by display to
display the Record msg display.
26
Tear-off line
Contact number:
Contact number:
Contact number:
● Check the number you call and dial it correctly. 31
■ Other contact numbers
※ Omakase Lock is a paid service. However,
when you subscribe to this service together
with your request to suspend the FOMA
terminal or while the FOMA terminal is
suspended, the service charge is not required.
Setting/canceling the Omakase Lock
0120-524-360 (24-hour service)
: Videophone message is set (there are
non-played back videophone messages)
( is green, is light blue)
: Lock key is set
Contact for Emergency Such As Lost Terminal
■ Omakase Lock
;
Service
Phone number
Number guide service (paid: (no area code) 104
service charge + call charge)※
Telegram service (paid: telegram fee) (no area code) 115
Time (paid)
(no area code) 117
Weather (paid)
Area code + 177
Emergency call to Police
(no area code) 110
Emergency call to Fire/Ambulance (no area code) 119
Emergency call to Maritime rescue (no area code) 118
Disaster Message Board Service (paid) (no area code) 171
Collect Call (paid: service (no area code) 106
charge + call charge)
※ Phone numbers of customers who declined to disclose
their number information cannot be guided.
27
Services Available on the FOMA Terminal (P.438)
Press for over a second in the stand-by
display to set/cancel the Record message.
: Press for over a second to display/
play back a still image/movie.
: Press to record an image by the camera.
FOMA SO906i
Quick Manual for “Overseas Use”
■ For Loss, Theft, and Charge Settlement for Overseas
 (24-hour service)
From DoCoMo mobile phones
International access number -81-3-5366-3114＊
of your country of stay (Table1) (toll-free)
＊ The call charges to Japan apply when
you place a call from ordinary phones.
※ Dial +81-3-5366-3114 to get connected when
you place a call from SO906i. (Press and hold
the “0” key for at least one second to enter “+”.)
From ordinary phones
Universal number
International prefix number for
the universal number (Table2) -800-0120-0151＊
＊ The call charges to your country of
stay may apply.
● For the international access number of
major countries (Table1) and international
prefix number for the universal number
(Table2), see P.13 or P.14 respectively.
○ × ○
○ ○ ○
○ ○ ○
○ × ○
○ × ○
○ × ×
○ ○ ○
3G GSM GPRS
Services Available Overseas (P.410)
Communication service
Voice call
You can use the same mobile phone
number as used in Japan even from an
overseas location to place international
calls to Japan and other countries as well
as ordinary calls in your country of stay.
Videophone call
Yo u c a n p l a c e i n t e r n a t i o n a l
videophone calls to specific 3G carrier
users overseas and to FOMA users.
i-mode
You can use i-mode even from an overseas location.
i-mode mail
You can use the same mail address
as used in Japan even overseas
and send/receive i-mode mail.
SMS
You can use the same mobile phone number
as used in Japan even from an overseas
location to send/receive SMS messages.
i-Channel
Data communication
(Packet communication)
■ About Troubles and Repairs for Services Overseas
 (24-hour service)
From DoCoMo mobile phones
International access number -81-3-6718-1414＊
of your country of stay (Table1) (toll-free)
＊ The call charges to Japan apply when
you place a call from ordinary phones.
※ Dial +81-3-6718-1414 to get connected when
you place a call from SO906i. (Press and hold
the “0” key for at least one second to enter “+”.)
From ordinary phones
Universal number
International prefix number for
the universal number (Table2) -800-5931-8600＊
＊ The call charges to your country of
stay may apply.
● For the international access number of
major countries (Table1) and international
prefix number for the universal number
(Table2), see P.13 or P.14 respectively.
Network Search Mode (P.415)
Select [Manual] → a carrier →
[Auto]:
Automatically connect to another carrier.
[Manual]:
Manually select a carrier.
[Network re-search]:
Search the carrier to be connected again.
[PLMN setting]:
Set a carrier with the higher-priority for connection.
Fr o m t h e M e nu , s e l e c t [ S e t t i n g s ] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Network search mode] → .
Example: Changing a carrier to be connected for manual connection
PLMN Setting (P.416)
Example: Saving a carrier from the carrier list
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Int’l roaming] → [Network search
mode] → [PLMN setting] →
Before Using the FOMA Terminal Overseas
■ Setting the i-mode
【In Japan】
Press
in the stand-by display →
[i Menu] → [料金＆お申込・設定] → [オプ
ション設定] → [海外利用設定] → [ｉモー
ド利用設定] → [利用する] → Enter an
i-mode password → [決定] →
【Overseas】
Press
in the stand-by display →
[i Menu] → [海外利用設定] → [ｉモー
ド利用設定] → [利用する] → Enter an
i-mode password → [決定] →
Select a network communication
method → [Yes] →
Select [Select from List] → a carrier
→
Select [Unregistered] and press
(Func).
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Remote
Control] → [Activate] → [Yes] →
■ Setting the Remote Control
【In Japan】
Setting After Returning to Japan (P.413)
The default setting is to search a network
after the FOMA terminal powered on in
Japan and connect to the FOMA network
(NTT DoCoMo, Inc) automatically.
Select [Manual] → [NTT DoCoMo, Inc]
→
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Int’l roaming] → [Network search
mode] →
■ Changing the network to the FOMA
network (NTT DoCoMo, Inc) manually
【Overseas】
From the Menu, select [Settings]
→ [Management] → [NW Services]
→ [Int’l roaming] → [Remote
access(Int.)] → [Yes]→
Available
Available
Available
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [Date/time] → [Auto
time adjust] → [ON] →
■ Setting the clock
Available Network
3G roaming
GSM network
GPRS network
Display to Be Shown Overseas (P.413)
Connected network
While you use the FOMA terminal overseas, the name of
the connected carrier appears in the stand-by display.
Network you can use
○○○○
Carrier name
Main clock
ˎ Display the current
date/time of the
location of stay.
Sub-clock
ˎ Display the current
date/time of Japan.
ˎ The following icons show the current
network connection.
(Blue) 3G network (supported packet communication)
Icon
GSM network
(Red) 3G network (not supported packet communication)
GPRS network
Tear-off line
Placing a Call from Your Overseas Location (P.414)
ˎ If an area code begins with “0”, omit
the “0” when dialing (excepting when
calling ordinary phones, etc. in Italy).
ˎ To place an international call to Japan,
enter the country code “81”.
To place a call to a country saved using the Country code
Enter a phone number in the stand-by display,
press
(Option), select [Call method] →
[Voice call]/[Videophone] → [Country code] →
a country code, and press
(Call).
To place a call to a recipient saved in the Phonebook
Select a recipient form the Phonebook
and press
. To place a videophone
call, select a recipient, press
, and
press
(V.phone). The first digit of the
phone number “0” is converted into a
country code automatically added by the
Int’l dial assist before the call is dialed. 8
Press “+” (press
for over a second) in the
stand-by display and enter a country code, area
code, and a recipient’s phone number, in that order.
Area
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
China
Czech Republic
Egypt
Fiji
Finland
France
Germany
Greece
Hong Kong
Hungary
India
Indonesia
Italy
Country code
61
43
32
55
86
420
20
679
358
33
49
30
852
36
91
62
39
Area
Japan
Korea
Macau
Malaysia
Maldives
Netherlands
New Caledonia
New Zealand
Norway
Peru
Philippines
Russia
Singapore
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Tahiti (French
Polynesia)
12
Country code
81
82
853
60
960
31
687
64
47
51
63
65
34
46
41
689
When you use an international call or set to
the Int’l dial assist, use the following country
codes (as of December 2007).
Country Codes for Major Countries
■ Placing a call to another country (including
Japan) from your overseas location
To place a videophone call
Press
(V.phone).
Press
To place a videophone call
Press
(V.phone).
Press
Country code
44
84
Area
Australia
Belgium
Brazil
Canada
China
Czech Republic
Denmark
Finland
France
Germany
Greece
Number
0011
00
0041/0014
011
00
00
00
00
00
00
00
Area
Hong Kong
Hungary
India
Indonesia
Ireland
Italy
Korea
Luxembourg
Macau
Malaysia
Monaco
13
Number
001
00
00
001
00
00
001
00
00
00
00
The international access number for major
countries is as follows (as of August 2007).
International Access Number for
Major Countries (Table1)
ˎ For other country codes and details, see the
DoCoMo’s “International service website”.
Country code
Area
886
United Kingdom
66
USA
90
Vietnam
When receiving a call, press
Area
Taiwan
Thailand
Turkey
ˎ Make sure to include the area code,
even for a local call.
ˎ If you place a call to a “WORLD WING”
overseas user, enter the country code “81”
and make the call an international call to
Japan even if the recipient is currently in
the same country in which you stay.
Enter a phone number in the stand-by display.
Receiving a Call (P.414)
■ Placing a local call in your overseas location
To place a call from the Redial/Received record
Select a recipient from the Redial/Received
record and press
or
(V.phone).
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Roaming Guidance] →
Number
00
00
00
00
00
00
810
001
00
Area
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
Turkey
United Arab Emirates
United Kingdom
USA
Vietnam
Number
00
00
002
001
00
00
00
011
00
Area
Argentina
Australia
Austria
Belgium
Brazil
Bulgaria
Number
00
0011
00
00
0021
00
Area
Canada
China
Colombia
Denmark
Finland
France
14
Number
011
00
009
00
990
00
The international prefix number for the
universal number of each country is as
follows (as of August 2007).
International Prefix Number for
the Universal Number (Table2)
Area
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
Philippines
Poland
Portugal
Russia
Singapore
Spain
ˎ You may not be able to set it depending
on the overseas carrier you use.
10
■ Bar Incoming call (P.417)
ˎ You need to set it in Japan.
■ Roaming Guidance (P.417)
To use the network services overseas, set
the Remote Control beforehand.
Network Services
Ask the caller to dial the international access number
−81−your phone number without the first “0”.
■ When the caller places a call from
countries other than Japan
Ask the caller to dial your phone number.
■ When the caller places a call from Japan
When you receive a videophone call
Press
or
(V.phone). To answer a call
with a substitute image, press
(Sub).
Fr o m t h e M e n u , s e l e c t [ S e t t i n g s ] →
[Management] → [NW Services] → [Int’l
roaming] → [Bar Incoming call] → .
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Int’l roaming] → [Voice Mail(Int.)] →
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Int’l roaming] → [Call FWD(Int.)] →
Area
Peru
Philippines
Portugal
Singapore
South Africa
Spain
Sweden
Switzerland
Taiwan
Thailand
United Kingdom
USA
Number
00
00
00
001
09
00
00
00
00
001
00
011
Tear-off line
For inquiries about loss, theft, the charge
settlement, and repairs, see “For Loss, Theft,
and Charge Settlement for Overseas” on the
frontcover or “About Troubles and Repairs
for Services Overseas” on P.1 of this manual.
ˎ When you place a call to a contact number for inquiries,
call the “International access number of your country
of stay (Table1)” or “International prefix number for the
universal number (Table2)” assigned to the location where
you stay, and then enter the contact phone numbers. 15
About Inquiries
Number
00
001
00
00
014
00
001
00
00
00
00
00
From the Menu, select [Settings] →
[Management] → [NW Services] →
[Int’l roaming] → [Roaming guide(Int.)]
→ [Yes] →
11
Area
Germany
Hong Kong
Hungary
Ireland
Israel
Italy
Korea
Luxembourg
Malaysia
Netherlands
New Zealand
Norway
■ Roaming guide(Int.) (P.418)
■ Call FWD(Int.) (P.418)
■ Voice Mail(Int.) (P.418)
“ドコモeサイト” allows you to go through procedures for various registration changes, including
changes of the address and charge plan, and request for relevant documents.
Using i-mode i Menu➡料金＆お申込・設定➡各種手続き (ドコモeサイト) Free packet communication charge
From a PC My DoCoMo (http://www.mydocomo.com/) ➡ 各種手続き (ドコモeサイト)
※ For access using i-mode, the “network security code” is required.
※ For access using i-mode, no packet communication charge is required, except for from abroad.
※ For access from a PC, the “DoCoMo ID/Password” are required.
※ If you have not yet obtained the “network security code” or “DoCoMo ID/Password”, or you forget them, call the “General
Contact” on the backcover of this manual.
※ Access to the services may not be available depending on the subscription detail.
※ DoCoMo e-site may be inaccessible because of the system maintenance.
Don’t forget your FOMA terminal or your manners!
When you use the FOMA terminal, be careful not to disturb others around you.
Power off the FOMA terminal in the following cases
● When you are in a place where the use is prohibited
In airplanes and hospitals, power off the FOMA terminal.
※ Power off the FOMA terminal not only inside hospital wards but also in the lobby or
waiting rooms since electronic medical equipment may be used nearby.
● When there is a possibility that the implantable cardiac pacemaker or implantable
cardioverter defibrillator is used nearby such as on rush-hour trains
The FOMA terminal may affect the operation of implantable cardiac pacemaker or
implantable cardioverter defibrillator.
Set the Public mode in the following cases
● When you are driving
Holding the mobile phone with a hand while driving applies the penal regulations.
※ When you are compelled to receive a call, tell “Call you back” to the caller using the
Hands-free function and park the vehicle in a safe place to place a call.
● When you are in a public place such as in a theater, movie theater or museum
Power off the FOMA terminal in a quiet public place since it may disturb others around you.
Be careful of where you use the FOMA terminal and the volume of your voice and ring tone
● Be careful of the volume of your voice when you use the FOMA terminal in a quiet place
such as in a restaurant or hotel lobby.
● Use the FOMA terminal in a place where you do not disturb passengers on the streets.
Be sensitive regarding privacy
Please be considerate of the privacy of individuals around you when taking and sending
photos using camera-equipped mobile phones.
Features to support public manners
The FOMA terminal is equipped with helpful features, such as muting sounds, not
answering incoming calls, etc.
● Public mode (Drive Mode/Power off) (P.66, 67)
● Manner mode (P.103)/Original manner mode (P.104)
● Vibrator (P.99)
● Record message (P.69)
This manual was printed and produced in such a way to allow easy recycling. Please dispose it
for recycling when it is no longer needed.
General Contact
Contact for Repair (in Japanese only)
■From DoCoMo mobile phones (in Japanese only)
(No prefix) 151 (toll-free)
■From DoCoMo mobile phones
(No prefix) 113 (toll-free)
※Not available from ordinary phones.
※Not available from ordinary phones.
■From ordinary phones
■ From ordinary phones
0120-800-000 (toll-free) (in Japanese)
0120-005-250 (toll-free) (in English)
0120-800-000 (toll-free)
※Also available from mobile phones and PHSs.
※Also available from mobile phones and PHSs.
● Check the number you call and dial it correctly.
● For information on applications and procedures, repairs, and after sales services, either call the inquiries above or
contact your local DoCoMo shop, etc via the DoCoMo’s website or i-mode site.
DoCoMo’s website http://www.nttdocomo.co.jp/ i-mode site i Menu お知らせ ドコモショップ
For Loss, Theft, and Charge Settlement for Overseas
About Troubles and Repairs for Services Overseas
 (24-hour service)
From DoCoMo mobile phones
International access number of -81-3-5366-3114＊
your country of stay (Table1)
(toll-free)
 (24-hour service)
From DoCoMo mobile phones
International access number of -81-3-6718-1414＊
your country of stay (Table1)
(toll-free)
＊ The call charges to Japan apply when you place a
call from ordinary phones.
※ Dial +81-3-5366-3114 to get connected when you place
a call from SO906i. (Press and hold the “0” key for at
least one second to enter “+”.)
＊ The call charges to Japan apply when you place a
call from ordinary phones.
※ Dial +81-3-6718-1414 to get connected when you place
a call from SO906i. (Press and hold the “0” key for at
least one second to enter “+”.)
From ordinary phones

International prefix number for
the universal number (Table2)
From ordinary phones

International prefix number for
the universal number (Table2)
-800-0120-0151＊
＊ The call charges to your country of stay may apply.
-800-5931-8600＊
＊ The call charges to your country of stay may apply.
※ For the international access number of major countries
※ For the international access number of major countries
(Table1) and international prefix number for the universal
(Table1) and international prefix number for the universal
number (Table2), see P.404, 405 of this manual.
number (Table2), see P.404, 405 of this manual.
● If you should lose your mobile phone or have it stolen abroad, please report it to DoCoMo and take steps to cancel the use of it as soon as possible.
● When the FOMA terminal you purchased is damaged, bring it to the DoCoMo repair handling service counter after returning to Japan.
Don’t forget your mobile phone … or your manners!
When using your mobile phone in a public place, don’t forget to show common courtesy
and consideration for others around you.
Sales: NTT DoCoMo Group
NTT DoCoMo Hokkaido, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo Tokai, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo Chugoku, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo Tohoku, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo Hokuriku, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo Shikoku, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo Kansai, Inc.
NTT DoCoMo Kyushu, Inc.
Manufacturer: Sony Ericsson Mobile Communications Japan, Inc.
Li-ion
Return all spent battery packs
to NTT DoCoMo or a dealer,
or a recycling shop
to protect the environment.
This manual is printed
on recycled paper.
This manual is printed using an ink
based on soy bean oil.
’08.5 (Ver.1)
3-296-221-11(1)

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : No
Encryption                      : Standard V4.4 (128-bit)
User Access                     : Extract
XMP Toolkit                     : 3.1-702
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 7.0 (Windows)
Create Date                     : 2008:03:28 12:57:11+01:00
Modify Date                     : 2008:04:17 19:36:57+02:00
Metadata Date                   : 2008:04:17 19:36:57+02:00
Creator Tool                    : PScript5.dll Version 5.2
Document ID                     : uuid:B62B7504BEFCDC11BCA7B8AC99A58DC9
Instance ID                     : uuid:993dcfb3-2c90-4da9-bd1f-edcc2baf06dd
Derived From Instance ID        : uuid:754a4351-9896-4991-a0cc-d73d4548b216
Derived From Document ID        : uuid:e01a0533-7fd4-4325-9664-a867dd929b36
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : untitled
Creator                         : 23048152
Page Count                      : 288
Author                          : 23048152